Online Technical Documentation 458 Italia

1.
1 Ferrari quality standards
When manufacturing a Ferrari vehicle, the primary goal is “to

achieve optimum product quality”. Consequently Ferrari defines
a number of quality standards. These quality standards apply
both to production and especially to customer service.
In the event of accident repairs, crash safety must be an absolute

priority. To maintain optimum crash safety, all structural work
must be done correctly as indicated.
The repair work may only be carried out by Ferrari-trained and

certified skilled personnel.
Only genuine parts should be used when carrying out the

repair. They have been tested by Ferrari and are compatible
for use with aluminium.
Follow the procedures exactly as given in the repair manual.

Any deviations from the procedures are permitted only after
consultation with and approval by Ferrari.
Using non-approved repair methods may compromise the

crash performance of the vehicle. This may ultimately lead to a
non-foreseeable safety and product liability risk.
Only Ferrari-approved tools may be used to carry out accident

repairs.
It is essential that corrosion prevention measures are performed

during and after the repair.
Copyright © 2010
1.2 The bodywork concept of the Ferrari F458 Italia
In addition to extruded members, aluminium parts and sheet

metal elements, the Ferrari F458 Italia also features new joint
reinforcements for the space frame structure; together, they
form the bodywork structure.
These ultra-high strength steel reinforcements (A), installed

in the two A-pillars, offer occupants greater safety in critical
situations.
A
The ultra-strong extruded sections of the A-pillars are concealed

below the steel reinforcements. The sections are joined to the
extruded members of the sill (B) by die-cast node joints.
The sill (B) of the Ferrari F458 Italia is oversized, as on a

B
cabriolet type vehicle. This means that the Ferrari F458 Italia
makes no compromises where crash safety is concerned.
Copyright © 2010
1.3 General safety instructions
Explanation of safety instructions
Danger!
“Danger” indicates imminent hazards that may result
in death or serious injury.
Warning!
“Warning” indicates potential hazards that may result
in death or serious injury.
Caution!
“Caution” indicates potential hazards that may result
in slight injury.
This symbol also indicates hazards to property.
NOTE!
“Note” indicates important information.
Copyright © 2010
When carrying out any of the procedures described in this 1.3.2 Handling body and assembly components with sharp
repair manual, please observe all national accident safety edges
regulations.
Caution!
1.3.1 Lifting vehicles
Risk of injury from sharp-edged burrs on body and
Danger! accessories.
Risk of death from the vehicle toppling or slipping off • Always wear protective gloves when working in the vicinity
the vehicle lift. of sharp-edged body and assembly components.
• Align vehicle centrally between the vehicle lift columns.

• Raise the vehicle only at the specific locating points.
• Ensure the lifting pads are seated correctly, lifting the
vehicle slowly while monitoring the vehicle visually.
• Before removing any components and significantly shifting
the centre of gravity of the vehicle, ensure that the vehicle
itself is securely fastened to the vehicle.
Copyright © 2010
1.3.3 Working in presence of aluminium dust 1.3.4 Handling batteries
Warning! Warning!
Risk of explosion from high concentrations of aluminium Risk of explosion and fire from flying sparks during
dust. Risk of injury from breathing in fine particulate. grinding and welding work. Risk of damage to vehicle
components and other vehicles from flying sparks.
• When carrying out any work that creates fine particles of
dust, wear a fine dust mask, safety goggles and protective • Before carrying out any welding work, always remove both
gloves. battery terminal clamps and cover the battery terminals.
• Any grinding work must be carried out with explosion- • Remove the vehicle battery before carrying out any work
protected air extraction systems; do not blow off dust that may produce sparks in the vicinity of the battery itself.
deposits with compressed air.
• Disconnect the battery earth strap when carrying out any
• Clean the work area and the extraction system regularly. vehicle body repair work and when working on the airbag
system.
• To prevent a dust explosion, all extraction systems must
be earthed and suitable powder extinguishers must be
provided.
• Any vehicle parts in the repair area which may be damaged
by dust should be removed from the area or covered with
fire-resistant covers.
Copyright © 2010
1.3.5 Grinding and welding • When welding, wear suitable, non-flammable protective
clothing and gloves.
Warning!
• When carrying out grinding and welding work around the
Risk of explosion and fire when welding in the vicinity fuel tank or fuel-carrying parts, ensure that these parts do
of highly flammable substances. Irritation of the not heat up. If in doubt, remove such parts.
respiratory tract caused by toxic gases produced
• Cover the grinding and welding area with fire-resistant
during welding. Risk of injury from the extremely bright
covers.
arc and welding splashes when welding. Risk of injury
as a result of inadvertent activation of pyrotechnic
safety components.
Risk of explosion and fire from flying sparks during

grinding and welding work. Risk of damage to vehicle
components and other vehicles from flying sparks.
• Use the specific visor when welding.
• Partition off workstations with spark protection curtains.
• A fire extinguisher must always be accessible in the
immediate vicinity of the welding area.
• Remove or cover any vehicle parts located in the repair
area.
• Always carry out grinding and welding work with an
extraction system.
• Clean the air extraction system at regular intervals.
• Never carry out welding and grinding work at the same time
in the same room.
Copyright © 2010
1.3.6 Removing sealants 1.3.7 Handling chemicals
Danger! Caution!
Risk of death from inhaling toxic vapours. Risk of burns Handling chemicals may cause allergic skin and
in the event of direct skin contact with hydrochloric respiratory tract reactions.
acid.
• Always ensure that there is sufficient air extraction
• Hydrochloric acid is produced when PVC sealant is heated and ventilation, and extract any vapours released by
to over 180 °C. adhesives.
• PVC sealant must only be removed with a rotary wire • Prevent chemicals from coming into direct contact with the
brush or by heating to max. 180 °C with a hot air gun and eyes and skin.
removing with a spatula.
• Wear protective gloves, protective goggles and, where
• Always wear a dust mask and protective goggles when necessary, an apron.
removing sealant with a rotary brush.
• Immediately change out of work clothes that are soiled with
• Always ensure there is sufficient air extraction and fresh air adhesive or solvent.
ventilation.
• At the end of the job, wash your hands and apply protective
cream.
• Always keep a bottle of eye wash ready for use.
• Only store adhesive products in the safety cupboard and
keep them away from naked flames and other sources of
ignition.
Copyright © 2010
1.3.8 Working with the air conditioning system 1.3.9 Handling the airbag system
Warning! Caution!
Risk of injury from the charged air conditioning system Risk of injury from activation of airbag units if earth
exploding during welding work. strap is not disconnected.
Do not weld, solder or work with a hot air gun in the vicinity of Disconnect the battery earth strap when carrying out any vehicle
the components of a charged air conditioning system. Similarly, body repair work and when working on the airbag system.
do not perform any welding work on a vehicle if the work will
cause parts of the air conditioning system to heat up. Wash hands thoroughly after touching airbag units that have
been fired.
When carrying out a paint repair, object temperatures in the
drying oven or preheating zone must not exceed 80 °C as 1.3.10 Working with tools
the overpressure caused by heating process may cause the
system to explode. Warning!
Risk of injury. All tools pose potential hazards to health
and life. Always observe the safety instructions and
warnings of the tool manufacturers.
Copyright © 2010
1.4 Important information
1.4.1 Assessing the extent of the damage 1.4.2 Instructions for body repairs
In the case of accidents involving substantial areas of the • Repair work on the Ferrari F458 Italia must only be carried
vehicle, examine the following components carefully to out by repair personnel who have been trained, tested and
prevent any damage to vehicle or suspension parts from going certified by the Ferrari Customer Service department.
undiscovered:
• Use only Ferrari-approved tools, spare parts and
• Check tyres and wheel rims for damage. consumables for repair and maintenance work.
• Check that the steering tie-rod, steering linkages and • If, in the course of the repair work, special cases arise that
steering system are working correctly. Also check for are not envisaged by the repair instructions, contact the
external damage and cracks. Ferrari Technical Customer service to establish how to
proceed further.
• Check all chassis components, such shock absorbers,
suspension and steering joints, links, axles, anti-roll bars • All the main repair operations possible for the Ferrari
and their fasteners, for external damage or cracks. F458 Italia are described in this repair manual. Combined
instructions may be used to differentiate between different
• Check brake system components such as brake discs,
repair procedures. Only the right or left hand components
brake pads, brake callipers, hydraulic lines and hydraulic
are illustrated in the description of a repair.
hoses and their respective fastenings for external damage,
stretching or leaks. • To ensure that the original crash safety of the vehicle is
maintained after a body repair, always used the same
• Check engine, gearbox, axle and exhaust system mounts
chassis joint points.
for damage.
• Cuts that may affect the crash safety of the body, and
• Before returning the vehicle to the customer following a
thereby the safety and roadworthiness of the vehicle, must
repair, test drive the vehicle carefully to ensure that it is
always be approved by Ferrari.
roadworthy.
Copyright © 2010
1.4 Important information
1.4.3 Original joint points

• The original joint points are all the weld joints made during
manufacture of the vehicle.
• To ensure crash safety, these joints must be rewelded in
the original positions after a body repair.
• Any methods and procedures that deviate from the original
assembly are described in the Ferrari F458 Italia bodywork
repair manual.
1.4.4 Cuts
• Cuts must only be made as described by the instructions
given in the Ferrari F458 Italia bodywork repair manual!
• Load-bearing components must only be parted at the original
joint.
• Cuts may only be made in the outer skin, as described by
the repair instructions given in this manual.
1.4.5 Sanding
NOTE!
When grinding weld seams, ensure that the thickness
of the outer panels is maintained or is only slightly
reduced.
Copyright © 2010
1.5 Key to symbols
1.5.1 Welding
SG tack weld
SG plug weld
SG continuous weld
SG staggered continuous weld
Spot weld
(SG = shield gas welding)
1.5.2 Riveting
Solid and self-piercing rivet with countersunk head
Blind rivet with countersunk head
Copyright © 2010
1.5 Key to symbols
1.5.3 Milling off, drilling out or piercing spot welds
Mill off spot weld
Drill out or pierce
1.5.4 Gluing and sealing
Bicomponent sealant mastic
Area to be sealed with mastic
1.5.5 Cavity preservation
1.5.5 Screw symbol
1.5.5 Cutting and grinding points for weld seams
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
4
3
1: Roof/Windscreen 3: Side window/Roof

Clearance = 4.0 mm ±1.0 mm Clearance = /
Offset = -2.0 mm -1.0 mm +1.5 mm Offset = -8.5 mm ±1.5 mm
2: Roof/Windscreen 4: Roof/Fender

Clearance = 4.0 mm ±2.0 mm Clearance = Minimum point 3.0 mm (variable) ±1.5 mm
Offset = variable Offset = /
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
6 5
8
5: Lid/Bumper 7: Headlight/Fender
Clearance = 3.5 mm ±0.5 mm Clearance = 3.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Offset = -1.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = +0.7 mm ±0.7 mm
6: Fender/Bumper grille 8: Headlight/Bumper

Clearance = 0.0 mm +0.5 mm Clearance = 3.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Offset = 0.0 mm ±0.5 mm Offset = variable
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
11
10
12
9: Bumper/Headlight/Grille 11: Fender/Lid

Offset = / Offset = 0.7 mm +0.7 mm -1.0 mm
10: Headlight/Lid 12: Roof seal/Front window surround

Offset = -1.4 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = /
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
16
14
13 15
13: Fender/Sill trim panel 15: Side door/Sill trim panel

Offset = -0.5 mm ±0.5 mm Offset = 0.0 mm ±1.0 mm
14: Door panel/Fender 16: Moulding/Door window

Clearance = 3.5 mm ±0.5 mm Clearance = /
Offset = -0.5 mm +0.5 mm Offset = -8.5 mm ±1.5 mm
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
17
19
18 20
17: Roof/Moulding 19: Quarterlight/Door window

Clearance = / Clearance = 6.3 mm ±2.0 mm
Offset = -1.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = Var. -0.8/-0.7 mm ±1.0 mm
18: Door panel/Flank 20: Quarterlight seal/Door window scraper seal

Offset = 0.75 mm +0.0 mm -0.75 mm Offset = 0.0 mm ±1.0 mm
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
21 22 23
24
21: Air intake surround/Roof 23: Roof/Rear window

Clearance = 3.5 mm ±0.5 mm Clearance = 4.5 mm +1.0 mm
Offset = -1.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = -1.0 mm +0.0 mm
22: Rear window/Air intake surround 24: Rear window/Engine compartment lid
Offset = -0.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = -2.0 mm +2.0 mm -1.0 mm
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
27
25
26
28
25: Engine compartment lid/Rear bumper 27: Taillight/Rear bumper

Clearance = 4.0 mm ±1.0 mm Clearance = Var. from 2.7 mm to 3.8 mm +1.0 mm
Offset = 0.0 mm ±1.0 mm Offset = /
26: Taillight/Exterior flank 28: Air intake grilles/Rear bumper

Clearance = 3.0 mm ±1.0 mm Clearance = 0.0 mm +0.5 mm
Offset = / Offset = /
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
29 32
30 31
29: Lower air intake/Rear bumper 31: Lower air intake/Diffuser

Clearance = 1.0 mm +0.5 mm Clearance = 2.0 mm +1.0 mm
Offset = / Offset = /
30: Lower air intake/Diffuser 32: Air intake surround/Exterior flank

Offset = 0.0 mm ±0.5 mm Offset = /
Copyright © 2010
1.6 Clearances
33
34
35
33: Rear window/Exterior flank 35: Exterior flank/Rear bumper

Offset = / Offset = 0.0 mm ±0.5 mm
34: Engine compartment lid/Rear bumper

Clearance = 4.0 mm ±1.5 mm
Offset = Var. from -4.2 mm to -0.0 mm ±1.5 mm
Copyright © 2010
1.7 Car Bench vehicle bench
To mount the vehicle on the straightening bench, proceed

in accordance with the assembly plan provided by the
manufacturer of the straightening tool.
A special set of straightening tools has been developed for

repairing the Ferrari F458 Italia. To ensure precise fit and
dimensional accuracy, it is generally advised to use the set of
straightening tools when carrying out all work on the vehicle
structure:
• Before separating individual parts from the body assembly.

• When aligning and tack welding new components.
• When welding in new components.
• During the cooling phase after welding.
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
Copyright © 2010
1.8 Expanded foam
Expanded foam parts are used to reduce interior noise and

prevent condensation and exhaust gases from entering the
passenger compartment. In the production process, the cavities
in certain areas of the bodywork are compartmentalised by
using expanded foam components and applying heat to the
bodywork.
During vehicle production, strips of sealant, in various widths

and thicknesses, are inserted into the box section cavities.
These expanded foam parts are optimally moulded to the shape
of the box section cavities by heating the bodywork to approx.
180 °C. This separates the individual box section cavities.
However, as the bodywork may not be heated to this extent
during a repair, different procedures have been established for
different cases:
Bicomponent expanded foam sealant

The cavities are filled with a bicomponent foam sealant. The
foam sealant must form a closed-cell seal. The closed-cell
seal prevents moisture from penetrating the area concerned.
Foam sealant is applied via existing holes. Only areas that
were foamed-in-situ at the manufacturing plant may be refilled
during a repair.
Single component permanently elastic adhesive mastic

This material is applied in very narrow repair areas, and in the
outer skin area in particular. For example, on the Ferrari F458
Italia, this is used to hermetically seal the underdoor panel.
Copyright © 2010
1.9 Workstation for bodywork repairs
A specially equipped workstation is necessary for carrying

out repairs on the aluminium bodywork of the Ferrari F458
Italia. If the workstation is not situated in its own dedicated,
enclosed space, adjacent workstations used for conventional
steel vehicles must be screened off with a sliding protective
curtain.
Copyright © 2010
1.10 Workshop equipment for aluminium repairs
A specific set of tools must be used for work on aluminium • Saw blades (coarse tooth)
bodies. When carrying out surface finishing work (grinding), • Hot air fan
never use grinding discs that have previously been used on
steel panels. When carrying out surface finishing work (planing, • Angle grinder
beating), never use tools that have previously been used on • Cutting disc
steel panels.
• Grinding discs
Caution! • Hole-punching pliers (hand-operated and pneumatic)

• Joggling tool (hand-operated and pneumatic)
Never use a tool on aluminium vehicles that has
previously been used for steel panels. • Spray gun for sealing
The following tools are generally required for carrying out work • Gun for applying underbody protection
on vehicle bodies: • Gun for applying cavity wax
• Set of straightening tools - Ferrari F458 Italia • Counterhold tool
• Portal gauge • Universal dolly
• Portal gauge accessory - F458 Italia • Plastic wedges
• MIG welding equipment • Plastic drift
• TIG welding equipment • Paintbrushes
• Welding fumes extraction system • Stainless steel wire brush
• Welding spot milling cutter • Single component adhesive gun (hand-operated)
• Aluminium panel beating system • Bicomponent adhesive gun (pneumatic)
• Oxyacetylene welding equipment • Clamping pliers
• Riveting tongs for self-piercing rivets • Oscillating cutter
• Riveting tongs for blind rivets • Stud welding equipment
• Pneumatic riveting tongs for blind rivets • Oscillating cutter
• Electric body saw/long stroke • Temperature indicator strips or temperature indicator crayons
• Pneumatic body saw/short stroke
Copyright © 2010
1.10 Workshop equipment for aluminium repairs
Special tools
A new template and punch kit (p/n 95978256) is used for repairs
in the wheelhouse area. These tongs enable the removal and
replacement of rivet joints at the flange connecting the two
halves of the wheel housing.
Copyright © 2010
1.11 Aluminium
Aluminium is obtained from bauxite and is the second most

commonly used metal today after steel. Magnesium and
silicon are the main alloying components used in high-quality
aluminium alloys. These alloys form the basis of the extruded
sections, die-cast node joints and panels in aluminium.
1.11.1 Contact corrosion

When aluminium is in contact with oxygen in the air, a passivating
oxide layer is formed on its surface that protects the material
underneath from environmental factors. Consequently, an
unpainted aluminium component will not normally corrode.
However, if aluminium comes into contact with another metal

that is higher in the electromotive series than itself and an
electrolyte is present at this point, contact corrosion will occur.
Electromotive series:
• Zinc (Zn)
• Chromium (Cr)
• Iron (Fe)
• Tin (Sn)
• Lead (Pb)
• Aluminium (Al)
Since aluminium is usually lower in the electromotive series
and is the more common metal, it will decompose.
Copyright © 2010
1.11 Aluminium
1.11.2 Corrosion protection 1.11.3 Screw connections

To prevent contact corrosion, only surface-coated fastener
Caution!
elements - bolts, nuts, washers, blind rivets, self-piercing
rivets, etc. - are used in the manufacture of the vehicle. These Bolts must not be reused. Friction produced during
components are tested for their compatibility with aluminium. tightening reduces the thickness of the coating.
New fastener elements must always be used when carrying Mechanical components and bodywork elements are fastened
out repairs. Screws may not be used as the friction generated to parts of the body with rivets (with blind rivets and self-piercing
during tightening reduces the thickness of the coating. Grinding rivets), screws applied to threaded rivets and screws applied
work on steel components (blind rivets, self-piercing rivets, to threads cut directly into the aluminium. To prevent damage
bolts) is not permitted. to the threads, please observe the maximum torque values.
The dust produced by grinding contains minute steel particles 1.11.4 Lightweight construction
which would damage the aluminium. To reduce vehicle weight, the entire(*) vehicle body has been
manufactured from aluminium components. The specific
The following work is required after an accident repair:
weight of aluminium is just 2.70 kg/dm3, whereas that of steel
is 7.85 kg/dm3. As a result, a considerably higher strength
• Painting, from primer right through to glaze
compared with a unitary construction steel body can be
• Post-treatment (sealing) of edges; material used: achieved.
1-component polyurethane-based permanently-elastic
body sealing compound and 1-component polymer-based
permanently-elastic body sealing compound
• Corrosion protection treatment for the underbody
• Post-treatment of cavities with cavity protection agents.
Copyright © 2010
1.11 Aluminium
1.11.5 Space-Frame assembly

The entire bodywork of the Ferrari F458 Italia is constructed on
a Space Frame structure.
The areas highlighted in purple are made from an aeronautical

grade aluminium alloy. Extruded sections and cast parts are all
welded in the area of the join. Replacement parts have been
specifically designed for use with prefabricated assemblies.
All welding work carried out on the Space Frame assembly
must be done in conjunction with a straightening system. The
components to be replaced must be mounted on a straightening
jig.
Essentially, this construction consists of:
• extruded sections
• die-cast joints (cast parts)
• gussets (reinforcements)
• (*) The reinforcements in the A pillars are made from ultra-
high strength steel sheet (see chapter 1.12 “Ultra-high
strength steel reinforcements”)
Copyright © 2010
1.11 Aluminium
1.11.6 Extruded sections 1.11.8 Gussets (reinforcement panels)

The vehicle is fitted with gussets (reinforcement panels) in
Caution!
different thicknesses. The gussets are mainly attached to the
Deformed extruded sections must not be repaired either space frame by means of welded or riveted joints.
cold or by applying heat.
Screw connections are used in a limited number of areas.
Damaged extruded sections must be replaced. The gussets essentially help to strengthen and increase the
torsional stiffness of the space frame construction.
The body-in-white structure consists of extruded sections -
with differing cross sections and stiffness characteristics - and 1.11.9 Recycling
die-cast joints (cast parts). Extruded sections have excellent
strength characteristics and superior torsional stiffness. The NOTE!
extruded sections used in the vehicle are compartmentalised Scrap aluminium parts must be detached immediately
by one or two cavities. Due to the properties of the material, and disposed of separately.
straightening work on extruded sections is not possible or
permitted.
1.11.7 Die-cast joints
Caution!
For safety reasons, die-cast node joints (castings) may
not be repaired and must be replaced!
Welding of cracks is not permitted.
The die-cast joints (castings) constitute the key areas of the
Space Frame construction. They constitute the entire welded
joint area for all extruded sections.
The die-cast joints are also used as mounts for the axle
components and the engine and transmission assembly.
Copyright © 2010
1.12 Ultra-high strength steel reinforcements
To reinforce the windscreen frame for increased occupant

protection and body stiffness, reinforcements made from ultra-
high strength steel are installed in both A-pillars (A) of the
Ferrari.
The cover panel of the A-pillar is made from aluminium.

The joints between aluminium body components and steel
components must meet extremely high requisites in terms of
strength and corrosion resistance. On the Ferrari F458 Italia, A
these requirements have been met by joining the components
using non-thermal procedures and coated self-piercing rivets.
Self-piercing riveting is a proven joining technology for joining

aluminium parts with other aluminium parts and for joining
steel and aluminium parts. Any heat subsequently applied to
these reinforcements - for example when cutting or welding
- results in considerable loss of strength, which in turn has a
drastic effect on the vehicle's crash safety. Therefore, in the
event of repair, these reinforcements must not straightened
using either cold or hot techniques. The complete part must be
replaced in all cases.
Copyright © 2010
1.13 Consumable materials
Only the consumable materials listed must be used when

carrying out any of the body repairs described in this manual.
All materials must be approved by the vehicle manufacturer.
Name Manufacturer Product number Specification

Bicomponent cartridge gun for 3M Scotch-Weld EPX 37/50
structural adhesive (end-cured)
Bicomponent structural 3M Scotch-Weld DP 490
adhesive (end-cured)
Adhesive cleaner 3M Scotch-Weld 08984 Contains: petroleum distillates,
hylol, ethyl benzene
Mixing tube for structural Wieländer + Schill 838115
adhesive
Silicate abrasive paper Wieländer + Schill 667212 Contains silicate
Aluminium filler with curing Wieländer + Schill 542050 Polyester based aluminium filler
agent with aluminium powder
Crack testing material:
Cleaner Wieländer + Schill 311051
Penetrating dye 311050
Developer 311052
Bicomponent filler foam/ Henkel/Teroson
expanding foam
Single component body adhesive Henkel/Teroson Teroson 9100 1K PUR Permanently-elastic polyurethane-
sealing compound based adhesive sealing compound,
may be painted over with all paints
Copyright © 2010
1.13 Consumable materials
Name Manufacturer Product number Specification

Butyl tape Henkel/Teroson Permanently-elastic sealant,
8 mm
Single component primer Henkel/Teroson
Cleaner (for painted areas) Henkel/Teroson
Silicone remover Henkel/Teroson
Copyright © 2010
1.14 Preparing and cleaning areas for welding
Often, for the sake of convenience or due to a shortage of time,

joint areas are not adequately prepared and cleaned correctly,
in spite of the fact that these preliminary procedures are vital
for a perfect, high quality weld.
The quality of a weld seam may be compromised so severely

as a result of inadequate preparation that it may even need to
be removed for safety and the weld repeated. The time saved
in terms of preparation is not even remotely comparable to the
amount of time wasted in having to redo a weld.
The following procedures are necessary:
• The weld points on all parts of the bodywork must be ground

(removing the paint).
• Before welding, remove the layer of oxide with a stainless
steel wire brush.
• Before welding, clean the welding area with a degreasing
detergent or acetone.
NOTE!
Failure to clean weld areas adequately may severely
compromise the strength of the weld itself by promoting
the development of porosity.
Caution!
Before welding, fit all attached parts (lights, radiator
grille, engine compartment lid etc.)!
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.1 Panel beating 1.15.3 Monitoring temperature
NOTE! Caution!
Only use aluminium tools for all panel beating work. Outer skin body components may be heated for
The risk of stretching the material is greater with aluminium straightening and panel beating work provided the
than with steel. As a result, aluminium panels should preferably temperature is monitored constantly. Never exceed
be pressed rather than beaten. Panel beating procedures 180 °C. For precise temperature monitoring, use
in which the aluminium panel is placed directly between the temperature indicator pencils or strips or temperature
counterhold tool and the body hammer, should be kept to a reading instruments.
minimum. Contrary to standard practice with steel panels,
panel beating work on aluminium panels should begin in the Panel beating may be facilitated by applying targeted heat.
centre of the dent. When panel beating, do not use sharp- When heating aluminium, the material must not be allowed to
edged or hard tools such as steel hammers. tarnish. Consequently, the temperature has to be determined
by means of temperature indicator strips. The different
When performing finishing operations, operate the counterhold
areas on the temperature indicator strip change colour once
tool loosely. Excessive force applied during finishing actions
predetermined temperatures are exceeded.
may cause the material to stretch. To avoid this, use a
counterhold tool made from hardwood. Procedure:
1.15.2 Shrinking 1. Thoroughly clean and confine the area to be heated
Elongation of the material may be rectified by shrinking, 2. Temperature indicator strips must be applied at a distance
which involves the application of heat. Shrinking is done with of approximately 25 mm from the area to be heated
a neutral flame. The shrinking operation involves heating the
area to be shrunk then locally cooling it immediately. As a 3. Apply the temperature indicator strips spaced at regular
result of the rapid temperature change, the aluminium panel intervals
shrinks at the area concerned and resumes its original shape. 4. Heat the material while simultaneously monitoring the
The surrounding colder material confines the heated area and temperature.
stretches less.
During subsequent cooling, the heated, buckled aluminium
panel shrinks. As a general rule, the repair area must be heated
and cooled quickly when carrying out shrinking procedures.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.4 Cutting 1.15.5 Joggling

Joggling is a particularly suitable method for creating a backing
Caution!
for welding aluminium panels. This should be carried out using
Only perform cuts in accordance with the instructions mechanical or pneumatic joggling tools. Before making a
in this repair manual. Before carrying out any cutting cut, allow 22 mm for an overlap. To allow filler to be applied
work, the paint and sealant must be removed from subsequently to the repair area, create a 45° bevel on the
the area of the cut. When making the cuts, protect upper panel and deburr.
adjacent parts, such as castings, from damage.
1.15.6 Same-material weld backing
Before performing any cutting operations, the structural The same material as the material being welded is used during
characteristics of the area in question, such as inner joining the repair as a weld backing. This is required when welding
flanges, reinforcement panels, etc., must be examined aluminium panel sections where a butt-to-butt weld is not
carefully. possible. The thin material would otherwise burn through very
quickly under the effect of the heat. Offcuts from the new or
In general, and around die-cast joints in particular, start rough
old part may be used for this backing material. Same-material
cuts with a body saw. This facilitates access for other cutting
backing should also be used on beaded panel edges.
tools and ensures the necessary visibility of the individual
cutting areas. In the case of small cross sections or large panel edges, cut
the material and create a 45° bevel on both panels. The panel
• Only make cuts with the body saw or panel shears. edges must be spaced by a 3 to 4 mm gap.
• The tooth pitch for aluminium saw blades is coarser than
that for steel panels.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.7 Straightening pressing it out with the riveting tongs. When doing so, observe
the following precautions:
Aluminium behaves differently from steel when it is being
straightened. The risk of stretching the material is considerably
ಶ If required, make cuts first
greater with aluminium. Aluminium panels should preferably be
pressed rather than beaten. Because of the particularly high ಶ Adjust the riveting tool to the thickness of the material
strength of the aluminium extruded sections and aluminium
castings, straightening cannot be carried out on any part ಶ Insert the tip of the punch into the stamped area of the
of the Space Frame structure. Any damaged parts must be panel
replaced. ಶ Pull out the self-piercing rivet with the riveting tool, taking
care not to tilt the riveting tool as you do so
The scope of the repair is ascertained by superimposing
the measurement points of adjacent components on the NOTE!
straightening bench. Straightening work to correct the Self-piercing rivets must not be drilled or ground out.
dimensions of normal structural panels (e.g. bulkhead, side
panel/rear closure panel, spare wheel well/rear cross-member, Ensure that the riveting tool is adjusted to the thickness
etc.) is possible to a limited degree. of the material before carrying out any job. If the flange
is not accessible with the riveting tool, cut the damaged
1.15.8 Riveting
part out roughly.
Riveting consists in the formation of a non-detachable joint by
plastic deformation of the rivet itself. If the self-piercing rivet is not accessible with the
riveting tool, the aluminium may be drilled out around
Self-piercing riveting
the rivet using a welding spot milling cutter with a
Self-piercing riveting is one of the most important joining sprung tip.
techniques used on the bodywork of the Ferrari F458 Italia.
This technique is used to join aluminium body components Sparks produced when grinding are an indication
together and to join aluminium with steel body components. of remnants of rivets in the material. Remove these
One example of where this method is used are the ultra-high remnants and change the grinding disc.
strength steel reinforcements which are joined to the aluminium
cover plate of the A pillar.
The self-piercing rivet is made from steel and has a special

coating. In repairs, the original self-piercing rivets are replaced
with solid rivets. The self-piercing rivet joint is removed by
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Pressing out the self-piercing rivet leaves a hole in the inner Blind rivet joints are critical to the strength and torsional stiffness
panel. The self-piercing rivet remains on the outer panel. of the bodywork.
A gap is created between the head of the self-piercing rivet Two types of blind rivet have been approved for repairs on the
and the outer panel. If so, detach the damaged part with a flat Ferrari F458 Italia:
chisel and remove.
• High-strength structural blind rivets are used for work on
Carefully remove any rivet residues with a flat chisel. structural components.
Gently align the flange on the undamaged panel with the • Textron blind rivets are used to replace factory-installed self-
riveting tong, using two flat inserts. piercing rivet joints in places that are difficult to access.
Threaded rivets
Adapt and fasten the part to be repaired, and insert solid or
blind rivets in accordance with the repair manual. NOTE!
Use only the threaded rivets that have been approved
Remove all rivets that fall into the vehicle during the repair.
Magnets may be used to remove them. by the manufacturer (with special coating). Threaded
rivets must never be ground or drilled out. The metal
Blind rivet joints swarf produced will cause contact corrosion.
NOTE! Threaded rivets are generally pre-installed in with replacement
Factory-installed structural blind rivets must only be parts and assemblies. The repair may necessitate the removal
of some of these inserts. Damaged threaded rivets may also
replaced with structural rivets, even in the case of
be replaced individually. The threaded rivets must also be
repair. Use only blind rivets that have been approved
completely removed from cavities.
by Ferrari. These blind rivets are coated and prevent
contact corrosion. The operating pressure for the
pneumatic riveting tongs must be 8 bar. Before starting
the riveting procedure, ensure that the parts to be
joined and the rivet head are on top of one another
and that there is no gap between them.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.9 Welding aluminium 1.15.10 Checking weld seams and die-cast node joints
Metal inert gas (MIG) welding is the most commonly used
Caution!
method for carrying out repair welds on aluminium. It is used
to create joints between castings and extruded sections and Before using any penetrating agents, cleaners and
between panel sections. In this method, the arc burns between developers, it is essential that all the safety precautions
the component to be welded and the melting wire electrode. indicated by the respective manufacturers are taken.
The latter serves as the filler material and transfers the energy All three diagnostic agents are highly flammable.
required to melt the metal. Argon is used as the shielding gas.
When assessing damage to die-cast joints and the quality of
1 mm diameter AlSi 12 wire is used as the filler wire. Before repairs to welded joints, crack-testing is necessary.
welding, remove any underbody protective treatment, sealants
and paint from the parts and then remove the oxide layer with The dye penetration method is suitable for carrying out crack
a stainless steel brush. tests on surfaces. In this case all faults originating in the surface
are highlighted by a contrasting colour. Red or yellowish-green
To prevent the formation of cracks, always continue weld fluorescent dyes are usually used as the penetrating agent.
seams around the corners of extruded sections.
Caution!
All welds must be carried out with the parts fixed in
the jig to prevent the parts themselves from moving
during welding, which would compromise the results
of the repair.
Only remove the jigs after checking that the weld areas
have cooled.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Do not brush the area to be examined before carrying out a

crack test as this will fill up the cracks!
Procedure:
1. Expose the damaged area and clean the surface.
2. Apply the penetrating agent with an aerosol spray can. The
penetrating agent will permeate into the apertures in the
surface by capillary action. Allow the penetration agent to
take effect - observe the correct length of time.
3. Use a detergent to completely remove any excess
penetrating agent that has not permeated into the damaged
surface.
4. Spray on developer and allow it to act. The damaged area
becomes visible.
Check the areas for cracks. If a component reveals any cracks,
it must be replaced.
If a weld seam contains cracks, it must be reworked. All cracks

must be ground out and re-welded. In this case, the crack test
will have to be repeated.
In general, however, only faults in the material surface or

communicating directly with the surface are detectable.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.11 Welding defects

A
Cracks
The most common types of cracks in aluminium are cracks
caused by heat and/or solidification; the risk of crack formation
increases with increasing solidification.
Cracking in welds is primarily influenced by the composition

of alloys being welded. There is a risk of crack formation with
AlMgSi type aluminium alloys and with AlMg and AlMgMn alloys
with an Mg and/or Si content lower than 2.5%. As a result, these
alloys may only be welded using welding additives made from
alloys with a higher Mg and/or Si content, as these additive
wires increase the residual melt content in the weld pool.
In addition to the use of inappropriate additive materials,

other cause for cracks include excessively shallow craters,
excessively short tack welds or incorrect welding sequences,
resulting in high shrinking stress in the event of sheet
overheating or tension. B
Subsequent processes performed on the welds may also

cause the formation of cracks.
For instance, cracks will form around weld beads in the event
of using excessively high weld currents or inappropriate
electrode wires (Fig. A).
Cracks in the end crater are usually caused by inappropriate

finishing treatments (Fig. B).
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
To repair a crack, the weld bead must be ground along the full
length of the crack to twice the depth of the crack itself before C
repeating the weld (Fig. C). After welding, crack testing must
be repeated.
Cracks in the outer skin are repaired by drilling a 2 mm diameter

hole at each end of the crack to prevent it from spreading.
Then both the crack and the holes are welded (Fig. D). Crack
Approximately double the length of the crack
Hole
Hole
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Pores
E
Pores within the weld bead constitute the most frequently
encountered defect. Pore formation reduces with increasing
solidification intervals.
Pores are formed by the inclusion of gas bubbles in the event

of excessively rapid cooling. This is caused by the greater
solubility of hydrogen in liquid aluminium (20 times higher than
in the solid state). Condensation therefore poses a particular
hazard, as moisture causes a layer of hydroxide to form, which
has a high hydrogen content.
Other possible causes of pore formation are:
• unstable electric arc (due to irregular current, irregular

movement of the wire electrode or incorrect weld settings),
• incorrect placement of welding torch,
• insufficient inert gas quantity, F
• air infiltration,
• nozzles that are too small or obstructed by metal splashes,
• contaminants in the weld bead area (grease, oil, paint,
dirt).
Penetration notches (Fig. E) are formed in the event of using
excessive weld currents or in the event of incorrect placement
of the welding torch.
Protruding weld beads

Protruding weld beads are formed in the event of using
excessively low weld currents or in the case of excessively
slow weld speeds (Fig. F).
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Inclusions
G
The most frequent types of inclusions are oxides. These form
when small fragments of oxide film fall into the weld pool, as
the oxide layer was not removed prior to welding.
As these fragments are in general very fine and uniformly

distributed, they have no discernible influence on the strength
of the weld bead.
This, however, is not the case in the event of insufficient

shielding gas coverage or air infiltration. In these cases,
larger oxide inclusions may be formed, resulting in significant
notching due to material separation.
End craters
A crater forms at the end of each weld bead, which must be
filled (Fig. G).
To do this, do not turn the welding torch off at the end if the H
weld bead. The melting welding wire fills the crater (Fig. H).
Alternatively, turn the welding torch on and off repeatedly until

the crate has been filled.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Melting
I
The weld may melt in the event of excessive weld currents or
inadequate edge preparation (Fig. I).
Application error ('I' shaped bead)

Application errors occur when the filling material runs into the
gap and when a weld is applied on top of another newly applied
bead that has not yet solidified.
The root must be perfectly welded. Slightly bevelling the inner

side of the sheet flanges improves the influx of the root.
Application errors consist of material separation cracks with a

high penetration effect, which compromise the strength of the
weld itself.
Soot deposits
In event of an excessively small torch angle or incorrect welding
torch movements (such as when welding forward), significant J
soot deposits may be formed in certain conditions (Fig. J).
Other causes of this phenomenon may be an insufficient

quantity of inert gas or inadequate cleaning of the welding
flanges.
When working with magnesium based aluminium alloys, small

soot deposits are practically unavoidable.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
Cold spots
Cold spots may occur at the start and end of the bead, which
compromise the strength of the joint due to poor penetration.
As a result, approximately 5 mm should be added to the start
and finish of the bead when determining the length of the bead
itself.
Effects of Welding Heat on AlMgMn Base Material

The thermally altered area is weakened as a result of
crystallisation. Should this occur, there is no way of increasing
the strength of the altered area.
Effects of Welding Heat on AlMgSi Base Material.

The thermally altered area is weakened by coarse segregation
with mixed hypersaturated crystals (in the case of a cold
hardened initial state) and/or by increased segregation with no
correlation (in the case of hot hardened initial state).
The only way to substantially increase strength is to temper the

material again - in other terms by solubilizing, sudden cooling
and natural cooling. However, this process is not possible on
bodywork in a workshop.
In both types of alloy, the thermally altered area is the weakest

part of the joint.
Copyright © 2010
1.15 Repair methods
1.15.12 Structural adhesive bonding Sealing seams that have not been done correctly or that are
missing may also cause wind noise.
Bonded joints are also used in certain areas to supplement
the self-piercing or blind rivet joints and resistance spot welds.
Even the tiniest gap in the seal can result in substantial water
This increases the strength of the joint.
infiltration.
1.15.13 Sealing
NOTE!
Before carrying out any cutting work, the paint and
sealant must be removed from the area of the cut.
Remove sealant with a rotary wire brush.
After carrying out repair work, all seals must be reapplied

as per the original assembly.
To prevent leaks and wind noise, the body is sealed in the
factory.
During and after work on the vehicle body, maintain the

factory-applied corrosion protection or reapply if necessary. If
repair work is required on a vehicle body, the following must
be observed.
If, after straightening work, hairline cracks appear near the

sealing seams in the area of the outer panels or body joint
areas, these must be carefully reworked. Hairline cracks in the
sealing seam, or sealing seams that have not been properly
made during the repair usually result in water infiltrating into
the passenger compartment.
Copyright © 2010
2.1 Replacing the fender
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, headlight, gravel guard).

procedures
Replacement parts • Fender (A)
Material necessary • 7 x M6 screws
Copyright © 2010
Repair sequence Removing the old part

1. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the 2 fastener screws
joining the fender and the flank of the vehicle.
2. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the 4 fastener

screws joining the fender and fender mounting.
2
Copyright © 2010
3. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the fastener screw

joining the fender and the front sill pillar.
Fitting the new part 4. Fit the fender, aligning with the holes on the fender
mounting and on the vehicle flank.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the 5. Fasten the fender to the fender mounting with 4 M6

new part screws.
5
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously.
See paragraph (1.11.3 Screw connections).
6. Fasten the fender to the front sill pillar with 1 M6

screw.
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
7. Fasten the fender to the vehicle flank with 2 M6

screws.
Caution!
ಶ Refit connected parts (bumper, headlight, gravel

guard).
ಶ Check the clearance dimensions, rework if
necessary.
Remove the fender for subsequent painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.2 Replacing the fender mounting assembly
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, headlight, hinges, lid)

procedures
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Place the vehicle on the vehicle bench.
Replacement parts • Front fender mounting (A)

• Reinforcement base (B) A
Material necessary • 7 structural rivets (Ø 6.4)

• 4 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9)
• Bicomponent sealant mastic
Copyright © 2010
Repair features
Warning!
Work with the utmost caution when welding to
avoid igniting any components in the vicinity.

1. Sand the weld points between the fender mounting
and the front trellis.
1
1
Copyright © 2010
2. Remove the beads of bicomponent sealant mastic

near the three fastener rivets joining the mounting
base and the upper diagonal brace.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and
safety glasses.
3. Remove the 3 structural rivets joining the

reinforcement base and the upper diagonal brace.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause 3
noise when the vehicle is in use.
Copyright © 2010
4. Remove the 4 self-piercing rivets joining the fender

mounting and the lower reinforcement base.
4
• 2 on outer side of vehicle.
• 2 on inner side of vehicle.
NOTE! 4
necessary, as any remaining rivets will cause
5. Remove the 4 structural rivets joining the fender

mounting and the lower reinforcement base.

NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
6. Retrieve the protective foam.
7. Remove the lower mounting base and sand the

welding points for joining the fender mounting and
the upper diagonal brace.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the upper
diagonal brace.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 8. Sand the new part.
9. Fit the outer tower, then mount the fender mounting

in the jig (B - C). B
ಶ Prepare the weld area (see chapter 1.14).
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part

NOTE!
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15
Repair methods) thoroughly.
10. Weld the fender mounting to the front lateral trellis at 10

the original weld points.
10
10
11. Weld the fender mounting to the upper diagonal

brace at the original weld points.
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair

area and then apply a primer coat.
11
Copyright © 2010
12. Fasten the reinforcement base to the upper diagonal

brace with 3 structural rivets.
13
13. Fasten the reinforcement base to the fender

mounting with 4 self-piercing rivets.
14
NOTE! 14
Insert the new self-piercing rivets next to the
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
14. Fasten the reinforcement base to the fender

mounting with 4 structural rivets.

15
15
15. Refit the protective foam.
15
Copyright © 2010
16. Seal the three structural rivets joining the

reinforcement base and the upper diagonal brace
with bicomponent mastic.
Danger!
safety glasses.
16
17. Refit the fender (see chapter 2.1).
ಶ Check that the part is correctly aligned.

ಶ Refit the door and lid.
necessary. Remove the fender, door and lid for
subsequent painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.3 Replacing the front lateral trellis
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (headlight, gravel guard, radiator, radiator mounting).
procedures
ಶ Remove the fender (see chapter 2.1).
Replacement parts • Front lateral trellis (A)

• Upper outer radiator mounting bracket (B) C B
• Front link tube (C)
Material necessary -
Copyright © 2010

1. Sand the weld points between the front trellis and
the front spar.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the front
spars.
1
1
2. Sand the weld points joining the upper outer radiator

mounting bracket.
NOTE!
cross-member.
2
2
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the weld points on the internal side of the car

between the trellis and the cross-member.
3
NOTE!
cross-member.
4. Sand the weld points between the trellis and the

shock tower.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the
shock tower.
Caution!
Check that there are no cracks in the shock 4
tower.
In the event of damage, the part must be
replaced (see chapter 2.6).
Copyright © 2010
5. Sand the weld points between the trellis and the

fender mounting.
5
5
6. Sand the weld points between the front link tube, the
front lateral trellis and the front cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 7. Mount the front trellis in the jig.
NOTE!
The procedure described above must be
performed with the assistance of another
worker.

NOTE!
Before fitting the new part, read chapter (1.15 8
8. Weld the front trellis to the cross-member at the

original weld points on the internal side of the
vehicle.
Copyright © 2010
9. Mount the bracket (A) in the jig and weld at the

original weld points to both the front trellis and the
cross-member. A
9
9
10. Weld the front trellis to the front spar at the original
weld points.
Caution!
When welding the front lateral trellis, there is a
risk of the spar (A) buckling as a result of the
heat.
10
To prevent this, the trellis must only be welded 10
with the front cross-member mounted in the jig
(see chapter 2.4).
Copyright © 2010
11. Fit and then weld the link tube (B) to the front cross-
member and to the front lateral trellis at the original
weld points.
11
11
12. Weld the front trellis to the shock tower at the original
weld points.
12
Copyright © 2010
13. Weld the front trellis to the fender mounting at the

original weld points.

13
ಶ Refit the door and lid.

necessary.
NOTE!
Refit connected parts after tacking the trellis
into position.
Then weld the trellis only after checking
clearances.
Remove the fender, door and lid for subsequent

painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.4 Replacing the front cross-member
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, headlights, radiator, tub).

procedures
Replacement parts • Front cross-member (A).

• Upper outer radiator mounting bracket (B). A

• 18 x M8 screws
Copyright © 2010

1. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 12 screws located 1
on the internal side of the car in correspondence
with the bumper mounting brackets.
2. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 6 screws in

correspondence with the tow hook mounting.
2
2 2 2
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the weld points between the front cross-

member and the front spars.
NOTE!
spars. 3
4. Remove the 12 structural rivets (6 per side)

connecting the front cross-member and the front
spars.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
5. Grind and clean the welds on the front spars.
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution, taking care not to
damage the front spars. 5
Fitting the new part 6. Mount the front cross-member in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is perfectly
horizontal.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
7. Fit 4 structural rivets (2 per side) to fix the front

cross-member in position.
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is flush with the 7
front spars on both sides.
8. Then fit the remaining 8 rivets (4 per side) in

correspondence with the holes in the front cross-
member.
Copyright © 2010
9. Weld the front cross-member to the spars (external/

internal lateral and upper/lower) at the original weld
points.
10. Fit the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3).
Copyright © 2010
11. Weld the two upper outer radiator mounting brackets

to the cross-member and to the front lateral trellis at

11
11
12. Fasten the bumper mounting brackets to the front

cross-member with 12 M8 screws. 12
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
13. Fasten the tow hook bracket to the front cross-

member with 6 M8 screws.
13
Caution!
13 13 13
14. Refit the RH/LH front trellises (see chapter 2.3).
15. Refit the fender (see chapter 2.1)
ಶ Refit the bumper and lid.

ಶ Check the clearance dimensions, rework if necessary.
Remove the fender, bumper and lid for subsequent
painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.5 Replacing the front spar
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, headlights, lid, radiator, tub)

procedures
ಶ Remove the front trellis (see chapter 2.3)
ಶ Remove the front cross-member (see chapter 2.4)
Replacement parts • Front spar (A)

• Reinforcement mounting (B)

(5 for RH spar/5 for LH spar)
• 2/4 x M8 screws
A B
Copyright © 2010

1. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the screws, located
on the internal side of the car, fastening the rear 1
luggage tub bracket.
2. Cut the front spar.
Copyright © 2010
3. Remove the 5 structural fastener rivets joining the

front spar and the reinforcement mounting.
NOTE!
4. Sand the lower weld points between the front spar

and the reinforcement mounting.
NOTE!
spars.
Copyright © 2010
5. Sand the weld points between the reinforcement

mounting and the shock tower.
Remove the reinforcement mounting.

NOTE!
spars.
Caution!
Check that there are no cracks in the shock 5
tower.
If any cracks are found, the part must be
6. Grind all the welds between the front spar and the
shock tower.
Caution!
When grinding the welds, take care not to
damage the casting joints. 6
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 7. Rest the front spar in the relative recess on the
shock tower.
NOTE!
Check that the front spar is perfectly horizontal.
8. Check that the height of the top surface of the spar

at both the inner and outer vehicle points is exactly
689.5 mm.
689.5 mm
689.5 mm
Copyright © 2010
9. Mount the front cross-member (A) in the jig, ensuring

that it is fitted correctly onto the two spars (B). B

NOTE!
10. Tack the front spar to the shock tower.
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Check that the front cross-member (A) is fitted

correctly, removing from the front spars (B). B
Caution!
Perform all the welds described as follows with
the part still in the jig.
Remove the jig only once the weld areas are 12

cool.
12. Remount the front cross-member in the jig then

weld the spar to the shock tower at the original weld
points.
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the weld beads at

the lower area of the spar.
Copyright © 2010
13. Weld the reinforcement mounting to the shock tower

at the original weld points.
13
14. Fasten the reinforcement mounting to the spar with

5 structural rivets.
14
Copyright © 2010
15. Weld the front spar to the reinforcement mounting at


15
16. Fasten the rear luggage tub bracket with 2 M8

screws.
16
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
17. Using the front cross-member as a template for

drilling, drill the specified holes in the spar and then
fasten the spar to the cross-member with 6 structural
rivets (Ø 6.4).
17
18. Refit the front cross-member (see chapter 2.4).
19. Refit the front trellis (see chapter 2.3).
20. Refit the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2).
ಶ Refit the fender, bumper and lid.

Remove the fender, bumper and lid for subsequent
painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.6 Replacing the wheel bay cover plate
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (dashboard, interior)

procedures
Replacement parts • Wheel bay cover plate (A)

Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the internal and external beads of sealant
mastic around the wheel bay cover plate.
1
Danger!
safety glasses. 1 1
2. Remove the 4 structural rivets from the upper part of

the wheel bay cover plate.
NOTE! 2 2
Copyright © 2010
3. Remove the 7 structural rivets from the lower part of

the wheel bay cover plate.
NOTE!
3
3
4. Sand the internal weld seams around the wheel bay

cover plate.
4 4
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 5. Fit the wheel bay cover plate in correspondence with
the rivet holes on the upper diagonal brace and on
the torque box.

NOTE!
6
6. Fasten the wheel bay cover plate in position with 11
structural rivets (Ø 4.8).
6 6
Copyright © 2010
7. Perform all the welds connecting the wheel bay

cover plate to the connected parts.

area and then apply a primer coat. 7
7 7
8. Apply new beads of sealant mastic in all areas where

it was removed previously.
Danger!
8
safety glasses.
8 8
ಶ Refit connected parts.
Copyright © 2010
2.7 Replacing the shock tower
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, dashboard, front lid and hinges, tub)
procedures
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)
ಶ Remove the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3)
ಶ Remove the front cross-member (see chapter 2.4)
ಶ Remove the front spar (see chapter 2.5)
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.3)
ಶ Remove the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6)
Replacement parts • Shock tower (A)

• Wheel bay cover plate (B) A
• Underwindscreen covering (C)
(p/n 81302100 RH / p/n 81406900 LH)
Material necessary • 6/8 x M8 screws B
• 2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8)

• 3x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 6.4)
C
• 11 structural rivets (Ø 6.4)
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the 4 M8 perforating screws fastening the
casting link cross-member.
2. Remove the 2/4 M8 screws fastening the lower front

suspension cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
3. Remove the internal and external beads of sealant

mastic on the lateral portion of the front firewall.
Danger!
safety glasses.
3
4. Remove the beads of sealant mastic on the 3

structural rivets connecting the torque box with the
shock tower.
Danger!
safety glasses.
4
Copyright © 2010
5. Remove the beads of sealant mastic on the weld

points in the underbody between the shock tower
and the semi-floorpan.
Danger!
safety glasses.
5
Removing the 6. Remove the beads of sealant mastic around the

underwindscreen underwindscreen covering.
covering
Danger! 6

Wear breathing protection, protective gloves and 6
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
7. Sand the beads of joining weld between the

underwindscreen covering, the upper diagonal
brace and the A-pillar flange.
7
NOTE!
diagonal brace.
7
8. Use the AVDEL FPM-35 gun to remove the 2

self-piercing fastener rivets (Ø 4.8) joining the
underwindscreen covering and the vehicle flank.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
9. Cut the shock tower in multiple points to allow access

for the removal of the welds on the cross-members
and reinforcements.
9
Caution!
When making separating cuts, take the utmost
care not to damage the casting joints.
9
Check the location of any internal cross- 9
member reinforcement on the new part in order
to cut correctly.
10. Sand the internal lateral weld points connecting the

shock tower and the front firewall.
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Sand the internal lower weld points connecting the

shock tower and the front cross-member.
Caution!
Check carefully to ensure that there is no
evident buckling in the floorpan and in the
reinforcements connected to the centre tunnel. 11
12. Sand the external lateral weld points connecting the

shock tower and the front firewall.
12
Copyright © 2010
13. Remove the 3x2 structural rivets connecting the

windscreen valence and the shock tower.
13
NOTE!
14. Sand the weld points at the ends of the windscreen

valence connecting the part with the shock towers.
NOTE!
14
upper diagonal brace.
Copyright © 2010
15. Remove the structural rivets (1 upper rivet and 3

lateral rivets on inner side) fastening the upper 15
diagonal brace to the shock tower.
NOTE!
noise when the vehicle is in use. 15
16. Grind the joint welds between the upper diagonal

brace and the shock tower.
NOTE!
upper diagonal brace.
16 16
Copyright © 2010
17. Gradually grind the joint welds between the upper

diagonal brace connected to the tunnel and the
shock tower.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the 17
upper diagonal brace connected to the tunnel.
18. Remove the 5 structural rivets (3 lateral rivets and 2

lower rivets) fastening the torque box to the shock
tower.
NOTE!
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if 18
18
Copyright © 2010
19. Gradually grind the joint welds between the torque

box and the shock tower, taking care not to damage
the parts themselves.
NOTE! 19
torque box.
20. Remove the 2 structural rivets on the lower surface

of the lower front suspension cross-member.
NOTE!
20
Copyright © 2010
21. Gradually grind the joint welds between the lower

front suspension cross-member and the shock
tower.
21
NOTE!
lower front suspension cross-member.
21
Fitting the new part 22. Mount the shock tower in the jig and tack.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
23. Fasten the shock tower to the torque box with 5 23

structural rivets.
23
24. Fasten the shock tower to the upper diagonal brace

with 4 structural rivets.
24
24
Copyright © 2010
25. Fasten the shock tower to the windscreen valence

with 3 structural rivets.
25
25
26. Fasten the lower front suspension cross-member to

the shock tower with 2 structural rivets.
26
Copyright © 2010
Caution!
Remove the jig only once the weld areas are

cool. 27
27. Weld the shock tower to the torque box and to the
front cross-member at the original weld points in the
underbody.
28. Weld the shock tower to the upper diagonal brace at

28 28
Copyright © 2010
29. Weld the shock tower to the front cross-member at the

original weld points in the passenger compartment
interior.
29
30. Weld the shock tower to windscreen valence at the


area.
30
Copyright © 2010
31. Weld the upper diagonal brace connected to

the tunnel to the shock tower at the original weld
points.
31
32. Weld the lower front suspension cross-member to

the shock tower at the original weld points.
32
Copyright © 2010
33. Weld the shock tower to the front firewall at the

original weld points (passenger compartment
interior/exterior).
33
33
34. Fit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6).
Copyright © 2010
35. Fasten the lower front suspension cross-member

with 2/4 M8 screws.
Caution!
35
36. Fasten the casting link cross-member to the shock

tower with 4 M8 screws.
Caution!
36
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the 37. Use the AVDEL FPM-35 gun to apply the 2 self-
underwindscreen piercing fastener rivets (Ø 4.8) connecting the
covering underwindscreen covering to the vehicle flank.
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
37
38. Weld the underwindscreen covering to the upper

diagonal brace and to the A-pillar flange at the
original weld points. 38
38
Copyright © 2010
39. Reapply the beads of mastic removed previously

from the underwindscreen covering.
39
Danger!
safety glasses.
40. Reapply all the beads of mastic sealant removed

previously.
Danger!
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 40
safety glasses.
40
40
Copyright © 2010
41. Refit the roof skin (see chapter 3.3)
42. Refit the front spar (see chapter 2.5)
43. Refit the front cross-member (see chapter 2.4)
44. Refit the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3)
45. Refit the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2)

Remove connected parts for subsequent painting.
Copyright © 2010
2.8 Replacing the front end module
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, dashboard)

procedures
ಶ Remove the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3)
ಶ Remove the windscreen support rib (see chapter 3.4)
ಶ Remove the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6)
Replacement parts • Front end module (A)

E A B F
• Front firewall (B)
• Lower diagonal braces (C)
• Upper diagonal braces (D)
• Underwindscreen covering (E)
D
• Wheel bay cover plate (F)
• Bumper mounting bracket (G)
• Casting link cross-member (H)
C
• 2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8) G H
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the shock towers (see chapter 2.7).
2. Cut the 3 lower diagonal braces near the welds on

the centre tunnel and on the lower front suspension
cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
3. Cut the 2 upper diagonal braces near the welds on

the centre tunnel.
4. Grind the welds between the diagonal braces and

the centre tunnel.
Caution!
Carefully check that the centre tunnel is free of
cracks.
4
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the casting
joints on the centre tunnel.
Copyright © 2010
5. Remove the beads of mastic on the front firewall

(lower area/lateral portions).
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation!
Risk of injury from skin or eye contact with
adhesive!
Wear breathing protection, protective gloves
and safety glasses.
6. Cut the front firewall, following the floorpan/centre

tunnel weld line.
Caution!
When cutting the front firewall, take the utmost
care not to damage the casting joints on the
centre tunnel.
Copyright © 2010
7. Grind the welds between the firewall, floorpan and

centre tunnel.
Caution!
joints on the centre tunnel.
Caution!
Carefully check that there is no evident buckling
on the reinforcements connected to the centre
tunnel.
7
Fitting the new part 8. Mount the front end module in the jig
(see the jigs used for the shock tower - chapter
2.7).
Warning!
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another worker, as there is a risk
of crushing in the event of the front module
falling.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
9. Tack the two shock towers to the upper diagonal

9
brace and to the torque box (see chapter 2.7).
9
Caution!

cool.
10. Tack and then weld the three lower diagonal braces
to the centre tunnel and to the lower front suspension 10
cross-member at the original weld points.
Copyright © 2010
11. Tack and then weld the two upper diagonal braces
to the centre tunnel and to the two shock towers at
11
12. Weld and rivet the two shock towers at the original
weld points (see chapter 2.7).
12
12
12 12
Copyright © 2010
13. Fit the front firewall in the relative recess, holding it

against the windscreen valence cross-member (A). A
13
14. Weld the front firewall to the two shock towers

(passenger compartment interior/exterior) at the
14
14
Copyright © 2010
15. Weld the front firewall to the front cross-member and

to the centre tunnel at the original weld points.
15
16. Weld the front firewall to the windscreen valence

cross-member (passenger compartment interior/
exterior) at to the original weld points. 16
Copyright © 2010
17. Fasten the casting link cross-member to the shock

towers with 4 M8 screws.
Caution!
36

19
18. Fit the underwindscreen covering (see chapter 2.7
Replacing the shock tower - step 37).
19. Fit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.6).
18
Copyright © 2010
20. Reapply beads of sealant mastic in the entire portion

adjacent to the front firewall (interior/exterior of
passenger compartment).
Danger!
20
safety glasses.
21. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic in the underbody

area (see chapter 2.7).
Danger!
safety glasses.
21
Copyright © 2010
22. Refit the windscreen support rib (see chapter 3.4)
24. Refit the front lateral trellis (see chapter 2.3)

ಶ Check clearances and rectify if necessary.
Copyright © 2010
3.1 Replacing the roof skin
Preliminary ಶ Remove the connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
procedures relative hinges).
ಶ Remove the fender mounting (see chapter 2.2).
Replacement parts • Roof skin (A)

• 32 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5 p/n 81126900)
• 25 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0)
• Expanded foam
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the beads of mastic in the windscreen 1
adhesive bonding area.
Danger!
1 1
adhesive!
and safety glasses.
2. Sand the sections of weld in correspondence with

windscreen valence cross-member (passenger
compartment interior/exterior).
Caution!
Take care not to damage the casting joints on
the shock towers.
2
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the weld points on the A-pillars.
Caution!
joints on the front sill pillar.
3
4. Sand the weld points on the C-pillars.
Caution!
joints on the rear sill pillar.
Copyright © 2010
5. Remove all the rivets in the lower windscreen area.
NOTE!
5
6. Remove all the rivets in the upper windscreen area.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
7. Using the 50 mm C-frame, remove all the rivets from

the lateral windscreen frame areas.
NOTE!
High strength self-piercing rivets are used for
the high strength steel reinforcements of the A-
pillars.
7 7
NOTE!
8. Remove all the fastener rivets joining the roof skin

and the vehicle flank in the upper door area.
8
NOTE!
High strength self-piercing rivets are used for
the high strength steel reinforcements of the A-
pillars.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
9. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the 4x2 M6 screws

from the rear connector fin joining the upper skin 9
and the vehicle flank.
10. Remove all the rivets on the rear connector fin joining

the upper skin and the vehicle flank. 10
NOTE!
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Remove the beads of mastic from the lower part of

the rain gutter.
Danger!
11
adhesive!
and safety glasses.
12. Sand the weld points in the lower part of the rain
gutter.
12
Copyright © 2010
13. Remove the spots of mastic from the rear part of the
upper skin.
Danger!
adhesive! 13
and safety glasses.
14. Remove the roof skin, detaching the spots of foam

on the skin itself in the positions indicated.
14
14
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
15
Before fitting the new part, reapply all the spots
of foam removed previously.
• Roof skin/underwindscreen rib joint

• Upper reinforcement cross-members
15. Fit the new part, using the recesses in the windscreen
valence cross-member as reference.
15
16. Tack the edges of the roof skin to keep it in the

correct position.
NOTE! 16
Check the diagonal braces in the windscreen

frame.
16
16
16
Copyright © 2010
17. Refit the connected parts (door, fender, lid).

Remove the connected parts.

NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
18. Fasten the front of the roof skin to the underwindscreen

rib using 10 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
18
19. Fasten the roof skin externally to the vehicle flanks

using 10x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5 p/n
81126900).
19
Caution!
The high-strength steel vehicle flank
reinforcements in area (A) must only be
fastened with high-strength self-piercing rivets.
NOTE!
A
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
20. Fasten the roof skin internally to the A-pillars using

6x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5 p/n 81126900).
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements in area
(A) must only be fastened with high strength A
A
structural rivets.
20 20
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
21. Fasten the upper part of the roof skin to the upper
reinforcement cross-member using 11 self-piercing
rivets (Ø 3.9x7).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
21
Copyright © 2010
22. Fasten the roof skin to the vehicle flank in

correspondence with the C-pillars using 4x2 M6 22
screws.
Caution!
23. Use the Avdel FPM-35 gun to apply 2x2 self-

piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x5.5) fastening the roof skin to 24
the vehicle flank in correspondence with the screws
applied previously.
24. Fasten the roof skin to the vehicle flank in

correspondence with the rear connector fin using
2x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
23
Copyright © 2010
25. Weld the roof skin to the underwindscreen rib at to

the original weld points (passenger compartment
interior/exterior).
25
25
26. Weld the roof skin to the A-pillars at the original weld
points.
26
26
Copyright © 2010
27. Weld the roof skin to the C-pillars at the original weld
points.

27
28. Reapply the beads of mastic removed previously

from the windscreen adhesive bonding area.
28
Danger!
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! 28 28
safety glasses.
29
Copyright © 2010
29. Reapply all the spots of mastic removed previously

(rear rain gutter area/interior of C-pillars).
Danger!
safety glasses.

Copyright © 2010
3.2 Replacing the windscreen support rib and the windscreen valence cross-member
procedures relative hinges).
ಶ Remove the roof skin (see chapter 3.1).
Replacement parts • Windscreen reinforcement support rib (A)

B
• Windscreen valence cross-member (B)
Material necessary • 3x2 rivets (Ø 6.4)

Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the beads of mastic from the lower part of
the underwindscreen rib and the mastic joining the
rib itself to the windscreen valence cross-member.
1
Danger!
safety glasses.
2. Sand the internal sections of weld joining the

windscreen valence cross-member with the front
firewall.
NOTE!
firewall.
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the exterior sections of weld joining to the

underwindscreen rib.
NOTE!
firewall.
4. Sand the sections of weld joining the underwindscreen

rib and the windscreen valence cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
5. Sand the sections of weld joining the underwindscreen

rib and the underwindscreen covering.
6. Remove the 3x2 structural rivets at the ends of the

windscreen valence cross-member fastening the
part to the two front shock towers. 6
NOTE!
6
Copyright © 2010
7. Sand the weld beads joining the windscreen valence

cross-member and the two front shock towers.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the two 7
shock towers.
Fitting the new part 8. Fit the windscreen valence cross-member in the
relative seats on the shock towers.
8
Copyright © 2010
9. Fit the underwindscreen rib against the windscreen

valence cross-member. 10
10. Tack the underwindscreen rib to both the windscreen
valence cross-member and the underwindscreen 10
covering.
10

NOTE!
11. Fasten the windscreen valence cross-member to
the shock towers using 3x2 structural rivets (Ø 6.4).
11
Copyright © 2010
12. Weld the windscreen valence cross-member to the

two front shock towers at the original weld points.
12
13. Weld the underwindscreen rib to the underwindscreen

covering at the original weld points.
13
Copyright © 2010
14. Weld the underwindscreen rib to the front firewall at

14

front firewall at the original weld points.
15
Copyright © 2010

underwindscreen rib at the original weld points.

16
17. Reapply the beads of mastic sealant removed

previously.
Danger!
17
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
18. Refit the roof skin (see chapter 3.1).

Copyright © 2010
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle flank
procedures relative hinges)
ಶ Remove the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)
Replacement parts • Complete vehicle flank (A)

• Rear diagonal brace (B)

• 1 x M6 nut
B
• 5 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0 p/n 81126700)
A
• Expanded foam
Copyright © 2010

1. Using the AVDEL gun with the 45 mm C frame,
remove the rivets from the front pillar.
NOTE!
1
1
1

remove the rivets from the door surround (lower
area) in correspondence with the sill.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010

remove the rivets in correspondence with the lower
rear bumper reinforcement and the lateral crash
reinforcement.
NOTE!
4. Sand the underdoor weld points on the sill tubular

element and on the A-pillar flange.
Caution!
Check that the front sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling.
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see
chapter 3.5).
Caution!
Take care not to damage the sill tubular 4
element.
4
Copyright © 2010
5. Remove the beads of mastic and foam from the

upper flank connector cross-members.
Danger!
safety glasses. 5
6. Sand the weld points on the upper flank connector

cross-members.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the upper flank
connector cross-members.
6
6
Copyright © 2010

remove the rivets from the upper cross-members.
NOTE! 7
7
Retrieve all the rivets, using a magnet if 7
8. Remove the internal and external beads of mastic in

the area surrounding the air intake and the rear screen
8
(interior/exterior of passenger compartment).
Danger!
safety glasses.
8
Copyright © 2010
9. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the M6 nut fastening

the vehicle flank to the rear screen bulkhead
substructure.
10. Sand the welds joining the vehicle flank with the rear
screen bulkhead substructure.
NOTE!
Take care not to remove any other material from
the rear screen bulkhead substructure. 10
Copyright © 2010
11. Sand the four weld spots joining the vehicle flank
and the rear screen bulkhead.
11
11
12. Remove the beads of sealant mastic in

correspondence with the front sill pillar.
Danger!
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
13. Sand the weld beads joining the vehicle flank with
the upper casting of the front sill pillar.
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die-
cast joints. 13
Check that the front sill pillar die-cast joints are
free from cracks.
chapter 3.5).
14. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 2 M8 screws

from the front pillar (interior of vehicle).
NOTE!
When removing the screws, take the utmost
care not to let them fall into the front door pillar.
14
Copyright © 2010
15. Remove the 4 self-piercing rivets in the inner area of

the rear lid in correspondence with the two brackets
fastened to the rear trellis.
15 15
NOTE!
16. Remove the rear diagonal brace, sanding the weld

points at the ends.
Caution!
Check that the rear sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling. 16
16
chapter 3.5).
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the rear
sill pillar and from the casting for the rear shock
tower.
Copyright © 2010
17. Remove the 2 fastener rivets joining the vehicle

flank and the rear flank connector cross-member.
NOTE!
17

correspondence with the rear sill pillar and the rear
screen bulkhead (rear lid area).
Danger!
safety glasses.
18
Copyright © 2010
19. Sand any joint weld beads between the vehicle flank
and the upper casting of the rear sill pillar (rear lid
area).
Caution!
cast joints.
Check that the rear sill pillar die-cast joints are

free from cracks.
chapter 3.5).
19
20. Using the AVDEL FPM-35 gun, remove the 5 self-

piercing rivets joining the vehicle flank with the rear
trellis.
NOTE!
20
Copyright © 2010
21. Remove the 4 self-piercing rivets joining the vehicle

flank with the lateral reinforcement.
NOTE!
21
22. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 3 M8 fastener

screws joining the vehicle flank and the rear sill
pillar.
NOTE!
care not to let them fall into the front door pillar.
22
Copyright © 2010

correspondence with the rear sill pillar (interior of
Danger!
safety glasses.
23
24. Sand the joint weld beads between the vehicle flank
and the upper casting of the rear sill pillar (interior of
Caution!
cast joints.

free from cracks.
If any damage is noted, replace the sill (see 24
chapter 3.5).
Copyright © 2010
25. Check that the front fender mounting bracket is not

damaged.
If necessary, adjust the gap from the sill wall to
the exterior of the bracket to the correct value of
115 mm.
115 mm
26. Check that the rear fender mounting bracket is not

damaged.
If necessary, adjust the gap from the vertical wall
of the pillar reinforcement to the correct value of
115 mm.
115 mm
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 27. Fit the vehicle flank in its seat.
Warning!
This operation must be carried out with the
assistance of another worker, as the size of
the vehicle flank makes is difficult to position
correctly.
28. Fit the 2 M8 screws onto the front pillar.
Caution!
28
Copyright © 2010
29. Fit the 3 M8 screws onto the rear pillar.
Caution!
29
30. Fit the external tower and the relative jigs to ensure
that the vehicle flank is positioned correctly.
ಶ Fit the rear spoiler and fasten in position.

Remove the rear spoiler.
NOTE!
Check that the vehicle flank is correctly fitted
onto the upper reinforcement cross-members.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
31. Tighten the 5 M8 screws applied previously.
31
31
32. Fasten the vehicle flank to the rear screen bulkhead

substructure with an M6 nut.
Caution!
32
Copyright © 2010
33. Using the AVDEL FPM-35 gun, fasten the vehicle

flank to the front and rear trellises with 5 self-piercing
rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0 p/n 81126700).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
33
34. Fasten the vehicle flank to the rear flank

connector cross-member with 2 self-piercing rivets
(Ø 3.9x7.0).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
34
Copyright © 2010
35. Fasten the vehicle flank to the lateral reinforcement

with 4 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
35
36. Fasten the vehicle flank to the A-pillar with 22 self-

piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5).
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements must
only be fastened with high strength structural
rivets.
36
36
NOTE! 36
old rivet holes.
36
Copyright © 2010
37. Fasten the vehicle flank to the kickplate (lower

part of door surround) with 22 self-piercing rivets
(Ø 3.9x7.0).
Caution!
The high strength A-pillar reinforcements must
only be fastened with high strength structural
rivets.
NOTE!
old rivet holes. 37
38. Fasten the flank to the lower rear fender reinforcement

with 6 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0)
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
38
Copyright © 2010
NOTE!
Check that the vehicle flank is correctly fitted
onto the upper reinforcement cross-members.
39 39
39
39. Using the AVDEL gun with the 100 mm C-frame, fasten
the vehicle flank to the upper reinforcement cross-
members with 8x2 self-piercing rivets (Ø 4.8x7.5).
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
Rivet the passenger compartment interior side

first and then the passenger compartment
exterior side.
Caution!

cool.
40. Weld the vehicle flank to the sill tubular element and
to the A-pillar flange at the original weld points.
40
40
Copyright © 2010
41. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper casting of the

front sill pillar at the original weld points.
41
42. Insert the 4 self-piercing rivets (Ø 3.9x7.0) in the

inner area of the rear lid in correspondence with the
two brackets fastened to the rear trellis.
42 42
NOTE!
old rivet holes.
Copyright © 2010
43. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper casting of the rear
sill pillar at the original weld points (rear lid area).
43
44. Fasten the rear diagonal brace by welding the ends

44
44
Copyright © 2010
45. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper casting of the

rear sill pillar at the original weld points (passenger
compartment interior).
45
46. Weld the vehicle flank to the upper reinforcement

cross-members at the original weld points.
46 46
Copyright © 2010
47. Weld the vehicle flank to the rear screen bulkhead

with 4 spot welds.
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair 47

47
48. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic in the area

surrounding the air intake and the rear screen
48
(interior/exterior of passenger compartment).
Danger!
safety glasses.
48
Copyright © 2010
49. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic in

correspondence with the upper casting of the rear sill
pillar (interior/exterior of passenger compartment).
Danger!
safety glasses.
49
49
50. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic in

correspondence with the upper casting of the front
sill pillar.
Danger!
Danger of poisoning due to fume inhalation! Risk 50
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
51. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic on the upper

reinforcement cross-members.
Danger!
safety glasses. 51
53. Refit the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1)

Copyright © 2010
3.4 Replacing the lateral crash reinforcement
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
ಶ Remove the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
Replacement parts • Complete vehicle flank (A)

• Lateral crash reinforcement (B)
Material necessary • 5 x M8 screws.

B
Copyright © 2010

1. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 5 M8 fastener 1
screws joining the lateral crash reinforcement, the
rear sill pillar and the extruded elements (A).
NOTE!
A
care not to let them fall into the rear door pillar. 1
Fitting the new part 2. Fit the rear tower and mount the lateral crash
reinforcement in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 3. Fasten the lateral crash reinforcement to the rear
sill pillar and to the extruded elements (A) with 5 M8
3
screws.
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously. A
3
4. Refit the vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3).
NOTE!
Carry out final adjustment of the lateral crash
reinforcement only after refitting the vehicle
flank.
Copyright © 2010

Copyright © 2010
3.5 Replacing the sill
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, windows, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges,
procedures rear lid and relative hinges, doors)
ಶ Remove the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)
ಶ Remove the underwindscreen covering (see chapter 2.6 Replacing the shock tower)
ಶ Remove the lateral crash reinforcement (see chapter 3.4)
ಶ Remove the rear firewall and mountings (see chapter 3.6)
Replacement parts • Sill (A)
E K
• A-pillar flange (B)
• Wheel bay cover plate (C)
C
• Torque box (only if necessary) (D)
F G
• Upper diagonal brace (only if necessary) (E)
• Front covering (F)
• Rear covering (G)
• Internal pillar bracing (H) J
• External pillar bracing (I)

• Front flank mounting bracket (J)
I
D B A H
• Lateral firewall mounting (K)
Copyright © 2010
Material necessary • 9 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x9.0)

• 31 structural rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2)

1. Remove the wheel bay cover plate (see
chapter 2.7).
1
Copyright © 2010
2. Cut the sill near the weld beads joining to the torque
box, the upper diagonal brace, the fuel tank cross-
member and the semi-floorpan.
2
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution to prevent damaging
the internal diagonal braces connected to the
centre tunnel, the upper diagonal brace and the
2 2
torque box.
2
3. Remove the structural fastener rivets joining the sill

and the semi-floorpan.
NOTE!
noise when the vehicle is in use. 3 3
Copyright © 2010
4. Sand the joint weld beads between the sill, the semi-
floorpan and the diagonal braces connecting to the
centre tunnel.
NOTE!
diagonal braces connecting to the centre tunnel. 4 4

correspondence with the 3 structural fastener rivets
joining the front sill pillar and the torque box.
Danger!
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010

front sill pillar and the torque box (interior/exterior of
NOTE!
6
7. Sand the joint weld beads between the front sill pillar
and the torque box.
NOTE!
torque box.
Copyright © 2010
8. Sand the joint weld beads between the sill and the
reinforcement (A).
NOTE!
torque box/centre tunnel reinforcement and
from the torque box.
A
8
9. Remove the beads of sealant mastic in correspondence

with the weld beads in the underbody between the
sill, the torque box and the reinforcement (A).
Danger!
of injury from skin or eye contact with adhesive! A
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
10. Sand the joint weld beads in the underbody between

the sill, the torque box and the reinforcement (A).
NOTE!
reinforcement (A) and from the torque box.
A
10
11. Sand the internal and external joint weld beads

between the sill and the upper diagonal brace.
NOTE!
diagonal brace.
11
11
Copyright © 2010
12. Remove the structural fastener rivets joining the sill

and the internal B-pillar bracing.
NOTE!
12
13. Sand the joint spot welds between the sill and the
internal B-pillar bracing.
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the sill
connector cross-member.
13
Copyright © 2010
14. Gradually sand the joint weld beads between the sill
connector cross-member and the sill itself.
NOTE!
NOTE! 14
The facilitate the operation described above,
remove the external bracing.
15. Gradually sand the joint weld beads between the

fuel tank cross-member and the upper sill casting.
15
NOTE!
Do not remove any other material from the fuel
tank cross-member. 15
Copyright © 2010
16. Remove the 8 structural fastener rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2)

in the underbody joining the sill, the lower extruded
element (C) and the sill connector cross-member.
NOTE! C
16 16
16 16
17. Sand the joint weld beads in the underbody between

the sill, the lower extruded element (C) and the sill
Caution!
Work with the utmost caution to prevent
damaging the lower extruded element (C).
17
NOTE!
connector cross-member. C 17
17 17
Copyright © 2010
18. Sand the remaining weld beads in the underbody to

facilitate removal of the sill.
18
Fitting the new part 19. Fit the external tower, the mount the sill in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
NOTE!
Check that the two castings of the A-pillar are
fitted correctly into the torque box and the upper
diagonal brace.
Check that the semi-floorpan is fitted correctly.

NOTE!
20
20. Tack the sill to the torque box and to the upper 20
diagonal brace.
20
Copyright © 2010
21. Tack the sill to the sill connector cross-member

and to the fuel tank cross-member (vehicle interior/ 21
exterior).
Caution! 21
This operation must only be performed with the

two cross-members mounted in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the upper casting of the B-pillar is 21
fitted correctly into the fuel tank cross-member.
21 21
22. Tack the sill to the internal diagonal braces connecting

to the centre tunnel.
NOTE!
Check again that the semi-floorpan is fitted
correctly.
22 22
Copyright © 2010
23. Weld the front sill pillar to the torque box at the
original weld points (interior/exterior of passenger
compartment).
23
23
24. Fasten the front sill pillar and the torque box (interior/
exterior of passenger compartment) with 6 structural
rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
24
24
Copyright © 2010
25. Weld the sill to the torque box and to the reinforcement
(A) at the original weld points in the underbody.
25
26. Weld the rear sill pillar to the fuel tank cross-member
26
26
Copyright © 2010
27. Weld the sill to the upper diagonal brace at the

original interior and exterior weld points.
27
27
28. Weld the sill to the reinforcement (A) at the original

weld points.
28
Copyright © 2010
29. Weld the sill tubular element to the semi-floorpan

and to the diagonal braces connecting to the centre
tunnel at the original weld points.
29 29
30. Fasten the semi-floorpan to the sill tubular element,

starting at the bottom and working upward, with
9 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x9.0).
NOTE!
When reinstalling the electrical system, apply a
protective pad to prevent contact between the 30 30
cables and any protruding rivets.
Copyright © 2010
31. Weld the sill to the sill connector cross-member

(vehicle interior/exterior) at the original weld points.

area.
Caution!
31
Remove the jigs retaining the sill only after the
welds have cooled.
31
32. Mount the lower extruded element (C) in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
33. Weld the lower extruded element (C) to the sill and
to the sill connector cross-member at the original
weld points.
33
C 33
33 33
34. Fasten the lower extruded element (C) to the sill and
to the sill connector cross-member with 8 structural
rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
34 34
34 34
Copyright © 2010
35. Fit the external bracing and weld to the sill.
ಶ Reapply corrosion inhibitor to the new weld beads.
35
36. Fit the internal bracing and weld to the sill.
36
Copyright © 2010
37. Fasten the internal and external bracing to the sill

with 17 structural rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
37
37
37
38. Fit the front covering, with the two holes (D) on the
covering itself aligned with the two threaded holes in
the front sill pillar.
D
Copyright © 2010
39. Weld the front covering to the sill in correspondence

with the holes in the covering itself.
ಶ Reapply corrosion inhibitor to the weld beads between

the two bracings. 39
39
40. Fit the rear covering, bringing it up against the rear

sill pillar.
NOTE!
Check that the rear covering is flush with the
front covering fitted previously.
Copyright © 2010
41. Weld the rear covering to the sill in correspondence

with the holes in the covering itself.
41
41
42. Fit the front flank mounting bracket as shown in the

diagram aside.
32 mm
129.5 mm
26 mm
11 mm
Copyright © 2010
43. Weld the front flank mounting bracket to the sill and
to the external bracing.
43
44. Fit the A-pillar flange against the front sill pillar,
with the notch in the flange over the lower sill pillar
weld.
Copyright © 2010
45. Weld the A-pillar flange to the sill and to the extruded
hinge mounts (E) on the sill.

45 E
46. Reapply the beads of mastic sealant removed

previously.
Danger!
safety glasses.
46
46
Copyright © 2010
47. Refit the wheel bay cover plate (see chapter 2.7)
48. Refit the subframe connector extruded element (see chapter 3.8)
49. Refit the rear shock tower casting (see chapter 3.9)
50. Refit the rear firewall and mountings (see chapter 3.6)
51. Refit the front/rear lateral trellises (see chapter 3.10)
52. Refit the lateral crash reinforcement (see chapter 3.4)
53. Refit the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.3)
56. Refit the underwindscreen covering (see chapter 2.6 Replacing the shock tower)
57. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop manual)

Copyright © 2010
3.6 Replacing the rear firewall and mountings
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, windows, lateral seals, rear lid and relative hinges, doors)
procedures
Replacement parts • Rear firewall (A)

C
• RH lateral firewall mounting (B)
• LH lateral firewall mounting (C)

• 36 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x10.0)
• 6 threaded M6x21.5 rivets
A
B
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the beads of mastic sealant on the upper
portion of the rear firewall (passenger compartment
interior). 1
Danger!
safety glasses.
2. Remove the beads of sealant mastic on the perimeter

of the rear firewall (engine area).
Danger!
safety glasses.
Copyright © 2010
3. Use a hex headed wrench (Ø 4.0) to remove the 16

M6 fastener screws joining the firewall and the rear
bulkhead.
3 3
4. Remove the threaded fastener rivets (M6x21.5)

joining the rear firewall and the fuel tank cross-
member.
NOTE! 4
Copyright © 2010
5. Remove the structural rivets fastening the rear

firewall (engine area).
NOTE!
5 5
6. Remove the structural fastener rivets joining the

firewall, the fuel tank cross-member and the sill
6 6
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
7. Remove the structural fastener rivets joining the

firewall and the relative mountings.
NOTE!
7
7
8. Sand the joint weld beads between the RH and LH

firewall mountings and the rear sill pillars.
Caution!
Check that the rear sill pillar casting joints are
free from cracks or buckling.
chapter 3.5).
8
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 9. Fit the RH and LH firewall mountings up against the
sill tubular elements and tack in position.
10. Fit the rear firewall in the seat, bringing it up against

the relative mountings.
NOTE!
Fit the rear firewall from the passenger
compartment interior side to facilitate
installation of the new part.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
11. Fasten the firewall to the sill connector cross-

member with 16 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x10.0).
11
12. Fasten the back of the firewall (engine area) with 10

structural rivets (Ø 4.8x10.0).
12 12
Copyright © 2010
13. Weld the RH and LH firewall mountings to the rear

sill pillars at the original weld points.
13
13
14. Fasten the firewall to the relative RH and LH

mountings with 2 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x10.0).
14
14
Copyright © 2010
15. Fasten the firewall to the fuel tank cross-member

with 8 structural rivets (Ø 4.8x10.0).
15 15
16. Fasten the firewall to the centre of the fuel tank

cross-member with 6 threaded rivets (M6x21.5).
16
Copyright © 2010
17. Fasten the rear bulkhead to the firewall with 16 M6

screws.
Caution! 17
ಶ Reapply corrosion inhibitor to the welds on the RH

17 17
and LH firewall mountings and apply a coat of primer
to the repair areas.
17
18. Reapply the beads of mastic sealant on the upper

portion of the rear firewall (passenger compartment
interior).
18
Danger!
safety glasses.
18
Copyright © 2010
19. Reapply the beads of sealant mastic on the perimeter

of the rear firewall (engine area).
Danger!
safety glasses.
19
20. Refit the rear end module (see F458 Italia workshop
manual)

Copyright © 2010
3.7 Replacing the fuel tank cross-member
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (interior trim, rear screen, lateral seals, rear lid and relative hinges)
procedures
ಶ Remove the rear firewall (see chapter 3.6)
ಶ Remove the lateral firewall mountings (see chapter 3.6)
Replacement parts • Fuel tank cross-member (A)

A
• Rear screen bulkhead substructure (B)
• Rear firewall (C) B
• Lateral firewall mountings (D)
D
C D
Copyright © 2010

1. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 8 screws 1
fastening the mountings (A) to the fuel tank cross-
member.
2. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 8 screws

fastening the internal tubular elements.
2 2
Copyright © 2010
3. Cut the fuel tank cross-member near the die-cast

joints on the rear sill pillars.
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die- 3
cast joints.

free from cracks.
chapter 3.5).
4. Gradually grind the weld beads between the fuel

tank cross-member and the casting joints on the
rear sill pillars. 4
Caution!
4
cast joints.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 5. Mount the fuel tank cross-member in the jig.

NOTE!
6. Tack the fuel tank cross-member to the casting joints
6
on the rear sill pillars.
NOTE!
Check that the fuel tank cross-member is
perfectly horizontal.
Copyright © 2010
7. Weld the fuel tank cross-member to the casting

joints on the rear sill pillars.
7
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the fuel tank cross- 7
member only after the welds have cooled.
8. Fasten the mountings (A) to the fuel tank cross-

member with 8 M8 screws.
8
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
9. Fasten the internal tubular elements removed

previously with 8 M8 screws.
Caution!
9 9
10. Refit the lateral firewall mountings (see

chapter 3.6).
11. Refit the rear firewall (see chapter 3.6).
12. Refit the rear end module (F458 Italia workshop

manual).

Copyright © 2010
3.8 Replacing the subframe connector extruded section
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, rear lid and relative hinges, lights, bumper and rear grilles)
procedures
ಶ Remove the lateral crash reinforcement (see chapter 3.4)
ಶ Remove the front/rear lateral trellises (see chapter 3.10)
Replacement parts • Subframe connector extruded element (A)

LH RH
• Lateral crash reinforcement tubular element (B)
• Rear mounting bracket for rear flank (C) E
D
• Rear pillar reinforcement (D)
D
• Suspension casting reinforcement (E) E
Material necessary - A
C
B
C
B A
Copyright © 2010

1. Cut the lateral crash reinforcement tubular element,
the rear pillar reinforcement and the suspension
casting reinforcement in the area next to the weld
beads.
Caution!
1
joints on the rear sill pillar.
2. Grind the joint weld beads between the lateral

crash reinforcement tubular element, the rear
pillar reinforcement and the suspension casting
reinforcement.
NOTE!
E
Do not remove any other material from the rear 2
sill pillar (D) and the upper external diagonal
brace (E).
D
2
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 3. Mount the subframe connector extruded element in
the jig.

NOTE!
4. Fit the lateral crash reinforcement tubular element in

the relative seat on the sill and tack.
4
Copyright © 2010
5. Fit the rear pillar reinforcement in the relative seats

on the lateral crash reinforcement tubular element
and the subframe connector extruded element and
tack.
5
5
6. Check that the part is correctly positioned then weld

the lateral crash reinforcement tubular element to
the sill and to the subframe connector extruded
element at the original weld points.
6
Copyright © 2010
7. Weld the rear pillar reinforcement to the sill and to

the lateral crash reinforcement at the original weld
points.

area. 7
7
8. Fit the suspension casting reinforcement in the

seat between the two extruded elements fitted
previously.
Tack the suspension casting reinforcement at the
ends.
8 8
Copyright © 2010
9. Weld the suspension casting reinforcement to the

subframe connector extruded element and to the
upper external diagonal brace at the original weld
points.
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the subframe connector
extruded element only after the welds have
cooled. 9
ಶ Apply new corrosion inhibitor to the entire repair 9

area.
10. Fit the external tower then mount the flank mounting
bracket (A) in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the distance between the outer edge
of the bracket (A) and the sill wall is 115 mm.
A
115 mm
Copyright © 2010
11. Weld the rear bracket (A) to the subframe connector

extruded element and to the two extruded elements
fitted previously. A
11
11
12. Refit the front/rear lateral trellises (see

chapter 3.10)
13. Refit the lateral crash reinforcement (see

chapter 3.4)
manual)
Copyright © 2010

Copyright © 2010
3.9 Replacing casting for rear shock tower
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (complete interior, rear lid and relative hinges, lights, bumper and rear grilles)
procedures
ಶ Remove the front/rear lateral trellises (see chapter 3.10)
Replacement parts • Casting for rear shock tower (A)

• Front/rear lateral trellises (B) A
• Upper external diagonal brace (C)

B
Copyright © 2010

1. Cut the upper external diagonal brace near the weld
beads with the die-cast sill joint.
Caution!
1
When making separating cuts, take the utmost
care not to damage the casting joints.
Check the location of any internal cross-

member reinforcement on the new part in order
to cut correctly.

upper external diagonal brace and the die-cast sill
joint.
NOTE!
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the sections of joint weld between the upper

external diagonal brace and the suspension casting
reinforcement.
NOTE!
upper external diagonal brace.
4. Use a 13 mm wrench to remove the 4 M8 screws

fastening the internal tubular element.
4 4
Copyright © 2010
5. Grind the joint weld beads between the upper

external diagonal brace and the die-cast sill joint.
Caution!
Take the utmost care not to damage the die- 5 5
cast sill joint.
If the event of damage, the sill must be replaced

(see chapter 3.5).
6. Grind all the weld beads sanded previously.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 7. Mount the casting for the rear shock tower in the
jig.

NOTE!
8 8
8. Fasten the casting for the rear shock tower to the
shock tower itself with 3 M12 screws.
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
9. Fit the upper external diagonal brace against the

relative seat on the die-cast rear sill pillar joint and
tack in position.
Check that the upper external diagonal brace is

correctly positioned. 9
10. Fasten the upper external diagonal brace to the die-

cast sill joint with 2 structural rivets (Ø 6.4x19.2).
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Weld the upper external diagonal brace to the die-

cast sill joint at the original weld points.
11 11
12. Weld the upper external diagonal brace to the casting

for the rear shock tower at the original weld points.
Caution!
Remove the jig retaining the casting for the rear
shock tower only after the welds have cooled.
12
Copyright © 2010
13. Refit the front/rear lateral trellises (see

chapter 3.10)
manual)

Copyright © 2010
3.10 Replacing the rear lateral trellis
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (dashboard, interior trim, windows, doors, lateral seals, front lid and relative hinges, rear lid and
Replacement parts • Rear lateral trellis (A)

• Angle piece for flank mounting bracket (B) A
• Central substructure mounting bracket (C)
• Central substructure mounting bracket (D)
C B
Material necessary • 1 x M8 screw
• 2 x M6 screws
A D
Copyright © 2010
NOTE!
The following procedures may be performed both
with the rear end module installed or removed.
1. Sand the weld points on the rear trellis.

1
NOTE!
trellis.
2. Sand the weld points between the connecting

brackets and the rear trellis.
NOTE!
connecting brackets.
Copyright © 2010
NOTE!
When working with the rear subframe module
installed, remove the M8 screw (A) and the 2
M6 screws (B) fastening the lateral trellis to the
rear subframe.
3. Sand the weld points between the connecting

brackets and the rear pillar reinforcement.
NOTE!
connecting brackets.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the lateral trellis in the jig.
ಶ Prepare the weld area (see chapter 1.14)
5. Fit the trellis connector in the relative seats on the

rear pillar reinforcement.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
6. Weld the lateral trellis at all the original weld points.
7. Position the bracket (C) (p/n 81649700 RH / p/n

81649800 LH) 90 mm from the edge of the extruded C
section (D).
90 mm
Copyright © 2010
8. Fasten the bracket (C) to the extruded section (D)

with four 15 mm lengths of weld. C
9. Fit the rear bracket (E) (p/n 81583200 RH /

p/n 81583300 LH), centring with the seat on the
bushing (F).
E
F
Copyright © 2010
10. Fasten the rear bracket (E) to the extruded section

(D) with four 20 mm lengths of weld.
10
11. Mount the bracket (G) (p/n 81952000) in the jig.
NOTE! G
installed on the vehicle, use the module itself as
a template for correctly fitting the bracket (G).
Copyright © 2010
12. Fasten the bracket (G) to the front trellis with two
30 mm lengths of weld and two 10 mm lengths of G
weld.
12
13. Fit the bracket (H) (p/n 81582600 RH / p/n 81582700

LH) on the rear trellis, holding the bracket with the
inner side flush and at a distance of 5 mm from the 5 mm
front end of the extruded section (I).
H I
Copyright © 2010
14. Fasten the bracket (H) to the extruded section (I)

with four 15 mm lengths of weld.
H
14
NOTE!
installed, fasten the lateral trellis to the rear
subframe with 1 M8 screw (A) and 2 M6
screws (B).
Caution!
A
Copyright © 2010
15. Refit the complete vehicle flank (see chapter 3.5).

Copyright © 2010
4.1 Replacing the rear spoiler
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (rear bumper, taillights,

procedures grilles and, if necessary, rear lid)
Replacement parts • Rear spoiler (A)

• Rear bumper mounting cross-member (B) A
Material necessary • 2 M6x18 screws

• 5 M6 nuts
Copyright © 2010

1. Sand the joint weld beads between the rear spoiler
and the vehicle flanks.
NOTE! 1
vehicle flanks.
2. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the 2 M6x18

fastener screws joining the spoiler and the rear
2
bumper mounting cross-member.
Copyright © 2010
3. Use a 10 mm wrench to remove the 5 M6 fastener

nuts joining the spoiler, the rear bumper mounting 3 3 3
cross-member and the mounting bracket.
4. Clean any welding and filler residue.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 5. Fit the spoiler in correspondence with the holes in
the rear bumper mounting cross-member and the
vehicle flanks.

NOTE!
6
6. Fasten the spoiler to the rear bumper mounting

cross-member with the 2 M6x18 screws.
Caution!
Copyright © 2010
7. Apply and tighten the 5 M8 nuts removed previously.

7 7 7
Caution!
Do not reuse the nuts removed previously.

ಶ Check clearances on the rear lid and rectify if
necessary.
Remove the connected parts for subsequent painting.
Copyright © 2010
8. Weld the rear spoiler to the vehicle flanks at the


Copyright © 2010
4.2 Replacing the rear bumper mounting cross-member
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, taillights, grilles)

procedures
Replacement parts • Rear bumper mounting cross-member (A)
Copyright © 2010

1. Roughly cut out the rear cross-member.
1 1
2. Sand the joint weld beads between the cross-

member and the rear spars.
NOTE!
spars.
2
Copyright © 2010
3. Grind the welds on the rear spars.
Caution!
Check that the rear spars are undamaged.
In the event of damage, the spars must be
3
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear cross-member in the jig.
NOTE!
Check that the cross-member is flush with the
rear spars.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
5. Tack and then weld the rear cross-member to the

spars. 5
Caution!
cool.

ಶ Refit the connected parts (taillights, grilles, rear
bumper).
ಶ Check clearances on the rear lid and rectify if
necessary.
Copyright © 2010
4.3 Replacing the rear spar

procedures
ಶ Remove the rear upper trellis (see chapter 4.4)
ಶ Remove the flank mounting bracket (see
chapter 4.5)
ಶ Remove the rear cross-member (see chapter 4.2)
Replacement parts • RH rear spar (A)

• LH rear spar (B)
A B
Copyright © 2010

1. Roughly cut out the rear spar.
2. Sand the joint weld beads between the spar and the
rear shock tower.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the die-cast joints.
2
Copyright © 2010
3. Grind the welds on the rear shock tower.
Caution! 3
Check that there are no cracks in the rear shock
tower.
In the event of damage, the entire rear end
3
module must be replaced.
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear spar in the jig, bringing it against the
relative seat on the shock tower.
NOTE!
Check that the spar is perfectly horizontal.
4
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
5. Tack and then weld the rear spar to the shock

tower. 5
Caution!
Remove the jig only once the weld areas are 5
cool.

6. Refit the rear cross-member (see chapter 4.2)
7. Refit the upper rear trellis (see chapter 4.4)
8. Refit the flank mounting bracket (see chapter 4.5)

Remove the connected parts for subsequent painting.
Copyright © 2010
4.4 Replacing the rear upper trellis

procedures
Replacement parts • Rear upper trellis (A)

• 2 rear upper trellis support bases (B)
• 2 rear upper trellis connector brackets
B A B
Copyright © 2010

1. Cut the 2 support bases near the rear spars.
2. Cut the two connector brackets near the weld beads

on the rear bumper mounting brackets.
Copyright © 2010
3. Grind all the welds in the vicinity of the cuts made

previously.
NOTE!
spars.
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the rear upper trellis in the jig.
Copyright © 2010
5. Fit the rear spoiler, the rear bumper, the grilles and
the taillights.

Remove the rear spoiler, the rear bumper, the grilles
and the taillights.

NOTE!
6. Tack the 2 support bases to the rear spars.
Copyright © 2010
7. Tack the rear upper trellis to the two support bases.
8. Tack the two rear upper trellis connecting

brackets (A).
Copyright © 2010
9. Weld the support bases to the spars at the original

weld points.
10. Weld the rear upper trellis to the support bases.
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Weld the connector brackets (A) joining the rear

upper trellis and the rear bumper mounting brackets
at the original welds.

11
12. Refit the rear spoiler (see chapter 4.1).

Copyright © 2010
4.5 Replacing the flank mounting bracket
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (bumper, rear grilles)

procedures
Replacement parts • Flank mounting bracket (A)

• Rear upper trellis connector bracket A
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the 3 M6 fastener screws joining the flank
mounting bracket, the rear lateral trellis and the rear
spar.
2. Sand the joint weld points between the connector

bracket, the rear upper trellis and the rear spar.
NOTE!
spars. 2
2 2
Copyright © 2010
3. Sand the joint weld beads between the flank

mounting bracket and the rear spar.
NOTE!
spars.
3 3
4. Grind all the welds sanded previously.
NOTE!
spar.
Copyright © 2010

NOTE!
Before carrying out the following operation,
mount the rear lateral trellis in the jig and ensure
that it is correctly positioned.
If the trellis appears particularly damaged,

replace the trellis itself (see chapter 3.7).
5. Fit the flank mounting bracket, using the two holes in

the rear lateral trellis as reference.

5

NOTE!
6. Fasten the M6 screw in the hole on the rear spar.
Caution!
6
Copyright © 2010
7. Fasten the 2 M6 screws in the two holes in the rear

lateral spar.
Caution!
8. Tack the flank mounting bracket to the rear spar.
8 8
Copyright © 2010
9. Fit the connector bracket (A) and tack in position.
ಶ Check that the assembly is correctly positioned and

adjust if necessary.
10. Weld the flank mounting bracket to the rear spar at

Caution!
When welding the flank mounting bracket, there
is a risk of the spar (B) buckling as a result of B
the heat.
To prevent this, the bracket must only be welded

with the rear cross-member mounted in the jig 10 10
(see chapter 4.2).
10
Copyright © 2010
11. Weld the flank mounting bracket to the rear upper

trellis at the original weld points.
11
12. Weld the connector bracket (A) at the original weld

points.

12
12
Copyright © 2010

Copyright © 2010
4.6 Replacing the upper trellis mounting bracket
Preliminary ಶ Remove connected parts (rear lid)

procedures
Replacement parts • Upper trellis mounting bracket (A)
Material necessary • 1 x M8 screw
Copyright © 2010

1. Remove the M8 fastener screw joining the bracket
(A) and the extruded element (B).
A 1
2. Sand the weld beads between the trellis mounting

bracket and the respective support base on the rear
shock tower.
Caution!
Take care not to damage the rear shock tower.
3. Grind the sanded weld points.
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part 4. Mount the upper trellis mounting bracket in the jig,
centring with the bushing (A). A

NOTE!
5. Fasten the bracket (A) to the extruded element (B)

with the M8 screw.
B
Caution!
Do not reuse the screws removed previously. A 5
Copyright © 2010
6. Weld the upper trellis mounting bracket to the

respective support base at the original weld points.


Copyright © 2010
4.7 Finishing the rear end module
Preliminary ಶ Place the rear end module on the vehicle bench using
procedures the specific jigs.
Replacement parts • Rear upper trellis (A)

• 2 rear upper trellis support bases (B) A
• RH and LH flank mounting brackets (C)

• RH and LH upper trellis mounting brackets (D)
Material necessary • 1x2 M6 screws C
Copyright © 2010
Fitting the new part Flank mounting brackets

1. Mount the flank mounting brackets in the jig (see
chapter 4.5.5).
2. Fasten the flank mounting brackets to the rear spars

with 1x2 M6 screws.
Caution!
Do not reuse screws removed previously.
Copyright © 2010
NOTE!
Check that the flank mounting brackets are
flush with the spars.
3. Weld the flank mounting brackets to the rear spars.
2 2
2
Fitting the new part Rear upper trellis

4. Mount the rear upper trellis in the jig (see
chapter 4.4.4).
Copyright © 2010
5. Weld the 2 support bases to the rear spars using the

weld points on the original part as reference.
6. Weld the rear upper trellis to the two support

bases.
NOTE!
Check that the trellis is perfectly horizontal.
Copyright © 2010
7. Weld the connector brackets (A) between the rear

upper trellis and the flank mounting brackets.
Fitting the new part Upper trellis mounting brackets

8. Mount the upper trellis mounting brackets in the jig
(see chapter 4.6.4).
Copyright © 2010
9. Fit the upper trellis mountings onto the respective

support bases by interference, as shown in the
figure.
10. Weld the upper trellis mounting brackets to the

respective support bases on both the internal and
external sides of the bases.
7 7
Copyright © 2010

Copyright © 2010
1 Standard times for front body shell
Activity Standard times in hours

2.1 Replacing the wings 0.6 hours
2.2 Replacing the fender mounting 3.5 hours
2.3 Replacing the front lateral trellis 3.9 hours
2.4 Replacing the front cross-member 4.8 hours
2.5 Replacing the front spar 4.9 hours
2.6 Replacing the wheel bay cover plate 2.4 hours
2.7 Replacing the shock tower 13.8 hours
2.8 Replacing the front end module 32 hours
Copyright © 2010
2 Standard times for central body shell
CONTENTS

3.1 Replacing the roof skin 8.2 hours
3.2 Replacing the underwindscreen rib and the windscreen valence cross-member 5.1 hours
3.3 Replacing the complete vehicle side 24.2 hours
3.4 Replacing the lateral crash reinforcement 0.7 hours
3.5 Replacing the sill 46.5 hours
3.6 Replacing the rear firewall and mountings 4.9 hours
3.7 Replacing the fuel tank cross-member 6.7 hours
3.8 Replacing the subframe connector extruded section 7.5 hours
3.9 Replacing casting for rear shock tower 5.5 hours
3.10 Replacing the rear lateral trellis 2.2 hours
Copyright © 2010
3 Standard times for rear body shell

4.1 Replacing the rear spoiler 2.8 hours
4.2 Replacing the rear cross-member 3.9 hours
4.3 Replacing the rear spar 4.1 hours
4.4 Replacing the rear upper trellis 3.2 hours
4.5 Replacing the flank mounting bracket 1.5 hours
4.6 Replacing the upper trellis mounting bracket 0.8 hours
4.7 Finishing the rear end module 5.2 hours
4.8 Replacing the rear subframe see F458 Italia workshop manual
Copyright © 2010
Star sdt - Specific equipment Page 1 of 70
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Foto Code Description California FF GTB
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessanta
Fiorano
Adapter
(900027010)
900027010
for tool AV
26300.
Adaptor
95973537
(AV 3537)
AV 3537 valve seat X
guide
installer
punch.
Adaptor
95973604
(AV 3604)
for angular
AV 3604
engine
timing
reference
tool.
Adaptor
95973606
(AV 3606)
for trolley
(900026230)
for
AV 3606 X X X
transporting
and
handling
engine-
gearbox
assembly.
Blocks
95976156
(AV 6156)
AV 6156
for adjusting
the exhaust
system.
Bore gauge
ALZF
(ALZF
04702
04702)
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=as 8/4/2011
for checking
big end
diameter.
599
SA 458 599 612 61
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sess
Fiorano
Bushing (AV
3350)
for upper
AV 3350 pump
assembly
fastener
screws.
Calibre (ALZF
09206)
92 mm
ALZF 09206 X
diameter for
cylinder
sleeves.
Calibre
(TLDF006108)
TLDF006108 for checking
valve guide
wear.
Extractor
95972714_1
AV 2714 (AV 2714) X X X
front crankcase
cover.
Extractor
95972734 (AV
AV 2734 2734) X X X
oil seal for
valve.
False cylinder
sleeve (AV
3335)
AV 3335
for fitting
pistons into
crankcase.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sessant
Fiorano
Feeler gauge
(CS 107155)
for measuring
CS 107155
axial
connecting
rod endfloat.
Goniometer
95975784_2
AM 105784 (AM 105784) X
for setting
engine timing
Go/no-go
gauge
TLDF02060 95972060
(TLDF02060)
for small end.
Handle
900026300 (900026300) X
punches.
Index
95973430
(AV 3430)
AV 3430
timing
reference
marker.
Insertion tool
95972944
(AV 2944)
AV 2944
for fitting seal
ring onto
valve guide.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Pressure
95971243 gauge
( 95971243)
Punch
(900026550)
for installing
900026550 X
crankshaft
bearing,
clutch side.
Punch
(900026590)
for
900026590 mounting oil X
seal on front
crankcase
cover.
Punch
(900027000)
for
mounting
900027000 X
cylinder
head
alignment
dowel.
Punch
(900027050)
for
mounting
pump
900027050 assembly X
Corteco seal
ring on
lower
crankcase
shell.
Punch
(900027060)
for
900027060 X
mounting
Corteco seal
ring on
flywheel
side of
crankshaft.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Punch
95972178
(AS
AS 102178)
X X
102178 for installing
valve
guides, Ø 7
mm
Punch
95972692
(AV 2692)
AV 2692
for
extracting
valve guide.
Screw
95973435
(AV 3435)
AV 3435 goniometer X
connector
hub (AM
105784).
Screwdriver
95973002
(AV 3002)
AV 3002 X X X
for installing
piston pin
rings.
Sheet
95973608
(AV 3608)
for
AV 3608 X
protecting
intake
orifices in
heads.
Special
wrench
(900027020)
for installing
900027020
variable
valve timing
adjuster on
camshaft.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Supports
95973135 (AV
3135)
AV 3135 X X X
for checking
camshaft
(concentricity).
Tensiometer
(95978151)
95978151 X X X X X X X X
Seem
DIAPAZ.
Tool (AM
107064)
AM mounting for
107064 crankcase on
AV 2621
trolley.
Tool (AM
AM 107080)
107080 for supporting
head.
Tool (AV
3311)
for fitting
AV 3311
gear/drive
chain
assembly.
Tool (AV
3333)
for mounting
cable grommet
AV 3333
clips for
variable valve
timing adjuster
solenoid valve.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool (AV
3843)
for
immobilising
AV 3843 camshafts,
with 30 mm
diam.
hexagonal
head.
Tool
(1870736000)
1870736000 for removing X X X X X
fuel pump
ring nut.
Tool
(900026610)
900026610 cylinder X
sleeve
extractor.
Tool
(900026970)
900026970 for cleaning
head
conduits.
Tool
(900027030)
900027030 for fitting
pump drive
shaft.
Tool
(900027040)
900027040 for fitting
pump unit
bearing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95970737
(AV 737)
AV
dial gauge X X
737
for
measuring
piston TDC.
Tool
95972916
(CS 102916)
CS cylinder
X X X
102916 sleeve
projection
measurement
dial gauge.
Tool
95972926
AV (AV 2926)
X X X
2926 for
extracting
valve guides.
Tool
95972955
(AV 2955)
AV
for checking X X
2955
the
connecting
rod.
Tool
95973122
AV (AV 3122)
X
3122 for
immobilising
crankshaft
Tool
95973603
AV (AV 3603)
X
3603 for
immobilising
camshafts
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95973605
(AV 3605)
for centring
and
AV
installing
3605
check valve
on right and
left hand
cylinder
banks.
Tool
95973607
(AV 3607)
for
AV immobilising
3607 crankshaft
for damper
installation
(with engine
in vehicle)
Tool
95973838
(AV 3838)
AV for manually
3838 checking
variable
valve timing
adjuster.
Tool
95973844
AV (AV 3844)
X X X
3844 for fitting
right hand
float valve.
Tool
95973845
AV (AV 3845)
X X X
3845 for fitting
left hand
float valve.
Tool
95974488
(CS 104488)
CS dial gauge
104488 for
measuring
piston
T.D.C.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95977231
(AM
AM
107231) X
107231
for installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Tools
95973602
(AV 3602)
AV 3602 X X X
for installing
water-oil
pump.
Torque
wrench end
F9x12/17
fitting
(F9x12/17)
Torque
wrench
95973305 FACOM
S.405DA
(95973305)
Torque
wrench
95978172
(AV 8172)
AV 8172 (Replaces X X X X X X X X
torque
wrench
USAG
815F)
Trolley
(900026230)
for
transporting
900026230 and X X X
handling
engine-
gearbox
assemblies
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Trolley
95972621
(AV 2621)
for
AV 2621 X X X X X
overhauling
engine-
gearbox
assemblies
Wrench
(AV 6038)
for
detaching
AV 6038
delivery
pipe from
pump to
steering box.
Wrench
USAGD156
(95971560)
95971560 X X X X X
for
tightening
oil filter.
Wrench
(900026990)
for variable
valve timing
900026990
adjuster
control
valve oil
filter.
Base
95973614
(AV 3614)
for
assembling
AV 3614
double
gearing and
bearings on
secondary
shaft.
Bearing
pusher
AV 3617
95973617
(AV 3617)
for
removing
tapered
roller
bearing on
cover side.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Centring
screws
95973251
AV
(AV 3251)
3251
for shaft-rod
cluster with
forks.
Extractor
95972714
AV (AV 2714)
X X X
2714 for the
differential
flange.
Extractor
95973045
AV (AV 3045)
X X X
3045 for the
differential
flange.
Extractor
95973272
(AV 3272)
AV for 3rd - 4th
3272 gear
synchroniser
on main
shaft.
Flange
95973244
(AV 3244)
gearbox
AV
housing seal
3244
for
measuring
rolling
torque.
Insert
95973837
AV
(AV 3837)
3837
Facom
D.27.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Pin
95973831
(AV 3831)
AV centring
3831 pin for
bevel gear
pair crown
installation.
Plate
95973536
AV (AV 3536)
3536 for
pressure
seal test.
Pliers
95973612
(AV 3612)
for crown
pinion
AV
clearance
3612
gauge
(used in
conjunction
with AV-
3266).
Polygonal
wrench
95973048
AV (AV 3048)
3048 hydraulic
clutch
control
stud bolt.
Punch
95973075
(AV 3075)
for driving
AV
flexible pin
3075
onto the
bearing
mounting
bushing
Punch
95973079
(AV 3079)
AV for centring
X X X
3079 the
complete
thrust
bearing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Punch
95973268
(AV 3268)
AV
for fitting
3268
the retainer
washer (Ø
14 mm).
Punch
95973270
(AV 3270)
AV
for fitting
3270
the retainer
washer (Ø
25 mm).
Ring nut
(AV 8066)
for
AV
removing X X X X X
8066
oil tank
cap with
F1 kit.
Stud bolt
95973611
(AV 3611)
AV
union for
3611
die-casting
gearbox
element.
Support
95973248
AV (AV 3248)
3248 for
gearbox
housing.
Templates
95978073
(AV 8073)
for
AV
locating
8073
the Power
Unit pipes
and
actuator
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool (AV
3375)
for replacing
AV
upper rubber
3375
bushing on
gearbox
housing.
Tool (AV
8065)
AV
for topping X X X X X
8065
up oil with
F1 kit.
Tool
95973070
AV
(AV 3070) X X X X X
3070
disengaging
the clutch.
Tool
95973080
AV (AV 3080)
3080 for thrust
bearing
centring.
Tool
95973218
AV (AV 3218)
X X X
3218 for removing
the roller
race.
Tool
95973219
(AV 3219)
for replacing
AV
upper rubber
3219
bushing on
gearbox
housing (4
components).
599
SA 458 599 612
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Se
Fiorano
Tool 95973234 (AV
3234)
AV
for replacing lower
3234
bushing on gearbox
housing (8 components)
Tool 95973243 (AV

3243)
AV
for fitting assembled
3243
gearbox shafts (5
components).
Tool 95973252 (AV

3252)
AV for
3252 disassembling/assembling
the main shaft (4
components).
Tool 95973255 (AV

3255)
AV for assembling double
3255 gearing and bearings on
secondary shaft (4
components).
Tool 95973257 (AV

3257)
AV
kickback tool for
3257
tightening secondary
shaft ring nut.
Tool 95973258 (AV

AV 3258)
3258 for installing clutch shaft
ball bearing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool 95973259
AV (AV 3259)
3259 for fitting roller
bearing outer ring.
Tool 95973260
(AV 3260)
for
AV
extracting/inserting
3260
gearbox housing
bearing (2
components).
Tool 95973261
AV (AV 3261)
3261 for fitting clutch
shaft bearing.
Tool 95973262
(AV 3262)
AV for fitting the
3262 spacer and the 1st
and 2nd gear
synchroniser body.
Tool 95973263
(AV 3263)
AV for assembling
3263 various
components on
secondary shaft.
Tool 95973264
(AV 3264)
AV
for fitting the ball X X X
3264
bearing onto the
primary shaft.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95973265
(AV 3265)
for fitting
AV bearing and
3265 bushing on
the
intermediate
plate (4
components).
Tool
95973266
AV
(AV 3266) X X X
3266
for checking
pinion play.
Tool
95973267
AV
(AV 3267)
3267
for installing
ball bushing.
Tool
95973271
(AV 3271)
AV
for locating
3271
the gear shift
control lever
on the rod.
Tool
95973273
(AV 3273)
AV
for extracting
3273
shaft-rod
cluster with
forks.
Tool
95973275
(AV 3275)
AV for fitting the
X X X
3275 external ball
bearing ring
(2
components).
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool 95973276
(AV 3276)
for fitting the
AV bearing onto
X X X
3276 differential
shaft with
flange (2
components).
Tool 95973277
(AV 3277)
for fitting
AV bearing onto
3277 differential half
-shaft with
flange on left-
hand side.
Tool 95973278
(AV 3278)
for fitting the
AV
tapered X X X
3278
differential
bearings (2
components).
Tool 95973613
(AV 3613)
for checking
AV
bush between
3613
bevel gear pair
pinion and
bearing seat.
Tool 95973615
(AV 3615)
AV
for
3615
removing/fitting
hook.
Tool 95973616
(AV 3616)
AV for removing
3616 tapered roller
bearing on
cover side.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95973832
AV (AV 3832)
3832 for fitting
oil circuit
seal.
Tool
95973833
(AV 3833)
for fitting
AV
outer roller
3833
bearing
tapered
ring on
cover.
Tool
95973834
(AV 3834)
AV for fitting
3834 tapered
roller
bearing on
cover side.
Tool
95973835
(AV 3835)
AV
support
3835
tool for
fitting
bearing.
Tool
95973836
(AV 3836)
AV adapter
3836 tool for
piston
Corteco
seal ring.
Tool
95973846
AV (AV 3846)
3846 for
flushing E-
DIFF
hydraulic
system.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95976121
(AM
106121)
AM
for fitting X X X
106121
1st and 2nd
gear
synchroniser
sleeve.
Tool
95976524
(CS
106524)
CS
for checking
106524
gap between
pinion and
the bearing
seat.
Union
95973283
AV (AV 3283)
X X X
3283 to keep the
air under
pressure.
Wrench
95973245
(AV 3245)
for fastening
AV
the main
3245
shaft ring
nut and
check ring
nut.
Wrench
95973246
(AV 3246)
AV for fastening
3246 the main
shaft
shoulder
ring nut.
Wrench
95973247
(AV 3247)
for
AV
secondary
3247
shaft
bearing
retainer ring
nut.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Plug (AS 10723
-07)
AS
for supporting
10723
upper arm for
-07
ball joint
removal.
Plug (AV 3427-

AV 14)
3427- lower leverage
14 surface for ball
joint removal.
Support
95973206 (AV
AV
3206) X X X X X X X X
3206
for complete
hub.
Tool 95971651
AV (AV 1651)
X X X
1651 for removing
lever ball joint.
Tool 95973189
(AV 3189)
AV
for removing X X X X X
3189
Flanbloc and
ball joint.
Tool 95973217
(AV 3217)
for
AV
fitting/removing X X
3217
lower shock
absorber
Silentblock.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool 95973281
(AV 3281)
AV
leverage surface X X X X X
3281
for installing
Flanbloc.
Tool 95973282
(AV 3282)
AV
for fitting and X X X X X
3282
removing
Flanbloc.
Tool 95973304
(AV 3304)
AV for
3304 removing/fitting
shock absorber
bushing.
Frame
95973307 (AV
AV
3307)
3307
for supporting
hard top.
Frame
95975736 (AV
AV
5736)
5736
for lifting hard
top.
Tool kit
95972004 ()
for replacing
hard top rear
screen.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95978072
(AV 8072)
for aligning
AV 8072 the cosmetic
tailpipe tips
with the
exhaust
tailpipes
Shim
95978170
(AV 8170)
AV 8170 for locating
the engine
compartment
lid window.
Boring bar
95974736
(AS 4736)
AS 4736 X X
for cylinder
bank, Ø
66.675 mm.
Calibre
(ALZF
08902)
ALZF
89 mm X X
08902
diameter for
cylinder
sleeves.
Calibre
(TLDF00754)
TLDF00754 for valve X X
guides, Ø 7
mm
Complete
goniometer
95975165
AM
(AM X X
105165/20
105165/20)
for setting
engine timing
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Dial gauge
mounting
95977148
CS 7148 (CS 7148) X X
for measuring
valve seat
wear.
Index
95970208
AM (AM
X X
105165/21 105165/21)
for engine
timing.
Insertion tool
95972627
(AV 2627)
AV 2627 X X
for rear
crankshaft
seal ring
Lapper
95970240
AV 240 (AV 240) X X
cylinder
bank.
Plug gauge
95970206
(TLDF02068)
TLDF02068 X X
for checking
small end
bushing.
Protection
95972945
AV 2945 (AV 2945) X X
for installing
valve oil seal.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Punch
95970866
(AV 865)
AV
for X X
865
connecting
rod
bushing.
Punch
95972727
(AV 2727)
for
AV installing
X X
2727 front
crankcase
cover
“Corteco”
seal ring.
Punch
95972740
(AV 2740)
AV
for X X
2740
installing
check
valve.
Punch
95973011
(AV 3011)
for
AV
installing X X
3011
engine
cover seal
ring, clutch
side.
Punch
95973052
AV (AV 3052)
X X
3052 for fitting
camshaft
pulleys.
Punch
95973106
(AV 3106)
AV for fitting
X X
3106 front
timing
cover
bearing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Reamer
95974720
US
(US 4720) X X
4720
camshaft
seat
Shim
95973345
AV
(AV 3345) X X
3345
punch AV
102178.
Support
95972905
AV (AV 2905)
X X
2905 for
polygonal
wrench.
Support
95974994
(AS
AS 104994)
X X
104994 for
crankcase
on trolley
AV 2621.
Tool (AV
3287)
for
AV securing
X X
3287 crankshaft
onto AS
104994
mounting.
Tool
95972607
(AV 2607)
AV for
X X
2607 installing
camshaft
drive
bearing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95972697
(AV 2697)
AV
for X X
2697
installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Tool
95972882
(AV 2881)
AV
for X X
2881
installing
valve oil
seal.
Tool
95973546
AV (AV 3546-
3546- 01) X X
01 for dumper
anti-rotation
in vehicle.
Tool
95975774
(AM
AM 105774)
X X
105774 for
installing
cylinder
sleeves.
Torque
wrench
(USAG
USAG 815F)
X X
815F (Replaced
by torque
wrench AV
8172)
Wrench
95970815_1
(AV 815)
AV
for timing X X
815
system
drive pulley
ring nuts.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Wrench
AV 95972906
X X
2906 (AV 2906)
polygonal.
Wrench
95973400
AV
(AV 3400) X X
3400
for engine
oil filter.
Adaptor
95973300
AV
(AV 3300) X X X
3300
for tool
AM106628.
Base
95973415
(AV 3415)
AV for
X X X
3415 removing
the bearing
race from
the pinion.
Jig
95976226
(AM
106226)
AM for fitting
X X X
106226 central
gearbox
housing
onto rear
housing.
Jig
95976227
(AM
AM 106227)
X X X
106227 for fitting
front
gearbox
housing
onto the
central
housing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Pin
95972679
(AV 2679)
for
AV locating
X X X
2679 the 3rd,
4th, 5th,
6th
gearbox
rods.
Pin
95972881
(AS
AS 102881)
X X
102881 for
aligning
clutch
plate.
Punch
95972640
(AV 2640)
AV for fitting
X X X
2640 the bearing
onto the
secondary
shaft.
Punch
95972644
(AV 2644)
AV
for the X X X
2644
primary
shaft
bearing.
Punch
95972647
(AV 2647)
AV for fitting
X X X
2647 the bearing
onto the
primary
shaft.
Punch
95972649
AV (AV
X X X
2649/1 2649/1)
for fitting
bushings
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Punch
95972649
AV 2649/2 (AV 2649/2) X X X
for fitting
bushings
Punch
95972655
(AV 2655)
AV 2655 X X X
for the
primary shaft
bearing.
Punch
95973297
AV 3297 (AV 3297) X X X
for bushing
extraction.
Punch
95976629
(AM 106629)
AM 106629 X X X
for fitting seat
ring on front
cover.
Shim
95970152
ALZF08501 (ALZF08501) X X X
for tool
AV3415.
Shim
95973413
AV 3413 (AV 3413) X X X
for AV3275
tool.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Shim
95973414
(AV 3414)
AV
bearing X X X
3414
location for
tool AV
2622.
Shim
95973418
AV
(AV 3418) X X X
3418
for tool AV
3275.
Support
95977312_1
(AS
107312)
AS for fitting
X X X
107312 gearbox
housing
onto AV
2621
trolley.
Tool
95972572
(AV 2572)
AV
for locating X X X
2572
the 1st, 2nd
and reverse
gear fork.
Tool
95972573
(AV 2573)
AV
for locating X X X
2573
the 3rd, 4th,
5th, 6th
gear fork.
Tool
95972617
(AV 2617)
AV
for fitting X X X
2617
external
bearing
track onto
gearbox
housing.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95972622
(AV 2622)
AV
for fitting X X X
2622
the bearing
onto the
pinion.
Tool
95972629
(AV 2629)
for fitting
AV
the bearing X X X
2629
onto the
central
gearbox
housing.
Tool
95972630
(AV 2630)
for fitting
AV
the bearing X X X
2630
onto the
rear
gearbox
housing.
Tool
95972646
(AV 2646)
AV for fitting
X X X
2646 the outer
roller
bearing
seat.
Tool
95972907
(AV 2907)
AV for fitting
X X X
2907 the outer
roller
bearing
seat.
Tool
95973411
AV (AV 3411)
X X X
3411 spacer for
tool
AV2622.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95973418
AV
(AV 3418) X X X
3418
for fitting the
case.
Tool
95973419
AV (AV 3419)
X X X
3419 for centring
the side
cover lever.
Tool
95973458
(AV 3458)
for centring
AV shaft
X X X X X
3458 clearance
between the
universal
joint and the
actuator.
Tool
95975898
AM (AM
X X X
105898 105898)
for pinion
retention.
Tool
95976122
(AM
106122)
AM
for fitting X X X
106122
3rd, 4th, 5th,
6th and
reverse gear
synchroniser.
Tool
95976628
AM (AM
X X X
106628 106628)
for fitting
crown wheel
onto
differential.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
95976636
(AM
AM 106636)
X X X
106636 for
supporting
the
differential.
Wrench
95972054
AV (AV 2054)
X X
2054 for clutch
shaft ring
nut.
Wrench
95972631
(AV 2631)
AV for the
X X X
2631 primary shaft
ring nut,
differential
side.
Wrench
95972632
AV (AV 2632)
X X
2632 for clutch
shaft ring
nut.
Wrench
95972633
(AV 2633)
for the
secondary
AV shaft ring nut
X X X
2633 on engine
side and the
primary shaft
ring nut on
differential
side.
Wrench
95973412
(AV 3412)
for the
AV
intermediate X X X
3412
ring nut on
secondary
shaft (3
components).
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Wrench
95975177
(AM
105177)
AM
for fastening X X X
105177
the primary
shaft ring
nut on the
engine side.
Tool (AV
AV
3427-13)
3427- X X X X X
for fitting
13
Flanbloc.
Tool (AV
5225-2)
AV leverage
X X X X X
5225-2 surface for
extracting
Flanbloc.
Tool
95977310
(AM
AM 107310)
X X X X X
107310 leverage
surface for
installing
Flanbloc.
Tool
95977311
(AM
107311)
AM
leverage X X X X X
107311
surface for
extracting
Flanbloc and
ball joint.
Adapter (AV
3980)
AV
support for X
3980
valve seat
wear
measurement
dial gauge.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Belt
tensioner
(AV 8171)
AV
setting the X X X
8171
alternator
belt
tension.
Boring bar
95977233
AS (AS
X
107233 107233)
cylinder
bank.
Engine
bushing
installation
template
(AV 8169)
AV
for X X X
8169
checking
alignment
of rubber
engine
bushings.
Hook (AV
3979)
AV
for X X X X
3979
hoisting
engine.
Hook
95973432
AV (AV 3432)
X X X X
3432 for
hoisting
engine.
Kit (AV
3981)
AV press-
X
3981 fitting
water pipes
on engine.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Kit (AV
3982)
AV 3982 press-fitting X
oil pipes on
engine.
Lapper
95973429
AV 3429 (AV 3429) X
cylinder
bank.
Lever
95973433
AV 3433 (AV 3433) X
for fitting
timing chain
Punch
(900027260)
for
mounting 6
900027260 X
mm
diameter
centring
dowel.
Punch
(900027270)
for
mounting 13
900027270 X
mm
diameter
centring
dowel.
Reamer (US
19000)
hand reamer
US 19000 X
for ø26 mm
camshaft
seats
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Shield (AV
3983)
AV
intake X X X
3983
header
cover.
Tool (AM
107256)
AM
for X
107256
installing
half cones.
Tool (AV
3374)
AV for
X
3374 installing
oil seal on
valve.
Tool (AV
AV 3978)
X
3978 for timing
reference
Tool (AV
3984)
for
aligning
cylinder
AV
sleeves X
3984
(used
together
with tool
AM
107231).
Tool (AV
3985)
for
AV checking
X
3985 variable
valve
timing
adjuster.
599
SA 458 599 612 6
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Sess
Fiorano
Tool (900027360)
for immobilising
900027360 crankshaft for X X X
removing/refitting
dumper.
Tool 95972885
(AV 2885)
AV 2885 X
for fitting oil
sump bearing.
Tool 95973434
(AV 3434)
for fitting O-rings
AV 3434 on crankcase and X
lower crankcase
shell fastener stud
bolts.
Tool 95977232
(AM 107232)
AM
mounting for X
107232
crankcase on AV
2621 trolley.
Wrench (AV
3390)
AV 3390 for installing oil X
filters for timing
adjusters.
Templates
95978076 (AV
AV 8076 8076) X X X X
locating F1
gearbox kit pipes.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Tool
(900026250)
900026250 for complete X X X
clutch
mount.
Tools
95973218
(AV 3218)
AV 3218 X X X
for fitting the
seal ring (3
components).
354 mm
template
(AV 8168)
for setting
correct
AV 8168 distance X
between
chassis and
gearbox
(mechanical
gearbox).
Tool (AV
3994)
for adjusting
engine
AV 3994 X X X
compartment
lid striker
plate retainer
bracket.
Exhaust
tailpipe
extensions
95978177
AV 8177 (AV 8177) X
for
connection to
exhaust fume
extractor.
Tool
95977566
AS
(AS 107566) X
107566
for removing
the oil sump.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Trolley
95977565
(AS
107565)
AS removing
X X X
107565 the
engine /
gearbox /
subframe
assembly.
Wrench
95978175
(AV 8175)
AV tightening
X X X
8175 fuel pump
filter
retainer
ring.
Wrench
95978176
AV (AV 8176)
X X X
8176 tightening
fuel level
sensor.
Hook
95977564
(AS
AS
107564) X X X
107564
for lifting
the
gearbox.
Pump
95978174
(AV 8174)
AV
topping up X X X
8174
gearbox
and clutch
oil.
Bar
95977568
AS (AS
X
107568 107568)
support for
RHT
kinematics
L=1100.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Bar
95977570
(AS
AS 107570)
X
107570 support for
RHT
kinematics
L=806.
Fastener
brackets
for safety
retainers
95978184
(AV 8184)
AV raised
X X X
8184 vehicle
anti-
tipping
retention
for runway
type car
lifts.
Feeler
gauge
95978181
(AV 8181)
AV
checking X
8181
Rear Roof
shell
striker
plates
Hook
95977567
AS (AS
X
107567 107567)
installing
the RHT.
Riveter
Battery
Tool
95978173
AV
(AV 8173) X X
8173
(see repair
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
Rod
95978178
AV
(AV 8178) X
8178
for RHT
kinematics.
599
SA 458 599 612 6
APERTA Italia GTO Scaglietti Ses
Fiorano
Safety
retainers
95978183 (AV
AV 8183 8183) X X X
vehicle anti-
tipping
retention.
Separator tool
95978179 (AV
8179)
AV 8179 adjusting the X
Rear Roof
shell striker
plates
Template kit
(A7082600 -
A7082600/TIN
A7082600 -
- A456)
A7082600/TIN X
(see repair
- A456
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
Template
95978180 (AV
8180)
AV 8180 X
locating Rear
Roof shell
striker plates
Template
95978182 (AV
8182)
AV 8182 X
checking Rear
Roof shell
striker plates
Tool 95977569
(AS 107569)
AS 107569 support for X
hydraulic
pump.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Trolley
95977571 (AS
AS 107571)
X
107571 support for
complete
RHT.
Brackets for
fastening to
engine and
clutch housing
AV
shims X
8252
95978252 (AV
8252)
for hoisting
engine.
Engine retainer
bracket for
gearbox
AV removal
X
8254 95978254 (AV
8254)
removing the
gearbox.
Pins for lifting

engine-
gearbox
assembly
95978253 (AV
8253)
AV
for lifting X
8253
engine/gearbox
assembly off
rear subframe
after removal
of subframe
from vehicle.
Tailpipe cowl
for exhaust
fume
extraction
AV 95978250 (AV
X
8250 8250)
for use
exclusively
together with
one of the
extension
elements AV
8177 for
connection to
an exhaust gas
extraction
system.
Template
95978257 (AV
AV
8257) X
8257
fitting flexible
exhaust pipe.
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Trolley 95977572
(AS 107572)
to be used
together with
AS
trolley AS X
107572
107565 for
removing/refitting
gearbox from and
into vehicle.
Mounting bracket
for vehicle safety
retainers for
AV
lifting 95978251 X
8251
(AV 8251)
lifting vehicle on
vehicle lift.
Safety extensions
95977513 (AS
107573)
AS
for trolley AS X
107573
107565 for
removing/refitting
rear subframe.
Spacers
95978255 (AV
8255)
AV
for trolley AS X
8255
107565 for
removing/refitting
rear subframe.
Eye bolts (AV

AV 8260)
X X
8260 for hoisting
engine.
Brackets
95978259 (AV
AV
8259) X
8259
compressing fuel
pump springs
599
SA 458 599 612 612
Fiorano
Template kit
(A7082900
-
A7082900 - A7082900/T
A7082900/T - A456) X
- A456 (see repair
manual for
aluminium
bodyshell).
Consultation Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
01.01 Consultation
Consulting the manual
The manual is divided into sections, with each section identified by a different letter.
Each section is divided into chapters, identified by the letter indicating the relative section followed by a
sequential number.
Each chapter is, in turn, divided into paragraphs, identified by the letter indicating the relative section, the
chapter number and a sequential number, separated from the former by a point.
This format is used for all references to chapters or paragraphs in other sections.
The chapter or paragraph containing the notes relative to a certain topic may be identified by consulting the
table of contents at the beginning of each section.
To illustrate the topic more clearly, the text is supplemented by illustrations in which the elements described are
highlighted and/or identified with numerical references.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_010... 8/1/2011
Updates Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
01.02 Updates
Updates
The manual will be updated periodically to reflect modifications made to the vehicle and the production of new
versions.
ALWAYS read the Technical Notes as they may introduce more recently updated regulations and methods than
those in this manual.
Symbols Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
01.03 Symbols
The safety symbols given below are used to warn the operator of personal safety hazards and operational
conditions which may cause damage to the vehicle, and to provide useful information concerning the
operation being performed.
CAUTION
Failure to observe the instructions given in this note may result in serious injury to the operator and/or to
persons in the immediate vicinity.
IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the instructions given in this note may damage the vehicle and its components irreparably.
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION
This symbol indicates recommendations for the protection of the environment.
NOTES
This general note provides operators with useful information concerning the operation being performed.
REFERENCE
Reference to a section or chapter dealing with the operation being performed.
Glossary Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
01.04 Glossary
N2
Nitrogen
CO
Carbon Monoxide
CO2
Carbon Dioxide
NOx
Nitrogen Oxide
HC
Hydrocarbons
Standard
Indicates reference value
Service limit
Indicates the limit value beyond which a part or coupling must be serviced to bring it back within the prescribed
tolerance range
Right hand and/or left hand
The terms right hand and/or left hand indicate the right hand and/or left-hand side of the vehicle with respect to
the front of the vehicle
ABS
Antilock Braking System (Anti Blokier System)
CST
(Traction Stability C)ontrol
A.C.
(Air Conditioning)
ASR
Wheelspin control during acceleration (Antriebs Schlupf Regelung)
CAN
Communication line between ECUs (Controller Area Network)
PTC
Positive temperature coefficient, resistance increases as temperature increases (Positive Temperature

Coefficient)
NTC
Negative temperature coefficient, resistance decreases as temperature increases (Negative Temperature

Coefficient)
E-DIFF
(Electronic Differential)
EBD
(Electronic Brake force Distribution)
ECU
(Electronic Control Unit)
MSR
Engine braking torque control (Motor Schleppmoment Regelung)
NO
Normally open (in reference to valves)
NC
Normally closed (in reference to valves)
RHT
(Retractable Hard Top)
EPB
(Electric Parking Brake)
LC
(Launch Control)
AVH
(Automatic Vehicle Holding)
DCT
(Dual Clutch Transmission)
TPMS
(Tyre Pressure Monitoring System)
FBP
A system that eliminates the gap between the brake pads and discs by applying slight pressure to the brake
system as soon as the accelerator pedal is released when imminent braking is expected. (Ferrari Brake
Prefill)
VDC
Vehicle dynamics control using the brake system and engine torque
PTU
(Power Transfer Unit) system
4WD
(4 Wheel Drive)
Manual user Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
02.01 Manual user
Manual user
This publication was produced by the FERRARI Technical Service Department as an informative support tool to
assist the operator in performing work on FERRARI cars.
This manual is intended for expert operators with sufficient knowledge and skill to carry out all maintenance and
repair operations for FERRARI cars correctly and safely.
Carrying out the aforementioned operations without the necessary knowledge and skills will cause damage to
the vehicle and may expose the operator and the user of the vehicle to danger.
Operating procedures Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
02.02 Operating procedures
Operating procedures
The operator must observe the instructions and warnings given in the manual precisely and must not implement
inappropriate methods or tools, as this may constitute a risk to personal safety and compromise the reliability
of the vehicle.
In addition to the guided diagnostic system, that can be implemented using the FERRARI DEIS tester, each
section of the manual contains diagnostic procedures to identify malfunctions of the different components in
the vehicle.
Evaluating the impressions of the user is of vital importance, formulating appropriate questions to clearly identify
the symptoms of the problem.
Once the cause has been identified, plan the job by consulting the relative informative notes concerning the
tools necessary, the reference data for servicing and disassembly and reassembly procedures given in the
manual.
Following the methods described in this manual precisely for each job ensures the safety of the user and the
quality of the vehicle.
Using tools and spare parts Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
02.03 Using tools and spare parts
Using tools and original spare parts
FERRARI supplies workshops authorised to repair its vehicles with specific tools to ensure that repair work is
carried out correctly and safely.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty.
Always use original FERRARI spare parts, consulting the relative spare parts catalogue.
In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original components may damage the vehicle and expose the user
to danger.
Warranty Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
02.04 Warranty
FERRARI guarantees its vehicles for 3 years from the date of delivery.
The warranty may be extended if required. For details, see the specific documents "Power brochure"
and "Power warranty handbook". For more information, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department.
Carrying out any work without using specific FERRARI tools, or using alternative tools, may cause damage to
relative component and/or system, voiding the warranty. Always use original FERRARI spare parts,
consulting the relative spare parts catalogue. In addition to voiding the warranty, using non original
components may damage the vehicle and expose the user to danger.
During this period, the appropriate form must be filled out and the S.T. Schedule, which indicates the time
specified by FERRARI for the operation, must be consulted for any work on the vehicle.
Tightening torques Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
02.05 Tightening torques
For the fastening of main vehicle components, Ferrari has defined three tolerance classes relative to the rated
torque value: The tolerance class is shown in the summary paragraphs concerning tightening torques, at the
beginning of each section and/or at the beginning of each paragraph.
Class
A ±5 %
B ±10 %
C ±20 %
Safety at work Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
03.01 Safety at work
Prevention measures and protection devices
When carrying out particularly hazardous or difficult service or repair operations, the service staff must take all
precautions to prevent personal injury or damage to the vehicle.
Always wear protective gloves when working on sharp or hot parts, or when handling dangerous parts. In the
latter case, we recommend protecting the eyes with appropriate safety goggles.
Prevent sparks or open flames when working on the fuel system as fuel and fuel vapours are highly flammable.
Hazards Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
03.02 Hazards
Exhaust gas
Danger Precautions
The engine must be kept running for certain Never run the engine in a closed space; preferably
maintenance procedures. Exhaust gases contain work outdoors or use exhaust extraction systems.
carbon monoxide, a highly toxic gas which may
even cause death in the event of prolonged
inhalation.
The emissions control devices installed were Never puncture the exhaust silencers or remove any of
necessary in order for the vehicle to obtain type their internal elements. Never use the vehicle with
approval allowing the vehicle to be driven legally on any of these devices removed.
public roads in compliance with emissions and
noise legislation. Removing or tampering with these
devices is prohibited by law.
Each of these devices bears a marking or label Never replace any of the original devices with devices
indicating the type approval number obtained. without type approval. These devices must also be
kept in proper working order, carrying out all the
procedures indicated in the maintenance schedule.
Petrol
Danger Precautions
The petrol contained in the fuel tank and the entire fuel Smoking, sparks and naked flame must not be allowed
system is highly flammable and, in certain in the work area or the immediate vicinity.
conditions, potentially explosive. Keep out of reach of children!
Always work in a well ventilated area.
Never dispose of petrol into the environment!
Used oil
Danger Precautions
Prolonged skin contact with used oil may cause severe Keep out of reach of children!
skin disease. To prevent risks, always wear protective gloves and/or
wash any areas that have come into contact with
used oil thoroughly with soap and water.
Never dispose of used oil into the environment!
Hydraulic fluid
Danger Precautions
The fluid contained in the brake, clutch and power In the event of contact, wash the affected area with
steering systems is corrosive to plastic, rubber and plenty of running water.
paintwork and is extremely harmful in the event of To prevent risks, always wear protective eyewear and
contact with the eyes and skin. gloves.
Keep out of reach of children!
Never dispose of used hydraulic fluid into the
environment!
Hazards Page 2 of 2
Coolant
Danger Precautions
The cooling circuit contains fluid at high temperature Keep out of reach of children!
and pressure: contact with hot coolant may cause Never dispose of coolant into the environment!
severe burns. Coolant may cause irritation in the
event of skin contact and is poisonous if swallowed.
Dangerous emissions Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
03.03 Dangerous emissions
Exhaust system and engine

Danger Precautions
As the vehicle is used, the components of the exhaust Always wear insulating gloves when handling these
system and the engine itself reach very high components, or wait as long as necessary for the
temperatures and remain hot long after the engine components to cool.
is switched off.
Battery
Danger Precautions
As the battery is charged, gases are released which Always charge the battery in a well ventilated area.
are potentially explosive in the event of contact with
sparks or naked flame.
The battery also contains sulphuric acid as an Always wear appropriate protective garments and a
electrolyte, which may cause irritation in the event face mask when handling electrolyte.
of skin contact.
Electric cooling fans

Danger Precautions
After the vehicle is stopped with a warm engine, the Use particular caution when working near these
electric cooling system fans may activate without components.
warning.
Identification and type approval labels Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
04.01 Identification and type approval labels
Identification and type approval labels
A - 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' label

B - Mercury warning label
C - Safety standard compliance label
D - VIN label (Vehicle Identification Number)
E - Airbag maintenance label
F - Passenger airbag warning label
G - Unleaded fuel label
H - Radiator with antifreeze label
I - Emissions control data label
L - Punched engine type and number
M - Assembly number label
N - Engine and gearbox oil identification label
O - Gearbox type and number plate
P - Tyre type and pressure label
Identification and type approval labels Page 2 of 2
Q - TPMS system installed warning label

R - Chassis number plate
S - Original paintwork label
'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' warning Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.02 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' warning
'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' warning
A - 'Do not install child seat on passenger seat' warning
Mercury content warning Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.03 Mercury content warning
Mercury content warning
B - Mercury content warning
Safety standard compliance Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
04.04 Safety standard compliance
Safety standard compliance
C - Safety standard compliance
V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number) Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.05 V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number)
V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number)
D - V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Number)
Airbag maintenance Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.06 Airbag maintenance
Airbag maintenance
E - Airbag maintenance
Passenger airbag warning Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.07 Passenger airbag warning
Passenger airbag warning
F - Passenger airbag warning
Unleaded fuel Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.08 Unleaded fuel
Unleaded fuel
G - Unleaded fuel
Radiator containing antifreeze Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.09 Radiator containing antifreeze
Radiator containing antifreeze
H - Radiator containing antifreeze
Emissions control system specifications Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.10 Emissions control system specifications
Emissions control system specifications
I - Emissions control system specifications
Engine type and number Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.11 Engine type and number
Engine type and number
L - Engine type and number
Assembly number Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.12 Assembly number
Assembly number
M - Assembly number
Engine and gearbox oil identification Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.13 Engine and gearbox oil identification
Engine and gearbox oil identification
N - Engine and gearbox oil identification
Gearbox type and number Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.14 Gearbox type and number
Gearbox type and number
O - Gearbox type and number plate
Tyre type and pressure Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.15 Tyre type and pressure
Tyre type and pressure
P - Tyre type and pressure
TPMS system installed warning Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.16 TPMS system installed warning
TPMS system installed warning
Q - TPMS system installed warning
Chassis number Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.17 Chassis number
Chassis number
R - Chassis number
Original paint Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
04.18 Original paint
Original paint
S - Original paint
Performance and consumption Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
05.01 Performance and consumption
Performance
0 to 62 mph 1.312 ft from Top speed

standing start
DCT gearbox < 3.4 sec 11.3 sec > 202 mph
Fuel consumption (estimated figures based on tests conducted with vehicles equipped with frequently
requested options. Figures for 2008 models and later are calculated using EPA methods. The effective
consumption for this vehicle may vary depending on driving style, the state of the vehicle, optional
accessories fitted and the road and weather conditions in which the test is conducted)
Urban cycle 12 mpg

Extraurban cycle 18 mpg
Combined cycle 14 mpg
Dimensions and weights Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
05.02 Dimensions and weights
Dimensions and weights
Wheelbase 104.33 in.

Max. length 178.23 in.
Max. width 76.26 in.
Max. height 47.76 in.
Front overhang 43.58 in.
Rear overhang 30.31 in.
Front track 65.83 in.
Rear track 63.23 in.
Kerb weight (DCT) 3384 lbs (with most
favourable
combination of
options fitted)
Fluid properties Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A1.01 Fluid properties
Cooling circuit (1)

Protective fluid with antifreeze action for monoethylene glycol-based cooling systems. 50 %
Water 50 %
Windscreen washer/headlight washer system

Mixture of water and denatured isopropyl alcohol 50 %
Glass cleaner 2 phial
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_A10... 8/1/2011
Fluids and lubricants table Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A1.02 Fluids and lubricants table
Parts to be refilled Product Quantity

Engine (1) (2) (3) 10.57 qts.
PENNZOIL ULTRA™ SAE 5W-40

Gearbox and differential SHELL TRANSAXLE 75W-90 GL5 / SHELL SPIRAX 4.12 qts.
S5 ATE 75W-90
Clutch system and hydraulic SHELL DCT-F3 8.45 qts.
controls
Brake system SHELL DONAX UB BRAKE FLUID DOT4 Ultra / 1.58 qts.
SHELL BRAKE and CLUTCH DOT4 Ultra
Cooling circuit (1) SHELL GLYCOSHELL LONGLIFE CONC (diluted by 17.44 qts.
50%)
Hydraulic power steering SHELL DONAX TX / SHELL SPIRAX S4 ATF HDX 1.69 qts.
system (1)
Hydraulic power steering PENTOSIN CHF 11S 1.69 qts.
system (FROM Ass.ly No.
98002) (1)
"Front Lift" hydraulic system (1) SHELL DONAX TX / SHELL SPIRAX S4 ATF HDX 1.06 qts.
Fuel tank 95 RON unleaded fuel. 22.72 US Gallon
Fuel tank - Reserve 95 RON unleaded fuel. 3.69 US Gallon
A.C. system - Refrigerant DELPHI RL 488 "R 134 A" 1.47 ± 0.07 lbs.
AC system - Refrigerant DELPHI RL 488 "R 134 A" 1.38 ± 0.07 lbs.
(FROM Ass.ly No. 90177)
A.C. system - Compressor PAG ISO 46 10.07 cu.in.
Windscreen washer/headlight Mixture of water and glass cleaner 1.32 US Gallon
washer fluid tank
Certain products in the fluids and lubricants table are indicated with the names used both prior to and after the
change in nomenclature of Shell fluid products.
The technical characteristics of the products themselves, however, have remained unchanged.
(1) Empty.
(2) Between MIN and MAX 2.11 qts..
(3) Oil consumption 1.06 - 2.11 qts/600 miles.
Pre-Delivery Inspection - PDI form Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
Model Updated on
458 Italia March 2010
Chassis number: Dossier creation date:
Job order n°:

Notes:
Performed Performed R.O.L. N°

Description of inspection / operation:
OK NOT OK (if NOT OK)
1. - Battery connection and vehicle parameters reset.
2. - Check Park Lock device.
3. - Reset Park Lock device.
4. - Battery charge level; charge, if necessary.
5. - Disable “Logistic Mode” function (if enabled)
6. - Print out of parameters and errors for NCM ECUs, etc.
7. - Delete ECU errors.
8. - Test keys, etc.
9. - Day-time lights.
10. - Low beam lights.
11. - Check the vehicle front lift (if present).
12. - High beam lights.
13. - Stop lights.
14. - Turn indicators.
15. - Door lights, cabin light and luggage compartment light.
16. - Door, dashboard and glove compartment lights.
17. - Horn.
18. - Power windows .
19. - Windscreen wipers and headlight washer.
20. - Seats / Electric seats.
21. - Electric parking brake (EPB); manual/auto.
22. - HI-FI system / Navigation system (see point 33).
Model Updated on

23. - Coolant level.
24. - Power steering fluid level.
25. - Braking system fluid level.
26. - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid level.
27. - Tyre pressure / calibrated pressure on TPMS.
28. - Tightening of wheel stud bolts.
29. - *Air conditioning and heating system (static test).
30. - *Electric rear-view mirrors.
31. - *RH or LH rear-view mirror – reverse gear engagement
32. - *Parking sensors.
33. - Navigation system: Set route.
34. - Test drive (20 min.).
35. - Air conditioning and heating system (dynamic test).
36. - Engine oil level (warm engine – at idle speed).
37. - Print out of parameters and errors for NCM ECUs, etc.
38. - Verify VIN from NCM parameters
39. - Delete ECU errors.
40. - Enter the warranty start date.
41. - Disconnect and reconnect the battery.
42. - Perform “CAR OUT” procedures
43. - Print Extended Identification
44. - Remove complete aerodynamic flap.
45. - Water and/or oil leaks in vehicle underbody.
46. - Engine compartment lines.
47. - Engine compartment wiring.
48. - Underbody lines.
49. - Exhaust line.
(*) With engine running.
Model Updated on

50. - Visual inspection of fuel tanks.
51. – Visual inspection: Suspension units, etc.
52. -Visual inspection of Earth: car/engine and gearbox-chassis.
53. - Condition of brake pads and discs (DO NOT remove wheels).
54. - Condition of tyres and wheel rims.
55. - Refit flat undertray and the engine compartment panels.
56. - Door and lid locks.
57. - Emergency opening of engine compartment lid and fuel tank

flap.
58. - Condition of vehicle's leather upholstery.
59. - Condition of vehicle paintwork.
60. - Clean interior and wash car.
61. - Provided with vehicle: Labels, toolkits, etc.
Task performed by (Dealer):
Technical Manager:
Name Surname
(block letters) (block letters)
Company stamp
Full signature
Vehicle delivery date:
Scheduled Maintenance File Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
Model Updated on
458 Italia February 2011
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
Yearly Maintenance
Performed NOT
Description of procedure Notes
OK OK
A Vehicle reception - preparation
B Indicator light check
External visual brake inspection (pads and discs); replace if
C
necessary
D EPB electric parking brake function check
E Lifting the vehicle

F Internal visual brake wear inspection
G Removing the rear bumper diffuser
H Removing the rear flat undertray section
I Checking the gear oil level
L Checking the hydraulic clutch system fluid level
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plugs in crankcase
N (perform more frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Visual inspection for leaks and checking ancillary

O
drive belt (perform while draining the engine oil)
Replacing the ancillary

drive belt (every 37,500 miles/2 years - replace more
O1
frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil
P tank (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
Checking front and rear suspension components (perform

Q
while draining the engine oil)
Visual inspection of differential-gearbox assembly,

R fasteners and bushings and the condition of the exhausts
(perform while draining engine oil)
Checking tightness of engine and gearbox mounting strut
R1
fasteners
S Setting the vehicle on the ground

T Replacing the engine oil filter
T1 Filling with engine oil
Removing right hand underwindscreen shield cover to allow access to brake
U fluid reservoir
Replacing brake fluid (every 2 years - replace more
U1 frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating
conditions)
Visual inspection of power steering fluid, brake fluid,
V engine coolant and windscreen washer fluid levels
Visual inspection of pipes
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
Checking and (if necessary) replacing air filter (in the event
of use in particularly dusty conditions or on roads treated
V1
with sand and/or salt, more frequent replacement is
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years)
Replacing seat belts and pretensioners (every
Z4
15 years)
a Start the vehicle to check engine oil level
a1 Checking tyre pressure

a2 Checking wheel tightness
a3 Checking the A.C. system
Visual inspection of oil and fluid tightness and of
a4 areas subject to fretting (pipes and hoses)
Refitting cover on right hand underwindscreen shield
Final checks (open/close doors, check fuel filler cap and

a5
check seat and seat belt functions)
a6 Checking function of headlights and horn
Checking windscreen wiper, windscreen washer and
a7
headlight washer system function
Checking and lubricating controls, adjustment mechanisms
a8
in general, hinges, doors and lids
b Lifting the vehicle
c Visual inspection for leaks
c1 Checking radiators for fouling; clean if necessary
d Refitting the rear flat undertray section

d1 Refitting the rear bumper diffuser
f Setting the vehicle on the ground
g Service counter reset
g1 DEIS Diagnosis
h Road test (vehicle test)
i Car wash and cleaning interiors (optional)
L Treating interior trim in leather (if necessary)
Check for the existence of open campaigns on the ModisCS

system and record the service in the service entry
Procedure carried out by (Dealer):
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:
Stamp with company trading name

Full signature
Print Exit
Model Updated on
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
20,000 Km (12,500 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C
necessary

N (perform more frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)

O
conditions)

Q

R1
fasteners
U fluid reservoir

Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1
recommended)
Z4
15 years)


a5
a7
a8

g1 DEIS Diagnosis

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
Print Exit
Model Updated on
Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
40,000 Km (25,000 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C
necessary

N (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Visual inspection for leaks and checking ancillary drive

O
belt (perform while draining the engine oil)
conditions)

Q

R1
fasteners
U fluid reservoir

Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1
recommended)
Z4
15 years)


a5
a7
a8

g1 DEIS Diagnosis

Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Scheduled Maintenance File
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
60,000 Km (37,500 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
A Vehicle reception - preparation  
B Indicator light check o o
C o o
necessary
D EPB electric parking brake function check o o
E Lifting the vehicle  

F Internal visual brake wear inspection o o
G Removing the rear bumper diffuser  
H Removing the rear flat undertray section  
I Checking the gear oil level o o
L Checking the hydraulic clutch system fluid level o o
N (perform more frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)  

O o o
Replacing ancillary
O1 drive belts (every 37,500 miles/2 years - replace more o o
frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil tank
P (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating  
conditions)

Q o o
Visual inspection of differential-gearbox assembly, fasteners

R and bushings and the condition of the exhausts (perform o o
while draining engine oil)
R1 o o
fasteners
S Setting the vehicle on the ground  
T Replacing the engine oil filter  
T1 Filling with engine oil o o
U fluid reservoir  
o o
Visual inspection of pipes o o
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:02 AM
Scheduled Maintenance File https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
Z Replacing the pollen filter o o
Replacing spark plugs (replace more frequently if the
Z1 o o
vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Z3 Replacing the airbag (every 15 years) o o
Z4 o o
15 years)
a Start the vehicle to check engine oil level o o

a1 Checking tyre pressure o o
a2 Checking wheel tightness o o
a3 Checking the A.C. system o o
o o
Refitting cover on right hand underwindscreen shield  
a5 o o
a6 Checking function of headlights and horn o o
a7 o o
Checking and lubricating controls, adjustment mechanisms in
a8 o o
general, hinges, doors and lids
b Lifting the vehicle  
c Visual inspection for leaks o o
c1 Checking radiators for fouling; clean if necessary o o
d Refitting the rear flat undertray section  
d1 Refitting the rear bumper diffuser  
f Setting the vehicle on the ground  
g Service counter reset o o
g1 DEIS Diagnosis o o
h Road test (vehicle test) o o
i Car wash and cleaning interiors (optional) o o
L Treating interior trim in leather (if necessary) o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:02 AM
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
80,000 Km (50,000 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C o o
necessary


O o o
P tank (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating  
conditions)

Q o o

R1 o o
fasteners
Cleaning, repairing or replacing pipes and hoses in
R2 o o
emissions control system
o o
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:01 AM
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
V2 Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing ignition cables o o

Z4 o o
15 years)

o o
a5 o o
a7 o o
a8 o o

g2 Adjusting idle speed o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:01 AM
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
100,000 Km (62,500 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
External visual inspection of brakes (pads and discs),
C o o
replace if necessary

I1 Replacing gear oil o o
Changing power steering fluid
M2 (change more frequently if vehicle is used in severe o o
operating conditions)

O o o
conditions)

Q o o

R1 o o
fasteners
o o
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:18 AM
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
Z4 o o
15 years)

o o
a5 o o
a7 o o
a8 o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:18 AM
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
120,000 Km (75,000 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C o o
necessary


O o o
Replacing ancillary
O1 drive belts (every 37,500 miles/2 years - replace more o o
frequently if vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Preparations necessary and draining engine oil via plug at base of oil tank
P (replace more frequently if the vehicle is used in severe operating  
conditions)

Q o o

R1 o o
fasteners
Replacing oxygen sensors
R3 o o
(perform at 80,000 miles)
o o
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:19 AM
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
Replacing spark plugs (replace more frequently if the
Z1 o o
vehicle is used in severe operating conditions)
Z4 o o
15 years)

o o
a5 o o
a7 o o
a8 o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:19 AM
Print Exit
Page 1 of 2
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
140,000 Km (87,500 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C o o
necessary


O o o
conditions)

Q o o

R1 o o
fasteners
Replacing oxygen sensors
R3 o o
(perform at 80,000 miles)
o o
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Page 2 of 2
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
Z4 o o
15 years)

o o
a5 o o
a7 o o
a8 o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Print Exit
Page 1 of 3
Model Updated on
February 2011

Mileage in
Job order No.:
Km:
Notes:
160,000 Km (100,000 Miles)

Performed NOT
OK OK
C o o
necessary


O o o
conditions)

Q o o

R1 o o
fasteners
Cleaning, repairing or replacing pipes and hoses in
R2 o o
emissions control system
R4 Replacing catalytic converters o o
o o
1 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Page 2 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
V1 o o
recommended)
V2 Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing ignition cables o o
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing air injection

V3 o o
system components
V4 Replacing fuel injectors o o
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing engine control
V5 ECU and relative sensors (excluding oxygen sensors) and o o
actuators
Adjusting, cleaning, repairing or replacing evaporative and

V6 o o
fuel filler emissions canister

Z4 o o
15 years)

Visual inspection of oil and fluid tightness and of areas
o o
a4 subject to fretting (pipes and hoses)
a5 o o
a7 o o
a8 o o
2 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Page 3 of 3
Performed NOT
OK OK
g2 Adjusting idle speed o o

o o
Technical Manager:
Name: Surname:

Full signature
3 of 3 8/5/2011 11:20 AM
Print Exit
A3.01 Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication system filters
Checking the engine oil level
Always check the engine oil level with a warm engine.
The oil level must be checked with the vehicle standing on a level surface and with the engine idling.
The symbol shown aside is displayed on the left hand TFT display together with the message "Check engine oil level" to indicate that the engine oil level
must be checked.
Proceed as follows:
1. Warm the engine to an engine oil temperature of 90 °C.
2. Run the engine at idle speed.
3. Wait 2 minutes, then open the engine compartment lid and undo the engine oil tank cap (1).
4. Wipe the dipstick on the cap (1).

5. Place the cap (1) on the tank filler pipe with the cap spring (A) in its seat, as shown in the image aside.
If the oil level is too low, identify the cause for excessive oil consumption before refilling.
The space between the MIN and MAX notches corresponds to approximately 2 litres of oil.
6. Remove the cap and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX notches on the dipstick.
DO NOT add oils with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.
7. Top up with the specified oil if necessary, taking care not to exceed the MAX level indicated on the dipstick.
1 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking engine oil level and changing engine oil and engine lubrication s... https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
8. Screw the cap (1) back on tightly.
After topping up, the "Low oil level" symbol shown aside may remain active on the left hand TFT display for a prolonged period of time. This occurs to
allow the system to perform all the checks necessary. This is completely normal.
9. After adding or replacing oil, check the oil level again using the procedure described above.
Draining the engine lubrication system
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the environment.
Remove the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Undo the two drain plugs (1) on the crankcase and the plug (2) under the engine oil tank.
Drain the oil completely.
Replacing the engine oil filter
Tightening torque Nm Class

Engine oil filter Engine oil filter cartridge 25+0 Nm A
-5
Replace damaged parts or parts that have been dropped, even if there is no visual damage.
The engine oil filter is mounted on the engine oil heat exchanger, located behind the intake manifold, and is accessible by simply lifting the engine compartment lid.
The oil filter must be replaced at every oil change.
2 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Drain the engine lubrication system ( A3.01).
Remove the engine oil filter (A) with a 32 mm socket wrench fitted in the relative seat, an extension (USAG 236
1/2" L = 250mm) and a reversible ratchet.
Turning counterclockwise (as indicated by the arrow), unscrew the complete engine oil filter (A).
Protect the surrounding area with absorbent cloths.

Remove the complete filter (A) via the space between the engine oil tank and the intake manifold.
On the workbench, detach the filter element (A1) from the cover (A2), releasing the retainer tabs.
There are plastic tabs at the top of the filter element which fasten to the cover.
Dispose of the filter element (A1) correctly in accordance with applicable recycling procedures.
Remove the gasket (1) from the cover (A2), taking particular care not to damage the seal recess.
Select a new gasket (1) from the spare parts kit and install on the cover (A2), taking particular care not to
damage the gasket itself and the relative seal recess.
Ensure that the gasket (1) is installed correctly and is not twisted.
DO NOT assemble the filter element if the drain pipe O-ring is missing.
Select a new filter element (A1) from the spare parts kit and check that the drain pipe O-ring (2) is installed
correctly
DO NOT fit the filter element directly onto the casting without fastening to the cover first.
Fit the new filter element (A1) onto the cover (A2), ensuring that the plastic retainer tabs click audibly into place.
When installing the filter element, take particular care not to bend or damage the plastic retainer tabs.
If the filter element does not fix correctly to the cover, check that the By-pass valve is still correctly installed
in the cover. If the valve has accidentally detached, replace the cover with a new component. Do not
attempt to repair the By-pass valve, as this may severely compromise filtration.
Check that the filter element (A1) is securely fastened to the cover (A2).
Lubricate the outer edge of the gasket (1) with new engine oil.
3 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Fit the complete engine oil filter (A) correctly in the relative seat on the engine, taking care not to damage the
filter during assembly.
Fasten the engine oil filter (A) with a 32 mm socket wrench fitted in the relative seat, an extension (USAG 236
1/2" L = 250mm) and a reversible ratchet.
4 of 5 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Print Exit
A3.02 Inspecting oil level and replacing Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Checking the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level

Fastening gearbox oil filler/drain plug and clutch Plug 25 Nm B
hydraulic fluid filler/drain plug
The following procedures must be carried out exactly as described to ensure that the hydraulics are proper lubricated and function correctly.
To check the gear oil level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely as described.
Remove the rear diffuser ( E3.12).
Before carrying out any work concerning the transmission oil level, ensure that:
the vehicle is perfectly levelled on the car lift;
reverse gear is engaged, the brake pedal is depressed and the engine is running at idle speed;
engine coolant temperature is 40 - 50 °C.
CAUTION
HOT OIL may be released: use adequate protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1) located on the rear surface of the transmission, and check the level: the fluid must
reach the edge of the hole from which the plug was removed, on the limit of overflowing.
If the level is too low, identify the possible causes for excessive consumption before refilling.
If topping up is necessary, proceed as follows.

Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 (with the short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a newly
opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 and a container for collecting excess oil, top up via the level pipe
until excess oil overflows from the orifice of the cap remove previously.
Let the oil fluid completely until the flow stops.
Tighten the threaded plug (1).

Plug 25 Nm B
Refit the rear diffuser ( E3.12).
Draining the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
1 of 2 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Inspecting oil level and replacing Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=li...
The gear oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Place a container under the plugs indicated in the figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plugs (1) and (2) at the bottom of the gearbox housing.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of used oil in the
environment.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil

Clean the plugs (1) and (2) thoroughly with a suitable degreaser that does not leave residue, and replace the
seals.
Tighten the plugs (1) and (2).

Plug 25 Nm B
Undo the threaded inspection/filler plug (3) located on the rear surface of the transmission.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 01 (with the short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a newly
opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) element 01 and a container for collecting excess oil, fill with 3.9 litres of oil via the
inspection/filler orifice.
Fill with half of the quantity indicated, wait a few minutes for the fluid to settle, then gradually finish filling, until oil
overflows from the check/filler hole.
The quantity of oil required may vary slightly relative to the amount indicated for filling the tank when empty; this
is due to unavoidable pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil level ( A3.02).
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
2 of 2 8/5/2011 11:21 AM
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
A3.03 Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level

The following procedures must be carried out exactly as described to ensure that the hydraulics are
proper lubricated and function correctly.
To check the hydraulic clutch system fluid level correctly, carry out the following procedures precisely as
described.
Before carrying out any work concerning the oil level in the hydraulic clutch system, ensure that:
the vehicle is perfectly levelled on the car lift;
reverse gear is engaged, the brake pedal is depressed and the engine is running at idle speed;
engine coolant temperature is 40 - 50 °C.
CAUTION
HOT OIL may be released: use adequate protection.
Undo the threaded plug (1), located on the left on

the bottom of the differential housing.
This hole is connected to a level pipe.
When the threaded plug is unscrewed, fluid

pooling within the level pipe may drain out.
Checking Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system fluid level Page 2 of 2
Check the fluid level with the level pipe (2): the fluid
must reach the upper edge of the pipe, on the
limit of overflowing.
If the level is too low, identify the possible

causes for excessive consumption before
refilling.
If the level is too low (oil not overflowing), top up as

follows.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 02 (with
the long spout), aspirate the specified oil from a
newly opened container.
Using the pump (AV 8174) with attachment 02 and
a container for collecting excess oil, top up via
the level pipe until excess oil overflows.
Let the oil fluid completely until the flow stops.
Check that the hydraulic fluid temperature does not
exceed 80 °C during operation.
Tighten the threaded plug (1).

Plug 25 Nm B
Refit the rear flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.04 Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level
Checking the windscreen and headlight washer fluid level
The windscreen/headlight washer fluid reservoir cap is located underneath the luggage compartment lid.
Open the cap (A) on the windscreen/headlight

washer fluid filler pipe.
Check that the level of the windscreen/headlight
washer fluid level is visible in the filler neck.
If the level of the windscreen/headlight washer fluid
level is not visible in the filler neck, top up with
the specified fluid until the level is visible in the
filler neck.
Close the cap (A).
A level sensor mounted on the reservoir detects when the windscreen/headlight washer fluid
level is too low and causes the relative warning light on the control panel to light.
Checking brake system fluid level Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
A3.05 Checking brake system fluid level
Checking brake fluid reservoir level
The brake fluid reservoir is located at the centre of the luggage compartment, underneath the right hand
underwindscreen shield.
Open and close the cover VERY CAREFULLY,

as the fastener tabs are particularly fragile.
Remove the cover (A) from the right hand

underwindscreen shield to access the brake fluid
reservoir cap, prising off at the position indicated
by the arrow.
Undo the cap (B) from the brake fluid reservoir.
The fluid contained in the brake system is

harmful in the event of contact with the eyes
or skin.
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the
affected area immediately with plenty of
running water.
Brake fluid may also damage paintwork.
Check that the brake fluid level in the reservoir is

near the MAX limit.
Levels approaching the MIN limit may be
indicative of excessive brake fluid consumption.
If the level is near the MIN limit, top the system up

with brake fluid as follows.
Always use fresh oil of the recommended type
and in the quantity indicated, taken from
sealed containers.
The circuit is filled with synthetic oil.

Using mineral oil may cause irreparable
damage to the rubber seals in the system.
Fill the brake fluid reservoir to the MAX level.
Tighten the cap (B) firmly onto the brake fluid

reservoir.

Fit the cover (A) onto the right hand

underwindscreen shield, inserting the rear tabs
in the respective seats first and then the front
tabs.
Checking the power steering system fluid level Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
A3.06 Checking the power steering system fluid level
Checking the power steering system fluid level
FROM Ass.ly No. 98002, a different power steering fluid is prescribed.

Before topping up or filling, always check which type of fluid should be used, as mixing the two different
types of power steering fluid will damage the power steering system itself.
The power steering fluid level must be checked with the system warm, after driving for at least 15 Km.
If checked cold, the level may appear to be excessively low even with the correct amount of fluid in the
system.
At the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE, check the level of liquid in the power steering
system.
Undo and open the cap (A).
Checking the power steering system fluid level Page 2 of 2
Use the dipstick on the cap (A) to check that the

power steering fluid level is between the MIN
and MAX levels.
There are MIN and MAX levels indicated on both
sides of the dipstick. Use the levels on the side
indicating the temperature 90°C.

sealed containers.

If the level is near the MIN level, top up with power

steering fluid to reach the MAX level.
Levels approaching the MIN limit may be
indicative of excessive power steering fluid
consumption.
Close and tighten the cap (A) securely.
Checking coolant level and topping up Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
A3.07 Checking coolant level and topping up
Checking the cooling system fluid level
CAUTION
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures and pressure.
ALWAYS WORK WHEN THE ENGINE IS COLD.
Check that the coolant level is always as indicated

by the dotted line in the figure aside.
If not, unscrew the cap (A) and top up to the correct
level with the specified fluid.
Fully tighten the filler cap (A) onto the expansion
tank.
Filling the cooling system
CAUTION
Check that all the connection sleeve clamps are tight.
Static filling (engine off)
Remove the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).

Remove right hand engine compartment shield.
01) Do not disconnect bleed pipes on expansion tank.
02) Undo expansion tank plug (1) and slowly pour

coolant, alternating this operation with repeated
pauses of a few seconds so as to allow the
bleeding of the air present inside system.
03) Pay attention to the passage of coolant inside
vent pipe (2) from engine to expansion tank to
confirm the first filling of engine cooling circuit.
04) Complete filling until reaching the point where

fluid inside expansion tank is at 60 mm from filler
plug top (1) (MAX level), corresponding to about
2 litres of coolant inside expansion tank.
Dynamic filling (engine on)
05) Screw plug (1) onto expansion tank.
06) Check that heater circuit is off.

07) Start engine at idle speed and wait for 5 minutes.
08) Keep engine running at idle speed, check level and, if necessary, top up until MAX level.
09) Take and keep engine at 2000 rpm for 30 seconds.
10) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 30 seconds.
14) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 2 minutes (or until radiators electric fans are enabled).
16) Take and keep engine at 2000 rpm for 1 minute.
18) Open heater circuit selecting the max. temperature of air conditioning system for both “zones”.
20) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 2 minutes.
23) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 1 minute.
26) Close heater circuit.
27) Turn engine off.
28) Allow engine to cool until water temperature is 40 - 45 °C (1h and 30'- 2 hours) with expansion tank plug
open.
29) If necessary, top up until reaching the point

where fluid level in header tank is 60 mm from
filler plug top (1) (MAX level).
Tighten the cap (1).
Refit the engine compartment cosmetic shields ( E3.13).
Replacing the active carbon filter Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
A3.08 Replacing the active carbon filter
Removing the active carbon filter
Replace the active carbon filter at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE. The filter is located
in front of the left hand rear wheel bay.
Disconnect the battery ( F2.01).

Remove the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the rear left hand wheelhouse.
Only for vehicles with TPMS tyre pressure

monitoring system (optional)
Remove the bracket (1), complete with trigger,

undoing the screws indicated and without
disconnecting the trigger from the system.
Remove pipe (7) from the indicated mounting rib.
On pipes (2) there are two "double lock" safety clips.

To disconnect the "double-lock" quick connector,
using due caution and by pressing on both sides,
push the safety clip out of its seat until you hear
the "unclick".
The difference between the safety clip "clicked"
and "unclicked" position is only a few
millimetres.
Then press on both sides of quick coupling, and

detach pipes (2) from the active carbon filter (A).
Disconnect the connector (4).
Undo the screw indicated fastening the active

carbon filter mounting bracket (A).
Working from underneath, undo the two screws

indicated fastening the active carbon filter
mounting bracket (A).
Remove the active carbon filter (A) from the wheel
bay.
Remove the active carbon filter (A) completely from
the wheel bay, complete with mounting bracket,
diagnostic pump filter and diagnostic pump.
On the work bench, detach the active carbon filter
from the relative mounting bracket.
Refitting the active carbon filter

Fastening active carbon filter mounting bracket to Screw 8 Nm C
chassis
Fit the active carbon filter on the relative mounting

bracket as originally installed.
Fit the active carbon filter (A) complete with bracket
in the wheel bay.
Fit the active carbon filter (A), complete with
bracket, in the relative seat and tighten the two
screws indicated.

Screw 8 Nm C
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the active

carbon filter mounting bracket (A).

Screw 8 Nm C
After connecting the quick connector pipes (2)

correctly onto active carbon filter (A), with due
caution and pressing on both sides of
the "double-lock" clips indicated, push the clips
into their seats until they click audibly into place
and the pipes are secured correctly.
The difference between the safety clip "unclicked"
and "clicked" position is only a few millimetres.
Connect the connector (4).
Secure pipe (7) inside the indicated mounting rib.
Only for vehicles with TPMS tyre pressure

monitoring system (optional)
Fasten the bracket (1), complete with trigger, onto

the chassis, tightening the screws indicated.
Refit the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).

Refit the rear left hand wheelhouse.

Reconnect the battery ( F2.01).
Connect the DEIS diagnostic tester to the diagnostic socket ( F2.10).

Perform the "Fuel tank tightness test" cycle.
Replacing the oxygen sensors Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
A3.09 Replacing the oxygen sensors
Replacing the front oxygen sensors

Oxygen sensors Oxygen sensor 50 Nm B
Do not clean or apply grease on the oxygen sensor thread.

Do not use solvents or thread locking products as they may impede correct sensor operation.
The oxygen sensor thread is pre-lubricated by the manufacturer with a specific product.
Whenever a sensor is replaced, the self-acquired parameters must be deleted from the ECU memory.
The front oxygen sensors are mounted on the exhaust manifolds.
Front left hand oxygen sensor

Remove the left hand engine compartment shield.


Detach the indicated clamp fastening the cable.
Unscrew and remove the front left hand oxygen

sensor (A) from the left hand exhaust manifold
and replace.
Tighten the front left hand oxygen sensor (A) onto
the left hand exhaust manifold.

Oxygen sensor 50 Nm B
Attach the indicated clamp fastening the cable.


Front right hand oxygen sensor

Remove the right hand engine compartment shield.

Remove the rear right hand wheelhouse.
Unscrew and remove the front right hand oxygen

sensor (A) from the right hand exhaust manifold
and replace.
Tighten the front right hand oxygen sensor (A) onto
the right hand exhaust manifold.


Replacing the rear oxygen sensors

Do not clean or apply grease on the oxygen sensor thread.

Do not use solvents or thread locking products as they may impede correct sensor operation.
The oxygen sensor thread is pre-lubricated by the manufacturer with a specific product.
Whenever a sensor is replaced, the self-acquired parameters must be deleted from the ECU memory.
The rear oxygen sensors are mounted onto the rear of the catalytic converters.
Rear left hand oxygen sensor

Disconnect the connector (1), detaching from the

relative mounting bracket.
Undo the relative fastener screw to open the clamp

with sheath (2) fastening the rear left hand
oxygen sensor cable.
Unscrew and remove the rear left hand oxygen

sensor (A) from the left hand catalytic converter
and replace.
Tighten the rear left hand oxygen sensor (A) onto
the left hand catalytic converter.

Tighten the relative fastener screw to close the

clamp with sheath (2) fastening the rear left hand
Connect the connector (1), attaching onto the


Rear right hand oxygen sensor

Disconnect the connector (1), detaching from the

Undo the relative fastener screw to open the clamp

with sheath (2) fastening the rear right hand
Unscrew and remove the rear right hand oxygen

sensor (A) from the right hand catalytic converter
and replace.
Tighten the rear right hand oxygen sensor (A) onto
the right hand catalytic converter.

Tighten the relative fastener screw to close the

clamp with sheath (2) fastening the rear right
hand oxygen sensor cable.
Connect the connector (1), attaching onto the


Replacing the engine air filter Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
A3.10 Replacing the engine air filter
Replacing the air filter
Place a few strips of adhesive tape to protect the

bodywork on the areas shown in the photo aside.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the air filter

box cover (A) to the air filter box.
WARNING: take care not to damage the
bodywork during air filter box cover handling.
Prise out and move the air filter box cover (A) out of
its seat.
Replacing the engine air filter Page 2 of 2
Remove the air filter (B) from the relevant seat and
replace.
Fit the new air filter (B) in the relevant seat.

Fit the air filter box cover (A) in its relevant seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the air filter
Remove the adhesive tape fitted previously.
Replacing the air conditioning and heating system filter Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.11 Replacing the air conditioning and heating system filter
Replacing the pollen filter
The pollen filter is located under the luggage compartment lid, on the right hand underwindscreen shield.
Gently detach and remove the seal (A) from the

relative seat.
Remove the pollen filter (B) from the relative seat
and replace.
Fit the new pollen filter (B) in the relative seat.
Fit and affix the seal (A) in the relative seat.
If necessary, apply new double sided adhesive
tape underneath the seal (A) to fix into the
relative seat.
Checking tension and replacement of auxiliary utilities belts Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
A3.12 Checking tension and replacement of auxiliary utilities belts
Checking the tension of the ancillary belt

Fastening complete tensioner Screw 25 Nm B
Crank the engine by a few revolutions then apply

the frequency probe (A) of the belt tension
measurement instrument (95978151) at the mid
point of the lower section of belt, avoiding
contact with the belt.
Tap the belt near the probe with a screwdriver and
check that the value indicated by the instrument
is 156 ± 10 Hz.
If the tension measured is less than the prescribed
value, replace the complete belt tensioner as
follows.
Remove the belt as illustrated previously.

Undo the screw (3) and remove the complete
tensioner (2).
When fitting the new belt tensioner, ensure that the

locator pin (B) is correctly inserted in the relative
seat on the front engine cover.
Fit the tensioner (2) and fasten by tightening the

screw (3).

Screw 25 Nm B
Repeat the ancillary drive belt tension setting procedure described previously.
Removing the ancillary belt
The engine ancillary drive belt must be replaced at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Work from underneath the vehicle.

With a 15 mm (1) fixed wrench applied to the
tensioner pulley fastener screw (2), rotate the
mobile tensioner counterclockwise to loosen the
belt and enable its removal, first from the pulley
on the A.C. compressor, then from the other
pulleys.
Remove the worn belt (A).
Refitting the ancillary belt
In order not to damage the belt, do not fold it

with sharp corners and do not let it come
into contact with oil or fuel.
Working by hand only and using no tools, fit the belt

(A) as originally installed onto the relative pulleys
and tensioners.
Check the tension of the ancillary belt ( A3.12).
Checking and replacing spark plugs Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
A3.13 Checking and replacing spark plugs
Removing the spark plugs

Remove the ignition coils ( F3.02).
Using a universal articulated wrench, undo and

remove the spark plugs (A).
Refitting the spark plugs

Fastening spark plug Spark plug 11 Nm A
Before refitting the spark plugs, check that they are in good condition and replace if necessary.
Check that the spark plug electrode gap is between 0.6 and 0.7 mm. Oil the threaded part of the spark plug with
very little oil.
Checking and replacing spark plugs Page 2 of 2
When refitting the original spark plugs, clean them

with compressed air to remove any dirt.
Fit the spark plugs (A) in the relevant holes in the
cylinder head.
Use an articulated wrench to hand tighten the spark
plugs until the gasket sits up against the support
seat.
Loosen slightly.
Use a torque wrench to tighten the spark plugs.

Spark plug 11 Nm A
Refit the ignition coils ( F3.02).

Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.14 Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections
Checking Blow-by system pipes and connections
Check the state of the pipes (1), (2), (3) and the
tightness of the relative clamps, around the oil
tank and intake ducts.
Check the connections. Replace the relative pipe
and/or clamp if any leakage or sweating is noted.
Check the state of the pipes (4) and the tightness of

the relative unions on both cylinder heads.
Replace the relative pipe and/or clamp if any leaks
are noted.
Checking cooling system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.15 Checking cooling system pipes and connections
Checking cooling system pipes and connections

Remove the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Remove the front flat undertray section ( E3.12).
Check that the pipes and pipe unions on the water pump, the radiator and the expansion tank are undamaged.
Replace any worn pipe unions or loose clamps.
Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.16 Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections
Checking injection and ignition system pipes and connections
Check the state of the connection pipes between the fuel tank and the high pressure pump, and of the fuel rail
on the intake manifold.
In the event of leakage, replace the pipe and check the system.
Check the state of the cables and connectors for the Motronic ECUs and the coils. If the outer casing or the
connector locks are damaged, replace the cable.
In the event of malfunction, check the spark plugs. Replace the spark plugs at the intervals indicated in the
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Checking exhaust system connections Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.17 Checking exhaust system connections
Checking exhaust system connections

Check the state of the system components, the connections between the manifolds and the catalytic
converters, and the connections between the catalytic converters and the silencers, then check the
fasteners.
Checking exhaust emissions Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.18 Checking exhaust emissions
Checking exhaust emissions
Check CO, HC and NOx levels by connecting the

tester to the unions on the connector pipes for
the exhaust manifold, after removing the two
nuts (1).
After completing the procedure, tighten the two nuts
(1).
Checking service brakes for wear Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
A3.19 Checking service brakes for wear
Checking service brakes for wear
At the intervals indicated in the Maintenance Schedule, check the state of wear of the brake pads and discs.
Remove the wheels ( D2.01).
Remove all.
The front brake pads are fitted with a wear indicator connected to the brake failure warning light on the
instrument panel. Should this warning light illuminate, check the thickness of the pads and the state of the
braking surfaces on the discs.
In the event of excessive wear, even of just one pad, replace all the pads on the axle.
Checking and inspecting the brake discs
The brake discs must be perfectly clean, free of any oil, grease or rust, and must not be excessively scored.
In the event of poor braking performance not attributable to the state of the brake pads and callipers, carry out a
series of dimensional checks on the discs.
Using a dial gauge, measure the planarity with the disc fitted on the wheel hub.
Using a micrometer, measure the parallelism between the contact surfaces and the pads at different points on
the braking surface.
Using the special tool, check the roughness of the pad contact surface.
The rear discs differ from the front discs in that they have two additional holes to enable access to the brake
shoe adjustment pin without removing the disc.
They also have a large friction surface on the inner side for the parking brake.
Checking CCM brake disc wear
This operation includes:

visually inspecting for alterations in the brake disc friction surface;
checking the minimum brake disc thickness (maximum permitted wear 0.5 mm);
checking the brake disc edges for damage (damage caused by improper use).
The brake discs must be replaced if:

there are significant alterations in the friction surface;
the brake discs are worn beyond the minimum required thickness (material abraded).
Normally, both forms of brake disc wear occur simultaneously. Only rarely, following prolonged stress on the
race track with large temperature variations on the friction surface, surface alteration may become so
pronounced as to necessitate earlier replacement of the brake discs.
The front and rear CCM brake discs must always be replaced in pairs (both discs on the same axle).
Front and rear CCM disc wear is calculated by the instrument panel operating software, which uses an
algorithm to determine when to switch on the relative indicator to warn the driver.
The bedding in procedure must be carried out after replacing discs or the pads alone.
Disc replacement is necessary when the wear limit is reached, as indicated by the relative warning on the
TFT display, or if visual inspection reveals any surface damage.
Visual inspection of the disc friction surface
The alterations in the friction surface are caused by the material oxidising as a result of extremely high
thermal stress. The high temperatures reached by the brake discs, especially in race track conditions,
cause the material to oxidise progressively.
Surface alteration is detrimental to braking comfort, reduces brake disc resistance and increases pad wear,
requiring the replacement of components earlier than scheduled.
Understanding the signs of brake disc wear and consequent operations necessary:
The figure aside shows the friction surface after

normal brake usage in road conditions; disc
replacement is not necessary in this case.
The figure aside shows the friction surface after a

long journey, with only one intense brake
application; here too, disc replacement is not
necessary.
The figure aside shows the friction surface after an

appropriate mileage or following maximum
stress in track conditions; disc replacement is
necessary in this case.
The figure aside shows the friction surface after an

appropriate mileage or following maximum
stress in track conditions; disc replacement is
necessary in this case.
Checking minimum disc thickness

The minimum thickness of cross-drilled discs must always be measured at the base of the inner or outer
friction surface track. Use a suitable micrometrical screw or a brake disc template.
Maximum permissible wear is 0.5 mm
Checking disc edges for damage
Regardless of the overall state of wear, discs

with damage around the edge must be
replaced.
Unauthorised work to the holes drilled in the

brake disc surface may damage the disc.
If necessary, clean the holes drilled in the brake
discs and the friction surface with a high
pressure cleaner.
Never carry out mechanical work on the disc
holes.
CAUTION
When using pressure cleaners to clean discs, use
adequate face protection.
When assessing damage to the disc edges, apply

the following criteria:
maximum permissible width/depth 2 mm;
maximum permissible length (10 mm);
no more than 3 damaged areas are permissible.
Check CCM brake pad wear
After severe race track use, visually inspect the appearance of the pads as well as checking for wear. If a
marked white coloration is noted around the edges of the pads, extending almost as far as the metal
backing plate, the pads must be replaced to ensure optimum braking performance.
CCM brake disc wear
As the discs wear, their mass reduces. This is due to two simultaneous effects - a thermal effect, which burns
the carbon fibres, and a mechanical abrasion effect between the disc and pad.
The instrument panel operating software uses an algorithm to calculate, in relation to effective vehicle usage
(e.g.: deceleration caused by braking), separate wear indices for the front P(a) and rear P(p) carbon brake
discs, expressed as a percentage (%) of wear.
These indices are periodically compared against a threshold value (100%). Upon reaching this threshold, an
amber warning signal (possible danger of disc failure) is shown on the TFT display, warning the user that
disc replacement is necessary.
The user is warned of this condition by the appearance of the message: “CCM brake discs worn” on the
display, together with the specific amber symbol. At the end of the display cycle, or when the MODE button is
pressed (with “Escape” function), the symbol is reduced to icon form.
An RLI for “Number of brake disc replacements” is also generated, identifying the number of times that the discs
have been replaced.
Once the brake discs have been replaced, the wear index may be reset on the instrument panel.
The wear index on the instrument panel may only be reset once the discs have been replaced, after the
index has exceeded 100%.
To maintain a record of the latest brake wear index reset, three values are stored in the statistics memory for the
front and rear brakes, which are updated upon reset (with the possibility of storing the last seven resets):
Number of brake disc changes counter: --------- (dimensionless number)
Kilometres at first disc brake change: --------- Km
Wear percentage at first disc brake change: --------- %
At each service, submit the following data (printing out the parameters from the instrument panel):
vehicle serial number;
vehicle mileage (“Odometer” parameter);
“Disc Wear Index” value.
There are essentially 5 different scenarios possible:

1 - Replacing all carbon discs due to vehicle usage;
2 - Replacing one carbon disc (or two discs on same axle) due to failure;
3 - Replacing a working instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument possible);
4 - Replacing of a malfunctioning instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument not possible);
5 - Replacing the carbon discs before reaching wear threshold (“Disc Wear Index” parameter < 100%).
1 - Replacing the carbon discs due to vehicle usage

In this situation, the amber warning signal on the TFT display is lit.
Use the diagnostic instrument to verify from the instrument panel that the disc wear index has exceeded
100%.
Replace the carbon discs.
Reset the carbon disc wear index on the instrument panel with the diagnostic instrument.
2 - Replacing one carbon disc (or two discs on same axle) due to failure
In this situation, only one disc (or two discs on the same axle) are replaced, without modifying the parameters
on the instrument panel.

In other terms, the “Disc Wear Index” parameter is left at the value for the discs not being replaced (partially
worn).
3 - Replacing a working instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument possible)

Order a spare instrument panel, specifying:
vehicle serial number;
mileage indicated on old instrument panel (“Odometer” parameter readable with diagnostic instrument);
“Disc Wear Index” parameter value (readable with diagnostic instrument).
Upon approval from SAT (which will verify the data supplied by the dealership), the Spare Parts Department will
confirm the order and supply a spare instrument panel (with the estimated values from the replaced unit).
4 - Replacing a malfunctioning instrument panel (dialogue with diagnostic instrument not possible)
Order a spare instrument panel, specifying:
the serial number of the vehicle;
estimated vehicle mileage.
SAT will verify the estimated vehicle mileage.

Using a table correlating vehicle usage time with increase in disc wear % compiled by the engineering division,
SAT will determine the % disc wear value to be entered in the new instrument panel in relation to the mileage
recorded at the last service.
Upon approval from SAT (which will verify the data supplied by the dealership), the Spare Parts Department will
confirm the order and supply a spare instrument panel (with the estimated values from the replaced unit).
5 - Replacing the carbon discs before reaching wear threshold (“Disc Wear Index” parameter < 100%)
This is a non-standard procedure and may only be performed by authorised personnel. Contact the Ferrari SAT
service.
Checking service/parking brake operation and control play Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.20 Checking service/parking brake operation and control play
Checking service brake/parking brake function
Check the brake pedal travel and STOP light switch function.
Road test the vehicle to check braking performance.
Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).
Check electric parking brake operation and the state of the parking brake cables.
Checking suspension components Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.21 Checking suspension components
Checking suspension components
Road test the vehicle to check shock absorber performance and to check for suspension noise.
Remove all.
Check tightness of suspension components.

Check that all protective gaiters are in good order and that the ball joints on the stub axle and on the rear hub
holder have sufficient play.
Check that the silentblock bushings at the arm and shock absorber mounting points on the chassis have
sufficient play.
Check that the arms are not deformed and exhibit no signs of failure.
Check the state of the upper rebound stop bushes on the shock absorbers.
Check front and rear stabiliser bar alignment and the state of the rubber mounts and tie rod ball joints.
Checking vehicle set-up Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.22 Checking vehicle set-up
Checking vehicle set-up
The following operations must be performed beforehand to ensure that vehicle set-up parameters are checked
correctly
Check that the tyre pressure is correct.

Check the steering and transmission system components.
Ensure that there is no backlash between the ball tie-rod of the steering box and the stub axle, and between
the ball tie-rod and the rear hub holder.
Check the state of the protective gaiters on the steering box tie-rods, on the toe-in tie-rod and on the axle
shaft tie-rods.
For optimum vehicle performance, the set-up procedure must be performed accurately.
Check that all suspension components are in proper working order.

Check the set-up data.
Vehicle set-up procedure
Important: for proper use see ( D4.07)

For optimum vehicle performance, the set-up procedure must be performed accurately.
Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.23 Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts
Checking proper installation and function of seats and seat belts
With the seat adjustment controls, check that the electrical seats move through their entire adjustment travel
without impediment.
Check that the seat guides are securely fastened to the floor mounts.
Lubricate the guide connections and sliding surfaces with waterproof lithium grease.
Check that the seat belt anchor screws are properly tightened.
Checking and recharging battery Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
A3.24 Checking and recharging battery
Checking battery charge level
If you are in doubt about your battery or it if shows signs of inefficiency, check its charge level.
For the purposes of such a check, the battery must be at room temperature (between 15 and 25 °C) and must
have been resting for at least 6 hours, i.e. it must not have been connected to any devices, even if these
absorb only a few milliamperes.
Then proceed as follows:

Remove the battery ( F2.01).
Remove the passenger footrest.
Detach the positive terminal (A) from the battery.

Connect the terminals of an appropriately calibrated
digital multimeter (Beckman T11 OB) (M) to the
battery poles.
Read the voltage value displayed by the multimeter to two decimal points. If the battery is insufficiently
charged, with a voltage of less than 12.55, either recharge or replace, depending on the voltage measured.
Once the battery has been recharged, make sure it maintains the same charge over time by carrying out a
test under full-load conditions.
To carry out the test, use a battery tester with a current range of 200 to 300 amperes.
Test the battery in the following way:

connect the battery tester to the battery terminals;
measure the battery temperature;
set the battery tester to a discharge current equal to 75% of the value indicated on the battery identification
plate (DC);
apply load for 15 seconds and measure the voltage while still under load;
compare the voltage measured (with open circuit) against the limits given in the following table.
Charging level (Volt)
Percentage charge
Higher than 12.70 100
Between 12.45 and 75 ÷ 100
12.70
Between 12.36 and 50 ÷ 75
12.45
Lower than 12.36 0 ÷ 50
Check the tester setting regularly.
If the voltage measured under full-load conditions is lower than the voltage indicated in the table, the battery
must be considered faulty and must be replaced.
The battery charging level can be considered sufficient if it is higher than 75 ÷ 80%; the multimeter display
must show voltage levels which are not lower than 12.50÷12.55 Volts.
Recharge the battery ( A3.24).
Perform the procedure if the voltage measured is less than the limit value specified.
You are reminded that, once the battery has been recharged, the voltage of the poles is not a faithful
indication of the charging levels because of the electrolyte stratification inside the battery. This
phenomenon occurs when the electrolyte has not yet mixed evenly; however, this condition is obviously
achieved when the battery is in use.
Checking and recharging battery
A Ferrari battery charger or a "stabilised" battery charger is necessary for this procedure.
Check that the terminals and terminal clamps are thoroughly clean and securely fastened.
Visually inspect the outer casing of the battery for cracks.
On models fitted with the special socket for the Ferrari battery charger, this socket can be used to start
the vehicle when the battery is flat. If the vehicle does not have the special socket, an auxiliary battery
and/or a stabilised battery charger must be connected to the terminal poles on the vehicle’s battery,
without using the battery master switch.
If the vehicle is not used for extended periods, remove the battery from the vehicle and recharge at least
once every 3 months.
If you intend to the leave battery connected to the electrical system, to keep certain connected devices
operating (car radio channel memory, alarm system, etc.), recharge at least once a month.
In case of doubt or if any signs of reduced battery performance are noted, check battery charge and/or check
the current absorption of the vehicle electrical system.
CAUTION
The battery must be charged in a well ventilated place away from sources of heat and/or naked flame.
Recharge the battery ( A3.24).

Refit the battery ( F2.01).
Check the breather pipe for kinks or obstructions which could raise the internal battery pressure and
damage the battery.
Apply water-repellent lubricant to the electrical system terminal clamps and reconnect the clamps to the
battery terminals.
Tighten the terminal screws securely.
Recharging the battery
CAUTION
The batteries contain sulphuric acid (corrosive) and, in certain conditions, release explosive gas, especially
during charging; take the precautionary measures prescribed by the instructions and by Law Decree
626/94 – sections 40 and 46, requiring the use of personal protection devices (gloves, goggles etc.) when
working with batteries.
Do not smoke near the battery and keep all sources of flames and sparks away from the battery.
Keep your face out of the area directly above the battery during installation and removal.
To safeguard the electrical components fitted in the vehicle, always use a battery charger with a max.
constant voltage of 14.4 ÷ 15V and a charge current limiting device, and disconnect the battery from
the vehicle electrical system before recharging.
Lead acid batteries do not produce gas during recharging, but the voltage values must be observed to
prevent potential swellings and explosions of the accumulator.

Clean the battery terminals thoroughly with a brush or other suitable tool.
Measure the battery voltage with a digital multimeter.
The maximum time necessary for the battery to start accepting a measurable charge current, in relation to
voltage measured, is as follows.
Charging times and procedure
Voltage (Volt) Current (A) Time (hours)

Standard 14.4 to 15 max. max. 6 to 12 (10 to 12 ÷ 24
20% battery
capacity)
Quick 14.4 to 15 max. 18 to 30 (30 to 50% 4÷6
battery capacity)
From completely flat, 14.4 to 15 max. 1÷2 12 to 24 (then
battery with perform “normal”
voltage of 10 to 9 charge)
V
Ensure the internal temperature of the battery never exceeds 45°C during recharging. If this occurs, stop
recharging for a few hours, then resume and complete the procedure.
At the end of the recharge cycle, battery voltage must be at least 14.4 – 15.0 V.
If this voltage is NOT reached (even if the battery was charged at constant current) indicates a general
deterioration in the state of the battery. In this case, replacing the battery is recommended even if the
vehicle will start.
Prolonged periods with the battery not in use (more than 2 weeks with the battery master switch ON) may
cause faults at the next recharge cycle. The voltage may reach the value of 14.4 – 15.0 V specified
previously, but the current in the battery may drop rapidly and the battery may fail to maintain charge for
the correct period.
Assessing charge level
Check the battery charge level ( A3.24).
Recharging interval
In the event of the vehicle not in use with the battery connected
The battery must be recharged at certain intervals in the event of prolonged periods with the battery not in
use.
Follow the recharge intervals given in the following table, in relation to the current absorption of the electrical
system.
Absorption (mA)
Interval (days)
< 40 25
40 to 60 20
60 to 80 15
80 to 100 10
In the event of periods with the vehicle not in use and with the battery disconnected or removed for
storage
With the battery removed for storage or with the vehicle kept with the battery disconnected, recharge intervals
must not exceed 3 months.
The battery must be stored or the vehicle must be kept in a dry place with a constant temperature of
approximately 25°C.
Avoid temperatures above 30°C, as self-discharging phenomena increase with increasing ambient
temperature.
Other precautions
Charge the battery with a standard battery charger if battery charge level drops below 75%.
When using battery chargers with automatic disconnection, ensure that the voltage regulator is set to start
charging when battery voltage drops below 12.55 - 12.60 V. In case of doubt, have the voltage
regulator set correctly by the vendor of the battery charger.
If the battery remains in a discharged state for a prolonged period, the battery may be permanently damaged
and may no longer be chargeable. The severity of the damage caused depends on how long and at what
temperature the battery remained in this state.
Battery conditioner
Ferrari vehicles are equipped with a battery conditioner representing the state of the art in battery care.
Using the battery conditioner contributes to prolonging battery life.
The device is stored in a pocket in the car cover bag, which is located in the luggage compartment.
A quick connector socket is installed in a protected and concealed location in the vehicle for connecting the
device.
The previous image shows the location of the socket for connecting the battery conditioner: under the
dashboard on the passenger side.
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
If the vehicle is not to be used for periods longer than a week, the battery conditioner should be connected to the
vehicle to keep the battery in perfect working order.
Instructions for use: active mode and passive mode
Connect the battery conditioner first to the vehicle socket and then to the mains socket: this activates
the “Active” mode, and the battery conditioner may safely be left connected to the vehicle for months.
Place the device outside the vehicle, taking care not to pinch the connector cable and/or damage the seals
when closing the passenger side door.
CAUTION
Ensure that all lids and doors are closed correctly.
Place the battery conditioner in an easily visible location, away from heat sources and out of the reach of
children.
Battery conditioning may be interrupted at any time by simply disconnecting the power cable from the mains
socket.
Always disconnect the mains socket before disconnecting the battery conditioner from the vehicle socket.
Engine start is inhibited as long as the battery conditioner is connected to the vehicle socket (even if the
battery conditioner is disconnected from mains power).
1 - Error warning light

2 - Active mode indicator light: mode indicator
3 - Battery conditioning function indicator light: battery conditioning in process
Indicator light (1) lights continuously: to indicate a malfunction of the vehicle electrical system or battery.
Indicator light (2) lights continuously: battery conditioner in “Active” mode. In this mode, the battery is charged to
the optimum level from a lower level.
Indicator light (3) lights continuously: battery is completely charged and battery conditioner is in “Passive” mode.
In this mode, the device maintains battery charge at an optimum level.
Indicator lights (2) and (3) flashing in alternation:
if the lights flash several times a second, the battery is probably sulphatated;
if the alternating flashing continues for more than 60 minutes, the battery must be replaced;
if the lights flash at intervals of a few minutes, the self-discharge percentage of the battery is high and battery
replacement may be necessary.
If no lights are lit, one of the following cases may be possible:

the battery conditioner cables may be disconnected;
the battery may be incorrectly connected to the vehicle electrical system;
the battery may be defective;

the battery voltage may be insufficient or there may be no power at the mains socket.
After checking the battery conditioner connections (to the mains and to the vehicle socket) and checking for
mains voltage, if lights (2) and (3) indicating the “Active” or “Passive” mode do not illuminate within a few
seconds of connecting the battery conditioner, contact the Ferrari Technical Service Department to have the
vehicle electrical system checked.
Recharging cycle
A - Desulphating
B - Ground
C - Absorption
D - Impulse
Precautions and warnings
Ensure that the cables are not pinched and do not come into contact with hot surfaces or sharp edges.
Never cover the battery conditioner.
Ensure that the mains socket is not exposed to water.
Never recharge a frozen battery.
Never recharge a damaged battery.
Connections to mains electricity must comply with national law concerning high voltages.
Always check the battery conditioner cables before use: there must be no cracks in the cables or the outer
insulation.
Never use a battery conditioner with damaged cables.
Store and use the battery conditioner out of the reach of children; never let children play with the battery
conditioner.
Overheating protection
The battery conditioner is equipped with protection against overheating.

Output power is reduced in the event of increased ambient temperature.
Maintenance
The battery conditioner is maintenance-free.

Do not disassemble the battery conditioner.
The battery conditioner casing may be cleaned with a moistened soft cloth or with neutral detergent.
Always disconnect the battery conditioner from the mains before cleaning.
Checking the state of the chassis and box elements Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.25 Checking the state of the chassis and box elements
Checking the state of the chassis and box elements
The vehicle chassis elements, box sections and outer components are made of aluminium: all repairs
and/or replacements of chassis parts or bodywork components must be performed by skilled
personnel using suitable tooling and equipment.
Check that the chassis structures, box elements and outer skins are in perfect condition. Repair if any
deformation or failure is noted.
Check tightness of chassis fittings.
Checking wheels and tyres Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.26 Checking wheels and tyres
Checking wheels and tyres
CAUTION
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions and at
high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Remove the wheels from the vehicle, then check the state of the wheel rims and tyres.
Check that the tyre pressure matches the value specified
Check the location and fastening of the balancer weights on the inside of the wheel rims.
In case of excessive tyre wear, check the wheel alignment data and perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing
Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.27 Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system
Inspecting the air conditioning and heating system

Remove the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Check the unions on the pipes leading to the condenser, the dehydrator filter, the evaporator and compressor
for gas leakage.
Check that there is no gas leakage from the system hoses.
Check that there is no refrigerant leakage from the recirculation pump and the evaporator.
Inspecting the brake system Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.28 Inspecting the brake system
Inspecting the brake system

Remove all.
Remove the underwindscreen shields ( E4.07).

Remove the right hand underwindscreen shield.
Check the connection pipes leading to the callipers and to the unions on the rigid lines.
Check that there is no leakage near the brake master cylinder unions or on the electrohydraulic unit.
Check that the unions are properly tightened.
Check that the instrument panel warning lights function correctly.
If any leakage is found, replace the defective unions or pipes.
Fill and bleed the brake system ( D3.10).
Tightening bolts, unions and clamps Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.29 Tightening bolts, unions and clamps
Tightening bolts, unions and clamps
At the intervals given in the Maintenance Schedule, check the tightness of the major mechanical fittings.
Refer to the tightening torque tables given at the beginning of each section.
Also check that all hydraulic hose fittings and clamps are correctly tightened.
Replace only with the clamp types specified.
Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.30 Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters
Checking and lubricating hinges and adjusters
Check that the door hinges and the engine and luggage compartment lid hinges are correctly fastened and
that they open and close without free play or noise.
Check that the door locks and the engine and luggage compartment lid release mechanisms function
correctly.
Check the state of the engine compartment lid release cable and of the fuel filler flap, luggage compartment
lid and engine compartment lid emergency release cables.
Check that the luggage and engine compartment lid gas struts function correctly.
Lubricate all surfaces subject to friction with waterproof lithium grease.
Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
A3.31 Treating interior trim in leather - Alcantara
Treating interior leather upholstery
Proper and regular treatment (at least once a year) will preserve the natural qualities and softness of Ferrari
leather trim.
For this precise purpose, a range of specific leather care products (Cleaner and Cream), developed and
tested by Ferrari, is also available. These products may be ordered through the Ferrari Spare Parts
Department, either individually or as part of the "Care Kit", which includes a complete set of car cleaning
products.
For the instructions on how to use the products contained in the "Care Kit", see the "User's Manual,
Carrozzeria Scaglietti Programme" and the instructions included with the Kit.
Never use acidic detergents, turpentine, liquid stain removers, petrol, solvents or domestic cleaning products
to clean leather as these will damage the natural material.
Treating interior trim in Alcantara
Alcantara® is the registered trade mark of a new generation material produced exclusively by Alcantara S.p.A.
Both elegant and practical, Alcantara® combines softness, sophistication, rich colours and outstanding
resilience with remarkably easy maintenance.
The material is ideally suited to innovative and exclusive applications in interior decor, automotive interiors,
fashion clothing and fashion accessories.
Regular care
Avoid rubbing with too much force and do not use equipment with vapour.
Regular cleaning is recommended to maintain the beauty of Alcantara® over time.
Daily cleaning
Simply dust Alcantara® with a soft brush or dry cloth, or clean with a vacuum cleaner.
Weekly cleaning
Avoid the use of rags/blotting paper because they could leave ink on the material.
After dusting Alcantara®, wipe with a slightly moistened white cotton cloth.
Yearly cleaning
With removable upholstery, machine wash using the following procedure (general guidelines for washing).
With non-removable upholstery, use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.
If no specific products are available, dust the material thoroughly.
Be very careful not to wet Alcantara® in depth.
Moisten a soft cloth or sponge with water, squeeze out thoroughly and wipe all surfaces in Alcantara®.
Wipe again with a cloth moistened with clean water and leave to dry completely (overnight).
Once dry, brush delicately with a soft bristled brush to restore the nap.
General guidelines for washing
If removable upholstery needs to be cleaned

completely due to large stains, observe the
washing instructions given aside precisely:
In case of dry-cleaning do not use trichloroethylene and avoid direct contact with equipment that uses
steam.
Alcantara® must not be treated with chlorine-based bleaches.
Never use a centrifuge.
With removable upholstery, Alcantara® may be safely machine washed at approximately 30°C, using a
neutral detergent.
If Velcro is applied to the upholstery hems, protect the Velcro with counter-velcro before washing to prevent
damage to the upholstery.
After washing, allow the upholstery to air-dry and brush gently with a soft-bristled brush.
The bottom of the iron must be at a temperature lower than 110°C.
If necessary, Alcantara® may be ironed, placing a white cloth between the iron and the material.
Spray extraction cleaning machines may only be used at low temperatures.
For non-removable upholstery, follow the procedure give for yearly cleaning.
General guidelines for stain removal
With localised stains, if no specific products for cleaning Alcantara® are available, immediately wipe off
(within 30 minutes) and minimise the stain, working from the edge of the stain toward the middle to stop
it from spreading.
Before wiping off the stain, remove the spilt substance from the upholstery: use a spoon or plastic spatula for
dense substances (yoghurt, jam etc.), use unprinted absorbent paper or a sponge with liquids.
Do not pour the product being used for cleaning directly on Alcantara®.
Avoid rubbing to keep the stain from spreading or penetrating in depth.
Use a moistened and thoroughly squeezed white cloth or sponge to remove stains.
When using a sponge, rinse in clean water and squeeze thoroughly between applications.
Water-soluble stains
Preferably use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.

If no specific products are available, use water, lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol (spirits), depending on the
case.
Fruit juice, jam, jelly, ketchup: use lukewarm water; rinse by patting with clean water.
Blood, egg: use cold water; do not use hot water as it coagulates proteins; rinse by patting with clean water.
Liqueur, wine, beer, cola and tea: use lukewarm water; if a coloured stain remains, use lemon juice then rinse
well.
Copying pencil, cocoa, chocolate, custard or chocolate confectionary, ice cream, mustard: use lukewarm
water; rinse by patting with clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce, sweet coffee: use lemon juice, then wipe with lukewarm water; rinse by
patting with clean water.
Non-water-soluble stains
Preferably use specific products for cleaning Alcantara®.

If no specific products are available, use water, lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol (spirits), depending on the
case.
Lipstick, foundation, mascara, eye shadow, perfume, shoe polish, oil and grease in general, grass stains and
marker pen (including indelible markers): pat with ethyl alcohol then pat with water and rinse.
With difficult to remove grass and marker pen stains, especially if light in colour, clean as soon as possible
before the stain dries excessively.
Chewing gum and wax: fill a plastic bag with ice; when the substance has hardened, break it off in pieces,
then treat with ethyl alcohol.
Stubborn stains
Repeat the treatments described several times.

Often, even non-water-soluble stains require treatment with water after initial cleaning.
Checking radiators for fouling Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.32 Checking radiators for fouling
Checking radiators for fouling
Detritus from the road may enter the vehicle front air intake and foul the radiators; over time, this may
compromise the functionality of the cooling systems so that they are no longer capable of providing sufficient
cooling.
It is therefore VITAL that the radiator cores are checked for fouling at each scheduled service and cleaned, if
necessary, using the following procedure.
Check the radiator cores for fouling.

In the event of fouling, clean with a pressurised water jet or equivalent method.
Check for any dirt accumulated between the water radiator and the AC condenser.
Remove the front bumper ONLY in the event of very heavy fouling.
ONLY in the event of very stubborn dirt, which may be possible with particularly high mileage vehicles,
remove the radiator assembly and remove the dirt by blowing air from the rear of the radiators.
Checking the condition of the radiators
Periodically check the condition of the radiator core. Clean the radiator fins, removing any leaves, insects or
other matter that could obstruct air flow and lead to overheating of the fluid. Straighten any bending
present while being careful not to cause breakage of the radiator core.
Replace the radiator if it proves to be in poor condition.
Periodically check the state of the pipe couplings.
Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (if applicable) Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.33 Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (if applicable)
Cleaning and maintaining matt paints (optional)
NEVER polish the paintwork with any product.
DO NOT lean on the vehicle, especially if wearing garments with buttons, belts, rings, necklaces etc., as
you may cause irreparable damage to the bodywork.
For information on the correct products to be used, contact the Ferrari Service Network.
Proper care by the owner is essential for keeping vehicles with matt paintwork (optional) in pristine condition.
The following is a list of the most important precautions necessary:
Wash the vehicle exclusively with Steam cleaner, and rinse with demineralised water only.
The vehicle must only be dried with an automatic blower or with compressed air. The vehicle may ONLY be
hand dried using a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened with
demineralised water and using Glass cleaning solution in areas with remaining limescale residue. Keep
the cloth in a specific clean container.
To remove grease stains, use a clean Yellow 3M microfibre cloth (Ferrari p/n 571.400.022) moistened in
R107/S solvent (heptane). Use a new cloth only, or a cloth that has never been used with demineralised
water or Glass cleaning solution.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or when the bodywork is still hot.
Never apply adhesive stickers to the bodywork.
Cracks or exposed areas of underlying bodywork caused by stones, scratches, parking damage etc. must be
repaired immediately by the Ferrari Service Network.
Service counter reset Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
A3.34 Service counter reset
Service counter reset
Connect the DEIS tester to the diagnostic socket.
Switch on the DEIS tester.

Click the DEIS button.
Select "NQS - Instrument panel".
Click "Diagnostics"
Select "SET SERVICE"
Technical specifications Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B1.01 Technical specifications
Engine specifications
The engine is a naturally aspirated V8 with a 180° crank.

variable valve timing with continuous high pressure timing adjuster mechanism on all camshafts;
timing chains (one per cylinder bank) with hydraulic chain tensioners;
four overhead composite camshafts (two per cylinder bank) and four valves per cylinder with self-adjusting
hydraulic tappets;
chain driven water pump (integrated in front timing cover) and oil pump;
oil-water heat exchanger incorporated in crankcase, between the two cylinder banks;
the following components are mounted on the engine: the air conditioner compressor, the power steering
pump and the alternator, all of which driven by the crankshaft via a belt;
the engine is cooled by a circuit containing an antifreeze mixture.
Main engine specifications
Type F136FB
Number of cylinders 90° V8
Cylinder bore 3.7 in.
Piston stroke 3.2 in.
Total displacement 4499 cm³
Compression ratio 12.5 : 1
Max. engine speed 9200 rpm
(at rev limiter)
Maximum power (Dir. 558 hp
1999/99/EC)
Corresponding rpm 9000 rpm
Maximum torque (Dir. 398.23 ft. lb.
1999/99/EC)
Corresponding rpm 6000 rpm
Specific tooling and equipment Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
B1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Tensiometer (95978151)
Seem DIAPAZ.
Hook 95973432 (AV 3432)

for hoisting engine.
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_B10... 8/5/2011
Hook (AV 3979)

Torque wrench 95978172 (AV 8172)

(Replaces torque wrench USAG 815F)
Wrench 95978175 (AV 8175)

tightening fuel pump filter retainer ring.
Wrench 95978176 (AV 8176)

tightening fuel level sensor.
Tailpipe cowl for exhaust fume extraction 95978250

(AV 8250)
for use exclusively together with one of the
extension elements AV 8177 for connection to
an exhaust gas extraction system.
Brackets for fastening to engine and clutch housing

shims 95978252 (AV 8252)
Pins for lifting engine-gearbox assembly 95978253

(AV 8253)
for lifting engine/gearbox assembly off rear
subframe after removal of subframe from vehicle.
Engine retainer bracket for gearbox removal

95978254 (AV 8254)
removing the gearbox.
Template 95978257 (AV 8257)

fitting flexible exhaust pipe.
Hook 95977564 (AS 107564)

for lifting the gearbox.
Print Exit
B1.03 Tightening torques

Fastening complete tensioner Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening spark plug Spark plug 11 Nm A
Fastening engine mounting bush - chassis Screw 50 Nm B
Fastening engine strut - engine mounting bush Screw 15 Nm B
Screw 103 Nm A
Fastening heat shield - engine mounting bush Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening ground cable - engine Screw 18 Nm B
Fastening heat shield - removable subframe Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening U-bracket - removable subframe Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening fuel vapour separator mounting bracket - Screw 9 Nm B
removable subframe
Fastening front pipe retainer pillory block - Screw 6 Nm B
bodyshell
Fastening the cylinder heads Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Screw 11 Nm B
Fastening active carbon filter mounting bracket to Screw 8 Nm C
chassis
Fastening fuel tank retainer belts Nut 20 Nm B
Fastening heat shield Screw 9 Nm B
Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening belts to chassis Screw 40 Nm B
Fastening expansion tank to chassis Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening water radiators Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening upper radiator air ducts Screw 6 Nm C
Fastening front brake air ducts Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening electric fans to water radiators Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening underbody mounting brackets for Screws 9 Nm B
cooling system rigid pipes
Fastening water pump Screw 10 ÷ 12 Nm A
Fastening brackets for complete underbody pipe Screws (FROM Ass.ly 6 Nm B
set No. 90802)
Fastening hose union to thermostat Screw collar 4 Nm B
Engine oil filter Engine oil filter cartridge +0 A
25 -5 Nm
Magnetic oil drain plugs M22x1.5 plug 60 Nm B
Oil pump - crankcase Screw 25 Nm B

Fastening engine oil tank to gearbox Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine oil recovery and pick-up pipe Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening oil pump bush retainer bracket Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening oil-water heat exchanger Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening solenoid valve mounting bracket to Screw 4 Nm B
engine air filter box
Fastening engine air filter box Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening hose unions to engine air filter box Screw collar 4 Nm C
Fastening engine air ducts Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening hose unions to engine air ducts Screw collar 4 Nm C
Fastening intake manifold to cylinder heads Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening catalytic converters to silencers Clamp (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm
Fastening catalytic converter mounting brackets to Screw 25 Nm B
chassis
Fastening catalytic converters to exhaust manifolds Clamp 13 Nm B
Fastening exhaust manifolds to cylinder heads Nut 25 Nm B
Fastening A.C. compressor heat shield Screw 9 Nm C
Removing the complete engine Page 1 of 26
Print Exit
B2.01 Removing the complete engine
Removing the complete engine
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the VEHICLE MAY ONLY BE LIFTED WITH THE ANTI-TIPPING SAFETY RETAINERS
INSTALLED.

Remove the engine compartment lid ( E3.01).
Lift the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Drain the cooling system ( B6.07).
Drain the power steering system ( D5.08).
Discharge the air conditioning system ( F5.12).
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801. Remove the engine inspection hatch ( E4.06).
Remove the expansion tank ( B6.02).
Remove the exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Remove both exhaust manifolds.
Remove the engine air ducts ( B4.02).

Remove the complete gearbox ( C2.02).
Remove the indicated clamp and separate the

respective pneumatic actuator system pipes (1).
Disconnect the pipe (46) leading from the

secondary air pump, removing the indicated
clamp.
Open the indicated clamps and remove the
secondary air pipe (2), complete with valves,
from the engine compartment.
Remove the cover (92).
Disconnect the low pressure pipe (3) from the fuel

pump filter.
Disconnect the pipes (4) from the right hand fuel
pipe.
There are two "double-lock" safety clips fitted onto
the union.
the "unclick".
millimetres.
Then press on both sides of the quick couplings and

remove the pipes (4).
Open the indicated clamp fastening the pipes (4) to
the bodyshell.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802
Open the indicated clamp on the low pressure pipe

(3).

pump filter.
Disconnect the pipe (4) from the left hand fuel tank.
A "double-lock" safety clip is fitted on the union.
the "unclick".
millimetres.
Then press on both sides of the quick coupling and

remove the pipe (4).
Open the indicated clamp on the low pressure pipe

(5).
Remove the right hand front heat shield (48),

undoing the indicated screws.
Remove the right hand rear heat shield (47),
undoing the screws indicated by the red arrows.
Follow the same procedure to remove the front and
rear heat shields on the left-hand side of the
engine.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801
Undo the screw indicated fastening the power

steering pump shield (6).
Undo the screw indicated and remove the power

Undo the union (7) on the power steering pump.
Place a container under the clamp (14).

Loosen the clamp (14) and disconnect the pipe (15)
leading from the expansion tank.
Pour the fluid drained from the system into a
container and seal it. DO NOT DISPOSE OF
USED FLUID IN THE ENVIRONMENT.
Allow all the fluid to drain completely.
Remove the clamp (20) on the pipe retainer pillory

block, undoing the screws indicated.
Disconnect the power steering system pipe (8),

removing the indicated clamp.
Disconnect the quick connector (9) of the brake
servo vacuum pipe (19).
from the front timing cover.

from the pressure switch/thermostat.

Detach the brake servo vacuum pipe (19) from the
pillory block.

Remove the indicated clamp and disconnect the

power steering system pipe (8).
Disconnect the quick connector (7) on the power
steering system pipe.
Open the indicated clamp.

Disconnect the quick connector (16) on the water
pipe leading to the recirculation pump.

servo vacuum pipe.

from the pressure switch/thermostat.
Remove the clamp indicated by the red arrow.

Disconnect the pipe (93) from the rigid pipe.
Release the pipe (93) by detaching from the clamp
indicated by the black arrow.
Disconnect the evaporative emissions control

system solenoid valve pipe (18) from the left
hand plenum, removing the indicated clamp.
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and undo the
indicated nut fastening the cable (45).
Detach the clamps retaining the cable (45) to the
chassis.
Release the right hand injection cable (23), cutting

the indicated cable ties and detaching the
indicated clamps fastened to the chassis.

Disconnect the connector (24) from the right hand
Motronic ECU, and disconnect the connector
(25) from the engine compartment cable junction.
Release the right hand injection cable (22) leading

to the ELDOR ECU, removing the indicated
clamps.
Disconnect the connectors (26) from the ELDOR
ECU.
Disconnect the front right hand oxygen sensor

connector (27) and remove the indicated clip.
Pull out the right hand injection cable (22) and place
on top of the intake manifold.
Release the left hand injection cable (28), removing

the indicated clamps.
Disconnect the front left hand oxygen sensor
connector (29) and remove the indicated clip.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the fuel vapour
separator mounting bracket (30) to the chassis.

the indicated clamps, and disconnect the
connector (31) from the engine compartment
cable junction.
Disconnect the connector (32) from the left hand

Motronic ECU.
Pull out the left hand injection cable (28) and place
Remove the right hand removable subframe (33)

from the chassis, undoing the screws indicated.
Remove the U-bracket (35), undoing the two screws

indicated.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the heat
shield (36).
Undo the fours screws indicated fastening the left
hand removable subframe (34) to the chassis.
Remove the indicated clamp fastening the

secondary air pipe (46) and retrieve the pipe.
From underneath, undo the two screws indicated
fastening the secondary air pump mounting
bracket to the left hand removable subframe (34).
Remove the left hand removable subframe (34)
from the chassis.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the ground

cable (38) onto the engine and release the cable
from the indicated fastener clamp on the starter
motor shield.
Remove the heat shields (37) from above the

engine mounting bushes on both sides, undoing
the screws indicated.
Fit the bracket (AV 8252)onto the stud bolts of

cylinder No. 7 on the left hand cylinder bank.

cylinder No. 2 on the right hand cylinder bank.
Tighten the three shims, elements 01 of the tool

(AV 8252), onto the stud bolts of the crankcase.
Fit the hook (AV 3432) onto the stud bolts of the
shims installed previously, and fasten by
tightening the three nuts indicated.
Provisionally fit a block (F), as shown in the photo

aside, to prevent the engine from tipping when
the tool (AV 8254) is removed (as described as
follows).
Remove the tool (AV 8254) from the underside of

the vehicle, undoing the two screws indicated, to
allow more room for the engine removal
procedure.
Using a mobile hydraulic hoist with a minimum load

capacity of 300 Kg, position the lift hook over the
engine.
Use a suitable strap (39) to fasten the hook
(AV 3979) to the hoist.
Using two suitably sized straps (41) and carabiners,
connect the hook (AV 3979) to the brackets
(AV 8252) fastened previously to the exhaust
stud bolts.
Using a suitably sized strap (42) and carabiners,
connect the lift tool (AV 3432) mounted
previously onto the crankcase stud bolts to the
hydraulic hoist.
Tauten the hoist straps with the mobile hydraulic
hoist.
Remove the block (F) fitted previously.
On both sides, undo the screws (42) fastening the

engine strut to the engine mounting bush,
retrieving the relative washer.
Lift the engine by a few millimetres, ensuring that
the strap tension is uniform and that the engine
itself lifts evenly.
On the right-hand side only (as shown in the photo
aside), undo the screws indicated and remove
the engine mounting bush (43), to allow enough
room for the engine to be lifted past the oil pump.
Retrieve the retainer bracket (44).
When removing the engine, work with due

CAUTION to prevent any of the engine's
components - and the engine oil pump, the
variable timing adjuster control solenoid
valves and the mounting brackets for the
secondary air pipes mounted on the cylinder
heads in particular - from colliding with the
chassis.
Lift the engine from the engine compartment and

set down securely in a safe place.
Removing the engine-gearbox assembly
The following procedure is only possible with the rear removable subframe already removed from the vehicle.
Remove the rear subframe ( E2.02).

Remove the air flow meter ( F3.07).
Remove both.
Remove the engine air filter box ( B4.03).

Remove the catalytic converter ( B7.03).
Remove both.
Remove the silencers ( B7.04).

Remove the axle shaft ( C4.01).
Remove both axle shafts from the gearbox flanges.
Remove the shield (1), undoing the 2 nuts and 2

screws indicated.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the heat shield
(2).
Remove the heat shield (2), undoing the screw

indicated.

indicated.
Clean the area surrounding the fastener point for

the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes thoroughly
using a suitable degreaser that does not leave
residue.
Place a container for collecting the clutch hydraulic
system oil under the pipes.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the fork (3) on
the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes.
Pour the oil drained from the system into a
container and seal it. DO NOT dispose of
used oil in the environment.
Disconnect the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes (4)

from the gearbox and plug immediately.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the retainers

on the pillory blocks holding the clutch hydraulic
system oil pipes (4) and the gear oil pipes (6).
Clean the area surrounding the gear oil pipe
fastener point thoroughly with a suitable
degreaser that does not leave residue.
Place a container for collecting the gear oil under
the pipes.
the gear oil pipes.
Disconnect the gear oil pipes (6) from the gearbox

and plug immediately.
Release the oil pipes from the mounting bracket (7)
and remove the bracket from the gearbox.
Move the oil pipes of both systems aside carefully, taking care not to twist or damage them, so that they do
not hinder the removal of the gearbox.
Remove the clamp fastening the gearbox wiring

harness, undoing the screw indicated, and
disconnect the three connectors (8).
Move the gearbox wiring harness out of the way so
that it does not hinder the removal of the
gearbox.
Remove the indicated clamp and separate the

Remove the indicated clamps fastening the pipes to

the rear subframe.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the ground

cable (38) onto the engine and release the cable
from the indicated fastener clamp on the starter
motor shield.
Release the drain pipe (23) from the rubber lined

bracket by undoing the indicated screw.
FROM Ass.ly No. 96750 (see Spare Parts Catalogue

to see vehicles not affected by modification)


brackets by undoing the indicated screws.
Move the pipes out of the way so that they do not
hinder the subsequent operations.
Unscrew the indicated screws fastening the lower

gearbox mounting cross-member (9).


Unscrew the indicated screws and remove the

lower gearbox mounting cross-member (9).


Remove the right hand front heat shield (11),

Remove the right hand rear heat shield (12),
undoing the screws indicated by the red arrows.
Follow the same procedure to remove the front and
rear heat shields on the left-hand side of the
engine.
Remove the heat shields (37) from above the

engine mounting bushes on both sides, undoing
Tighten the eyebolts (elements 27) of the hook

(AV 3432) into the specific seats (13) at the front
of the engine.
Note that the heat shield is still fitted in the photo
aside. The heat shield must be removed.
Screw the hoisting pins (AV 8253) into the vertical

holes in the engine-gearbox connector tie-rods
(14).
Remove the two eyebolts (19) from the tool

(AS 107564).
Screw the two eyebolts (19), removed previously

from the tool, into the relative holes on the
gearbox.
The engine-gearbox assembly must be lifted from

the rear subframe: this operation requires the
use of a mobile hydraulic hoist or a bridge crane
with a minimum load capacity of 300 Kg,
element 31 of the hoisting hook (AV 3432)
(which is also used for the Enzo) and the
crossbeam (AV 3979).
Connect the hook (AV 3432) to the hoist hook of the
bridge crane, aligning so that the crossbeam
(AV 3979) faces towards the rear of the
subframe.
Connect the fixed length bars (17) to the hook
(AV 3432) and connect the variable length tie-
rods (18) to the crossbeam (AV 3979).
Position the hoist over the engine-gearbox
assembly and connect the bars (17) to the
eyebolts (elements 27) of the hook (AV 3432).
Connect the tie-rods (18) to the pins (AV 8253).
Raise the hook to place the bars and tie-rods under
tension.

subframe.
eyebolts (element 27) of the hook (AV 3432).
Hook the tie rods (18) onto the eyebolts (19).
tension.
On both sides, undo the screws (42) fastening the

engine strut to the engine mounting bush,
retrieving the relative washer.
Undo the nut (21) retrieving the washer.

Remove the pin (22) fastening the bushing
mounting (15) to the rear subframe, retrieving
the washer.
Lift the engine-gearbox assembly by a few

millimetres, ensuring that the bar tension is
uniform and that the assembly itself lifts evenly.
Slowly lift the engine-gearbox assembly from the
rear subframe, watching carefully for any
electrical connections that may still be connected
and taking care not to damage any other
components.
Remove the engine-gearbox assembly from the
rear subframe and set down in a stable position
in a safe place.
Refitting the complete engine Page 1 of 30
Print Exit
B2.02 Refitting the complete engine
Refitting the complete engine

Screw 103 Nm A
Fastening removable subframe to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening heat shield - removable subframe Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening U-bracket - removable subframe Screw 5 Nm B
removable subframe
Fastening engine services cable to terminal block Nut 15 Nm B
bodyshell
Fastening rigid pipe to power steering pump Union 37 Nm B
On the right-hand side only, fit the engine mounting

bushing (43), the retainer bracket (44) and hand
tighten the three indicated screws.
On the left-hand side only, undo the three screws
indicated fastening the retainer bracket (44) and
the engine mounting bush (43) to the rear
subframe.

cylinder No. 7 on the left hand cylinder bank.

cylinder No. 2 on the right hand cylinder bank.
Tighten the three shims, elements 01 of the tool

(AV 8252), onto the stud bolts of the crankcase.
Fit the hook (AV 3432) onto the stud bolts of the
shims installed previously, and fasten by
Using a mobile hydraulic hoist with a minimum load

capacity of 300 Kg, position the lift hook over the
engine.
Use a suitable strap (39) to fasten the hook
(AV 3979) to the hoist.
Using two suitably sized straps (41) and carabiners,
connect the hook (AV 3979) to the brackets
(AV 8252) fastened previously to the exhaust
stud bolts.
Using a suitably sized strap (42) and carabiners,
connect the lift tool (AV 3432) mounted
previously onto the stud bolts to the hydraulic
hoist.
Lift the engine, ensuring that the strap tension is
uniform and that the engine itself lifts evenly.
When installing the engine, work with due
CAUTION to prevent any of the engine's
components - and the engine oil pump, the
variable timing adjuster control solenoid
valves and the mounting brackets for the
secondary air pipes mounted on the cylinder
heads in particular - from colliding with the
chassis.
Lift the engine and place in its relative seat on the

engine mounting bushes, but without allowing
the bushes to take up the weight of the engine.
Fit the engine on the engine mounting bushes,

aligning the bushes correctly.
On both sides, fit and pretighten the screws (42)
fastening the engine strut to the engine mounting
bush after installing the relevant washer.

Screw 15 Nm B
Fasten the engine mounting bushings (43) and the

retainer brackets (44) tightening the indicated
screws.

Screw 50 Nm B
Tighten the two screws (42) fastening the engine

strut to the engine mounting bushing.

Screw 103 Nm A
Provisionally fit a block (F), as shown in the photo

aside, to prevent the engine from tipping when
the hoisting tools are removed (as described as
follows).
Remove all the engine hoisting tools installed previously.
Working underneath the vehicle, install the tool

(AV 8254) onto the chassis, tightening the two
screws indicated, to support the weight of the
engine and prevent it from tipping.
Remove the block (F) fitted previously.
Use a feeler gauge to check that the gap between

the retainer bracket (44) and the engine
mounting bush (43), along the "X" axis, is
between 1.2 mm and 2.8 mm.
mounting bush (43), along the "Z axis, is
Fit and fasten the heat shields (37) over the engine
mounting bushes on both sides, tightening the
screws indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated on the ground cable

(38) onto the engine and secure the cable to the
indicated fastener clamp on the starter motor
shield.

Screw 18 Nm B
Fit the left hand removable subframe (34) in the

relative seat on the chassis.
From underneath, tighten the two screws indicated
fastening the secondary air pump mounting
bracket to the left hand removable subframe (34).
Fit the secondary air pipe (46) onto the pump inlet
and fasten by fitting a new clamp as indicated.
Tighten the fours screws indicated fastening the left

hand removable subframe (34) to the chassis.

Screw 24 Nm B
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the heat

shield (36).

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit and fasten the U-bracket (35), tightening the two

screws indicated.

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit and fasten the right hand removable subframe

(33) in the relative seat on the chassis,
tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 24 Nm B
Lay out the left hand injection cable as originally

fitted on the chassis.
Connect the connector (32) to the left hand
Motronic ECU.
Fasten the left hand injection cable (28), fitting the

indicated clamps, and connect the connector
(31) to the engine compartment cable junction.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the fuel

vapour separator mounting bracket (30) to the
chassis.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the front left hand oxygen sensor

connector (29) and fit the indicated clip.
indicated clamps.
Lay out the right hand injection cable as originally

Connect the front right hand oxygen sensor
connector (27) and fit the indicated clip.
Connect the connectors (26) to the ELDOR ECU.

Fasten the right hand injection cable (22) leading to
the ELDOR ECU, fitting the indicated clamps.
Connect the connector (24) to the right hand

Motronic ECU, and fasten the connector (25) to
the engine compartment cable junction.
Fasten the right hand injection cable (23), fitting the
indicated clamps.

indicated clamps.
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and tighten the

Nut 15 Nm B
Fit the cable retainer clamps (45) as originally

installed on the chassis.
Connect the evaporative emissions control system

solenoid valve pipe (18) to the left hand plenum,
fitting a new clamp as indicated.
Connect the pipe (17) to the front timing cover and

fasten by tightening the clamp (16).
Fasten the brake servo vacuum pipe (19) in the

relative seat on the pillory block.
Connect the pipe (13) to the pressure
switch/thermostat and fasten by tightening the
clamp (12).
Connect the quick connector (9) of the brake servo
vacuum pipe (19).
Connect the power steering system pipe (8) and
fasten by tightening the indicated clamp.
Fit and fasten the bracket (20) onto the pipe retainer
pillory block, tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 6 Nm B
Connect the pipe (15) leading from the expansion

tank and fasten by tightening the clamp (14).
Tighten the union (7) on the power steering pump

Union 37 Nm B
Fit the power steering pump shield (6) and fasten by

tightening the screw indicated.
Connect the pipe (13) to the pressure

switch/thermostat and fasten by tightening the
clamp (12).
vacuum pipe.
Connect the quick connector (16) on the water pipe

leading to the recirculation pump.
Close the indicated clamp.
Connect the quick connector (7) on the power

Connect the power steering system pipe (8) and
fasten by tightening the indicated clamp.
Connect the pipe (93) to the rigid pipe.

Fit and tighten a new clamp as indicated by the red
arrow.
Secure the pipe (93) by fastening to the clamp
indicated by the black arrow.
Fit the right hand rear heat shield (47) in the

relevant seat and fasten by tightening the screws
indicated by red arrows.
Fit the right hand front heat shield (48) in the
relevant seat and fasten by tightening the
indicated screws.
Follow the same procedure to fit the front and rear
heat shields on the left-hand side of the engine.
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the power

Connect the low pressure pipe (5) to the fuel pump

filter.
After connecting the quick connector pipe (4)
correctly to the left hand fuel tank, with due
the "double-lock" clip indicated, push the clip into
its seat until it clicks audibly into place and the
pipe is secured correctly.
Fasten the low pressure pipe (5) by closing the

indicated clamp.
Fit the cover (91).

filter.
Fasten the pipes (4) to the engine with the indicated
clamp.
correctly to the right hand fuel tank, with due
the "double-lock" clips indicated, push the clips
into their seats until they click audibly into place
and the pipes are secured correctly.

indicated clamp.
Fit the cover (92).
Connect the pipe (46) leading from the secondary

air pump to the relative pipe (2), fitting the
indicated clamp.
Close the indicated clamps fastening the secondary
air pipe (2), complete with valves.
Connect the pneumatic actuator system pipes (1)

and fasten with a new clamp as indicated.
Refit the complete gearbox ( C2.03).

Refit the engine air ducts ( B4.02).
Refit the exhaust manifold ( B7.02).
Refit the expansion tank ( B6.02).
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801. Refit the engine inspection hatch ( E4.06).
Charge the air conditioning system. ( F5.12).
Fill the power steering system ( D5.08).
Fill the cooling system ( A3.07).
Lower the vehicle using anti-tipping safety retainers ( E3.12).
Refit the engine compartment lid ( E3.01).
Refitting the engine-gearbox assembly

Screw 103 Nm A
Fastening gearbox mounting bushing to rear Nut 50 Nm 0
subframe Nut 100 Nm B
Fastening lower gearbox mounting cross member Screw 60 Nm A
to chassis
Fastening retainer fork on GL and ATF oil pipes Screw 20 Nm A
on gearbox
On both sides, undo the three screws indicated

fastening the retainer bracket (44) and the
engine mounting bush (43) to the rear subframe.
Tighten the eyebolts (elements 27) of the hook

(AV 3432) into the specific seats (13) at the front
of the engine.
Note that the heat shield is fitted in the photo
aside. The heat shield must be mounted later
on.
Screw the hoisting pins (AV 8253) into the vertical

holes in the engine-gearbox connector tie-rods
(14).
Remove the two eyebolts (19) from the tool

(AS 107564).
Screw the two eyebolts (19), removed previously

from the tool, into the relative holes on the
gearbox.
The engine-gearbox assembly must be lifted and

positioned in its relevant seat on the rear
subframe: this operation requires the use of a
mobile hydraulic hoist or a bridge crane with a
minimum load capacity of 300 Kg, element 31 of
the hoisting hook (AV 3432) (which is also used
for the Enzo) and the crossbeam (AV 3979).
subframe.
Connect the tie-rods (18) to the pins (AV 8253).
tension.

subframe.
Hook the tie rods (18) onto the eyebolts (19).
tension.
Lift the engine-gearbox assembly by a few

millimetres, ensuring that the bar tension is
uniform and that the assembly itself lifts evenly.
Lift the engine-gearbox assembly and set down in
the relevant seats on the rear subframe, taking
care to avoid collisions with any other
components.
Fit the pin (22) fastening the bushing mounting (15)

to the rear subframe, after fitting the washer.
Hand tighten the nut (21) after fitting the washer.
Lower the engine-gearbox assembly, locating the

engine struts on the bushings.
On both sides, hand-tighten the screws (42)
fastening the engine strut to the engine mounting
bush, after installing the relevant washer.
On both sides pretighten the screws (42) fastening
the engine strut to the engine mounting bushing.

Screw 15 Nm B
Fasten the engine mounting bushing (43) and the

retainer bracket (44), tightening the three screws
indicated.

Screw 50 Nm B
On both sides tighten the screws (42) fastening the

engine strut to the engine mounting bushing.

Screw 103 Nm A
Pretighten the nut (21).

Nut 50 Nm 0
Tighten the nut (21).

Nut 100 Nm B
Remove all the hoisting tools fitted previously.

mounting bush (43), along the "X" axis, is
mounting bush (43), along the "Z axis, is
Fit and fasten the heat shields (37) over the engine
mounting bushes on both sides, tightening the
screws indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the right hand rear heat shield (12) in the

relevant seat and fasten by tightening the screws
indicated by red arrows.
Fit the right hand front heat shield (11) in the
relevant seat and fasten by tightening the
indicated screws.
Follow the same procedure to fit the front and rear
heat shields on the left-hand side of the engine.
Apply AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - MEDIUM

STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the thread of
Fit the lower gearbox mounting cross-member (9) in
its seat and hand-tighten the indicated screws.



Hand-tighten the indicated screws fastening the


Tighten the indicated screws fastening the lower

gearbox mounting cross member (9), following
the sequence shown in the photo.

Screw 60 Nm A



Screw 60 Nm A
Fasten the drain pipe (23) inside the rubber lined

brackets tightening the indicated screws.

bracket tightening the indicated screw.


Tighten the screw indicated on the ground cable

(38) onto the engine and secure the cable to the
indicated fastener clamp on the starter motor
shield.

Screw 18 Nm B
Fit the indicated clamps fastening the pipes to the

rear subframe in the original positions.

and fasten by tightening the indicated clamp.
Fasten the gearbox wiring harness to the chassis,

fitting the clamp and tightening the screw
indicated, then connect the three connectors (8).
Fit the mounting bracket (7) on the gearbox stud

bolts and fasten the oil pipes of both systems
onto the relevant pillory blocks.
Remove the plugs fitted previously on the oil pipes.
Replace the O-rings on the gear oil pipes (6) and fit
into the relevant seats.
Fit the fork (5) on the gear oil pipes and fasten to
the gearbox by tightening the screw indicated.

Screw 20 Nm A
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the retainers


residue.
Replace the O-rings on the clutch hydraulic system
oil pipes (4) and fit into the relevant seats.
Fit the fork (3) on the clutch hydraulic system oil
pipes and fasten to the gearbox by tightening the
screw indicated.

Screw 20 Nm A
Fit and fasten the heat shield (2), tightening the

screw indicated.

screw indicated.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the heat

shield (2).
Fit and fasten the shield (1), tightening the 2 nuts
and 2 screws indicated.
Refit the axle shaft ( C4.01).

Refit both.
Refit the silencers ( B7.04).

Refit the catalytic converter ( B7.03).
Refit both.
Refit the engine air filter box ( B4.03).

Refit the air flow meter ( F3.07).
Refit both.
Refit the rear subframe ( E2.02).

Inspect the hydraulic clutch system oil level Shell DCT F-3 ( A3.03).
Engine overhaul - Disassembly Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
B2.03 Engine overhaul - Disassembly
Removing the cylinder head covers
Remove the complete engine ( B2.01).

Remove the ignition coils ( F3.02).
Right hand cover
Disconnect the connectors (1).
Release the clip (2).
Disconnect the ground cable (3) by undoing the

indicated screw.
Detach the pipe (5) by loosening the indicated
clamp.
Open the clip (7) and release the relative pipes.

DAL Ass.ly No. 91654, open the clip (8) and release
relative pipe.
Undo the screws indicated.

Remove the cover (A).

Remove the cover carefully.
Left hand cover

indicated screw.
clamp.



Remove the cover carefully.
Removing the front timing cover (with engine in vehicle)
In preparation
Engine overhaul - Inspections Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B2.04 Engine overhaul - Inspections
In preparation
In preparation
Engine overhaul - Rebuild Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
B2.05 Engine overhaul - Rebuild
Refitting the front timing cover (with engine in vehicle)
In preparation
Refitting the cylinder head covers

Fastening the cylinder heads Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Screw 11 Nm B
Soundproofing cover - high pressure pump Screw 10 Nm B
Right hand cover
Clean the cover mating surface thoroughly.

Apply a suitable quantity of paste CAF 4 in the
indicated positions.
Replace the gasket (9).

Replace the gaskets (10).
Lubricate the gaskets (11) with soapy water.
Fit the cover carefully, tacking the indicated screws.

Pretighten the indicated screws in the sequence
given.

Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Tighten the indicated screws in the sequence given.

Screw 11 Nm B
Fit the cover (A).

Hand tighten the screws indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B
FROM Ass.ly No. 91654, position the respective

pipe correctly and close the clip (8).
Position the respective pipes correctly and close the
clip (7).
Connect the pipe (5), tightening the indicated clamp.

Connect the ground cable (3) by tightening the
indicated screw.
Attach the clip (2).
Connect the connectors (1).
Left hand cover
Clean the cover mating surface thoroughly.

Apply a suitable quantity of paste CAF 4 in the
Replace the gasket (9).

Replace the gaskets (10).
Lubricate the gaskets (11) with soapy water.
Fit the cover carefully, tacking the indicated screws.

Pretighten the indicated screws in the sequence
given.

Screw (pretightening) 5 Nm B
Tighten the indicated screws in the sequence given.

Screw 11 Nm B
Fit the cover (A).


Screw 10 Nm B

clip (8).
clip (7).
Connect the pipe (5), tightening the indicated clamp.

Connect the ground cable (3) by tightening the
indicated screw.
Refit the ignition coils ( F3.02).

Refit the complete engine ( B2.02).
Engine fuel system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B3.01 Engine fuel system layout
Fuel system layout
A - Fuel tanks
B - Fuel pumps
C - High pressure pumps
D - Fuel rail
E - Low pressure pipes
F - High pressure pipes
G - Fuel level sensor
H - Fuel pump filters
Fuel tank Page 1 of 12
Print Exit
B3.02 Fuel tank
Removing left hand fuel tank

Drain the fuel system ( B3.06).
Remove the secondary air pump ( F3.12).
Remove the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).
Remove the lower left hand lateral passenger compartment trim panel.
In the passenger compartment, push inwards the

cable grommet (1).
Remove from the housing and take out the cap (2).

Undo the screw indicated by the red arrow on the
ground cable (5).
Disconnect the pipe (6).
the "unclick".
millimetres.

Undo the indicated fasteners.

Remove the lower heat shield (7).

Remove the upper heat shield (8).
Hold properly the left hand fuel tank (A).

Undo the nuts indicated.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 89228, retrieve the shims (9).
Remove the belts (10) from the relative seats.

Remove the left hand fuel tank (A).
Refitting left hand fuel tank

Nut 5 Nm B
Check the state of the pads; replace if necessary.

Apply a layer of grease TUTELA MR3 on the pads,
if necessary.
Fit the left hand fuel tank (A).

Hold properly the left hand fuel tank (A).
Lay out the straps (10) in the relative guides on the
left hand fuel tank (A).
UP TO Ass.ly No. 89228, fit the shims (9).

Fit the belt eyebolts on the tie-rods.
Tighten the nuts indicated.

Nut 20 Nm B
Fit the upper heat shield (8).


Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the lower heat shield (7).

Tighten the indicated fasteners.

Screw 9 Nm B
Nut 5 Nm B

correctly to the fuel tank, with due caution and
pressing on both sides of the "double-lock" clip
indicated, push the clip into its seat until it clicks
audibly into place and the pipe is secured
correctly.

Hand tighten the screw indicated by the red arrow
on the ground cable (5).
In the passenger compartment, connect the

connector (3).
Fasten the cap (2) in the relative housing.

Fasten the cable grommet (1) on the cap (2).
Refit the passenger compartment trim panels ( E4.04).

Refit the secondary air pump ( F3.12).
Add fuel to the tanks.
Removing the right hand fuel tank


Undo the screw indicated by the red arrow on the
ground cable (5).
Disconnect the pipes (6).
the unions.
the "unclick".
millimetres.

remove the pipes (6).
Detach the indicated clamps.

Move the pipes (1) aside so that they do not hinder
the subsequent operations.

Remove the lower heat shield (2).

Remove the upper heat shield (7).

the "unclick".
millimetres.

pipe (9).
Support the weight of the right hand fuel tank (A)

adequately.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 89228, retrieve the shims (10).
Remove the belts (11) from the relative seats.

Remove the right hand fuel tank (A).
Refitting the right hand fuel tank

Nut 5 Nm B
Check the state of the pads; replace if necessary.

Apply a layer of grease TUTELA MR3 on the pads,
if necessary.
Fit the right hand fuel tank (A).

Support the weight of the right hand fuel tank (A)
adequately.
Lay out the straps (11) in the relative guides on the
right hand fuel tank (A).
UP TO Ass.ly No. 89228, fit the shims (10).

Fit the belt eyebolts on the tie-rods.

Nut 20 Nm B

pressing on both sides of the "double-lock" clip
indicated, push the clip into its seat until it clicks
audibly into place and the pipe is secured
correctly.
Connect the pipe (9) and fasten with a new clamp

as indicated.
Fit the upper heat shield (7).


Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the lower heat shield (2).

Tighten the indicated fasteners.

Screw 9 Nm B
Nut 5 Nm B
Fit the pipes (1) on the heat shields.

Fasten the indicated clamps on the heat shields.

pressing on both sides of the "double-lock" clips
indicated, push the clips into their seats until
they click audibly into place and the pipes are
secured correctly.

Hand tighten the screw indicated by the red arrow
on the ground cable (5).

Fuel pump assembly Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
Copyright Ferrari S.p.A. - P.IVA 00159560366
B3.03 Fuel pump assembly
Removing the fuel pump filter
CAUTION
FUEL IS HIGHLY FLAMMABLE.
NEVER WORK ON A HOT ENGINE.
TO PREVENT FIRE RISKS AND FUEL LEAKAGE, WORK ONLY ON A COLD ENGINE WITH AN EMPTY
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after the
operations described.
Protect the engine components adequately to allow access to the interior of the fuel tanks and work
without damaging the engine.
The fuel pump filters are fitted on the respective fuel tanks, at the front of the engine compartment.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand fuel pump. Where applicable, differences in the procedure
for the right hand fuel pump are given.

Right-hand side
Disconnect the connectors (2) and release from the

bracket (12).
Remove the bracket (12).

Remove the ground cable (4), undoing the indicated
screw and retrieving the lock washer.
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind
that the line may be pressurised. Proceed
therefore with caution and keep away any type of
flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the
operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent
residual fuel from leaking.
Disconnect the fuel pipe (5) from the fuel pump filter.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802, detach the clip indicated
by the red arrow.
Using a suitable tool, prise off and remove the

safety clip (10) from its seat on the fuel pump
filter ring nut.
Fit the tool (AV 8175) in the relative seat on the fuel
pump filter ring nut (6).
Turn the fuel pump filter ring nut (6)
counterclockwise to bring the lock pin (shown in
the box in the photo) into the position indicated.
Remove the tool and remove the fuel pump filter
ring nut (6).
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind
that the line may be pressurised. Proceed
therefore with caution and keep away any type of
flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the
operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent
residual fuel from leaking.
Remove the fuel pump filter (A) from the relative

seat and disconnect the unions (7) and (8).
Disconnect the connectors (9) and remove the fuel

pump filter (A).
Refitting the fuel pump filter
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand fuel pump. Where applicable, differences in the procedure
for the right hand fuel pump are given.
Before refitting, thoroughly clean all the parts removed and dry with compressed air.
ALWAYS REPLACE the ring nut and relative O-

ring whenever the fuel pump is removed.
ALWAYS replace the O-ring (11).
Connect the connectors (9) on the fuel pump filter

(A).
Connect the unions (7) and (8) and fit the fuel pump
filter (A) in the relative housing.
To ensure that the filter is installed correctly, the tab

on the fuel pump filter (A) must match up with
the respective seat on the fuel tank, as shown in
the photo aside.
ALWAYS REPLACE the ring nut and relative O-

ring whenever the fuel pump is removed.
ALWAYS replace fuel pump filter ring nut (6) with a

new ring nut by fitting it in the relative seat.
pump filter ring nut (6).
Turn the fuel pump filter ring nut (6) clockwise to
bring the lock pin (shown in the box in the photo)
into the position indicated.
Remove the tool and check that the fuel pump filter
ring nut (6) is locked in place.
Fit the safety clip (10) into its seat on the fuel pump
filter ring nut, ensuring that it is securely
fastened.
Connect the fuel pipe (5) onto the fuel pump filter.
Fasten the ground cable (4), fitting the lock washer
and tightening the indicated screw.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802, fasten the clip indicated
by the red arrow.
Fit the cover (1) in the relative seat.
Right-hand side
Fasten the bracket (12), tightening the indicated

screws.
Connect the connectors (2) and fasten to the
bracket (12).

Fill the fuel tank.
Replacing the fuel pump
CAUTION
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Protect the engine components adequately to allow access to the interior of the fuel tanks and work
without damaging the engine.
ALWAYS REPLACE the ring nut and relative O-ring whenever the fuel pump is removed.
There are two fuel pumps, installed inside the fuel tanks at the front of the engine compartment.
The following procedure is for the replacement of the left hand fuel pump which, unlike the right hand pump, also
incorporates the fuel level sensor.

Remove the fuel pump filter ( B3.03).
Lift the retainer (1).

Turn the fuel pump (A) counterclockwise to align
the pins of the retainer (2) with the indicated
recesses.

Remove the fuel pump (A) from the fuel tank floor.
Remove the fuel pump (A) from the tank and

replace.
In the case of the left hand fuel pump, take care
not to bend the fuel level sensor rod.
Place the new fuel pump (A) in the tank.

In the case of the left hand fuel pump, take care
not to bend the fuel level sensor rod.
Turn the fuel pump (A) clockwise to align the pins of

the retainer (2) with the indicated recesses.
Check that the fuel pump (A) engages correctly with
the lip (3) on the fuel tank floor.
Lower the retainer (1).
Fasten the fuel pump pipes (A) by closing the

indicated clamp.
Refit the fuel pump filter ( B3.03).

Fuel level sensor Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
B3.04 Fuel level sensor
Replacing the fuel level sensor
CAUTION
FUEL TANK.
CAUTION
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed, ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW SENSOR, fitting a new O-
ring.
The fuel level sensor is mounted on the left hand fuel tank and is accessible from the passenger compartment.

Remove the lower lateral trim panels.
Remove the cap (1) from the fuel level sensor

housing.
Push the rubber cable grommet (2) inwards, then
remove the cap (1).
Disconnect the connector (3) and, using a suitable

tool, prise off and remove the safety clip (4) from
the fuel level sensor (A).
level sensor (A).
Turn the fuel level sensor (A) counterclockwise to
bring the retainer clips (shown in the box in the
photo) into the position indicated.
Remove the fuel level sensor (A) from its seat and
replace.
Whenever the fuel level sensor is removed,
ALWAYS REPLACE WITH A NEW
SENSOR, fitting a new O-ring.
ALWAYS replace the O-ring (5).

Fit the new fuel level sensor (A) in the relative seat
on the tank, aligning the indicated tooth and
recess.
level sensor (A).
Turn the fuel level sensor (A) clockwise to bring the
retainer clips (shown in the box in the photo) into
the position indicated.
Fit the safety clip (4) in the relative seat, ensuring

that they are correctly oriented, then connect the
connector (3) on the fuel level sensor (A).
Fit and fasten the cap (1) onto the fuel level sensor
seat.
Pull the rubber cable grommet (2) outwards, then fit
correctly on the cap (1).

Fill the fuel tank.
Fuel vapour separator Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
B3.05 Fuel vapour separator
Removing the fuel vapour separator
Release pipes (1) opening the indicated clamps,

and disconnect them from right hand fuel tank
(2).
There are two "double-lock" safety clips (9) fitted
onto the unions.
the "unclick".
millimetres.

disconnect pipes (1).
Disconnect the pipe (3) for the fuel vapour

separator (A) from the left hand fuel tank (4).
Disconnect pipe (1) from the left hand fuel tank (4).
the unions.
the "unclick".
millimetres.

disconnect pipes (1) and (3).
Open the indicated studs.

Open the shielding (B).
Remove the indicated clamps fastening the pipe (7)

and disconnect the pipe from the active carbon
filter.
A "double-lock" safety clip (8) is fitted on the union.
the "unclick".
millimetres.

Undo the screws (10) fastening the fuel vapour
separator (A) to the relative mounting bracket.
Remove the fuel vapour separator (A), complete
with pipes, from the engine compartment.
Refitting the fuel vapour separator
Fit the fuel vapour separator (A) in the relative seat

and fasten to the mounting bracket by tightening
the screws (10).
correctly to the active carbon filter, with due
the "double-lock" clip (8) indicated, push the clip
into its seat until it clicks audibly into place and
the pipe is fastened securely.
Fasten the pipe (7) with the indicated clamps.
Close the shielding (B).

Fasten the indicated studs.
After connecting the quick connector pipes (1) and

(3) of fuel vapours separator (A) correctly to left
hand fuel tank (4), with due caution and pressing
on both sides of the "double-lock" clips indicated,
push the clips into their seats until they click
audibly into place and the pipes are secured
correctly.

correctly to the right hand fuel tank (2), with due
the "double-lock" clips indicated (9), push the
clips into their seats until they click audibly into
place and the pipes are secured correctly.
Secure pipes (1) closing the indicated clamps.

Draining the engine fuel system Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B3.06 Draining the engine fuel system
Draining the fuel system
CAUTION
Fuel is highly flammable.
This procedure requires the use of an aspirator pump compliant with EEC standards.
Connect a suitable pipe at least 2.5 metres in length, with a maximum diameter of 10 mm, to the aspirator
pump.
Only use the funnel included in the vehicle tool

kit, which is designed to release the Capless
automatic sealing system.
Select the funnel (A) from the vehicle tool kit and
insert in the relative seat in the filler neck.
The funnel releases the capless automatic filler
neck closure system.
CAUTION
Collect the fuel in a suitable container.
Feed the pipe into the filler neck until it reaches the right hand fuel tank, then aspirate all the fuel out of the
tank.
The two tanks are connected by a pipe at the bottom, so the fuel level will drop in both tanks simultaneously.
Check the quantity of fuel remaining in the tanks from the instrument panel. If necessary, repeat the previous
procedure to aspirate as much of the fuel as possible out of the tanks.
Air intake system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B4.01 Air intake system layout
A - Air ducts
B - Air filter box
C - Air flow meters
D - Throttle bodies
E - Intake manifold
Air ducts Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
B4.02 Air ducts
Removing the engine air ducts
The following procedure is for removing the left hand duct.
The procedure for removing the right hand duct is identical.

Remove the relevant engine compartment shield only.
Loosen the screw collar (1) fastening the duct (A) to

the hose union (B).
Disconnect the hose union (B) from the duct (A).
Undo the screw (2) fastening the duct (A).
Undo the screw (3) fastening the duct (A).

Disconnect the duct (A) from the duct (C), easing
out toward the rear of the vehicle.
Remove the duct from the relevant seat.
Air ducts Page 2 of 2
Refitting the engine air ducts

Fastening engine air ducts Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening hose unions to engine air ducts Screw collar 4 Nm C
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand duct.
The procedure for refitting the right hand duct is identical.
Fit the duct in the relative seat.
Connect the duct (A) to the duct (C), installing

towards the front of the vehicle.
Tighten the screw (3) fastening the duct (A).

Screw 6 Nm B
Tighten the screw (2) fastening the duct (A).

Screw 6 Nm B
Connect the hose union (B) to the duct (A).

Tighten the screw collar (1) fastening the duct (A) to
the hose union (B).

Screw collar 4 Nm C
Air filter box Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
B4.03 Air filter box
Replacing the air filter
Place a few strips of adhesive tape to protect the

bodywork on the areas shown in the photo aside.

Prise out and move the air filter box cover (A) out of
its seat.
Remove the air filter (B) from the relevant seat and
replace.
Fit the new air filter (B) in the relevant seat.

Fit the air filter box cover (A) in its relevant seat.
Remove the adhesive tape fitted previously.
Removing the engine air filter box

Undo the indicated nuts fastening the air flow

meters (A) to the air filter box cover (B).
box cover (B).
Remove the air filter box cover (B) from the relative
seat, disconnecting from the air flow meters (A)
and retrieving the O-rings.
Loosen the indicated screw collar fastening the left

hand lateral hose union (C) to the air filter box
(D).
Disconnect the left hand lateral hose union (C) from
the air filter box (D).
Undo the nuts (1) fastening the air filter box (D).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the left hand
bracket (E) to the engine compartment lid
mounting.
Remove the left hand bracket (E) from the relevant
seat.
Loosen the indicated screw collar fastening the right

(D).
Disconnect the right hand lateral hose union (C)
from the air filter box (D).
Undo the nuts (1) fastening the air filter box (D).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the right hand
mounting.
Remove the right hand bracket (E) from the relevant
seat.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the bracket (F)

to the back of the air filter box (D).
Remove the bracket (F) from the relevant seat.
Working with due caution, remove the air filter box from the relevant seat.
Refitting the engine air filter box

Fastening solenoid valve mounting bracket to Screw 4 Nm B
engine air filter box
Fastening engine air filter box Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening hose unions to engine air filter box Screw collar 4 Nm C
Working with due caution, fit the air filter box in the relative seat.
Fit the bracket (F) in the relative seat.

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the bracket
(F) to the back of the air filter box (D).

Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the right hand bracket (E) in the relative seat.

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the right
hand bracket (E) to the engine compartment lid
mounting.
Tighten the nuts (1) fastening the air filter box (D).

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the right hand lateral hose union (C) to the

air filter box (D).
Tighten the indicated screw collar fastening the right
(D).

Screw collar 4 Nm C
Fit the left hand bracket (E) in the relative seat.

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the left hand
mounting.
Tighten the nuts (1) fastening the air filter box (D).

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the left hand lateral hose union (C) to the

air filter box (D).
Tighten the indicated screw collar fastening the left
(D).

Screw collar 4 Nm C
Fit the air filter box cover (B) in the relative seat,
refitting the O-rings and connecting the cover to
the air flow meters (A).
box cover (B).
Tighten the indicated nuts fastening the air flow
meters (A) to the air filter box cover (B).
Refit the rear bumper ( E3.04).

Air intake manifold Page 1 of 18
Print Exit
B4.04 Air intake manifold
Removing the intake manifold

Remove the clamps (1) and detach the motorised

throttle bodies from the plenums.
Disconnect the quick connector (26) from the left
hand bellow.
Right-hand side
Disconnect the pipe (6) from the rigid pipe,

Remove the vacuum pipe (7) from the plenum,
undoing the indicated screw.
FROM Ass.ly No. 91654 _ Right hand side
Remove the clamp indicated.

Disconnect the pipe (32) from the tank.
Release the pipes (6) and (32), removing the clamp
(33).
Right-hand side
Disconnect the pipes (4) and (5) from the plenum,

removing the indicated clamps.
Right-hand side
Detach the connector (8) from the mounting bracket.
Right-hand side
Remove the wiring harness retainer bracket (9),

Right-hand side
Remove the wiring harness retainer brackets (10)

and (11), undoing the indicated screws.
Right-hand side

Left-hand side
Disconnect the pipes (13) and (14) from the

plenum, removing the indicated clamps.
Left-hand side
Detach the connector (16) from the mounting

bracket.
Left-hand side
Remove the wiring harness retainer brackets (18)

and (19), undoing the indicated screws.
servo vacuum pipe.
Open the indicated clamps fastening the pipes to

the intake manifold.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ Left hand side
Open the clamps indicated.
Open the indicated clamp fastening the pipes to the

intake manifold.
Right-hand side
Undo the indicated upper screw fastening the three

plastic clamps to the intake manifold.
Undo the lower screw indicated fastening the
injection cable retainer bracket to the intake
manifold.
Left-hand side
Undo the indicated upper screw fastening the two

Undo the lower screw indicated fastening the
manifold.
Left-hand side
Move the left hand injection cable (23) aside as far

as possible to allow access to the intake
manifold fasteners.
Before lifting the intake manifold, check that all
the nuts and washers removed have been
retrieved so that they cannot fall into the
intake ducts.
Undo the eight indicated screws fastening the

intake manifold (A) to the cylinder head.
Right-hand side
Move the right hand injection cable (22) aside as far

as possible to allow access to the intake
manifold fasteners.
Before lifting the intake manifold, check that all
the nuts and washers removed have been
retrieved so that they cannot fall into the
intake ducts.
Undo the eight indicated screws fastening the

Left-hand side
Tilt the intake manifold slightly to the left in order to

be able to remove the indicated clip fastening
the power steering fluid pipes (24).
Left-hand side
Keeping the intake manifold tilted, remove the

indicated clip fastening the power steering fluid
pipes (24).
Left-hand side
Disconnect the connector (30) at the front of the

intake manifold.
Right-hand side
Disconnect the connector (31) at the front of the

intake manifold.
With the assistance of another worker, lift the intake manifold off the engine.
Remove the two gaskets (29) from the cylinder

heads.
Cover the intake duct orifices to prevent foreign bodies from entering.
Close off the intake ports in the cylinder heads to prevent foreign objects from entering the ducts.
Refitting the intake manifold

Fastening intake manifold to cylinder heads Screw 10 Nm B
Fit two new seals (29) in the relative seats on the

cylinder heads.
With the assistance of another worker, fit the intake manifold in the relative seat on the engine.
Right-hand side
Connect the connector (31) at the front of the intake

manifold.
Left-hand side
Connect the connector (30) at the front of the intake

manifold.
Left-hand side
Tilt the intake manifold slightly to the left in order to

be able to fix the indicated clip, fastening the
power steering fluid pipes (24), onto the metal
bracket.
Left-hand side
Keeping the intake manifold tilted, fix the indicated

clip, fastening the power steering fluid pipes
(24), onto the metal bracket.
Right-hand side
Move the right hand injection cable (22) aside as far

as possible in order to be able to tighten the
intake manifold fasteners.
Take particular care when fitting the intake
manifold. Locating the manifold incorrectly
may deform and compromise the tightness
of the gaskets, causing the "Engine
diagnostic system (EOBD)" warning light to
illuminate.
Tighten the eight indicated screws fastening the

Left-hand side
Move the left hand injection cable (23) aside as far

as possible in order to be able to tighten the
intake manifold fasteners.
Take particular care when fitting the intake
manifold. Locating the manifold incorrectly
may deform and compromise the tightness
of the gaskets, causing the "Engine
diagnostic system (EOBD)" warning light to
illuminate.
Tighten the eight indicated screws fastening the

Tighten the indicated screws in the order given.

Screw 10 Nm B
Left-hand side
Loosen the lower screw indicated fastening the

manifold.
Tighten the indicated upper screw fastening the two
Right-hand side
Loosen the lower screw indicated fastening the

manifold.
Tighten the indicated upper screw fastening the
three plastic clamps to the intake manifold.
Close the indicated clamp fastening the pipes to the

intake manifold.
Close the indicated clamps fastening the pipes to

the intake manifold.
Left-hand side

vacuum pipe.
Fasten the wiring harness retainer brackets (18)
and (19), tightening the indicated screws.
Close the indicated clamps.
Left-hand side
Fasten the wiring harness retainer bracket (17),

tightening the indicated screws.
Fit and fasten the connector (16) on the mounting
bracket.
Left-hand side

tightening the indicated screw.
Connect and fasten the pipes (13) and (14) to the
plenum, using new clamps as indicated.
Right-hand side

Right-hand side
Fasten the wiring harness retainer brackets (10)

and (11), tightening the indicated screws.
Right-hand side

Right-hand side
Fit and fasten the connector (8) on the mounting

bracket.
Right-hand side
Connect and fasten the pipes (4) and (5) to the

plenum, using new clamps as indicated.
Right-hand side
Connect and fasten the pipe (6) to the rigid pipe,

using a new clamp as indicated.
Fasten the vacuum pipe (7) to the plenum,
Connect the pipe (32) to the tank.

Tighten a new clamp as indicated.
Fasten the pipes (6) and (32), fitting the clamp (33).
Connect and fasten the motorised throttle bodies to

the plenums with new clamps (1).
Connect the quick coupling (26) to the left hand
bellow.

and fasten with a new clamp as indicated.
Engine lubrication system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B5.01 Engine lubrication system layout
Engine lubrication system layout
A - Engine oil tank

B - Engine oil pump
C - Water/engine oil heat exchanger
D - Engine oil filter
Engine oil pump Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
B5.02 Engine oil pump
Removing the oil pump
The oil pump is mounted on the lower right hand side of the engine.
Undo the indicated screw on the fork (1) retaining

the pipe (2) on the oil pump (A).
Detach the pipe (2) and move out of the way, so
that it does not hinder the subsequent operations.
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the lower

housing (3) onto the engine oil tank.
UP TO Engine No. 158940
Remove the Seeger ring (4) and push the bushing

(5) down to detach from the orifice on the
crankcase.
FROM Engine No. 158941
Undo the indicated screws and remove the bracket

(4).
Push the bush (5) downwards out of the relative
seat on the crankcase.
Undo the six indicated screws fastening the oil

pump (A) to the crankcase.
Supporting the weight of the pump and applying

leverage with a suitably protected tool (6), move
the oil pump (A) perpendicularly backwards, in
order to detach the union bushing (7) from the
crankcase.
Remove the oil pump (A), complete with lower

housing, from the engine.
If necessary, detach the oil pump (A) from the

flange (8) on the workbench, undoing the
indicated screw and retrieving the retainer fork
(9).
Remove the flange (8) from the pump (A).
Refitting the oil pump

Oil pump - crankcase Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening oil pump bush retainer bracket Screw 10 Nm B
Before refitting the oil pump, replace all the gaskets as follows.
Remove the mesh filter (14) from the relative seat

on the lower housing of the engine oil tank and
blow with compressed air to remove any
contamination or dirt; replace if necessary.
Then refit in the relative seat.
Replace and lubricate the gasket (15) on the lower

engine oil tank housing.
Replace and lubricate the gasket (10) on the oil

pump.
The tab at the centre of the gasket (10) must face
downward and fasten onto the edge of the
relative seat.
Replace the two O-rings (11) on the union bushings.
Replace and lubricate the two O-rings (12) on the

hose leading from the engine oil tank.
If removed previously, replace and lubricate the two

O-rings (13) on the flange (8).
Fit the flange (8) in the relative seat on the pump
(A).
Fasten the flange (8) onto the oil pump (A), fitting
the retainer fork (9) and tightening the screw
indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B
If the hexagonal bar was removed, during reassembly, ensure that the white paint marking on the bar itself is
turned towards the timing side.
Place the pipe leading from the engine oil tank in a

position to facilitate subsequent connection to
the pump.
Lubricate the seats of the connector bushings
between the crankcase and the lower crankcase
shell with SEGO grease.
Fit the oil pump (A) in the relative seat, taking
particular care not to pinch the mesh gasket, and
fit the union bushing (7) perpendicularly onto the
crankcase.
Loosely fit the six indicated screws fastening the oil

pump (A) to the crankcase.
Tighten the six screws indicated fastening the oil

pump (A) onto the crankcase, in the sequence
illustrated in the photo aside.

Screw 25 Nm B
UP TO Engine No. 158940
Push the bushing (5) upward to insert fully in the

crankcase, then fit the Seeger ring (4) in the
relative seat.
When fitting the bushing (5), push against the
loose Seeger ring (4) so as not to damage the
lip of bushing.
FROM Engine No. 158941
Push the bush (5) upwards against the crankcase.

Fit the bracket (4), fastening the bush (5).
Fasten the bracket (4), tightening the indicated
screws.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the pipe (2) in the relative seat on the oil pump
(A).
Fit the fork (1) retaining the pipe (2) in its relative
seat and fasten the assembly by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the four screws indicated fastening the

lower housing (3) onto the engine oil tank.
Fill the engine lubrication system ( A3.01).
Engine oil tank Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
B5.03 Engine oil tank
Removing the engine oil tank
Remove the air flow meter ( F3.07).

Remove both air flow meters.
Remove the motorised throttle body ( F3.08).

Remove both motorised throttle bodies.

Remove the catalytic converter ( B7.03).
Remove the right hand catalytic converter only.
Remove the power steering tank ( D5.02).

Remove the power steering fluid reservoir without disconnecting from the system and move aside so that
it does not hinder the removal of the engine oil tank.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the valve (1)

located at the rear of the engine oil tank (A).
Open the indicated clamps to detach the power

steering fluid pipes (4) and the secondary air
pipe (5).
Disconnect the pipe (3) from the engine oil tank (A).
Disconnect the pipes (6) and (7) from the right hand
intake manifold, removing the relative clamps
and opening the indicated clamp.
Remove the right hand tie-rod (8), undoing the

screws (9) and (10).
Undo the screw indicated on the fork (12) retaining

the pipe (11) on the oil pump (13).
Detach the pipe (11).
Undo the screws indicated fastening the engine oil

tank (A) to the flange on the oil pump.
Undo the indicated rear screws fastening the engine

oil tank (A) to the gearbox.
Undo the front left hand screw fastening the engine

oil tank (A) to the gearbox.
Undo the front right hand screw fastening the

engine oil tank (A) to the gearbox.
Remove the engine oil tank from the engine compartment, lifting out from above.
Refitting the engine oil tank

Fastening engine oil tank to gearbox Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening Tie-rod to gearbox Screw 88 Nm A
Fastening tie-rod to cylinder heads Screw 24 Nm A
Replace the two O-rings (14) on the hose and the O-

ring (15) on the engine oil tank, lubricating the
new rings.
Fit the engine oil tank (A) in the relative seat on the
gearbox from above and fasten at the rear by

Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the front right hand screw fastening the


Screw 10 Nm B
Tighten the front left hand screw fastening the


Screw 10 Nm B
Take care not to pinch or crush the O-ring.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the engine

oil tank (A) to the flange on the oil pump.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the pipe (11) in the relative seat on the oil pump
(13).
Fit the fork (12) retaining the pipe (11) in its relative
seat and fasten the assembly by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the right hand tie-rod (8) and fasten by tightening

the screws (9) and (10).

Screw 88 Nm A
Screw 24 Nm A
Connect the pipes (6) and (7) onto the right hand
intake manifold, fitting new clamps and closing
the indicated clamp onto the pipe.
Connect the pipes (2) and (3) to the engine oil tank
(A), fitting a new clamp.
Close the indicated clamps fastening the power

steering fluid pipes (4) and the secondary air
pipe (5).
Fit the valve (1) in the relative seat on the rear of

the engine oil tank (A) and fasten by tightening
Refit the power steering tank ( D5.02).

Refit the catalytic converter ( B7.03).
Refit the motorised throttle body ( F3.08).
Refit the air flow meter ( F3.07).
Water-engine oil heat exchanger Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
B5.04 Water-engine oil heat exchanger
Removing the engine oil-water heat exchanger
There may be residual engine oil inside the heat exchanger.

Clean/dry any pooling oil/water.
Take particular care not to contaminate the two systems.
The following photos show the engine removed from the vehicle to illustrate the procedure more clearly.
However, the following procedure is also possible with the engine still installed in the vehicle.

Remove the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Remove the complete rail ( F3.15).
Remove the complete fuel rail mounting.
Remove the alternator ( F2.04).
Disconnect the connectors (5) and (6).
Undo the screws indicated by the black arrows.

Retrieve the bracket (1).
Undo the stud bolts (2) fastening the clamps (3).
Undo the screws indicated by the red arrows to
release the clamps (3).
Move the injection cable (4) away from over the
heat exchanger so that it does not hinder the
subsequent operations.
Move the engine services cable (7) out of the way

so that it does not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Remove the water vent pipe (8), undoing the
indicated union.
Undo all the screws indicated.

Mark the position of the screws, as they are not all
of the same length.
There may be residual engine oil inside the

heat exchanger.
Clean/dry any pooling oil/water.
Take particular care not to contaminate the two
systems.
Lift the oil-water heat exchanger (A) out of the

relative housing.
Remove the gasket (9) from the heat exchanger (A)

and replace.
Remove the adhesive gasket (10) from the heat

exchanger (A) and replace.
Refitting the engine oil-water heat exchanger

Fastening oil-water heat exchanger Screw 10 Nm B
Thoroughly clean the mating faces on the

crankcase in contact with the gasket (9).
Thoroughly clean the mating faces on the heat
exchanger (A) in contact with the gasket (9).
Fit a new gasket (9).
Thoroughly clean the mating faces on the heat

exchanger (A) in contact with the adhesive
gasket (10).
Fit a new adhesive gasket (10).
Fit the oil-water heat exchanger (A) in the relative

housing.
Fit and snug the indicated screws, using the marks
made during removal as reference as the screws
are not all of equal length.
Tighten the screws indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit and fasten the water vent pipe (8), tightening the
indicated union.
Lay the engine services cable (7) as originally fitted
on the heat exchanger.
Place the injection cables (4) on top of the heat

exchanger as originally fitted.
Fit and fasten the clamps (3), tightening the screws
indicated by the red arrows.
Fit and fasten the clamps (3), tightening the stud
bolts (2).
Fit the bracket (1) and fasten to the stud bolts (2) by
tightening the screws indicated by the black
arrows.
Refit the alternator ( F2.04).

Refit the complete rail ( F3.15).
Refit the intake manifold ( B4.04).
Fill to the correct level.
Blow-by system Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B5.05 Blow-by system
The oil vapour and gas recirculation system is a closed circuit.

In the event of engine malfunction causing an anomalous increase in oil pressure, oil vapour from the heads is
ducted via the pipes (A) to the vapour separator (B).
In the vapour separator (B), a portion of the vapour condenses and drains into the oil tank below, whereas the
remaining gases are aspirated by the vacuum generated by the engine and ducted via the pipes (C) to the
bellows (D) ahead of the throttle bodies and into the intake plenums.
Draining and filling the engine lubrication system Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
B5.06 Draining and filling the engine lubrication system
Draining the engine lubrication system
environment.
Undo the two drain plugs (1) on the crankcase and

the plug (2) under the engine oil tank.
Filling the engine lubrication system

Magnetic oil drain plugs M22x1.5 plug 60 Nm B
Clean the oil drain plugs (1) and (2) thoroughly with
a suitable degreaser that does not leave residue.
Always replace the seals with new seals.
Tighten the plugs (1) onto the crankcase.

M22x1.5 plug 60 Nm B
Fully tighten the cap (2) onto the engine oil tank.
Unscrew the engine oil filler cap (B) and remove it.
Fill the system with the prescribed type and quantity

of oil (see "A1.02 _ Fluids and lubricants table").
The quantity of oil required may vary slightly
relative to the amount indicated for filling the
tank when empty; this is due to unavoidable
pooling within the system.
Fully tighten the engine oil filler cap (B).
Check that there are no oil leaks from the draining plugs and the filter cartridge.
Check the engine oil level ( A3.01).
Engine cooling system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B6.01 Engine cooling system layout
A - Expansion tank
B - Water pump
C - Radiators
Expansion tank Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
B6.02 Expansion tank
Removing the expansion tank


Remove the right hand air duct.
Drain the coolant from the tank by aspirating it from the filler neck.
Disconnect the oxygen sensor connector (1) and

remove the relative clips from the chassis.
Undo the cap (2).
Remove the clamps (3) then disconnect the relative
pipes.
Remove the clamp indicated by the red arrow,
located on the front of the expansion tank (A).
Undo the screws indicated and remove the
expansion tank (A) from the chassis.
Refitting the expansion tank

Fastening expansion tank to chassis Screw 8 Nm B
Expansion tank Page 2 of 2
Fit the expansion tank (A) in the relative seat and

fasten by tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B
Fasten the clamp indicated by the red arrow,

located on the front of the expansion tank (A).
Connect the pipes and fasten with new clamps (3).
FROM Ass.ly No. 94037 when connecting the
delivery pipe to the pump from the expansion
tank (A), the reference slot must be aligned
correctly to prevent blockage.

Connect the oxygen sensor connector (1) and
fasten to the chassis as originally mounted with
the relative clips.

Water pump Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
B6.03 Water pump
Removing the water pump
The water pump is integrated in the front timing cover.

Remove the from timing cover ( B2.03).
Undo the two screws indicated and remove the

water pump (A) from its seat in the front timing
cover.
Refitting the water pump

Fastening water pump Screw 10 ÷ 12 Nm A
Water pump Page 2 of 2
On the workbench, replace and lubricate the two O-

rings (1) on the pump, taking particular care not
to damage the rings or the seal recesses.
Ensure that the two O-rings (1) are installed
correctly and are NOT twisted.
Fit the water pump (A) in the relative seat on the

front timing cover, taking care not to pinch the O-
rings.
Prefit the pump, bringing the mating surfaces into
contact and aligning the fastener holes, then
tighten the two screws indicated.

Screw 10 ÷ 12 Nm A

Refit the from timing cover ( B2.05).
Pressure switch/thermostat Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B6.04 Pressure switch/thermostat
Replacing the pressure switch/thermostat

Fastening hose union to thermostat Screw collar 4 Nm B

Remove the engine inspection hatch ( E4.06).
Loosen the clamp (1) and detach the pipe (2) from the
pressure switch/thermostat (A).
Undo the screws indicated, remove the pressure
switch/thermostat (A) and replace.
Fit the pressure switch/thermostat (A) in the relative seat and

Fit the pipe (2), positioning the notch correctly, and fasten by
tightening screw collar (1).

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Refit the engine inspection hatch ( E4.06).

Water radiators Page 1 of 12
Print Exit
B6.05 Water radiators
Removing the water radiators

If only one radiator needs to be removed, drain that radiator only.
Left hand radiator
Remove the condenser ( F5.04).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the front brake

air duct (A).
Remove the front brake air duct (A) from the
relative seat.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the upper

radiator air duct (B).
Remove the upper radiator air duct (B) from the
relative seat.
Loosen the clamp (3) fastening the pipe union (C) to

the water radiator (D).
Disconnect the pipe union (C) from the water
radiator (D).
Place a suitably sized container under the pipe
union (C) to collect any coolant leakage.
Plug the water radiator (D) with a suitably sized plug.
Undo the indicated front screw fastening the water

radiator (D) and retrieve the relative washer and
mounting.
Supporting the weight of the water radiator (D),

undo the indicated rear screw fastening the
water radiator (D) and retrieve the relative
washer and mounting.

undo the indicated lateral screw fastening the
Remove the water radiator from the relative seat.
Right hand radiator
Remove the radiator/power steering fluid coil ( D5.05).

Remove the water radiator without disconnecting the power steering system pipes.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the front brake

air duct (A).
Remove the front brake air duct (A) from the
relative seat.

Remove the upper radiator air duct (B) from the
relative seat.
Loosen the clamp (3) fastening the pipe union (C) to

the water radiator (D).
Disconnect the pipe union (C) from the water
radiator (D).
Place a suitably sized container under the pipe
union (C) to collect any coolant leakage.
Plug the water radiator (D) with a suitably sized plug.
Undo the indicated front screw fastening the water

radiator (D) and retrieve the relative washer and
mounting.

undo the indicated rear screw fastening the

undo the indicated lateral screw fastening the
Remove the water radiator from the relative seat.
Refitting the water radiators

Fastening water radiators Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening upper radiator air ducts Screw 6 Nm C
Check the radiators for fouling ( A3.32).
Left hand radiator
Fit the water radiator in the relative seat.
Supporting the weight of the water radiator (D), fit

the relevant washer and mounting, and tighten
the indicated lateral screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B

the indicated rear screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B
Fit the relevant washer and mounting and tighten

the indicated front screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B
Remove the plug from the water radiator (D).

Connect the pipe union (C) to the water radiator (D).
Tighten the clamp (3) fastening the pipe union (C)
to the water radiator (D).
Fit the upper radiator air duct (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the upper

Screw 6 Nm C
Fit the front brake air duct (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the front
brake air duct (A).

Screw 5 Nm C
Refit the condenser ( F5.04).
Right hand radiator
Fit the water radiator in the relative seat.

the indicated lateral screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B

the indicated rear screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B
Fit the relevant washer and mounting and tighten

the indicated front screw fastening the water
radiator (D).

Screw 25 Nm B
Remove the plug from the water radiator (D).

Connect the pipe union (C) to the water radiator (D).
Tighten the clamp (3) fastening the pipe union (C)
to the water radiator (D).
Fit the upper radiator air duct (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the upper

Screw 6 Nm C
Fit the front brake air duct (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the front
brake air duct (A).

Screw 5 Nm C
Refit the radiator/power steering fluid coil ( D5.05).
Electric fans Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
B6.06 Electric fans
Removing the electric fans
Remove the water radiators ( B6.05).

Only remove the water radiator on which the relative electric fan is mounted.
Undo the four screws indicated fastening the

electric fan (A) to the water radiator.
Remove the electric fan (A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the electric fans

Fastening electric fans to water radiators Screw 5 Nm B
Electric fans Page 2 of 2
Fit the electric fan (A) in the relative seat.

Tighten the four screws indicated fastening the
electric fan (A) to the water radiator.

Screw 5 Nm B
Refit the water radiators ( B6.05).
Draining and filling the engine cooling system Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
B6.07 Draining and filling the engine cooling system
Draining the cooling system
CAUTION
The fluid contained in the cooling system reaches extremely high temperatures; take the necessary precautions
to prevent burns.

UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801 _ Right hand side
Loosen the clamps (1) fastening the connector pipe

(2) onto the rigid pipes.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the rigid pipe.

Detach the pipe (6) from the clip indicated by the
red arrow.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the rigid pipe.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90801 _ Left hand side
Disconnect the temperature sensor connector (3).

Undo the screw indicated fastening the rigid pipe
Disconnect the temperature sensor connector (3).

Undo the screw indicated fastening the rigid pipe
Use a suitable container to collect the fluid.

Disconnect the rubber connector pipes one by one

from the rear rigid pipe and allow the coolant to
drain completely.
Filling the cooling system
CAUTION
Check that all the connection sleeve clamps are tight.
Static filling (engine off)

Remove right hand engine compartment shield.
01) Do not disconnect bleed pipes on expansion tank.
02) Undo expansion tank plug (1) and slowly pour

coolant, alternating this operation with repeated
pauses of a few seconds so as to allow the
bleeding of the air present inside system.
03) Pay attention to the passage of coolant inside
vent pipe (2) from engine to expansion tank to
confirm the first filling of engine cooling circuit.
04) Complete filling until reaching the point where

fluid inside expansion tank is at 60 mm from filler
plug top (1) (MAX level), corresponding to about
2 litres of coolant inside expansion tank.
Dynamic filling (engine on)
05) Screw plug (1) onto expansion tank.
06) Check that heater circuit is off.

07) Start engine at idle speed and wait for 5 minutes.
14) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 2 minutes (or until radiators electric fans are enabled).
18) Open heater circuit selecting the max. temperature of air conditioning system for both “zones”.
20) Take and keep engine at idle speed for 2 minutes.
26) Close heater circuit.
27) Turn engine off.
28) Allow engine to cool until water temperature is 40 - 45 °C (1h and 30'- 2 hours) with expansion tank plug
open.
29) If necessary, top up until reaching the point

where fluid level in header tank is 60 mm from
filler plug top (1) (MAX level).
Exhaust system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
B7.01 Exhaust system layout
A - Manifolds
B - Catalytic converters
C - Silencers
D - Silencer joint
Exhaust manifold Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
B7.02 Exhaust manifold
Removing the exhaust manifold
The following process is for removing the left hand exhaust manifold.
The differences in the procedure for removing the right hand exhaust manifold will be indicated in the
instructions.

Remove lateral cosmetic shields.

Applicable for left hand exhaust manifold only. Remove the compressor ( F5.03).
Do not disconnect from the system and fasten to the chassis with clamps.

Unscrew and remove the oxygen sensor (1) from

the exhaust manifold (A).
Working from above, undo the two indicated screws

fastening the heat shield (4).
Working from the wheel bay, undo the indicated

screw.
Remove the heat shield (4) via the wheel bay.
If necessary, the heat shield (4) may be bent
slightly to facilitate the operation.
Left hand exhaust manifold
Fit the template (AV 8257) on the flexible part of the

exhaust manifold, as shown in the photo aside.
Fasten the lug (11) onto the relative hook to secure
the template (AV 8257).
Loosen the clamp (2) between the catalytic
converter and the exhaust manifold.
Right hand exhaust manifold

Remove the template (AV 8257) from the exhaust manifold.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the secondary

air pipe (3) to the exhaust manifold.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the secondary

air pipe (3) to the relative valve.
Remove the secondary air pipe and retrieve the

relative seals (5) on the exhaust manifold and
valve.
Applicable for left hand exhaust manifold only
Undo the indicated screw and retrieve the heat

shield (6) protecting the compressor.
Undo the eight nuts (7) fastening the exhaust

manifold (A) to the cylinder head.
Remove the exhaust manifold (A) via the wheel bay.
Retrieve the gasket (8) from the exhaust manifold.
Refitting the exhaust manifold

Fastening exhaust manifolds to cylinder heads Nut 25 Nm B
Check that the gasket mating surfaces on the head and the manifold are perfectly flat; if necessary, remove
any encrustation or gasket residue.
Preferably replace the gasket each time it is removed.
Lubricate the head stud bolts with copper based grease COPASLIP for high temperatures.
Fit a new exhaust manifold gasket (8) on the

relative stud bolts.
Fit and fasten the exhaust manifold (A) to the

cylinder head, hand-tightening the eight nuts (7).
Tighten the eight nuts in the sequence indicated in

the figure aside.

Nut 25 Nm B
Applicable for left hand exhaust manifold only
Fit and fasten the compressor heat shield (6),

tightening the screw indicated.

Screw 9 Nm C
Fit new gaskets (5) on the exhaust manifold and

valve.
Fit the secondary air pipe (3) in the relative seat and
fasten to the valve/mounting bracket by
tightening the two screws indicated.
Hand tighten the screws indicated fastening the

secondary air pipe (3) to the exhaust manifold.
Applicable for right hand exhaust manifold ONLY
Working from the wheel bay, fit the heat shield (4).
Hand tighten the indicated screw.
If necessary, bend the heat shield (4) back into the
original shape.
Applicable for right hand exhaust manifold ONLY
Working from above, tighten the two indicated

screws fastening the heat shield (4).
Fit the clamp (2) fastening onto the catalytic

converter and partially tighten by tightening the
relative nut.
Fit and tighten the oxygen sensor (1) on the

exhaust manifold (A).

Applicable for left hand exhaust manifold only. Refit the compressor ( F5.03).
Adjust the exhaust system ( B7.04).
Catalytic converter Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
B7.03 Catalytic converter
Removing the catalytic converter
The following procedure is for removing the left hand catalytic converter.
The procedure for removing the right hand catalytic converter is identical.


Unscrew and remove the oxygen sensor (1).
Apply AREXONS SVITOL TECHNIK SILIKON

SPRAY to the joint between the catalytic
converter and the silencer, leaving the product to
act for a few minutes.
Loosen the Torx clamp (2) fastening the catalytic
converter (A) to the silencer (3).
If present, remove shield (9) by loosening the

indicated screws.
Remove the clamp (4).

Disconnect the two quick connectors indicated from
the bellow (5).
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the air flow
meter to the air box (6).
Move the air flow meter - motorised throttle body
assembly to one side, without disconnecting
from the electrical system.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the

catalytic converter mounting bracket (7).
For left hand catalytic converter ONLY

For left hand catalytic converter ONLY

screw.
Left hand catalytic converter

converter (A) and the exhaust manifold.
Right hand catalytic converter

converter (A) and the exhaust manifold.
Remove the template (AV 8257) from the exhaust manifold.
Detach the catalytic converter (A) from the silencer

and remove upwards as shown in the photo
aside.
Refitting the catalytic converter

chassis
NEVER reuse exhaust system clamps that

have been subjected to operating
temperature. Replace with new components.
Removal and refitting is only permitted with new
clamps for adjustment purposes during initial
installation.
Fit the catalytic converter (A) in the relative seat

from above, as shown in the photo aside.
Fit the catalytic converter (A) on the silencer.

installation.
Align the catalytic converter (A) with the exhaust

manifold and partially tighten the clamp (8) by
tightening the relative nut.
Fasten the catalytic converter mounting bracket (7)

to the chassis, tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 25 Nm B
Fit the air flow meter - motorised throttle body

assembly in the relative seat.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the air flow
meter to the air box (6).
Fasten a new clamp (4).
Connect the two quick connectors indicated to the
bellow (5).
If present, position shield (9).


installation.
Partially tighten the clamp (2) fastening the catalytic

converter (A) to the silencer (3), by tightening
the relative nut.
Fit and tighten the oxygen sensor (1).


Silencers Page 1 of 20
Print Exit
B7.04 Silencers
Removing the silencers
Right hand silencer
Disconnect the pipe (1) from the By-pass valve of

the silencer.
Loosen the clamps (2) fastening the central exhaust

pipe (A) to the silencers (B), undoing the relative
nuts indicated.
Disconnect and remove the central exhaust pipe (A)
from the silencers (B).
Undo the indicated nut fastening the lateral

mounting bushing for the silencer.
Support the weight of the silencer adequately.
Undo the indicated nuts fastening the mounting

bushings for the silencer (B).
Loosen the clamp (3) fastening the silencer (B) to

the catalytic converter (C), loosening the relative
nut.
Disconnect the silencer (B) from the catalytic
converter (C), and remove from the relative seat.
Left hand silencer
Disconnect the pipe (1) from the By-pass valve of

the silencer.
Loosen the clamps (2) fastening the central exhaust

pipe (A) to the silencers (B), undoing the relative
nuts indicated.
Disconnect and remove the central exhaust pipe (A)
from the silencers (B).
Undo the indicated nut fastening the lateral

mounting bushing for the silencer.
Undo the indicated nuts fastening the mounting

bushings for the silencer (B).
Loosen the clamp (3) fastening the silencer (B) to

the catalytic converter (C), loosening the relative
nut.
Disconnect the silencer (B) from the catalytic
converter (C), and remove from the relative seat.
Refitting the silencers
Right hand silencer

installation.
Fit the right hand silencer (B) in the relative seat

and connect to the right hand catalytic converter
(C).
Partially tighten the clamp (3) fastening the right
hand silencer (B) to the right hand catalytic
converter (C), tightening the relative nut.
Partially tighten the indicated nuts fastening the rear

mounting bushings for the right hand silencer (B).
Partially tighten the indicated nut fastening the

lateral mounting bushing for the right hand
silencer.

installation.
Connect the central exhaust pipe (A) to the

silencers (B).
Partially tighten the clamps (2) fastening the central
exhaust pipe (A) to the silencers (B), tightening
the relative nuts indicated.
Connect the pipe (1) to the By-pass valve of the

right hand silencer.
Left hand silencer

installation.
Fit the left hand silencer (B) in the relative seat and
connect to the left hand catalytic converter (C).
Partially tighten the clamp (3) fastening the left hand
silencer (B) to the left hand catalytic converter
(C), tightening the relative nut.
Partially tighten the indicated nuts fastening the rear

mounting bushings for the left hand silencer (B).
Partially tighten the indicated nut fastening the

lateral mounting bushing for the left hand
silencer.

installation.
Connect the central exhaust pipe (A) to the

silencers (B).
Partially tighten the clamps (2) fastening the central
exhaust pipe (A) to the silencers (B), tightening
the relative nuts indicated.
Connect the pipe (1) to the By-pass valve of the left

hand silencer.
Adjusting the exhaust system

Fastening catalytic converters to exhaust manifolds Clamp 13 Nm B
Fastening centre exhaust pipe to silencers Clamp (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm
Fastening catalytic converters to silencers Clamp (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm
chassis
Fastening catalytic converters to mounting Screw / Nut 25 Nm B
bushings
Fastening silencers to mounting bushings Nut 13 Nm B
The exhaust system must be adjusted each time a component of the exhaust system is removed and
reinstalled.
NEVER reuse exhaust system clamps that have been subjected to operating temperature. Replace with
new components.
Removal and refitting is only permitted with new clamps for adjustment purposes during initial installation.

Remove the lateral cosmetic shields only.


indicated screws.

indicated screws.
Loosen the indicated nut.
Loosen the indicated nuts.
Loosen the indicated nut.
Loosen the indicated nuts.
Loosen the indicated screws.
Loosen the indicated screws.
Loosen the indicated clamp.
Loosen the indicated clamps.
for the left hand cylinder bank exhaust ONLY


screw.

Remove the template (AV 8257).

Check that the central exhaust pipe (A) is spaced

equally between the two silencer exhaust pipes
(B) and that it is parallel with the ground.
If not, adjust as necessary to meet the conditions
described above.
With the template (AV 8257) still fixed to the flexible

exhaust manifold pipe, tighten the clamp (8).

Clamp 13 Nm B

Tighten the clamp (8) between the catalytic

Clamp 13 Nm B
Pre-tighten the indicated clamps.

Clamp (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Pre-tighten the indicated clamp.

Pre-tighten the indicated clamp.


Fasten the catalytic converter mounting bracket
first and then fasten the catalytic converter to
the relative bushings.

Screw 25 Nm B
Screw / Nut 25 Nm B

Fasten the catalytic converter mounting bracket
first and then fasten the catalytic converter to
the relative bushings.

Screw 25 Nm B
Screw / Nut 25 Nm B

Nut 13 Nm B
Tighten the indicated nut.

Nut 13 Nm B

Nut 13 Nm B

Nut 13 Nm B
Tighten the indicated clamp.

Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm

Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm
Tighten the indicated clamps.

Clamp +6.5 0
54.2 -6.5 Nm
original shape.
Working from above, tighten the two indicated

screws fastening the heat shield (10).



Print Exit
C1.01 Technical specifications
Gear ratios
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th R

Transmission 3.077 2.185 1.626 1.286 1.028 0.839 0.693 2.791
gear ratios
Bevel gear 5.143
pair/differential
ratio
General
New dual clutch gearbox with 7 forward speeds + reverse and F1 shift paddles, chosen to offer the driving
pleasure of a sequential gearbox together with the comfort of an automatic gearbox.
Electrohydraulic actuation.
Triple cone synchronisers on all gear ratios to ensure the sporty performance typical of a sequential gearbox.
The system has two different wet clutches, each one of which mated to a different primary shaft. One clutch
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_C10... 8/5/2011
drives the even gears, the other drives the odd gears.
While one primary shaft transmits torque to 1st gear, 2nd gear is already engaged on the other primary shaft.
Gear shifting is achieved by opening one clutch while simultaneously closing the other. The results of this are
shift times close to zero (sportiness), seamless torque delivery (performance) and shifts as smooth as an
automatic transmission (comfort).
Control panel on centre console for selecting reverse gear, Automatic gearbox mode and the Launch Control
function.
Clutch
Designed to work as a torsional vibration damper (DMF).

Two wet multi-plate clutches with integrated centrifugal force actuation.
Mounting for the dual clutch in the clutch housing.
Hydraulically actuated clutch.
Gear shift system
Hydraulically actuated gearbox

Design of gear selection lever and fork
Mechanically locked torqueless (even or odd) gears.
Hydraulic system
Includes clutch management.

Includes shift actuator unit.
Additional lubricant pump for gearbox and differential.
E-LSD actuation.
Maximum temperature in hydraulic system is 120°C.
Print Exit
C1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Trolley 95977565 (AS 107565)

removing the engine / gearbox / subframe assembly.
Trolley 95977572 (AS 107572)

to be used together with trolley AS 107565 for
removing/refitting gearbox from and into vehicle.

Hook 95977564 (AS 107564)

for lifting the gearbox.
Pump 95978174 (AV 8174)

topping up gearbox and clutch oil.
Engine retainer bracket for gearbox removal

95978254 (AV 8254)
removing the gearbox.
Print Exit
C1.03 Tightening torques

Fastening starter motor to gearbox Screw 25 Nm A
Fastening gearbox to engine Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening engine mounting bush to gearbox Screw 100 Nm A
on gearbox
Fastening axle shaft to wheel hub Nut 275 Nm A
Fastening gear oil and clutch oil pipes to radiators Union 35 Nm B
Fastening gear oil and clutch oil radiator to chassis Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening flywheel to crankshaft Pretightening torque for 45 Nm 0
screw
Screw 91 Nm A
Fastening electric fan to clutch hydraulic system Nut 4 Nm B
oil radiator
Fastening gearbox gear oil pipe shield bracket Nut 24 Nm B
Gear oil system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
C2.01 Gear oil system layout
Gear oil system layout
A - DCT gearbox (gear oil tank and gear oil pump)

B - Gear oil pipes
C - Water/gear oil radiator
Removing the complete DCT gearbox Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
C2.02 Removing the complete DCT gearbox
Removing the complete gearbox
CAUTION
INSTALLED.

Remove the engine oil tank ( B5.03).
Remove the silencers ( B7.04).
Remove the axle shaft ( C4.01).
Remove both axle shafts from the gearbox flanges.
To remove the rear subframe complete with

gearbox and engine, use the trolley (AS 107565).
The trolley consists of a turntable platform (53),
which can be locked in position with the two
handles (54); of six locator pins (52), with
relevant swivelling and removable mounts; of a
pedal (55) for lifting the platform, and a handle
(56) for lowering the platform.
Before starting the following procedure, the trolley

(AS 107565) must be configured correctly for
removing the gearbox on this vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the telescoping
arm (17) to the relevant mounting (18) on all the
arms on the trolley (AS 107565).
Extend all the telescoping arms (17) from the
mountings (18).
Numbers (from 1 to 6) are stamped on each of the
arms and the respective mountings, which
must be matched to ensure correct reassembly.
Position the mountings (18) on the trolley

(AS 107565) as shown in the photo aside.
Place the trolley (AS 107572) on the mountings of

the trolley (AS 107565), orienting with the pairs
of holes indicated by the red arrows towards the
rear of the vehicle, as shown in the photo aside.
Fasten the trolley (AS 107572) onto the mountings,
in as centred a position as possible, tightening
the four screws indicated.




brackets by undoing the indicated screws.
Move the pipes out of the way so that they do not
hinder the subsequent operations.
Remove the shield (1), undoing the indicated nuts.

(2).

indicated.

indicated.

residue.
Place a container for collecting the clutch hydraulic
system oil under the pipes.
the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes.
Disconnect the clutch hydraulic system oil pipes (4)

from the gearbox and plug immediately.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the retainers

Place a container for collecting the gear oil under
the pipes.
the gear oil pipes.
Disconnect the gear oil pipes (6) from the gearbox

and plug immediately.
Release the oil pipes from the mounting bracket (7)
and remove the bracket from the gearbox.
Move the oil pipes of both systems aside carefully, taking care not to twist or damage them, so that they do
not hinder the removal of the gearbox.
Remove the clamp fastening the gearbox wiring

harness, undoing the screw indicated, and
disconnect the three connectors (8).
Move the gearbox wiring harness out of the way so
that it does not hinder the removal of the
gearbox.
Fit the tool (AV 8254) onto the rear subframe to

support the weight of the engine and prevent it
from tipping when the gearbox is removed.
Fit the tool in the relevant seat and fasten by
tightening the two screws indicated; loosen the
nut (C) and tighten the pin (D) to bring the
bushing (E) into contact with the lower
crankcase shell.
After fitting the bushing (E) correctly, tighten the nut
(C).
Screw the four adjuster pins of the tool (AS 107572)

into the relevant holes and adjust each one to
the same position.
The shorter adjuster pins must be installed in the
front holes.
The longer adjuster pins must be installed in the

rear holes.
Insert the support spacer (element 05) of tool

(AS 107572) between the lower gearbox
mounting cross member (9) and the gearbox (A).
Remove the left hand tie-rod (12), undoing the

screws (10) and (11).
Fit a hydraulic jack under the gearbox and lift it

slightly, placing it under tension, in order to
facilitate the removal of the pin (22).
Undo the nut (21) retrieving the washer.
Remove the pin (22) fastening the bushing
mounting (15) to the rear subframe, retrieving
the washer.
Lower the hydraulic jack until the gearbox rests on
the support spacer (element 05) of the tool
(AS 107572), previously fit.
Undo the three upper nuts (14) fastening the

gearbox (A) to the engine (B).
Position the trolley (AS 107565) under the vehicle

and lift the platform to approximately 10 mm
from the adjuster pins.
Loosen the nut (19) then unscrew the pin (20) of
tool (AS 107572), until the pin comes into
contact with the trolley (AS 107572).
Repeat this procedure for all the adjuster pins.
From underneath, tighten the indicated screws

fastening the four adjuster pins onto the trolley
(AS 107572).
Ensure that the lower and upper parts of the pin are
correctly fastened to the gearbox and trolley
(AS 107572) respectively, then tighten the nut
(19).
Repeat this procedure for all the adjuster pins.
Use the pedal on the trolley (AS 107565) to lift the

gearbox of a few millimetres in order to support
its weight.
Undo the four lower nuts (14) fastening the gearbox

(A) to the engine (B).
Undo the screws indicated fastening the starter

motor (13) to the gearbox.




Also recover the support spacer (element 05) of tool
(AS 107572).


Also recover the support spacer (element 05) of tool
(AS 107572).
Loosen the two trolley platform locking handles

(AS 107565) and move the trolley (AS 107572)
to ease the gearbox (A) off the engine stud bolts.
After easing out the gearbox (A), lock the two trolley
platform lock handles (AS 107565).
Replace gearbox mounting bushing ( C2.02).

Remove the component only.
Tighten the eye bolts in the relative holes on the

gearbox and fit tool (AS 107564).
Connect to a mobile hydraulic jack, lift the gearbox
from the trolley and set down in a safe place.
Replacing gearbox mounting bushing

Fastening gearbox mounting bush cover Screw 30 Nm B
Undo the screws indicated and remove the cover

(1).
Remove the gearbox mounting bushing (A) from the

cover (1) and replace it.
Fit a new gearbox mounting bushing (A) inserting

the indicated pin inside the relative seat on the
cover (1).
Fasten the cover (1) tightening the indicated

screws, and following the sequence shown in the
photo.

Screw 30 Nm B
Refitting the complete DCT gearbox Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
C2.03 Refitting the complete DCT gearbox
Refitting the complete gearbox

to chassis
Fastening gearbox to engine Nut 60 Nm A
on gearbox
Fastening gearbox gear oil pipe shield bracket Nut 24 Nm B
Tighten the eye bolts in the relative holes on the

gearbox and fit tool (AS 107564).
Connect to a mobile hydraulic jack and lift the
gearbox, locating in the relative seat on the
trolley (AS 107572).
Replace gearbox mounting bushing ( C2.02).

Refit the component only.
Apply a layer of copper grease Copper Grease

ROLOIL on the splined shaft of the gearbox.
Supporting the weight of the gearbox adequately

with the lift trolley (AS 107565) and the trolley
(AS 107572), position the complete gearbox (A)
under the engine compartment, aligned with the
engine stud bolts.
Loosen the two trolley platform locking handles
(AS 107565) and move the trolley (AS 107572)
to fit the gearbox (A) onto the engine stud bolts.








Screw 60 Nm A



Screw 60 Nm A
Insert the support spacer (element 05) of tool

(AS 107572) between the lower gearbox
mounting cross member (9) and the gearbox (A).
Fit and tighten the four lower nuts (14) fastening the
complete gearbox (A) to the engine (B).

Nut 60 Nm A
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the starter

motor (13) to the gearbox.

Screw 25 Nm A
From underneath, remove the indicated screws

fastening the four adjuster pins onto the trolley
(AS 107572).
Slowly lower the trolly (AS 107572) by a few
centimetres, allowing the gearbox to rest on the
support spacer (element 05) of tool (AS 107572).
Remove all the lifting tools (AS 107572) and (AS 107565).
Fit a hydraulic jack under the gearbox and lift it

slightly, placing it under tension, in order to
facilitate the fitting of the pin (22).
Fit the pin (22) fastening the bushing mounting (15)
to the rear subframe, after fitting the washer.
Hand tighten the nut (21) after fitting the washer.
Fit and tighten the three upper nuts (14) fastening

the complete gearbox (A) to the engine (B).

Nut 60 Nm A
Pretighten the nut (21).

Nut 50 Nm 0

Nut 100 Nm B
Fit the left hand tie-rod (12) and fasten by tightening

the screws (10) e (11).

Screw 88 Nm A
Screw 24 Nm A
Loosen the nut (C), then unscrew the pin (D) by a

few turns.
Supporting the weight of the tool (AV 8254), undo
the two screws indicated then remove the tool
from under the vehicle.
Fasten the gearbox wiring harness to the chassis,

fitting the clamp and tightening the screw
indicated, then connect the three connectors (8).
Fit the mounting bracket (7) on the gearbox stud

bolts and fasten the oil pipes of both systems
onto the relevant pillory blocks.
Replace the O-rings on the gear oil pipes (6) and fit
into the relevant seats.
Fit the fork (5) on the gear oil pipes and fasten to
the gearbox by tightening the screw indicated.

Screw 20 Nm A
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the retainers


residue.
Replace the O-rings on the clutch hydraulic system
oil pipes (4) and fit into the relevant seats.
Fit the fork (3) on the clutch hydraulic system oil
pipes and fasten to the gearbox by tightening the
screw indicated.

Screw 20 Nm A

screw indicated.

screw indicated.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the heat

shield (2).
Fit and fasten the bracket (1), tightening the
indicated nuts.

Nut 24 Nm B

brackets tightening the indicated screws.



Refit the axle shaft ( C4.01).

Refit the silencers ( B7.04).
Refit the engine oil tank ( B5.03).
Gear oil radiator Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
C2.04 Gear oil radiator
Removing gear oil radiator
The gear oil radiator is located on the rear right-hand side of the vehicle, in front of the rear bumper.
Remove the duct (1) by undoing the indicated

fasteners.
The internal nut is in common with the radiator
fastening to the chassis.
Clean the inlet area of the unions (2) on the radiator

with a suitable degreaser that does not leave
residues.
Place a container under the unions to collect any oil
spillage.
Mark the position of the unions (2) on the radiator to
avoid inverting them during the reassembly
operations.
Undo the unions (2) on the gear oil radiator (A).
Place immediately suitable plugs on radiator and
pipe inlets.
Clean any spilt fluid.
Undo the indicated nuts and remove the gear oil

radiator (A) from the vehicle.
If necessary, separate the duct (3) from the gear oil

radiator, undoing the indicated screws.
Refitting gear oil radiator

Fastening rear radiator air duct Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
Check the state of the foam rubber pads (4);

replace with new components if necessary.
If removed, fit the duct (3) on the gear oil radiator,

Fit the gear oil radiator (A) in the relative seat in the
vehicle and fasten by tightening the indicated
nuts.

Nut 9 Nm B

residues.
Remove the plugs positioned previously.
Tighten the unions (2) on the gear oil radiator (A),
using the markings made during removal as
reference.

Union 35 Nm B
Fit and fasten the duct (1) by tightening the

indicated fasteners.

Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
Operation to be carried out in the event of oil spillage.
Draining and filling with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
C2.05 Draining and filling with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
Draining the Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil
The gear oil must be changed at the intervals specified in the MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE.
Place a container under the plugs indicated in the

figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plugs (1) and (2) at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.
Filling the system with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil

Draining and filling with Shell Transaxle 75W-90 GL5 gear oil Page 2 of 2
Clean the plugs (1) and (2) thoroughly with a

suitable degreaser that does not leave residue,
and replace the seals.
Tighten the plugs (1) and (2).

Plug 25 Nm B
Undo the threaded inspection/filler plug (3) located

on the rear surface of the transmission.

the short spout), aspirate the specified oil from a
Using the pump (AV 8174) element 01 and a
container for collecting excess oil, fill with 3.9
litres of oil via the inspection/filler orifice.
Fill with half of the quantity indicated, wait a few
minutes for the fluid to settle, then gradually
finish filling, until oil overflows from the
check/filler hole.
pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plugs.
Hydraulic clutch oil system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
C3.01 Hydraulic clutch oil system layout
Hydraulic clutch oil system layout
A - DCT gearbox (clutch oil tank and clutch oil pump)

B - Clutch oil pipes
C - Clutch oil radiator
Hydraulic clutch oil system radiator Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
C3.02 Hydraulic clutch oil system radiator
Removing the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator
The clutch hydraulic system oil radiator is located on the rear left-hand side of the vehicle, in front of the rear
bumper.
Remove the duct (1) by undoing the indicated

fasteners.

residues.
Place a container under the unions to collect any oil
spillage.
Mark the position of the unions (2) on the radiator to
avoid inverting them during the reassembly
operations.
Undo the unions (2) on the clutch hydraulic system
oil radiator (A).
Place immediately suitable plugs on radiator and
pipe inlets.
Undo the indicated nuts and remove the clutch

hydraulic system oil radiator (A) from the vehicle.
Detach the connector (5) of the electric fan.
If necessary, separate the duct (3) from the clutch

hydraulic system oil radiator, undoing the
indicated screws.
Refitting the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator

Check the state of the foam rubber pads (4);

replace with new components if necessary.
If removed, fit the duct (3) on the clutch hydraulic

system oil radiator, tightening the indicated
screws.
Fit the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator (A) in the

relative seat in the vehicle and fasten by
tightening the indicated nuts.

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the connector (5) of the electric fan.

residues.
Tighten the unions (2) on the clutch hydraulic
system oil radiator (A), using the markings made
during removal as reference.

Union 35 Nm B
Fit and fasten the duct (1) by tightening the


Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
Operation to be carried out in the event of oil spillage.
Replacing the clutch hydraulic system oil radiator electric fan

Fastening electric fan to clutch hydraulic system Nut 4 Nm B
oil radiator


Remove the electric fan (A) and replace.
Fit the new electric fan (A) on the radiator.

Nut 4 Nm B

Draining and filling with Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
C3.03 Draining and filling with Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil
Draining Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil
Place a container under the plug indicated in the

figure to collect the oil.
Undo the plug (1) located at the bottom of the
gearbox housing.
Filling with Shell DCT F-3 hydraulic clutch system oil

Clean the plug (1) thoroughly with a suitable

degreaser that does not leave residue and
replace the seal.
Tighten the plug (1).

Plug 25 Nm B
Undo the threaded inspection plug (2), located on

the left on the bottom of the differential housing.
There is a small pipe above the threaded plug for
filling and checking the level of the system.

the long spout), aspirate the specified oil from a
Using the pump (AV 8174) together with element 02
and a container for collecting excess oil, fill with
8.0 litres of oil via the dipstick pipe.
Fill with half of the quantity indicated, wait a few

minutes for the oil to settle, then gradually finish
filling, until oil overflows from the level pipe (8).
pooling within the system. Fill gradually.
Check that there is no leakage from the drain plug.
Axle shafts Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
C4.01 Axle shafts
Removing the axle shaft
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand axle shaft.
The procedure for removing the left hand axle shaft is similar.
Disable the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function ( D3.07).

Use a punch and mallet to remove the caulking (1)

from the ring nut (2).
Undo the ring nut (2) fastening the axle shaft to the
hub carrier bearing.
Undo the six screws (3) fastening the axle shaft (A)
to the differential flange, recovering the three
shims (4).
Undo the nut (5), removing the relevant pin

fastening the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub carrier
(C).
Support the weight of the rear suspension
adequately and undo the nut (6), removing the
relevant pin fastening the upper arm (D) to the
hub carrier (C).
Use a suitable screwdriver to prise the clip (7) off

the EPB linkage bracket.
Detach the end (8) of the left hand EPB Bowden
cable (9) from the EPB linkage bracket.
Move the EPB equaliser (7) to the right.

Detach the end (8) of the right hand EPB Bowden
cable (9) from the EPB equaliser (7).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and
remove the right hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (9) from the relative mounting bracket.
Left hand axle shaft

remove the left hand EPB Bowden cable sheath
(9) from the relative mounting bracket.
Tilt the hub carrier outward to detach the axle shaft from the differential flange.
If necessary, cut the cable retainer clamps to slacken any tension preventing the hub carrier from tilting.
Use a suitable punch and mallet to extract the axle shaft from the hub carrier bearing, then remove the axle
shaft from the vehicle.
Refitting the axle shaft

Fastening upper arm to hub carrier Nut 90 Nm A
Fastening toe-in tie-rod to hub carrier Nut 80 Nm A
Fastening axle shaft to differential flange Screw 78 Nm A
When refitting the same axle shaft, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH
RETAINING COMPOUND.
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from the
hub carrier bearing.
Check that the surface of the differential flange is completely clean.
Apply three even and regularly spaced circular

beads of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH
STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND.
Fit the axle shaft in the hub carrier bearing.

Tilt the hub carrier inward to bring the axle shaft and the differential flange together.
Fit new cable retainer clamps if the previous clamps were cut.
Support the weight of the rear suspension

adequately, pretighten the nut (6) with a
tightening angle of 80°, and then fully tighten,
fitting the relative pin fastening the upper arm (D)
to the hub carrier (C).

Nut 90 Nm A
Pretighten the nut (5) with a tightening angle of 70°,

then fully tighten, fitting the relative pin fastening
the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub carrier (C).

Nut 80 Nm A
Tighten the six screws (3) fastening the axle shaft

(A) to the differential flange, fitting the three
shims (4).

Screw 78 Nm A
Tighten the ring nut (2) fastening the axle shaft to

the hub carrier bearing.

Nut 275 Nm A
Loosen the ring nut (2) and retighten.

Nut 275 Nm A
Use a punch and mallet to caulk (1) the ring nut (2).
Press on the two indicated fastener tabs and fit the

right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (9) in the
Move the EPB equaliser (7) to the left.
Left hand axle shaft

left hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (9) into the
Attach the end (8) of the left hand EPB Bowden

cable (9) to the EPB linkage bracket.
Refit the clip (7) in the relative seat on the EPB
linkage bracket.

Refit the wheels ( D2.01).
Carry out the EPB Calibration procedure.
Flywheel Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
C4.02 Flywheel
Removing the flywheel
Located inside the transmission housing and connected to the crankshaft.
Immobilise the crankshaft.

Undo the eight screws indicated fastening the
engine flywheel (A).
Undo the screws in a crossed pattern, by undoing
one screw first and then the opposite screw.
Note that while the starter motor has been

removed in the photo aside, its removal is not
necessary.
Remove the engine flywheel (A) from under the

vehicle.
Refitting the flywheel

Fastening flywheel to crankshaft Pretightening torque for 45 Nm 0
screw
Screw 91 Nm A
Flywheel Page 2 of 2
Fit the engine flywheel (A) in its seat, aligning the

crankshaft bearing and matching up the fastener
holes.
The flywheel can only be installed one way, as
one of the eight holes is not centred, as on the
crankshaft.
Apply all eight fastener screws by hand.

Pretighten the four screws indicated (red markings)
in the following order: 1-2-3-4.

Pretightening torque for screw 45 Nm 0
Tighten the screws definitively in the following

order: 5-6-7-8 then 1-2-3-4.

Screw 91 Nm A
Print Exit
D1.01 Technical specifications
Brake system
390 mm x 36 mm carbon-ceramic front disc with 4-piston aluminium calliper

350 mm x 32 mm carbon-ceramic rear disc with 4-piston aluminium calliper
148 T4300 pads (front)

77 S600 pads (rear)
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Can be inserted and removed using a control on the dashboard.

Differentiated release of callipers/pads at vehicle start (AVH function). This guarantees optimum release
dynamics.
Automatic activation at engine cut-off (AUTOHOLD function) with the option to disable automatic activation
using the AUTOPARK button incorporated into the EPB control.
Stability and Traction Control (CST)
The CST consists of two primary systems:
VDC: vehicle dynamics control through the brake system and engine torque;
F1-Trac: traction control, which functions by modulating engine torque in relation to maximum road grip.
CST also consists of a number of secondary systems, such as ABS, EBD etc., which are active at all times.
F1-Trac is quicker and more precise than a conventional traction control system and delays and minimises the
engine torque corrections necessary to maintain the desired trajectory.
The system is self-adaptive and calculates the maximum grip available by constantly monitoring the relative
speeds of the wheels.
F1-Trac correlates real data against a vehicle dynamics model stored in the control system and optimises the
behaviour of the vehicle by controlling engine torque delivery.
F1-Trac is not active with the Manettino turned to "CST off".
Suspension
New double-wishbone front suspension, including a hollow torsion bar to reduce roll, leading to a subsequent
increase in driving comfort.
New rear Multilink suspension. The Multilink layout means that the suspension has greater flexibility lengthwise
(for greater comfort) while maintaining the same transversal rigidity values as a conventional layout (the
same handling).
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_D10... 8/5/2011
The Multilink suspension layout offers a greater capacity to absorb bumps together with lower levels of noise
and vibration, optimum transversal rigidity and comfort.
Magnetorheological shock absorbers, already available on 599 GTB Fiorano and California.
Front
Wheel rim size
Light alloy 8.5 " J x 20 "

Spare wheel 4.5 " J x 20 "
Tyre size
235/35 ZR20 Pirelli P Zero

235/35 ZR20 Bridgestone Potenza
235/35 ZR20 Michelin Pilot Sport, interchangeable individually or in pairs with Michelin Pilot Super Sport (only in
size indicated for 458 Italia)
235/35 ZR20 Michelin Pilot Super Sport
235/35 ZR20 Bridgestone Potenza Run Flat optional Run Flat
Winter 235/35 ZR20 Pirelli Winter Sottozero optional
Spare wheel 145/60 ZR20 Vredestein optional
Rear
Wheel rim size
Light alloy 10.5 " J x 20 "

Spare wheel 4.5 " J x 20 "
Tyre size
295/35 ZR20 Pirelli P Zero

295/35 ZR20 Bridgestone Potenza
295/35 ZR20 Michelin Pilot Sport 2, interchangeable individually or in pairs with Michelin Pilot Super Sport (only
in size indicated for 458 Italia)
295/35 ZR20 Michelin Pilot Super Sport
295/35 ZR20 Bridgestone Potenza Run Flat optional Run Flat
Winter 285/35 ZR20 Pirelli Winter Sottozero optional
Spare wheel 145/60 ZR20 Vredestein optional
Inflation pressure (cold)
Front Rear
Pirelli P Zero 30.46 psi 29 psi
Bridgestone Potenza 33.36 psi 33.36 psi
Michelin Pilot Sport 30.46 psi 29 psi
Front Rear
Bridgestone Potenza 33.36 psi 36.26 psi
(Run Flat)
Pirelli Winter 30.46 psi 29 psi
Sottozero
Vredestein (Spare 60.92 psi 60.92 psi
wheel)
Print Exit
D1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Support 95973206 (AV 3206)

for complete hub.

Print Exit
D1.03 Tightening torques

Fastening power steering pump to engine Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening cover to power steering pump Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening power steering fluid pipes to reservoir Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fastening steering wheel to steering column Nut 50 Nm B
Fastening steering column to steering box Screw 30 Nm B
Fastening steering box to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm A
Fastening steering box tie-rod to front hub carrier Nut 40 Nm A
Fastening power steering pipe unions to power Nut 9 Nm B
steering fluid radiator
Fastening underbody union with power steering Union 40 Nm B
fluid delivery pipe
fluid return pipe
Fastening delivery and return pipes on steering M14 pipe union 35 Nm B
box M16 pipe union 38 Nm B
Fastening upper fastener for steering column to Screw 8 Nm B
dashboard
Fastening lower fastener for steering column to Screw 25 Nm B
dashboard
Fastening rear stabiliser bar to chassis Screw 60 Nm B
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 -
MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
Fastening rear stabiliser bar to tie-rod Nut 50 Nm B
Fastening upper arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening shock absorber to chassis Screw 110 Nm A
Fastening lower arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening brake pad sensor ground cable Nut 6 Nm B
Fastening front stabiliser bar to tie-rod Nut 50 Nm B
Fastening steering box tie-rod to hub carrier Nut 40 Nm B

Fastening shock absorber to lower arm Screw 80 Nm A
Fastening upper arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening toe-in tie-rod to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening lower arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening tyre inflation valve Nut 4 Nm A
Fastening tyre pressure sensor Screw 4 Nm A
Fastening front stabiliser bar to chassis Screw 30 Nm B
Fastening NRRPS motion sensor mounting Screw 5 Nm B
bracket to chassis
Fastening trigger to mounting bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening lower arm to hub carrier Nut (pretightening) 90 Nm A
Nut 63 Nm A
Fastening upper arm to hub carrier Nut 52 Nm B
Spherical tie-rod - lower arm Spherical tie-rod 50 Nm B
Fastening lower arm to hub carrier Nut 205 Nm A
Shock absorber ring nut Ring nut 65 Nm B
Fastening pipe and cable mounting bracket to hub Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
carrier
Products to use: AREXONS 242
Brake disc shield bracket Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fastening anti-rotation link to hub carrier Screw 85 Nm A
Fastening vehicle lift system unions Union 16 Nm B
Fastening mounting bracket for "Front Lift" system Screw 24 Nm B
electric pump
Fastening vehicle lift system fluid reservoir Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening pipe from reservoir onto "Front Lift" Union 25 Nm B
system electric pump
Bushing and shock absorber retainer washer Nut 40 Nm A
Connector - shock absorber strut Nut 40 Nm A
Fastening bleed union Union 10 Nm B
Fastening brake fluid reservoir Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening bleed unions - brake callipers Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0
Fastening brake pipe union or connection M10 union 16 Nm B
Fastening brake disc - bearing Screw 15.5 Nm B
Pin 15.5 Nm B
Fastening brake fluid underbody pipe unions Union 16 Nm B
Fastening EPB Bowden cable - rear hub carrier Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening brake fluid pipe on the electrohydraulic M10 - M12 union 16 Nm B
ABS/ASR unit

Fastening electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit Screw 24 Nm B
mounting bracket to chassis
Fastening electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit to Screw 18 Nm B
mounting bracket
Fastening air duct on heater/evaporator unit inside Screw 1.5 Nm B
luggage compartment
Fastening brake servo - pedal board Nut 20 Nm B
Fastening pedal board to firewall Screw 20 Nm B
Fastening brake calliper to hub carrier Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening rigid brake fluid pipe to front brake Union 15.5 Nm B
calliper
Fastening brake fluid hose to rear brake calliper Union 21.5 Nm A
Fastening oil pipe unions to brake pump Union 16 Nm B
Fastening central pin on front brake pads Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Wheels Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Stud bolt 100 Nm A
Fastening lower radiator air ducts Screw 5 Nm C
Complete wheel Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D2.01 Complete wheel
Removing the wheels
CAUTION
Before performing any maintenance on vehicles with the Stop&Start system, turn the ignition key to 0.
Before performing any maintenance procedures requiring the ignition key to be in position II on vehicles with
the Stop&Start system, deactivate the Stop&Start system with the relative button, ensuring that the specific
icon and the message "Stop&Start OFF" are shown on the TFT display, and that the LED on the on/off
button itself is off.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury to persons working on the vehicle and in the vicinity of the vehicle in
the event of the engine unexpectedly starting.
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
CAUTION
Loosen the five stud bolts (1).

Lift the vehicle.
Remove the complete wheel.
Checking the wheels
CAUTION
Check the state of wear of the tyre and the state of the wheel rim.
When replacing a tyre or rim, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced.
Check that the mating surfaces on the rim and brake disc are perfectly clean.
Replace any stud bolts with damage to the thread or cone.
Clean the stud bolts thoroughly before refitting.
Never lubricate the contact surfaces between the stud bolt and rim and between the rim and the brake disc.
Do not clean the wheel cones with solvents or aggressive products as they may remove the anti-seizing
coating.
Refitting the wheels

Wheels Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Stud bolt 100 Nm A
CAUTION
Use tools very carefully in order to prevent damaging the painted surfaces of the wheel rim.
Tyres that have been fitted for over 3 years must be checked to verify they are still suitable for use.
CAUTION
Fit the complete wheel, inserting the locator pin in

the seat on the wheel rim.
Hand tighten the stud bolt opposite the locator pin
first, then the others.
Pretighten the stud bolts in a crossed pattern.

Pretightening of stud bolt 25 ÷ 45 Nm 0
Lower the vehicle and tighten the stud bolts (1)

definitively

Stud bolt 100 Nm A
Tyres and rims Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
D2.02 Tyres and rims
Checking the state of the tyres
Tyre replacement is recommend after 4 years of normal use. Frequent use in maximum load conditions
and at high temperatures may lead to premature deterioration.
Check the state of the tyres during the scheduled maintenance.
CAUTION
Pressure increases with increasing tyre temperature. Never reduce the tyre pressure if measured when the
tyres are hot.
Tyre overheating due to underinflation may seriously compromise handling and tyre integrity.
Do not inflate the tyres to a pressure other than the specified value, as this would render the tyre pressure
monitoring system useless.
After replacing one or more tyres, always calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system by pressing the button
on the passenger compartment dome light panel.
Check the inflation pressure: pressure must be measured with cold tyres and must match the values specified.
CAUTION
Always inspect any tyre damage very carefully to assess severity: damage may greatly reduce tyre life and
cause accidents.
Check the tyres to ensure that there are no signs of damage such as abrasion, cuts, cracks, bubbles etc.
Violent knocks against kerbs, holes or other obstacles and driving on poor road surfaces for extended periods
may cause tyre damage. This damage may not always be visible. Any foreign objects penetrating the tyre
in these conditions may cause structural damage that is only identifiable after removing the tyre from the
wheel.
CAUTION
If the same tyres have been fitted on the vehicle for over 3 years, check frequently and carefully for signs of
deterioration.
Do not monitor the pressure of a damaged tyre.
Tyres will deteriorate even if the vehicle is used rarely or kept stationary. Cracks in the rubber on the tread
and sidewalls, at times accompanied by blisters, are an indication of tyre deterioration.
CAUTION
Never fit a tyre with tread depth under the specified limit, even if only in a single localised area.
Check the tread depth: the minimum permissible value is 1.7 mm. This depth is identified by the tyre wear
indicators.
Check the wear over the entire tread; in the event of uneven tread wear, perform static and dynamic wheel
balancing.
Note that in order to mount conventional tyres on a vehicle that has been fitted with Run Flat tyres, the
instrument panel must be reprogrammed as the TFT display will display a warning message.
Replace any tyres that have been punctured and/or been inflated with the tyre inflation bottle included with
vehicle toolkit. For safety reasons, we do not recommend attempting to repair punctured tyres.
Tyre grades
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety requirements, in addition to these grades.
DOT rating
Tread wear Traction Temperature

Pirelli P Zero 220 (Front) – 160 AA A
(Rear)
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are “AA”, “A”, “B” and “C”. Those grades represent the tyre's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked "C" has poor traction performance.
The traction rating given to a tyre is based on straight line braking tests and does not take other factors
such as acceleration, steering angle, aquaplaning or traction peaks into account.
Temperature
The temperature grades are "A" (the highest), "B", and "C", representing the tyre's resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade "C" corresponds to a
minimum level of resistance to which all tyres for cars carrying passengers must comply, according to what is
established by the Federal Standard no. 109 on vehicle safety (Federal Motor Safety Standard). Grades “B”
and “A”, measured for tyres on a laboratory test wheel, indicate higher performance levels than those
required by law.
The temperature rating is with reference to a correctly inflated, correctly loaded tyre. Excessive speed,
insufficient inflation, overloading or combinations thereof may cause heat production and possible tyre
failure.
Preparation for tyre removal
The tyre pressure monitoring sensor is installed on the wheel rims, near the inflation valve.
Removing the tyre without using the correct tools and taking the necessary precautions may damage the
sensor.
To avoid this problem, we are showing the entire procedure for removal and refitting of the tyres from the wheel
rim, using a CORGHI tool, model Artiglio A2019 RC (shown in the photo) or Artiglio A2020 TI,
recommended by Ferrari.
To prevent damage to the wheel rim, all parts of the tool that may come into contact with the rim are rubber
coated.
Only use rubberised tools.

Wear gloves and protective eyewear.
Removing the tyre
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a maximum
of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather and humidity
and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will verify whether old
tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3 years must be inspected
by an authorised Ferrari Service Centre.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and compromise
its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
The photos shown here were taken using a rim from the 575M Maranello.
To more clearly identify the correct mounting positions for the tools relative to the wheel, the vertical column of
the tyre demounting machine is used as the starting point (12 o'clock).
Undo the core of the valve (A) to completely deflate

the tyre.
Place the wheel on the machine table and break the

bead on both the inner and outer sides.
Lubricate the bead (1) with the lubricant spray
provided.
Place the wheel on the self-centring clamp and use

the bead breaker to ensure that the wheel is
gripped correctly by the clamps (2) on the table.
If the machine is not equipped with a bead
breaker, clamp the wheel from the inside.
Clamp the wheel.
Observe the correct positions for bead breaking

shown as follows.
Position the inflation valve (A) at 12 o'clock.

Position the bead breaker disc (3).
Push the bead into the rim channel using the bead
breaker disc while simultaneously turning the
tyre counterclockwise, until the inflation valve (A)
is at 3 o'clock.
Lubricate the bead while turning.
To facilitate tyre removal, if necessary, insert a
bead breaker lever at 180° relative to the sensor.
If the bead is not completely broken, repeat this
stage in a clockwise direction, moving the
inflation valve from 3 o'clock to 12 o'clock.
Perform this stage repeatedly, clockwise and
anticlockwise, until the bead is completely
broken.
Fit tool (4): after clamping, the tool automatically

moves upwards and outwards.
Mount the lever (5) on tool (4), using the bead
breaker disc to facilitate the operation if
necessary.
Remove the bead breaker disc.
Position the tyre bead on the tool (4) using the lever
(5).
Remove the lever.
Ensure that the entire edge of the bead is outside

the rim and completely visible. If this is not the
case, the bead may be damaged.
If the bead does not slide easily into the groove,
lubricate the contact area.
Turn the wheel clockwise.

Fit the lever (5) on the tool (4).
Lift the tyre.
Take care not to damage the sensor when
inserting the tyre lever (5).
Position the lower bead of the tyre on the tool (4),

using the lever (5).
Remove the rim from the machine and put carefully in a safe place.
If the tyre is not to be refitted immediately, refit the valve core and cap.
Remove the tyre pressure sensor ( D2.03).

Proceed as follows if removal is necessary.
Checking wheel rims
When carrying out regular maintenance or replacing tyres, check the state of the wheel rims.
Visually inspect the external and internal wheel rim surfaces; if cracks or deep gouges are noted, replace the
wheel.
In the case of scratching, minor dents or superficial scuffs, repaint the affected area or, if necessary, the
entire rim. Use the standard procedure for repainting an alloy wheel, applying a coat of silver based paint
then, once the coat had dried to a matte finish, applying a layer of clear coat. Dry the wheel in the oven to
polymerise the layers of paint applied.
Cover the valve mounting and the hub badge when repainting, as the additional thickness of the paint may
impede correct assembly and compromise the effectiveness of the corrosion treatment applied.
Take particular care around the mating surface with the brake disc; this area is only coated with a single layer
of cataphoresis film.
This treatment has a limited lifespan as the film is gradually eroded by fretting between the surfaces. This
area cannot be repainted and a rim with a deteriorated film must be replaced.
Before refitting, always check that the mating surfaces between the wheel and the brake disc are perfectly
clean.
Using inappropriate tools for removing and refitting the tyre may damage the wheel rim and compromise
the protective layer.
Balance the wheel without the tyre but with the pressure sensor and valve installed: if, after removing the
balancer weights, the values for static balance exceed 36 (including vertical bouncing and wobble), the rim
must be replaced.
Refitting the tyre
Ensure that tyres are not kept in stock for more than 4 years. Tyres may be kept in stock for a maximum
of 4 years, provided that they are kept out of direct sunlight, protected from the weather and humidity
and stored in low oxygen conditions. If necessary, the Ferrari Service Network will verify whether old
tyres are suitable for use. In all cases, tyres mounted on a vehicle for over 3 years must be inspected
by an authorised Ferrari Service Centre.
When removing and refitting tyres, DO NOT use tyre levers which could damage the rim and compromise
its protective layer. Use levers coated in protective material.
Refit the tyre pressure sensor ( D2.03).

Proceed as follows if the component has already been removed.
After installing the pressure sensor (A), mount the

clean rim on the self-centring clamp, ensuring
that the wheel is gripped correctly by the clamps
(2) on the table.
Lubricate the wheel.
Pick up the tyre and ensure that the direction of

rotation is correct.
Lubricate both beads.
Fit the inflation valve (A) at 6 o'clock.

Place the tyre on the rim and tip the tool arm (4)
forwards.
Fit the lower bead under the right hand part of the
tool (4).
Mount the bead on the rim, applying constant
pressure.
Turn the wheel, bringing the inflation valve (A) to 12
o'clock.
The bead breaker disc must never reach the

valve-sensor assembly position.
Fit the inflation valve (A) at 4-5 o'clock.

Place the tyre on the rim, matching the lighter parts
of the rim, marked with an embossed letter "G",
with the yellow dots on the tyre.
Insert the lever (5) at 2-3 o'clock, using the bead
breaker disc (3) to push the bead in.
If available, use tyre pliers instead of the lever (5),
with the appropriate adapter fitted.
If necessary, insert a second set of tyre pliers, with

the correct adapter fitted.
Turn the wheel clockwise until the upper bead is

completely mounted.
If used, remove the tyre lever with the bead breaker
disc.
Release the wheel from the clamps (2) on the table.
Refit the core of the valve (A).
To ensure that the bead is mounted correctly, inflate

the tyre immediately, while the beads are still
lubricated.
The tyre must be inflated to activate the tyre
pressure monitoring system sensor. Inflate the
tyre to a pressure greater than 0.6 bar and
keep inflated at this pressure for a few
minutes.
If the maximum permissible inflation pressure of

(3.2 bar / 44 psi) is not sufficient to seat the
beads, lubricate again.
Balance the wheels ( D2.02).
Wheel balancing
Only use self-adhesive counterweights. In addition to damaging the wheel rim, other types of
counterweights can interfere with parts of the suspension or detach while driving.
Do not touch the adhesive surface of the counterweight before applying to the rim and never reuse
counterweights or use weights with no protective paper, as these may detach while driving.
After replacing a tyre, wheel rim, or both, the wheel must be statically and dynamically balanced using a
balancing machine and suitable counterweights.
Manufacturers identify the heaviest part of the wheel rim and the tyre with a reference mark. When mounting the
tyre onto the rim, always set these reference marks opposite each other to minimise the amount of
counterweights necessary for balancing.
The counterweights must be applied in position (A)

on the inner edge of the wheel rim, in position
(B), or in both positions if necessary.
Thoroughly clean the wheel rim surface onto which
the counterweight will be applied with heptane.
Remove the protective backing and affix the
counterweight onto the wheel rim, pressing
evenly to ensure that it adheres perfectly.
Tyre pressure monitoring system Page 1 of 20
Print Exit
D2.03 Tyre pressure monitoring system
TPMS system layout
A - Sensors
B - Trigger
C - Antenna
D - Electronic control unit
Operating the TPMS tyre pressure and temperature monitoring system
The system must be calibrated from the relative menu option on the left hand TFT display after replacing
or inflating any of the tyres.
The TPMS system may be calibrated from the specific Menu option on the left hand TFT display.
The sensors fixed to the interior of the wheel rims, next to the inflation valve, detect the pressure and
temperature of the tyres.
These sensors transmit a signal received by the triggers fixed to the bodyshell behind the gravel guard, which
are in turn connected to the ECU.
The ECU processes the data received from the triggers and transmits the processed data to the instrument
panel.
The data transmitted to ECU activates the respective indications on the left hand TFT display.
Visualisation on TFT display
TYRES screen: use the relative controls on the left hand TFT display to access the informative screen
displaying the pressure and temperature values for each tyre.
- Insufficient pressure of one or more tyres
With any currently active screen, when the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit
indicating that the pressure of one or more tyres is below the warning threshold, but the system cannot
recognise which wheel is generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Check
tyre pressure” without the vehicle symbol.
indicating that the pressure of a tyre is below the warning threshold, the TFT display displays the specific
message “Check tyre pressure” together with the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
The background of the box indicating the pressure and relative unit of measurement for the faulty tyre turns
amber.
indicating that the pressure of more than one tyre is below the warning threshold, the TFT display displays
the specific message “Check tyre pressure” together with the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
amber.
The display cycle is 20 seconds, after which time the specific screen disappears.
At key-off, no information is displayed but the function continues to monitor tyre pressure while the vehicle is
parked.
If the fault persists at the subsequent key-on, the specific screen is shown again on the display.
TYRES screen: the driver may recall the screen by using the controls on the left hand TFT display, enabling
identification of tyres with insufficient pressure at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel
is generating the fault signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the screen
is not recallable by the driver.
- TPMS not calibrated
When the TPMS system has not been calibrated or a tyre has been replaced, the TFT display displays the
specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the message "Execute calibration".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the default
screen is shown automatically.
Simultaneously, the specific indicator light starts flashing and continues to flash for a maximum period of 90
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until the system is
calibrated.
The system may be calibrated via the specific option in the menu, in key-on state with the engine off.
Upon selection of the menu option and subsequent successful calibration, the TFT display displays the specific
message "Calibration activated" for 5 seconds.
In “Calibration activated” state, the TYRES screen is recallable, but the pressure and temperature values are
replaced by dashes.
- TPMS failure
In the event of a fault in the circuit and/or wiring harness leading to the ECU, or in the event of a TPMS ECU
fault, or in the event of no signal reception from one or more sensors due to fault, breakage or flat battery,
the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS failure".
The vehicle symbol is not displayed. Therefore, if the fault occurs while the TYRES screen is active, the default
screen is shown automatically.
seconds (determined by NTP), after which the indicator light remains lit continuously until normal operating
conditions are restored.
The TYRES screen is not recallable by the driver.
- Punctured tyre
When the instrument panel receives the signal from the electronic control unit indicating that the pressure of one
or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure” together with
the message "Do not proceed", without the vehicle symbol.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
or more normal tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre
pressure” together with the message "Do not proceed" and the vehicle symbol indicating tyre pressures.
If the vehicle is driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi) in “punctured tyre” state, the specific screen is displayed.
amber.
or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, but the system cannot recognise which wheel is
generating the fault signal, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low tyre pressure” together with
the message "Max speed 80 Km/h" without the vehicle symbol.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
or more RUN FLAT tyres is below the alarm threshold, the TFT display displays the specific message “Low
tyre pressure” together with the message "Max speed 80 Km/h" and the vehicle symbol indicating tyre
pressures.
The system warns the driver and displays the specific screen if the vehicle speed exceeds 80 Km/h (50 mph)
while in “punctured tyre” state.
The instrument panel also calculates (but does not display) the remaining range in Km (or mi) and repeats the
warning after 50 Km (31 mi).
In the event of a puncture to another tyre, the instrument calculates (but does not display) the updated
remaining range in Km (mi), in relation to the distance driven since the previous puncture event.
After the display cycle for the screen is complete, the screen disappears, but the relative indicator light remains
lit continuously.
Pressing the “Escape” function key during the display of faults with priority 0 (standard type tyre puncture) or
priority 1/ 2 (RUN FLAT tyre puncture, with speed limit not exceeded and with tyres still in usable condition)
cancels the screen while leaving the relative warning light lit.
TYRES screen: the screen may be recalled using the controls on the left hand TFT display, enabling the driver
to identify punctured tyres at any time. When the system cannot recognise which wheel is generating the
fault signal, as the respective values cannot be displayed by the TYRES screen, the screen is not recallable
by the driver.
- TPMS temporarily inactive
In the event of antenna reception disturbance caused by an RF source transmitting in the same frequency range
as the sensors, or in the event of sensor overheat, or during calibration, or if the ECU does not recognise the
sensor identifiers, the TFT display displays the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive".
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but the
warning light remains lit.
- "TPMS inactive"
When the system has been disabled via the diagnostic tester, the TFT display displays the specific
message "TPMS inactive".
Subsequently (or if the “Escape” function key is pressed during the display cycle), the screen disappears but the
warning light remains lit.
Tyre pressure sensor
The sensors are mounted to the wheel rim and secured by the inflation valve.
The sensor must be correctly fixed to the valve for the system to function.
ALWAYS replace with new components when REMOVING the TPMS sensor, complete with valve, from
the rim.
Replace the entire sensor-valve assembly even if only one of the components is damaged.
Detaching the tyre from the rim without due caution may cause irreparable damage to the sensor.
Removing the tyre pressure sensor
the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
Remove the tyre ( D2.02).
To prevent the inflation valve from turning, insert the

rod (1), included in the kit, in the hole on the
sensor side.
Undo the nut (2) from the inflation valve, retrieving

the insulator washer (3).
Remove the sensor (6) with valve (4) from the
wheel rim and replace.
Refitting the tyre pressure sensor

Fastening tyre inflation valve Nut 4 Nm A
Fastening tyre pressure sensor Screw 4 Nm A
When replacing the tyre pressure sensors, carry out the new ECU sensor acquisition procedure with the
DEIS tester.
Always finish all the components in the batch opened previously before starting a new sensor batch, as
the sensors are equipped with a battery with a limited lifespan.
Once the sensor has been activated, the internal battery has a lifespan of approximately 10 years.
the rim.
The sealant liquid contained in puncture repair aerosols may damage the sensor. Always replace the
sensor if a tyre has been repaired with a puncture repair aerosol.
The sensor must not be treated with detergents,

solvents or other harsh products.
Do not clean with compressed air or
pressurised liquids (e.g. pulivapor).
Take particular care not to tear the surface of
the filter interface (A) on the inner side of the
sensor. Always replace the sensor if the
interface surface is dirty or torn.
Store all the components of the sensor-valve
assembly in a clean, dry place.
Select a new TPMS valve-sensor assembly.
Clean the sensor mating area on the wheel rim.

Check that the sensor frequency matches the system frequency: 433 MHz for the STANDARD version, white
label on sensor; 315 MHz for the JAPAN version, blue label on sensor.
Fit the self-locking screw (5) in the hole on the

sensor and tighten the valve (4) by two or three
turns.
Fit the valve (4) with sensor (6) already assembled,

in the hole on the wheel rim.
Ensure that the insulating washer is fitted onto
the outside of the rim and is perpendicular to
the valve.
Fit the insulating washer (3) and tighten the nut (2)
fully.
Use a rod to ensure that the hole on the valve is

kept outside the rim.
Fit the rod (1) in the radial hole of the valve and
tighten the nut (2).
ALWAYS use a torque wrench, using only certified
and calibrated tools to ensure that the correct
tightening torque is achieved.

Nut 4 Nm A
Remove the rod (1).
For the sensor to function correctly, there must

be contact between the rim and the
mounting points of the sensor itself. The
system may not function correctly if the
sensor is not installed exactly as instructed.
Push the sensor gently onto the rim to ensure

contact between the rim and the mating surface
of the sensor itself.
Tighten the self-locking screw (5).
ALWAYS use a torque wrench, using only certified
and calibrated tools to ensure that the correct
tightening torque is achieved.

Screw 4 Nm A
Refit the tyre ( D2.02).
Replacing front triggers


Remove the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the rear element of the wheelhouse only.

Undo the indicated screws fastening the trigger (A)
to the relevant mounting bracket.
Remove the trigger (A) from the relevant mounting
bracket and replace.
Fit the new trigger (A) correctly on the relevant
mounting bracket.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the trigger
(A) to the relevant mounting bracket.

Screw 9 Nm B
Refit the front wheelhouses ( E3.05).

Replacing rear triggers

Right hand rear trigger

Remove the rear element of the wheelhouse only.

mounting bracket.

Screw 9 Nm B
Left hand rear trigger

Remove the front element of the wheelhouse only.

mounting bracket.

Screw 9 Nm B
Replacing the antenna (UP TO Ass.ly No. 91363)
Located under the vehicle, covered by the centre flat undertray section.


Undo the indicated screws; then remove and
replace the antenna (A).
Fit the antenna (A) in the relative seat.
Refit the central flat undertray section ( E3.12).

Replacing the antenna (FROM Ass.ly No. 91364)

Fastening underbody union with pipe leading from Union 16 Nm B
AC compressor Union (FROM Ass.ly No. 20 Nm B
90802)
Union (FROM Ass.ly No. 26 Nm B
90802)
set No. 90802)
Located under the vehicle, behind the underbody pipes.

Undo the union (1).

Open the indicated clamp on the pipe (2).
Loosen the clamp (5).
Disconnect the pipe (4) from the rigid pipe (3).
Cut the clamp indicated by the red arrow.
(6).
Remove the lower part of the pillory block (7).
Undo the union (8).

(9).
Remove the lower part of the pillory block (10).
Undo the indicated screws and remove the lower

parts of the pillory blocks (11) with relative
brackets.
Remove the AC system pipe (2).
Remove the engine cooling system pipe (3).

Undo the indicated screws; then remove and
replace the antenna (A).
Fit the antenna (A) in the relative seat.
Fit the AC system pipe (2).

Fit the engine cooling system pipe (3).
Fit the lower parts of the pillory blocks (11) with the
relative brackets and fasten temporarily by
Tighten the union (1).

90802)
Close the indicated clamp on the pipe (2).

Connect the pipe (4) to the rigid pipe (3).
Tighten the clamp (5).
Fit the lower part of the pillory block (7).
Fit the bracket (6) and fasten by tightening the
indicated screws.

Screws (FROM Ass.ly No. 6 Nm B
90802)
Fit a new clamp as indicated by the red arrow.

90802)
Fit the lower part of the pillory block (10).

Fit the bracket (9) and tighten the indicated screws.

90802)
Fasten the brackets and the pillory blocks (11) onto

the pipes (2) and (3), tightening the indicated
screws.

90802)

Brake system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
D3.01 Brake system layout
Brake system layout
A - Brake fluid tank

B - Master brake cylinder
C - Brake servo
D - ABS/ASR electrohydraulic unit
E - Brake callipers
F - Brake pads
G - Brake discs
H - Yaw sensor
Brake fluid tank Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D3.02 Brake fluid tank
Removing the brake fluid tank
The fluid contained in the brake system is harmful in the event of contact with the eyes or skin.
In the event of contact with brake fluid, rinse the affected area immediately with plenty of running water.
The brake fluid reservoir is located at the centre of the luggage compartment, underneath the right hand
underwindscreen shield.

environment.
Empty the brake fluid reservoir completely, aspirating the fluid.
Disconnect the brake fluid level sensor connector

(1).
or skin.
running water.
Loosen the relative metal fastener clamps and

disconnect the two pipes (2) from the brake fluid
reservoir, plugging adequately.
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the brake

fluid reservoir (A) to the chassis.
Remove the brake fluid reservoir (A) from the
relative seat.
Refitting the brake fluid tank

Fastening brake fluid reservoir Nut 9 Nm B

or skin.
running water.
Fit the brake fluid reservoir (A) in the relative seat.

Tighten the nuts indicated fastening the brake fluid
reservoir (A) to the chassis.

Nut 9 Nm B
Remove the relative caps, connect the two pipes (2)

to the brake fluid reservoir (A) and tighten the
relative metal fastener clamps.
Connect the brake fluid level sensor connector (1)
to the brake fluid reservoir (A).

Refit the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Brake discs Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
D3.03 Brake discs
Removing the brake discs

Remove the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).
Applicable only for removing the rear discs. DO NOT disconnect the calliper fluid pipe and take particular
care not to damage the pipe when handling the calliper.
Remove the front brake callipers ( D3.05).

Applicable only for removing the front discs.
Undo the wheel locator pin (1).

Undo the screw (2) fastening the disc.
Remove the disc, easing it off the wheel bearing.
Refitting the brake discs

Fastening brake disc - bearing Screw 15.5 Nm B
Pin 15.5 Nm B
Check that the disc is in proper working condition and inspect the disc contact surface, even if new.
If any dirt, stains or greasy/oily patches are noted on the disc surface, clean thoroughly with a regular solvent,
degreaser and/or soap and water.
Brake discs Page 2 of 2
Fit the disc on the wheel bearing.

To centre the disc on the wheel bearing, hand
tighten the wheel fastener stud bolts into their
seats.
Tighten the screw (2) fastening the disc.

Screw 15.5 Nm B
Tighten the wheel locator pin (1).

Pin 15.5 Nm B
Remove the stud bolts fitted previously for aligning

the disc.
Refit the front brake callipers ( D3.05).

Refit the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).
Carry out this operation only if the oil pipe unions have been disconnected.

Only in the case of replacing the discs. Bed in the CCM pads ( D3.04).
Brake pads Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
D3.04 Brake pads
Removing the front brake pads

Remove the front wheels only.
Disconnect connector (1) of brake pad wear sensor,

and detach it from the relative mounting bracket.
Remove the indicated cable ties.
Remove the indicated cable tie.

Remove the upper pin (2) from the relative seat,
tapping into place with a suitable mallet and
punch.
Remove the spring (3) from the relative seat.
Remove the lower pin (4) from the relative seat,
tapping into place with a suitable mallet and
punch.
Undo the screw (5).
Remove the pin (6).
Remove the brake pads (A) from the relative seats.
Refitting the front brake pads

Fastening central pin on front brake pads Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Fit the brake pads (A) in the relative seats.

Install the pin (6).
Tighten the screw (5).

Screw 27 ÷ 33 Nm 0
Fit the lower pin (4) in the relative seat, tapping into
place with a suitable mallet and punch.
Fit the spring (3) in the relative seat.
Fit the upper pin (2) in the relative seat, tapping into
place with a suitable mallet and punch.
Sliding pad wear sensor cable inside rigid brake
fluid pipe connected to brake calliper, tighten a
new cable tie in the indicated point.
Sliding it under ABS sensor cable, connect pad

wear sensor connector (1), and secure it to the
relative mounting bracket, so as it is pointing
toward rear side.
Apply new cable ties in the positions indicated.

In case of replacement only. Bed in the CCM pads ( D3.04).
Removing the rear brake pads

Remove the rear wheels.
Disconnect the connector (1) for the brake pad wear

sensor.
Cut the indicated clamps and remove the brake pad
wear sensor cable from the retainers (2).
Remove the pin (4), tapping with a suitable punch

and mallet.
Remove the spring (5).
Remove the pin (6), tapping with a suitable punch
and mallet.
Remove the brake pads (A).
Refitting the rear brake pads
Further separate the calliper pistons with the tool (FACOM DF.6).
Fit the pads (A).

Install the pin (6), tapping with a suitable punch and
mallet.
Fit the spring (5).
Install the pin (4), tapping with a suitable punch and
mallet.
Fit new clamps as indicated to fasten the brake pad

wear sensor cable and fit the cable in the
retainers (2).
Connect the connector (1) for the brake pad wear
sensor.

In case of replacement only. Bed in the CCM pads ( D3.04).
Bedding in CCM pads
The following procedure is applicable for both CCM1 and CCM2 brake systems and must be performed EACH
TIME the CCM brake pads and/or CCM brake discs are replaced.
For vehicles intended for ROAD use
Brake 16 times from 80 Km/h to 20 Km/h with constant pressure on the brake pedal and without activating
the ABS system.
Leave the brake system to cool for approximately 120 seconds.
the ABS system.
Leave the system to cool for 180 seconds.
The ABS system must be triggered during the last set of braking runs.
Brake AT LEAST 5 times from 120 Km/h to 0 Km/h (vehicle completely stopped), causing the ABS system
to activate.
Allow the brake system to cool completely before using the vehicle again after the bedding-in procedure
to ensure maximum braking efficacy.
As soon as you notice an increase in brake pedal travel, stop the car and wait for the brake system to cool
completely.
For vehicles intended for TRACK use
the ABS system.
Leave the brake system to cool for approximately 120 seconds.
the ABS system.
Leave the system to cool for 180 seconds.
The ABS system must be triggered during the last set of braking runs.
Brake AT LEAST 5 times from 160 Km/h to 0 Km/h (vehicle completely stopped), causing the ABS system
to activate.
Allow the brake system to cool completely before using the vehicle again after the bedding-in procedure
to ensure maximum braking efficacy.
As soon as you notice an increase in brake pedal travel, stop the car and wait for the brake system to cool
completely.
Brake callipers Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D3.05 Brake callipers
Removing the front brake callipers

Remove the front brake pads ( D3.04).
Undo the union (1) for the rigid pipe on the calliper.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the front brake
calliper (A).
Remove the front brake calliper (A) from the front
suspension.
Refitting the front brake callipers

Fastening rigid brake fluid pipe to front brake Union 15.5 Nm B
calliper
Check that the calliper mating surfaces with the

stub axle are clean, fit the brake calliper (A) to
the disc and hand tighten the two screws (2).

Screw 100 Nm A
Fit the rigid pipe on the brake calliper, tightening the

union (1).

Union 15.5 Nm B
Refit the front brake pads ( D3.04).

Removing the rear brake callipers

Remove the rear brake pads ( D3.04).
Undo the union (1) for the flexible hose on the

calliper.
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the calliper (A).
Remove the calliper from the rear suspension.
Refitting the rear brake callipers

Fastening brake fluid hose to rear brake calliper Union 21.5 Nm A
Check that the calliper mating surfaces with the

stub axle are clean, fit the calliper (A) to the disc
and tighten the two screws (2).

Screw 100 Nm A
Fit the flexible hose onto the calliper and tighten the
union (1).

Union 21.5 Nm A
Refit the rear brake pads ( D3.04).

ABS/ASR electrohydraulic unit Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
D3.06 ABS/ASR electrohydraulic unit
Replacing the ABS/ASR electrohydraulic unit

Fastening electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit to Screw 18 Nm B
mounting bracket
Fastening electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit Screw 24 Nm B
mounting bracket to chassis
Fastening brake fluid pipe on the electrohydraulic M10 - M12 union 16 Nm B
ABS/ASR unit
luggage compartment
The electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit is located inside the luggage compartment to the right of the
heater/evaporator unit.

Remove the air duct (1), undoing the screws

indicated.
Detach the brake fluid pipes, removing the indicated

clips.
Detach the brake fluid pipes, removing the indicated

clips.

Take note of the pipes' position on the
electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (3) so as to refit
them correctly afterwards.
Undo all the unions indicated by the red arrows
from the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit and
place suitable plugs on the inlets.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the
electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit mounting bracket
(3).
Move the brake fluid pipes to one side, taking
particular care not to bend or twist them, then
remove the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (3)
complete with mounting bracket.
On the workbench separate the electrohydraulic

ABS/ASR unit (3) from the relevant mounting
bracket, undoing the indicated screws.
Check the state of the mounting bushings; replace if
necessary.
Refit the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (3) on the
relevant mounting bracket, tightening the
indicated screws.

Screw 18 Nm B
Move the brake fluid pipes to one side, taking

particular care not to bend or twist them, then fit
the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit (3) complete
with mounting bracket in the relevant seat.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the
electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit mounting bracket
(3).

Screw 24 Nm B

Fit and hand tighten the unions indicated by the red
arrows on the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit,
using the markings made during removal as
reference.
Tighten the unions indicated by the red arrows on
the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit.

M10 - M12 union 16 Nm B
Fasten the brake fluid pipes by placing the indicated

clips.
Fasten the brake fluid pipes by placing the indicated

clips.
Fit and fasten the air duct (1) by tightening the

screws indicated.

Screw 1.5 Nm B

Always perform a complete operating cycle after replacing the electrohydraulic ABS/ASR unit.
EPB electric parking brake Page 1 of 17
Print Exit
D3.07 EPB electric parking brake
the parking brake is engaged and released with the specific control on the dashboard, to the left of the
steering wheel;
the brake is actuated by an electric motor;
the brake engages automatically when the engine is switched off (Autohold function);
it may be used as an emergency brake with the vehicle in motion. In this case, the system applies the brakes
to all four wheels for as long as the button is kept pressed, dialoguing with the ESP stability control
system, which prevents wheel lockup;
ensures optimised brake release dynamics for hill starts with the Automatic Vehicle Holding (AVH) function:
when certain conditions are met, the system keeps the vehicle braked by releasing the brake shoes and
callipers at different times, allowing the driver enough time to move the foot from the brake to the
accelerator without the vehicle rolling backwards.
EPB parking brake system layout
A - ECU
B - Equaliser bracket
C - Bowden cables
D - Shoes
Disabling the EPB electric parking brake Autohold function
The EPB electric parking brake is engaged automatically at each Key-off, as the Autohold function is always
enabled by default.
The following procedure disables the Autohold function to impede automatic engagement of the EPB electric
parking brake at Key-off: no maintenance is possible on the components of the EPB system while the EPB
electric parking brake is engaged, as a result, this procedure is necessary before carrying out any work
involving the components of the EPB electric parking brake.
The Autohold function will resume normal operation at the next Key-on, and the EPB electric parking brake will
therefore be automatically engaged at the next Key-off.
Open the driver side door.

Depress and hold the brake pedal.
Turn the ignition key to II (Key-ON).
Pull the EPB electric parking brake control lever (A).
Wait until the respective indicator light on the instrument panel extinguishes.
Press the AUTO PARK button (B).
Wait for the specific message "PARK OFF" to

appear on the TFT display.
Turn the ignition key to 0 (Key-OFF).
Emergency EPB electric parking brake release procedure
CAUTION
When the electric parking brake is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the Park Lock safety device, if engaged.
To hold the vehicle, the Park Lock safety system must be engaged: ensure that the letter "P" is shown on the
gearbox display.
If the electric parking brake cannot be released due to a flat battery or a failure of the electrical system
controlling the function and the vehicle must be moved, carry out the following emergency release procedure.
Remove the articulated wrench, p/n 261346, for

releasing the electric parking brake, from the tool
bag.
Fit the articulated wrench, p/n 261346, into the

relative hole underneath the slotted cap (1) on
the right hand rear wheelhouse, and turn
clockwise to loosen the parking brake cables
completely and release the grip of the shoes on
the rear discs.
The wrench must be turned approximately 50
times to completely release the parking brake;
the brake will begin to release after
approximately 20 turns.
After manually releasing the electric parking brake, at the subsequent Key-on, the EPB node
registers a "fault" and the symbol shown aside is displayed on the left hand TFT display,
together with the message "Parking Brake system revision. Go to dealer”.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, it is IMPERATIVE that the following indications are followed correctly.
The parking brake will return to normal functionality, however, the vehicle must still be taken to a Ferrari
service centre to calibrate the system and delete any errors from the failure memory. The system must be
calibrated for safety reasons.
Removing the EPB electric parking brake shoes
The following procedure is for removing the rear right hand wheel brake shoes.
With the exception of the specific steps indicated, the procedure for removing the rear left hand wheel brake
shoes is the same.

Remove the rear ones.
Remove the brake discs ( D3.03).

Remove the rear ones.

the EPB linkage bracket (A).
cable (D) from the EPB linkage bracket (A).
(D) from the relevant mounting bracket.
For the rear right hand brake shoes only
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the right.

Remove the safety pin (14).
cable (B) from the EPB equaliser (C).
sheath (B) from the relevant mounting bracket.
Detach the cable grommet (4) from the bracket on

the right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (B).
Undo the nut (5) fastening the ground cable onto
the bracket on the right hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (B).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the right hand
EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) onto the rear right
hand hub carrier.
Detach the eyebolt (6) on the right hand EPB

Bowden cable (B) from the fork (7) inside the
hub carrier.
Release the spring (8) and recover the adjuster pin

(9).
Do not disassemble the adjuster pin or alter its
setting to ensure that the shoes are refitted in
their original positions.
Remove the upper spring (10) by pushing towards

the brake shoes and then turning.
Remove the lower spring (11) by pushing towards
the brake shoes and then turning.
Release the spring (12) and remove the brake

shoes (E), taking care not to shift the linkage
pins (13).
Refitting the EPB electric parking brake shoes

Fit the linkage (13) correctly and install the brake

shoes (E) in the respective seats, with the spring
(12) already attached to one of the shoes.
Using suitable pliers, attach the spring (12) to the
other shoe (E).
Fit the lower spring (11) in the respective seat,

pushing towards the brake shoes and then
turning the spring.
Fit the upper spring (10) in the respective seat,
pushing towards the brake shoes and then
turning the spring.
Fit the adjuster pin (9) in its seat.
Attach the spring (8) to both brake shoes.
Check that there is a sufficient gap between the
outer surfaces of the shoes to install the brake
disc without scuffing.
If the gap is insufficient, to adjust the gap between
the outer surfaces of the shoes and allow
installation of the brake disc without friction, turn
the toothed sleeve on the adjuster pin (9) using a
suitable screwdriver.
Attach the eyebolt (6) on the right hand EPB

Bowden cable (B) to the fork (7) inside the hub
carrier.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the right hand

EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) onto the rear right
hand hub carrier.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (5) fastening the ground cable onto

the bracket on the right hand EPB Bowden cable
sheath (B).

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (4) to the bracket on the

right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (B).
For the right hand parking brake cable only

right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) into
the relative mounting bracket.
Attach the end (3) of the right hand EPB Bowden
cable (B) to the EPB equaliser (C).
Fit the safety pin (14).
Move the EPB equaliser (C) to the left.

left hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (D) into the
relevant mounting bracket.
cable (D) to the EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the clip (1) in the relevant seat on the EPB
linkage bracket (A).
Refit the brake discs ( D3.03).
Check that the disc rotates freely without

impediment. If not, adjust the adjuster pin to
achieve the optimum position.
Adjustment is also possible with the disc installed,
inserting a screwdriver through the holes (F).
Turn the adjuster pin to separate the brake shoes
until a slight resistance is felt; then turn the
toothed sleeve by one turn in the opposite
direction to close them slightly.
Adjust the EPB electric parking brake ( D3.07).

Replacing the EPB electric parking brake Bowden cables


Left hand EPB Bowden cable

the EPB linkage bracket (A).
cable (D) from the EPB linkage bracket (A).
(D) from the relative mounting bracket.
Remove the indicated clamp retaining the left hand

EPB Bowden cable (D).
Remove the indicated clamp retaining the left hand

Detach the cable grommet (4) from the bracket.

Undo the nut (6) fastening the ground cable.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the left hand
EPB Bowden cable sheath (D) onto the hub
carrier.
Detach the eyebolt (8) on the left hand EPB

Bowden cable (D) from the fork (9) inside the
hub carrier.
Remove the left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) from
the respective seat and replace.
Fit the new left hand EPB Bowden cable (D) in the
respective sheath.
Fasten the eyebolt (8) on the left hand EPB Bowden
cable (D) onto the fork (9) inside the hub carrier.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the left hand

EPB Bowden cable sheath (D) onto the hub
carrier.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (6) fastening the ground cable to the

bracket.

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (4) onto the bracket.
Fasten the indicated clamp retaining the left hand

Fasten the indicated clamp retaining the left hand


left hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (D) into the
cable (D) to the EPB linkage bracket (A).
Refit the clip (1) onto the EPB linkage bracket.
Right hand EPB Bowden cable
Remove the safety pin (14).

cable (B) from the EPB equaliser (C).
sheath (B) from the relative mounting bracket.
Undo the indicated screw.

Unscrew the stud bolt (17) retaining the right hand
EPB Bowden cable (B).
Remove the indicated clamp retaining the right

hand EPB Bowden cable (B).
Detach the cable grommet (4) from the bracket.

EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) onto the hub
carrier.
Detach the eyebolt (8) on the right hand EPB

Bowden cable (B) from the fork (9) inside the
hub carrier.
Remove the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) from
the respective seat and replace.
Fit the new right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) in the
respective sheath.
Attach the eyebolt (8) on the right hand EPB
Bowden cable (B) to the fork (9) inside the hub
carrier.

EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) onto the hub
carrier.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (6) fastening the ground cable to the

bracket.

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (4) onto the bracket.
Fasten the indicated clamp retaining the right hand

EPB Bowden cable (B).
Fasten the right hand EPB Bowden cable (B) by

tightening the stud bolt (17).
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the EPB
control unit Bowden cable.

right hand EPB Bowden cable sheath (B) into
cable (B) to the EPB equaliser (C).
Fit the safety pin (14).

Adjusting the EPB electric parking brake
After replacing the EPB brake shoes, the parking brake must be adjusted correctly with the following procedure.
Insert a suitably sized screwdriver into the slot (A)

on the rear disc.
Using the screwdriver inserted previously, turn the
sleeve (B) to lock the disc.
Turn the sleeve (B) in the opposite direction until
the disc turns freely.
Turn the ignition key to "II".

Engage the EPB electric parking brake by pulling
the electric parking brake control lever (1).
Check that the rear discs are locked in this state.
Disengage the EPB electric parking brake by pulling
the electric parking brake control lever (1) again.
Check that the rear discs turn freely in this state.

Carry out the procedure for Calibrating the EPB and Bedding in the EPB.
Brake servo - Pump Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
D3.08 Brake servo - Pump
Removing the brake servo
Remove the windscreen wiper linkage ( E3.09).

Remove the antitheft system siren ( F4.01).
Open the indicated retainer on the pipes (1).

Move the complete TGK valves (2) aside as far as
possible, without disconnecting the pipes from
the system.
Some brake fluid may leak when detaching the

unions from the master brake cylinder;
ensure that the oil does not come into
contact with surrounding parts.

or skin.
running water.
Unscrew the unions (2) on the brake pump.

Move the pipes (1) as far away as possible from the
brake pump, taking care not to bend or twist
them, so that they do not hinder the subsequent
operations.
Detach the vacuum pipe (4) from the brake servo
(A).
Remove the indicated clamps and disconnect the
pipes (3).
Working from underneath the driver side of the

dashboard, detach the brake servo linkage (6),
removing the retainer clip (5).
Undo the four indicated nuts fastening the brake
servo (A) to the pedal board.
Remove the brake servo (A), complete with pump,
from the luggage compartment.
Refit the retainer clip (5) in its relative seat on the
brake servo (A).
Refitting the brake servo

Fastening oil pipe unions to brake pump Union 16 Nm B
Fastening TGK valve mounting bracket to chassis Screw 8 Nm B
Ensure that the retainer clip (5) is installed correctly

on the brake servo.
Working from the luggage compartment, fit the
brake servo (A), complete with pump, in the
relative seat on the firewall.
dashboard, align the linkage (6) in the relative
seat on the brake servo (A).
Tighten the four nuts indicated in a cross pattern.

Nut 20 Nm B
Depress the brake pedal fully to engage the linkage

(6) onto the brake servo (A).
Release the brake pedal and ensure that it is
effectively attached to the linkage.

or skin.
running water.
Fit the unions (2) for the pipes (1) in the respective
seats on the pump and tighten.

Union 16 Nm B
Connect the vacuum pipe (4) to the brake servo (A).

Connect the pipes (3) to the brake pump and fasten
with the indicated clamps.
Fit the complete TGK valves (2) in the relative seat.


Screw 8 Nm B
Fasten the rigid pipes (1) by closing the indicated

clamp.
Refit the antitheft system siren ( F4.01).

Refit the windscreen wiper linkage ( E3.09).
Pedal board Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
D3.09 Pedal board
Removing the pedal board

Remove the complete dashboard ( E4.02).

dashboard, detach the brake servo linkage (6),
removing the retainer clip (5).
Undo the four indicated nuts fastening the brake
servo (A) to the pedal board.
Refit the retainer clip (5) in its relative seat on the
brake servo (A).
Disconnect the connector (10) from the brake pedal

stop light switch.
Undo the indicated upper screw.
Remove the pedal board (B).
Refitting the pedal board

Fastening pedal board to firewall Screw 20 Nm B
Fit the pedal board (B) in the relative seat in the

passenger compartment, hand-tightening all the
Tighten the five indicated fasteners (four nuts
fastening to the brake servo and one screw
fastening to the firewall) in the sequence given in
the image aside.

Nut 20 Nm B
Screw 20 Nm B
Connect the connector (1) to the brake pedal stop

light switch.
Ensure that the retainer clip (5) is fitted correctly on

the brake servo (A).
Depress the brake pedal fully to engage the linkage
(6) onto the brake servo.
Release the brake pedal and ensure that it is
effectively attached to the linkage.
Refit the complete dashboard ( E4.02).

Replacing the brake pedal switch

Fastening AC unit air ducts Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8.5 Nm B
In some of the following photographs, the dashboard has been removed from the passenger compartment to
illustrate the procedure more clearly.

Remove the mats ( E4.05).
Remove the driver side underdashboard mat.

Remove the air duct (1).

Keep the brake pedal depressed.
Turn the switch (A) clockwise then ease out of its
relative mounting on the pedal board.
Extend the pin (3) on the new switch completely.

New switches are supplied with the pin in an
intermediate position and not fully extended.

Fit the new switch (A) fully into the relative seat.
Note that the mounting shown in the photo aside
is an example only and is not the specific part
for the vehicle.
Turn the switch (A) counterclockwise by

approximately 90° until the retainer tang locks
into place.
Note that the mounting shown in the photo aside
is an example only and is not the specific part
for the vehicle.
Ensure that it is securely fastened.
Place a 1 mm thick shim (4) between the brake

pedal (5) and the pin on the switch (A).
Release the brake pedal so that it presses against
the pin on the switch, allowing the pin to self-
adjust.
Remove the shim (4).
Fit the air duct (1).


Screw 8 Nm B
Refit the mats ( E4.05).

Filling and bleeding the brake system Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D3.10 Filling and bleeding the brake system
Filling and bleeding the brake system

Fastening bleed unions - brake callipers Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0

Remove the cover (A) from the right hand

underwindscreen shield to access the brake fluid
reservoir cap, prising off at the position indicated
by the arrow.
Undo the cap (B) from the brake fluid reservoir.

sealed containers.

Fill the reservoir, bearing in mind that the level in

the reservoir must never drop below the MIN
limit when bleeding the brake system.

"Electronic" brake system bleeding must be performed on one calliper at a time using the DEIS diagnostic
tester. Use the specific function, following the relative instructions.
Detach the relative protective caps and undo the

bleed unions (2) on the brake calliper (C).
Connect a suitable transparent pipe to the bleed
unions (2).
Immerse the end of the pipes in a container filled
with brake fluid.
Control the pulse sequence with the DEIS
diagnostic tester and depress the brake pedal to
pressurise the circuit until all the air is bled from
the circuit.
Disconnect the transparent pipe from the bleed
unions (2).
Tighten the bleed unions (2) and fit the relative
protective caps.

Union 17 ÷ 20 Nm 0

sealed containers.

Tighten the cap (B) firmly onto the brake fluid

reservoir.

Fit the cover (A) onto the right hand

underwindscreen shield, inserting the rear tabs
in the respective seats first and then the front
tabs.
After the procedure, there must be no sponginess notable in the brake pedal and the braking action must be
progressive, starting immediately after a short free play.
Complete suspension Page 1 of 25
Print Exit
D4.01 Complete suspension
Removing complete front suspension
The following procedure is for the removal of the right hand front suspension.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension is the same.
Note that in some of the following images the vehicle is shown with the wheelhouse and the front flat undertray
section removed. However, removal of these components is not necessary.
Remove the luggage compartment cosmetic shields ( E4.07).

Undo the nut (1) fastening the steering box tie-rod

(A) to the hub carrier.
Undo the nut (2) fastening the stabiliser bar (B) to

the spherical tie-rod.
Disconnect the connector (3) from the shock

absorber.
Disconnect connector (4) of ABS sensor, and

detach it from the relevant mounting bracket.
Disconnect connector (5) of brake pad wear sensor,
and detach it from the relevant mounting bracket.
Detach the cable grommet (6) from the relevant
mounting bracket.
Disconnect ground cable from the indicated clip.
Undo the brake fluid hose union (10).

Remove the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for
the brake fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Remove the union (12) for the brake fluid hose from
Only for vehicles with "Front Lift" system
Undo the lift system fluid hose union (13).

Remove the clip (14) fastening the union (15) for
the lift system fluid hose onto the relative
mounting bracket.
Remove the union (15) for the lift system fluid hose
Using a delible yellow marker pen or paint, make

reference markings on the threaded rods and
relative nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs
fastening the lower arm.
DO NOT use lubricants or electric/pneumatic

drivers.
Partially loosen the four nuts fastening the lower

arm (C), retrieving the four shims (8), in the
following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).
Check that the yellow reference markings are

correctly aligned: the marking on the threaded
rods and the marking on the Flanbloc eyebolts
must be aligned.
Only the nut must turn, the threaded rod must
remain in its original position.
If the markings on the threaded rods and eyebolts

are not correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts (even if only on one threaded rod),
a ROL (Red On Line) must be opened, attaching
adequate photographic documentation, and
contact the Ferrari Help Desk.
are correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts, completely undo and remove the
four arm fastener nuts in the order given for the
previous operation.
Check again that the yellow reference markings are

correctly aligned: the markings on the threaded
rods and the markings on the Flanbloc eyebolts
must be aligned.
Support the weight of the suspension adequately.

drivers.
Undo the two screws fastening the shock absorber

(D) to the chassis.

fastening the upper arm.
Detach the tie-rod (9) for the NRRPS motion sensor

from the upper arm (E).
drivers.
Partially loosen the four nuts indicated fastening the

upper arm (E) in the following order: (a), (b), (c),
(d).
Move the shock absorber aside to facilitate the
operation.

must be aligned.
are not correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts (even if only on one threaded rod),
a ROL (Red On Line) must be opened, attaching
are correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts, completely undo and remove the
four arm fastener nuts in the order given for the
previous operation.
operation.

must be aligned.
Remove the complete suspension from its seat, retrieving the four washers of upper lever stud bolts.
Refitting complete front suspension

Nut 60 Nm A
Fastening lower arm to chassis Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A

The following procedure is for refitting of right hand front suspension.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension is the same.
Position the four washers onto upper arm stud bolts, and position the complete suspension inside its seat,
supporting its weight adequately.
Clean the mating surfaces with a degreasing

product (heptane).
drivers.
ALWAYS replace the suspension arm fastener

nuts, complete with relative washers, each
time they are removed.
Replacement is NOT necessary if the nuts are
loosened only.
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the upper

arm (E) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
operation.

Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod (9) for the NRRPS motion sensor

to the upper arm (E).

must be aligned.
Remove the yellow reference markings made

during removal.
Using an indelible red marker pen or paint, make
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the

shock absorber (D) to the chassis.

Screw 110 Nm A
Fit the four shims (8) in the relevant seats, pushing

down completely onto the threaded rods and
ensuring that they are perfectly perpendicular to
the horizontal axis of the Flanblocs.
product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the lower

arm (C) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

must be aligned.

during removal.
Tighten the nut (7) fastening the ground cable.

Nut 6 Nm B
Only for vehicles with "Front Lift" system
Fit the union (15) for the lift system fluid hose onto
Refit the clip (14) fastening the union (15) for the lift
system fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the lift system fluid hose union (13).

Union 16 Nm B
Fit the union (12) for the brake fluid hose onto the
relevant mounting bracket.
Refit the clip (11) fastening the union (12) for the
brake fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the brake fluid hose union (10).

M10 union 16 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (6) onto the relative

mounting bracket.
Connect pad wear sensor connector (5), and attach
it to the relevant mounting bracket so as it is
pointing back.
Slide connector (4) of ABS sensor above brake pad
wear sensor cable, connect it, and attach it to
Check that the indicated clip is positioned at 50 - 60
mm from cable grommet (6).
Connect ground cable to the indicated clip.
Connect the connector (3) to the shock absorber.
Tighten the nut (2) fastening the stabiliser bar (B).

Nut 50 Nm B
Pre-tighten the nut (1) fastening the steering box tie-

rod (A).

Nut 40 Nm B
Loosen the nut (1) then tighten again.

Nut 40 Nm B

Refit the luggage compartment cosmetic shields ( E4.07).
Only for vehicles with "Front Lift" system. Fill and bleed the "Front Lift" system ( D4.08).
Perform the vehicle set-up procedure ( A3.22).
Removing complete rear suspension
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension.
The process for removing the left hand rear suspension is identical.

Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse.

from the lower arm.
Disconnect the connector (2) for the brake pad wear
sensor.
Disconnect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
mounting bracket.
Cut the cable tie (5) for retaining cables.

bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Undo the nut (7) fastening the ground cable onto
the bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Undo the indicated screw fastening the EPB
Bowden cable sheath (8) onto the hub carrier.
Detach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable from the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
Remove and retrieve the clip (9) fastening the union

for the brake fluid hose (11) onto the relevant
mounting bracket.
Undo the brake fluid hose union (10).
Extract the brake fluid hose (11) from the relevant
mounting bracket.
Undo the six screws (12) fastening the axle shaft

(A) to the differential flange and retrieve the
three spacers (13).

absorber (B).
Support the weight of the complete suspension
adequately.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the shock
absorber (B) to the chassis.

reference markings on the threaded bolts and
relative nuts and the eyebolts fastening the toe-
in tie-rod.

drivers.
Partially loosen the two nuts indicated fastening the

toe-in tie-rod (C) to the chassis.

rods and the marking on the eyebolts must be
aligned.

are not correctly aligned after loosening the toe-
in tie rod fastener nuts (even if only on one
threaded rod), a ROL (Red On Line) must be
opened, attaching adequate photographic
documentation, and contact the Ferrari Help
Desk.
are correctly aligned after loosening the toe-in tie-
rod fastener nuts, completely undo and remove
the two toe-in tie-rod fastener nuts in the order
given for the previous operation.
rods and the markings on the eyebolts must be
aligned.

Undo the nut indicated fastening the stabiliser bar

(D) to the spherical tie-rod.

drivers.

upper arm (E) to the chassis.

must be aligned.
If the markings on the threaded rods and Flanbloc
eyebolts are not correctly aligned after loosening
the arm fastener nuts (even if only on one
Desk.
eyebolts are correctly aligned after loosening the
arm fastener nuts, completely undo and remove
the two arm fastener nuts in the order given for
the previous operation.

must be aligned.

Detach the tie-rod (15) for the NRRPS motion

sensor from the lower arm (F).
drivers.

lower arm (F) to the chassis, retrieving the four
shims (16), in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

must be aligned.

the arm fastener nuts (even if only on one
Desk.
the four arm fastener nuts in the order given for

must be aligned.
Remove the complete rear suspension from the vehicle, retrieving the two washers of upper lever stud bolts.
Refitting complete rear suspension

Nut 60 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension.
The process for refitting the left hand rear suspension is identical.
Position the two washers onto upper lever stud bolts, and then position the rear suspension inside the relative
seat, supporting its weight adequately.

down completely onto the threaded rods and
product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.

arm (F) to the chassis in the following tightening
order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut (pretightening) 9 Nm B
Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod (15) for the NRRPS motion

sensor onto the lower arm (F).

must be aligned.

during removal.

product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the upper

arm (E) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

must be aligned.

during removal.
Tighten the nut indicated fastening the stabiliser bar

(D) to the spherical tie-rod.

Nut 50 Nm B

product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the toe-in

tie-rod (C) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

aligned.

during removal.
reference markings on the threaded rods and the
relative nuts and eyebolts fastening the toe-in tie-
rod.

shock absorber (B) to the chassis.
Tighten in a crossed pattern.

Screw 110 Nm A
Connect the connector (14) to the shock absorber

(B).
Refit the three spacers (13) and tighten the six

screws (12) fastening the axle shaft (A) to the
differential flange.

Screw 78 Nm A
Insert the brake fluid hose (11) into the relevant

mounting bracket.
Tighten the brake fluid hose union (10).

M10 union 16 Nm B
Refit the clip (9) fastening the union for the brake
fluid hose (11) onto the relevant mounting
bracket.
Attach the eyebolt on the EPB Bowden cable to the relevant fork inside the hub carrier.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the EPB

Bowden cable sheath (8).

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the nut (7) fastening the ground cable onto

the bracket on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (6) to the relative bracket

on the EPB Bowden cable sheath (8).
Fit a new cable tie (5) for retaining cables.
Attach the cable grommet (4) onto the relative

mounting bracket.
Connect the connector (2) for the brake pad wear
sensor.
Connect the connector (3) for the ABS sensor.
onto the lower arm.

Suspension arms Page 1 of 24
Print Exit
D4.02 Suspension arms
Removing front suspension upper arms
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc and ball joint.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.


absorber.

drivers.
Undo the two screws fastening the shock absorber

(A) to the chassis.

reference markings on the stud bolts and relative
nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs fastening
the upper arm.
Detach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor (2)

from the upper arm (B).
drivers.

upper arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b), (c),
(d).
operation.

correctly aligned: the marking on the stud bolts
and the marking on the Flanbloc eyebolts must
be aligned.
If the markings on the stud bolts and eyebolts are
not correctly aligned after loosening the arm
fastener nuts (even if only on one stud bolt), a
ROL (Red On Line) must be opened, attaching
correctly aligned after loosening the arm fastener
nuts, completely undo and remove the four arm
fastener nuts in the order given for the previous
operation.
operation.

correctly aligned: the markings on the stud bolts
and the markings on the Flanbloc eyebolts must
be aligned.
Undo the nut (3) fastening the upper arm (B) to the
hub carrier (C), retrieving the relevant washer.
Remove upper lever (B) of front suspension from
the relative seat, retrieving the four washers from
the relative stud bolts.
Refitting front suspension upper arms

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front suspension upper arm is the same.
Clean any traces of grease from the ball stud.
Position the four washers onto the relative stud

bolts and upper lever (B) of front suspension into
the relative seats.
Hand tighten the nut (3), fitting the relevant washer,
fastening the upper arm (B) to the hub carrier
(C) and pretighten.

Nut 52 Nm B
Loosen the nut (3) and then tighten.

Nut 52 Nm B

product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.

arm (B) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
operation.

Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor (2)

to the upper arm (B).

be aligned.

during removal.
the upper arm.

shock absorber (A) to the chassis.

Screw 110 Nm A

Removing front suspension lower arms
The following procedure is for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm.
The procedure for removing the lower front right hand suspension arm is the same.
Support the weight of the front suspension adequately.
Undo the spherical tie-rod pin (1)

Undo the nut (2) and remove the pin (3), retrieving
the relevant washer.
Undo the nut (4) fastening the lower arm (A) to the
hub carrier, retrieving the relevant washer.

the lower arm.

drivers.
Partially loosen the four nuts fastening the lower

arm (A), retrieving the four shims (5), in the
following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

be aligned.
Only the nut must turn, the stud bolt must remain
in its original position.

operation.

be aligned.
Remove the lower front suspension arm from its relevant seat.
Refitting front suspension lower arms

Nut 63 Nm A
Nut 60 Nm A
Support the weight of the front suspension adequately.

Clean the ball joint pin and the relevant seat on the arm to remove any grease residue.
Fit the lower front suspension arm (A) in its relevant

seat.
Apply the nut (4), after fitting the relevant washer,
and pretighten.

Loosen the nut (4) and then tighten.

Nut 63 Nm A
Fit the pin (3) fastening the shock absorber to the

lower arm and, after fitting the relevant washer,

Screw 80 Nm A
Fasten the spherical tie-rod to the lower arm (A),

tightening the pin (1).

Spherical tie-rod 50 Nm B

down completely onto the stud bolts and
product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.

arm (A) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

be aligned.

during removal.
reference markings on the stud bolts and
relevant nuts and the eyebolts of the Flanblocs

Removing rear suspension upper arms
The replacement arm is supplied complete with Flanbloc.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.

the upper arm.
Holding the pin (1) still, undo the nut (2) and retrieve
the relevant washers.
Remove the pin (1) from the relevant seat.
drivers.

upper arm (A) to the chassis.

be aligned.
If the markings on the stud bolts and Flanbloc
the arm fastener nuts (even if only on one stud
bolt), a ROL (Red On Line) must be opened,
attaching adequate photographic documentation,
and contact the Ferrari Help Desk.
the two arm fastener nuts in the order given for
operation.

be aligned.
Remove upper arm of rear suspension from the relative seat, retrieving the two washers from the relative stud
bolts.
Refitting rear suspension upper arms

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension upper arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension upper arm is the same.
Position the two washers onto the relative stud bolts

and the upper arm (A) of rear suspension into
the relative seat.
Fit the pin (1) in the relevant seat.
Holding the pin (1) still, fit the relevant washers and
pretighten then tighten the nut (2).

Nut 90 Nm A

drivers.

loosened only.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the upper

arm (A) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

be aligned.

during removal.
the upper arm.

Removing the rear suspension lower arm
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.

Support the weight of the rear suspension adequately.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (C) from the

front of the lower arm.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (D) from the

rear of the lower arm.
Holding the pin (5) fastening the shock absorber to

the lower arm still, undo the nut (6) and retrieve

from the lower arm (A).
Magnetorheological shock absorbers (optional)
only.
Undo the nut (2) and remove the screw (3),

retrieving the relevant washer.

the lower arm.
Undo the tie-rod ball stud (4) on the lower arm.

drivers.

lower arm (A) to the chassis, retrieving the four
shims (7), in the following order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

be aligned.
Only the nut must turn, the stud bolt must remain
in its original position.

the arm fastener nuts (even if only on one stud
bolt), a ROL (Red On Line) must be opened,
attaching adequate photographic documentation,
and contact the Ferrari Help Desk.
the four arm fastener nuts in the order given for

be aligned.
Remove the lower rear suspension arm from its relevant seat.
Refitting rear suspension lower arms

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear suspension lower arm.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear suspension lower arm is the same.
Support the weight of the rear suspension adequately.
Fit the rear suspension lower arm (A) in its relevant

seat.
Tighten the tie-rod ball stud (4) on the lower rear
arm.


down completely onto the stud bolts and
product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.

arm (A) to the chassis in the following tightening
order: (a), (b), (c), (d).

Nut 60 Nm A

be aligned.

during removal.
the lower arm.
Align the lower arm with the link and the hub carrier
then fit the screw (3) in the relevant holes.
Fit the relative washer and tighten the nut (2)
fastening the screw (3).

Nut 205 Nm A

onto the lower arm (A).
Magnetorheological shock absorbers (optional)
only.

Holding the pin (5) still, fit the relevant washer and
tighten the nut (6) fastening the shock absorber
to the lower arm.

Screw 80 Nm A
Press the rubber plug (D) by hand into its relevant

seat at the rear of the lower arm.
Press the rubber plug (C) by hand into its relevant

seat at the front of the lower arm.

Removing the toe-in tie-rods

reference markings on the threaded bolts and
relative nuts and the eyebolts fastening the toe-
in tie-rod.
Holding the pin (1) still, undo the nut (2) and retrieve
the relevant washers.
drivers.

toe-in tie-rod (A) to the chassis.

rods and the marking on the eyebolts must be
aligned.

are not correctly aligned after loosening the toe-
in tie rod fastener nuts (even if only on one
Desk.
are correctly aligned after loosening the toe-in tie-
rod fastener nuts, completely undo and remove
the two toe-in tie-rod fastener nuts.
aligned.
Remove the toe-in tie-rod from the relative seat.
Refitting the toe-in tie-rods

Nut 60 Nm A
Fit the relative washers and tighten the nut (2),

holding the pin (1) still to prevent it from turning.

Nut 80 Nm A

product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the toe-in

tie-rod (A) to the chassis.

Nut 60 Nm A

aligned.

during removal.
reference markings on the threaded rods and the
relative nuts and eyebolts fastening the toe-in tie-
rod.
Hub carriers Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
D4.03 Hub carriers
Removing the front hub carriers
Remove the front brake callipers ( D3.05).

Remove the front disc.
Remove the indicated cable ties.

Disconnect ground cable from the indicated clip.
Release and disconnect connector (1).
Detach the cable grommet (2).
Undo the nut (3).

Detach the cable grommets (4).
Remove the clip (5).
Undo the union (6).
Detach the pipe (7) from the clip (8).
Undo the nut (9), retrieving the relative washer.

Detach the hub carrier (A) from the steering box tie-
rod (B).

Detach the hub carrier (A) from the upper arm (C).

Detach the hub carrier (A) from the lower arm (D).
Remove the hub carrier (A).

Undo the screws (12).
Remove the brake disc shield (15).
Refitting the front hub carriers

Fastening pipe and cable mounting bracket to hub Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
carrier
Nut 63 Nm A
Fit the brake disc shield (15).

Tighten the screws (14).

Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fit the bracket (13).


Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fit the hub carrier (A).
Attach the hub carrier (A) to the lower arm (D).

Clean the ball joint head and the relative seat
thoroughly.
Fit the relative washer and pre-tighten the nut (11).

Loosen and tighten the nut (11).

Nut 63 Nm A
Attach the hub carrier (A) to the upper arm (C).

thoroughly.

Nut 52 Nm B

Nut 52 Nm B
Attach the hub carrier (A) to the steering box tie-rod

(B).
thoroughly.

Nut 40 Nm B

Nut 40 Nm B
Attach the pipe (7) to the clip (8).


M10 union 16 Nm B
Fit the clip (5).

Attach the cable grommets (4).

Nut 6 Nm B
Attach the cable grommet (2).

Sliding it onto brake pad wear sensor, connect and
attach connector (1).
Apply new cable ties in the positions indicated.
Check that the indicated clip is positioned at 50 - 60
mm from cable grommet (2).
Connect ground cable to the indicated clip.

Refit the front disc.
Refit the front brake callipers ( D3.05).
Removing the rear hub carriers
Remove the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).

Remove the rear brake disc.
Remove the EPB electric parking brake shoes ( D3.07).
Preventing the screw (1) fastening the lower arm

(A) to the hub carrier from turning, undo the nut
(2).
Remove the screw (1) from the relative seat and
retrieve the relative washers.
Preventing the screw (3) fastening the toe-in tie-rod

(B) to the hub carrier from turning, undo the nut
(4).
Undo the screw (9) fastening the link (F) to the hub
carrier (E).
Remove the link (F) from the hub carrier (E) and
retrieve the compensator ring (10).
Preventing the screw (5) fastening the upper arm

(C) to the hub carrier from turning, undo the nut
(6).
Undo the three screws indicated fastening the brake

disc shield (D) to the hub carrier (E).
Remove the brake disc shield (D) from the hub
carrier (E).
Use a suitable punch and mallet to remove the
caulking (7) from the ring nut (8).
Undo the ring nut (8).
Remove the hub carrier (E), detaching from the axle
shaft.
Refitting the rear hub carriers

Fastening anti-rotation link to hub carrier Screw 85 Nm A
When refitting the same hub carrier, remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH
RETAINING COMPOUND.
Remove any residue of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND from the
axle shaft.
Apply three even and regularly spaced circular

beads of AREXONS SYSTEM 56A01 - HIGH
STRENGTH RETAINING COMPOUND.
Fit the hub carrier (E), fitting the axle shaft into the
relative seat on the wheel bearing.

Nut 275 Nm A
Use a suitable punch and mallet to caulk (7) the ring

nut (8).
Fit the brake disc shield (D) on the hub carrier (E).
Tighten the three screws indicated fastening the
brake disc shield (D) to the hub carrier (E).

Screw 9 ÷ 12 Nm B
Fit the screw (5) in the relative seat after installing

the relative washer.
Fit the relative washer and, preventing the screw (5)
fastening the upper arm (C) to the hub carrier
from turning, tighten the nut (6).

Nut 90 Nm A
Fit the link (F) and the compensator ring (10) in the
relative seat on the hub carrier (E).
Apply an even layer of grease Z2 PROTECTION to
the inner surface of the compensator ring (10) in
contact with the screw head (9).
Fasten the link (F) to the hub carrier (E), fitting and
tightening the screw (9).

Screw 85 Nm A

fastening the toe-in tie-rod (B) to the hub carrier

Nut 80 Nm A

fastening the lower arm (A) to the hub carrier

Nut 205 Nm A
Refit the EPB electric parking brake shoes ( D3.07).

Refit the rear brake callipers ( D3.05).
Shock absorbers Page 1 of 16
Print Exit
D4.04 Shock absorbers
Removing the front shock absorber
The following procedure is for removing the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand front shock absorber is the same.


absorber.

absorber (A) to the chassis.

the upper arm.
Detach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor (2)

from the upper arm (B).
drivers.

upper arm (B) in the following order: (a), (b), (c),
(d).
operation.
For vehicles with "Front Lift" system
Undo the lift system fluid hose union (5).

Remove the clip (6) fastening the union (7) for the
lift system fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Remove the union (7) for the lift system fluid hose

be aligned.
operation.
operation.

be aligned.

Support the weight of the shock absorber (A) and
remove the pin (3) from the relative seat.
Remove upper arm from the relative stud bolts, retrieving the four washers, and slightly turn it toward the front
of the vehicle.
Remove the shock absorber from the relative seat.
Refitting the front shock absorber

Nut 60 Nm A
The following procedure is for refitting the right hand front shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand front shock absorber is the same.
Fit the shock absorber in the relevant seat.

Position the four washers and upper arm, turning it toward the rear of the vehicle, onto the relative stud bolts.
Support the weight of the shock absorber (A) and fit

the pin (3) into the relevant seat.
the lower arm still, fit the relevant washer and

Screw 80 Nm A
For vehicles with "Front Lift" system
Fit the union (7) for the lift system fluid hose onto
Refit the clip (6) fastening the union (7) for the lift
system fluid hose onto the relative mounting
bracket.
Tighten the lift system fluid hose union (5).

Union 16 Nm B

product (heptane).
drivers.

loosened only.

arm (B) in the following tightening order: (a), (b),
(c), (d).
operation.

Nut 60 Nm A
Attach the tie-rod for the NRRPS motion sensor (2)

to the upper arm (B).


Screw 110 Nm A

be aligned.

during removal.
the upper arm.

For vehicles with "Front Lift" system. Fill and bleed the "Front Lift" system ( D4.08).
Removing the rear shock absorber
The following procedure is for removing the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for removing the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.


absorber (A).
absorber (A) to the chassis.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (C) from the

front of the lower arm.
Detach and remove the rubber plug (D) from the

rear of the lower arm.

Support the weight of the shock absorber (A) and
remove the pin (5) from the relevant seat.
Remove the rear shock absorber from the relevant seat.
Refitting the rear shock absorber

The following procedure is for refitting the right hand rear shock absorber.
The procedure for refitting the left hand rear shock absorber is identical.
Fit the rear shock absorber in the relevant seat.

Holding the pin (5) still, fit the relevant washer and
tighten the nut (6) fastening the shock absorber
to the lower arm.

Screw 80 Nm A
Press the rubber plug (D) by hand into its relevant

seat at the rear of the lower arm.
Press the rubber plug (C) by hand into its relevant

seat at the front of the lower arm.


Screw 110 Nm A
Connect the connector (1) to the shock absorber

(A).

Replacing the shock absorber elements

Bushing and shock absorber retainer washer Nut 40 Nm A
Connector - shock absorber strut Nut 40 Nm A
To replace a component of the front shock absorber. Remove the front shock absorber ( D4.04).
To replace a component of the rear shock absorber. Remove the rear shock absorber ( D4.04).
Disassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber
Detach and remove the connector (1).

Immobilise the shock absorber.
Undo the nut (2).
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must be
observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
Partially loosen the nut (3) by just enough to

decompress the spring.
Compress the spring (A) with a suitable press.
Undo the nut (3) completely.
Retrieve the washer (4).
Slowly release the spring (A).
Remove the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Remove the bushing (5).
Remove the upper spring shim (C).
Remove the spring (A).
Remove the plug (D).
Remove the lower spring shim (E).
Disassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber on a vehicle with "Front Lift"
system (optional, applicable for front shock absorbers only)
Detach and remove the connector (1).

Immobilise the shock absorber.
Undo the nut (2).
CAUTION
The following procedure for removing the nut must be
observed precisely in order to compress and
remove the spring safely.
Partially loosen the nut (3) by just enough to

decompress the spring.
Undo the nut (3) completely.
Retrieve the washer (4).
Remove the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Remove the bushing (5).
Remove the upper spring shim (C).
Remove the spring (A).
Remove the plug (D).
Remove the lower spring shim (E).
Remove the actuator (F).
Remove the shim ring (G).
Reassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber
Apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the surface of

the lower shim (E) in contact with the spring (A).
Fit the lower shim (E) on the shock absorber.
Fit the plug (D).
Fit the spring (A).
the upper shim (C) in contact with the spring (A).
Fit the upper shim (C) on the shock absorber.
Fit the bushing (5).
Fit the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Fit the washer (4).
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is fastened to
the shock absorber strut.
Apply thread lock compound AREXONS SYSTEM

52A43 - MEDIUM STRENGTH THREAD LOCK
to the thread of the nut (3) and tighten.

Nut 40 Nm A

Nut 40 Nm A
Fit and connect the connector (1).

Reassembling the magnetorheological variable-damping shock absorber on a vehicle with "Front Lift"
system (optional, applicable for front shock absorbers only)
Fit the shim ring (G).

Apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the surfaces of
the shock absorber and shim ring (G) in contact
with the actuator (F).
Fit the actuator (F).
With the shock absorber oriented as it would be in
the vehicle, the actuator bleed valve (F) must
be turned by 37° ± 1° toward the exterior of the
vehicle.
Fit the lower shim (E).

the lower shim (E) in contact with the spring (A).
Fit the plug (D).
Fit the spring (A).
the upper shim (C) in contact with the spring (A).
Fit the upper shim (C).
Fit the bushing (5).
Fit the upper stop cap (B), complete with
hyperblock.
Fit the washer (4).
CAUTION
Do not release the spring until the nut is fastened to
the shock absorber strut.
Apply thread lock compound AREXONS SYSTEM

to the thread of the nut (3) and tighten.

Nut 40 Nm A

Nut 40 Nm A
Fit and connect the connector (1).

Adjust the shock absorber length ( D4.04).

Refit the rear shock absorber ( D4.04).
Refit the front shock absorber ( D4.04).
Adjusting the shock absorber length
The distance (L) from the disc to the lower fulcrum axis must be adjusted in accordance with the spring fitted
and the type of shock absorber on which it is fitted. Two different spring sizes are available with different
control load tolerances, identifiable by the different colours stamped on a coil turn.
Length of front variable setting shock absorber

Yellow 262.8 mm

White 260.2 mm
Length of rear variable setting shock absorber

Yellow 227.4 mm
Length of rear variable setting shock absorber

White 225.6 mm

with lift
Yellow 260.8 mm

with lift
White 258.2 mm

Shock absorber ring nut Ring nut 65 Nm B
Using a standard pin wrench, loosen the ring nut

(A) fastening the stop cap.
Hand tighten or loosen the spring retainer stop cap
(B) to obtain the distance (L).
Hold the stop cap in this position and tighten the
ring nut (A).

Ring nut 65 Nm B
Stabiliser bars - Tie-rods Page 1 of 10
Print Exit
D4.05 Stabiliser bars - Tie-rods
Removing the rear stabiliser bar

Remove the rear elements of the rear wheelhouses only.
Undo the nut (1) fastening the stabiliser bar (A) to

the left hand suspension tie-rod, retrieving the
retainer plate.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the rear
stabiliser bar (A) to the chassis.

the right hand suspension tie-rod, retrieving the
retainer plate.
stabiliser bar (A) to the chassis.
Remove the rear stabiliser bar, complete with bushings, from the vehicle, removing via the wheelhouse.
Refitting the rear stabiliser bar

Fastening rear stabiliser bar to chassis Screw 60 Nm B
Apply 1 ml of DuPont Lubricants Krytox® 205

GPL Standard Grade Grease grease in a
uniform film over the entire inner surface and on
the lateral surfaces (contact surfaces only) of the
bushings.
Apply a uniform film of DuPont Lubricants
Krytox® 205 GPL Standard Grade Grease
grease to the outer diameter of the bar and the
shoulders of the bushings.
Fit the bushings in the relative seats on the
stabiliser bar, ensuring that the bushings are
oriented correctly (see notches on bushings).
Fit the rear stabiliser bar (A) in the relative seat on

the chassis, with the notch (3) nearest to the
outer edge on the bushing is facing upward.
Fit the retainer plate on the bushing and tighten the
indicated screws.

Screw 60 Nm B
Fit the retainer plate on the bushing and fasten the

rear stabiliser bar (A), tightening the screws
indicated.

Screw 60 Nm B
Fasten the rear stabiliser bar (A) to the tie-rod,

tightening the nut (2).

Nut 50 Nm B
Fasten the rear stabiliser bar (A) to the tie-rod,

tightening the nut (1).

Nut 50 Nm B

Replacing rear spherical tie-rods


Undo the nut (1), retrieving the relevant washer.
Undo the ball stud (2), retrieving the relevant

washer.
Remove the spherical tie-rod (A) and replace it.
Fit the new spherical tie-rod (A) in the correct
direction.
Tighten the ball stud (2) fitting the relevant washer.

Tighten the nut (1) fitting the relevant washer.

Nut 50 Nm B
Removing the front stabiliser bar

Remove the front wheels.

the spherical tie-rod (2).

the spherical tie-rod (4).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the stabiliser

bar (A) to the chassis, retrieving the retainer
bracket (5).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the stabiliser

bar (A) to the chassis, retrieving the retainer
bracket (5).
Remove the stabiliser bar (A) from the chassis,

easing out from one side.
Refitting the front stabiliser bar

Fastening front stabiliser bar to chassis Screw 30 Nm B
Apply 1 ml of DuPont Lubricants Krytox® 205

GPL Standard Grade Grease grease in a
uniform film over the entire inner surface and on
the lateral surfaces (contact surfaces only) of the
bushings.
Apply a uniform film of DuPont Lubricants
Krytox® 205 GPL Standard Grade Grease
grease to the outer diameter of the bar and the
shoulders of the bushings.
Fit the bushings in the relative seats on the
stabiliser bar, ensuring that the bushings are
oriented correctly (see notches on bushings).
Fit the stabiliser bar (A) in the relative seat on the

chassis, with the notch (6) nearest to the outer
edge on the bushing facing forward.
Fit the retainer bracket (5) on the bushing and
tighten the indicated screws.

Screw 30 Nm B
Fit the retainer bracket (5) on the bushing and

fasten the stabiliser bar (A), tightening the
screws indicated.

Screw 30 Nm B
Fit and tighten the nut (3) fastening the stabiliser

bar (A) to the spherical tie-rod (4).

Nut 50 Nm B
Fit and tighten the nut (1) fastening the stabiliser

bar (A) to the spherical tie-rod (2).

Nut 50 Nm B
Replacing front spherical tie-rods

Undo the nut (1), retrieving the relevant washer.

Undo the ball stud (2), retrieving the relevant
washer.
Remove the spherical tie-rod (A) and replace it.
Fit the new spherical tie-rod (A) in the correct
direction.
Tighten the ball stud (2) fitting the relevant washer.

Tighten the nut (1) fitting the relevant washer.

Nut 50 Nm B
Suspension damping control system Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
D4.06 Suspension damping control system
System function
This vehicle is equipped with the latest generation MagneRide™ magnetorheologically controlled suspension, a
system that continuously and automatically controls suspension damping developed by Delphi and honed by
Ferrari.
By processing data received from the vehicle dynamics sensors measuring the movements of the bodyshell, the
ECU determines the road surface conditions and instantaneously adapts the response of the suspension
accordingly, by varying the control current for each shock absorber.
These sensors allow the ECU to calculate vehicle speed, vertical and lateral acceleration, steering angle and
instantaneous brake system pressure, and therefore control suspension damping in relation to these
parameters.
Damping at each wheel is adjusted by a magnetorheological fluid which changes in density in relation to a
magnetic field applied to the suspension.
The magnetorheological (MR) fluid is an oil containing a suspension of spherical ferromagnetic particles
measuring a few microns in diameter.
Using an electric current to apply a magnetic field to the oil, the viscosity of the oil may be varied.
By varying the magnetic field applied to the MR fluid flowing in a duct, its pressure and flow rate characteristics
may be adjusted in real time without the use of any external mechanical moving parts or actuators.
As well as ensuring the perfect balance between handling and comfort at all times, through specific calibrations
selectable from the Manettino driving mode selector, this system can also shift the bias slightly towards one
or the other of these two aspects.
Three different calibration levels are used on this vehicle:
Level 1 (COMFORT): a slightly softer calibration optimised to absorb bumps better and to offer improved grip
in wet conditions (“Low Grip” Manettino setting).
Level 2 (SPORT): a slightly stiffer calibration optimised for sports and high speed use (in medium to high grip
conditions) without drastically compromising comfort (SPORT and ESC OFF Manettino settings).
Level 3 (RACE): an even stiffer calibration optimised for track use (RACE, CT OFF and CST OFF Manettino
settings).
System layout
The system consists of:

4 NRRPS (Non-Contacting Ratiometer Rotational Position Sensor) sensors installed on the suspension of
each wheel, in which the fixed part of the potentiometer is mounted on the chassis (sprung mass) while
the rotating part of the potentiometer moves together with the suspension. The sensors transmit a linear
signal to the NCS ECU proportional to the angle of movement.
NCS ECU, installed under the hatch cover in the passenger side footrest mat which, in relation to the signals
received from the four NRRPS sensors, the data provided by the ECUs connected to the NCS and the
Manettino setting, controls the damping function of the shock absorbers.
4 magnetorheological shock absorbers, with one for each wheel suspension, controlled by the NCS ECU
in relation to the signals received by the latter.
Replacing the front NRRPS motion sensors

bracket to chassis
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand front motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand front motion sensor is identical.

Remove the relative front wheel only.

Detach the tie-rod (2) from the upper arm.
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the front
motion sensor mounting bracket (A).
Remove the front NRRPS motion sensor (A),
complete with relative mounting bracket, and
replace.
Fit the new front NRRPS motion sensor (A) in its
seat, complete with relative mounting bracket.
Tighten the two indicated screws fastening the front
NRRPS motion sensor mounting bracket (A).

Screw 5 Nm B
Fasten the tie-rod (2) to the upper arm.


Replacing the rear NRRPS motion sensors

bracket to chassis
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand rear NRRPS motion sensor.
The procedure for replacing the left hand rear NRRPS motion sensor is identical.

Remove the relative rear wheel only.

Detach the tie-rod (2) from the lower arm.
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the rear
Remove the rear NRRPS motion sensor (A),
complete with relative mounting bracket, and
replace.
Fit the new rear NRRPS motion sensor (A) in its
seat, complete with relative mounting bracket.
Tighten the two indicated screws fastening the rear

Screw 5 Nm B
Fasten the tie-rod (2) to the lower arm.


Vehicle set-up Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
D4.07 Vehicle set-up
Checks and preparation of vehicle
Check the following before inspecting the set-up:

Wheel fastening;
Tyre pressure;
Clearance between pinion and rack in steering system;
Clearance between ball studs and steering tie-rods;
State of the shock absorbers;
Clearance between hub carriers and ball joints.
Set the vehicle on a flat surface and "filled with the correct quantities of fluids" with a full tank of fuel and the
electric parking brake activated.
Toe-in is measured over a diameter of 495 mm.
The following set-up data is relative to the car WITHOUT SAND BAGS.
Front set-up data
Adjusted vehicle 139.4±5 mm

height
Wheel camber -0.73° ± 0.2°
Caster 4.6°±0.4°
Rear set-up data
Adjusted vehicle 165.8±5 mm

height
Wheel camber -1.31° ± 0.2°
Caster 2.28° ± 0.4°
Toe-in
Total On wheel
Total On wheel
Front -2 ± 0.5 mm -1 ± 0.25 mm
Rear 3 ± 0.5 mm 1.5 ± 0.25 mm
Height check
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the front section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (A) (external surface of the hole), must
correspond to the specified set-up values.
With the vehicle arranged as specified above, the correct height of the vehicle measured between the ground
and the rear section of the chassis, measured in relation to the point (B) (internal surface of the hole), must
correspond to the specified set-up values.
Front suspension
- Wheel camber -
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (1) and fit new shims
(2) to obtain a camber angle between the prescribed values, proceeding as described in chapter D4.02.
- Toe-in -
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
Make sure that the steering box is in central position and that the steering wheel is perfectly horizontal. To
assess this condition, use a mounting fitted with a spirit level. In this position, the two lateral tie-rods must
be equal in length. If they are not equal, adjust them.
Loosen the nuts (3) and turn the lateral tie-rods (4), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a
toe-in value within the prescribed values.
Tighten the nuts (3) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
Rear suspension
- Wheel camber -
Check that the lower suspension arms are in the correct position.
After checking, if the camber angle is not within the prescribed values, loosen the nuts (5) and fit new shims
(6) to obtain a camber angle between the prescribed values, proceeding as described in chapter D4.02.
- Toe-in -
After checking, if the toe-in is not within the prescribed values, proceed as follows:
Loosen the nuts (7) and turn the tie-rods (8), adjusting both tie-rods by the same amount, to obtain a toe-in
value within the prescribed values.
Tighten the nuts (7) to a torque of 60 Nm, class A.
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift (optional) Page 1 of 10
Print Exit
D4.08 “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift (optional)
System layout
A - Tank
B - Electric pump
C - Union block
Operating the "Front Lift" system
CAUTION
The system is not designed to remain active with the engine switched off while the vehicle is parked.
If the vehicle is switched off with the lift function active, the vehicle lowers after 15 seconds.
Do not use the front lift to park the vehicle on obstacles (e.g. kerbs) as the front of the vehicle may come
into contact with the obstacle and be damaged when the lift function deactivates.
The “Front Lift” system uses the front shock absorbers to raise the front of the vehicle by approximately 40 mm,
to allow access to garages or steep ramps without damaging the vehicle.
The “Front Lift” system may be activated with the engine on and at speeds not greater than 40 Km/h by
pressing the relative button on the centre console.
At speeds above 40 Km/h, the "Front Lift" system is disabled. If already active, the system deactivates
automatically when the vehicle speed exceeds 40 Km/h.
In the event of engine malfunction, the “Front Lift” system may still be activated by pressing and holding the
relative button for 10 seconds.
While the “Front Lift” system is raising the front of the vehicle, the specific indicator flashes and the TFT display
displays the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing upward, together with the specific message "Front
Lift moving".
While the system is active, the TFT display shows the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing upward
together with the specific message "Front Lift ON".
If the ignition switch is turned to 0 while the system is active, the TFT display displays the vehicle symbol with a
white arrow pointing upward with the specific message "Front Lift ON", together with the message "Set
Front Lift to OFF".
While the “Front Lift” system is lowering the front of the vehicle, the specific indicator flashes and the TFT
display displays the vehicle symbol with a white arrow pointing downward, together with the specific
message "Front Lift moving".
If the system is inhibited, the TFT display shows the vehicle symbol with a red arrow pointing upward together
with the specific message "Front Lift inhibited".
Removing the "Front Lift" system electric pump
The electric pump is located in front of the rear right hand wheel bay.

Remove the door sill trim panel ( E3.11).
Remove the right hand sill trim.
Detach the connectors (4) and (5).
Disconnect the union (3).
Undo the union (1) on the pipe (2).

Place a container under the pipe (2).

Retrieve the seals on the union (1).
Remove the electric pump (A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the "Front Lift" system electric pump

Fastening mounting bracket for "Front Lift" system Screw 24 Nm B
electric pump
Fastening pipe from reservoir onto "Front Lift" Union 25 Nm B
system electric pump
Check that state of the adhesive pad applied to the

electric pump (A) and replace if necessary.
Fit the electric pump (A) in the relative seat.

Screw 24 Nm B
Replace the seals on the union (1).

Tighten the union (1) on the pipe (2).

Union 25 Nm B

Union 16 Nm B
Connect the connectors (4) and (5).

Fill and bleed the "Front Lift" system ( D4.08).
Refit the door sill trim panel ( E3.11).
Removing the "Front Lift" system reservoir

Remove the right hand cosmetic shield.
Aspirate all the fluid from the reservoir with a syringe.

Remove the reservoir (A).
Refitting the "Front Lift" system reservoir

Fastening vehicle lift system fluid reservoir Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the reservoir (A).


Screw 4 Nm B
Connect pipe (1).

Tighten a new clamp as indicated.
Fill and bleed the "Front Lift" system ( D4.08).

Filling and bleeding the "Front Lift" system

Fastening bleed union Union 10 Nm B
The vehicle must be on a level, horizontal surface.

Connect the vehicle to a battery conditioner or keep the engine running during the procedure.
Undo the cap (1).

Fill the reservoir (A), bearing in mind that the level
in the reservoir must never drop below the MIN
limit when bleeding the system.
Turn the ignition switch on.

Wait at least 10 seconds.
Start the "NSV bleeding" cycle, using the DEIS diagnostic tester and following the relative instructions.
Wait at least 5 seconds.
Remove the protector cap on both shock absorbers

and loosen the indicated bleed unions.
Connect suitable lengths of transparent pipe to the
bleed unions on both shock absorbers.
Immerse the end of the pipes in a container filled
with the hydraulic fluid specified for use in the
system.
Wait for the "NSV bleeding" cycle to complete.
Disconnect the lengths of transparent pipe from the
bleed unions on both shock absorbers.
Tighten the indicated bleed unions and refit the
protector caps on both shock absorbers.

Union 10 Nm B
Check the fluid level in the "Front Lift" hydraulic system ( D4.08).
Refit the right hand cosmetic shield.
Checking the fluid level in the "Front Lift" hydraulic system

Check that the fluid level in the reservoir (A) is near

the MAX limit.
If the level is near the MIN limit, top the system up
with fluid as follows.
Undo the cap (1).
Screw the cap (1) back on tightly.

Refit the right hand cosmetic shield.
Steering system layout Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
D5.01 Steering system layout
Steering system layout
A - Power steering fluid tank

B - Power steering fluid pump
C - Steering box
D - Power steering fluid radiator
E - Steering column
F - Steering wheel
Power steering tank Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D5.02 Power steering tank
Removing the power steering tank
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
environment.
For vehicles UP TO Ass.ly No. 98001 when replacing the power steering fluid reservoir, the pipe from the power
steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump and the pipe from the underbody to the power steering
fluid reservoir, the components of either RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917, or of RETROFIT KIT Part No.
279662, must be used, referring to the indications given in the Spare Parts Catalogue.
The components of RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917 and RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279662 are solely compatible
with the power steering fluid prescribed FROM Ass.ly No. 98002.
Empty the tank, aspirating and collecting the fluid with a suitable syringe.
Remove the shield (3) by undoing the screws

indicated.
Disconnect the breather pipe from the cap (1).

Undo the fastener screws indicated and lift the
power steering reservoir (A).
Disconnect the two pipes (2) from the power
steering tank (A), loosening the relative clamps.
Remove the power steering tank (A).
Refitting the power steering tank

Fastening power steering fluid pipes to reservoir Screw collar 4 Nm B
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is harmful to the eyes and skin and may also damage the
vehicle bodywork.
For vehicles UP TO Ass.ly No. 98001 when replacing the power steering fluid reservoir, the pipe from the power
steering fluid reservoir to the power steering pump and the pipe from the underbody to the power steering
fluid reservoir, the components of either RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917, or of RETROFIT KIT Part No.
279662, must be used, referring to the indications given in the Spare Parts Catalogue.
The components of RETROFIT KIT Part No. 280917 and RETROFIT KIT Part No. 279662 are solely compatible
with the power steering fluid prescribed FROM Ass.ly No. 98002.
Connect the two pipes (2) to the power steering

tank (A) by tightening the relative clamps.

Screw collar 4 Nm B
Screw collar 4 Nm B
Fit the power steering tank (A) onto its mounting

bracket.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the power
steering reservoir (A).
Connect the vent pipe (1) to the power steering
reservoir cap (A).
Fit the shield (3) and fasten by tightening the

screws indicated.
Fit the vent pipe (1) in the relative seat on the shield
(3).
Power steering pump Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
D5.03 Power steering pump
Removing the power steering pump
The majority of cases of NOISY power steering pump operation are caused by contaminated fluid in the
system; therefore, attempt to rectify the failure before replacing the power steering pump, replacing
the power steering fluid tank ALWAYS. Fit the new tank correctly, ensuring that the tank cap and
breather are exactly as specified in the respective vehicle layout to prevent infiltration, which will
contaminate the power steering fluid. Then fill the power steering system with fluid and bleed and
perform another pump function test. Only replace the power steering pump if the problem persists.
(Ref: Technical Information No. 1695 _ December 2008)
Located on the left-hand side of the engine, above the compressor.

Remove the compressor ( F5.03).

Remove the heat shield (1) on the compressor,

undoing the screw indicated.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the heat shield

to the power steering pump (2).
Remove the heat shield on the power steering

pump (2), undoing the screw indicated.
Undo the rear screw indicated fastening the power

steering pump (A) to the engine.
Remove the cover (3) by undoing the screws

indicated.
Undo the two front screws indicated fastening the

power steering pump (A) to the engine.
Retrieve the pipe guard.
Holding the power steering pump (A), undo the

union (4) on the rigid pipe and remove the clamp
(5) on the hose.
Remove the power steering pump (A).
Refitting the power steering pump

Fastening power steering pump to engine Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening cover to power steering pump Screw 10 Nm B
The majority of cases of NOISY power steering pump operation are caused by contaminated fluid in the
system; therefore, attempt to rectify the failure before replacing the power steering pump, replacing
the power steering fluid tank ALWAYS. Fit the new tank correctly, ensuring that the tank cap and
breather are exactly as specified in the respective vehicle layout to prevent infiltration, which will
contaminate the power steering fluid. Then fill the power steering system with fluid and bleed and
perform another pump function test. Only replace the power steering pump if the problem persists.
(Ref: Technical Information No. 1695 _ December 2008)
Holding the power steering pump assembly (A),

connect and fasten the hose, applying and
tightening a new clamp (5), and tighten the rigid
pipe union (4).

Union 37 Nm B
Fit the power steering pump assembly (A), with the

relative mountings, in its seat on the engine.
Fit the pipe guard.
Hand tighten the front screws (11) and (12)
fastening the power steering pump assembly
(A), installing the relative washers.
Hand tighten the indicated rear screw (13) fastening

the power steering pump (A) to the engine.
Fit the cover (3) onto the power steering pump and
fasten by hand tightening the screws (8).
Fit the heat shield on the power steering pump (2)

and fasten by tightening the screw indicated.
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the heat

shield to the power steering pump (2).
Fit and fasten the heat shield on the compressor

(1), tightening the screw indicated.

Screw 9 Nm C
Refit the compressor ( F5.03).

Carry out the procedure for installing the compressor, hand tightening the fastener screws only.
Tighten the front screws fastening the power

steering pump in the following sequence: (11)-
(12).

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the indicated rear screw (13) fastening the

power steering pump (A) to the engine.

Screw 25 Nm B
Refit the compressor ( F5.03).

Tighten the screws fastening the AC compressor.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the cover (3).

Screw 10 Nm B
Refit the ancillary belt ( A3.12).

Steering box Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
D5.04 Steering box
Removing the steering box

Remove the front wheels.
Remove the front stabiliser bar ( D4.05).

Disconnect the connector (1) from the steering box

(A).
Undo the nut (2) fastening the left hand tie-rod (B)
to the left hand hub carrier (C).
Disconnect the left hand tie-rod (B) from the left
hand hub carrier (C).
Undo the nut (2) fastening the right hand tie-rod (B)
to the right hand hub carrier (C).
Disconnect the right hand tie-rod (B) from the right
hand hub carrier (C).
Undo the screw (3) fastening the universal joint (D)

linking the steering column (E) with the steering
box.
On the left-hand side, undo the two screws

indicated fastening the steering box (A) to the
chassis.
On the right-hand side, undo the two screws

indicated fastening the steering box (A) to the
chassis.
Retrieve the mounting (4) and the relative shim (5).
Remove the clamp (6) retaining the steering box

cables (A).
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the

recirculation pump mounting bracket (F).
Move the recirculation pump (F), complete with
mounting bracket, out of its seat to facilitate the
removal of the steering box (A).
Rotating clockwise by just enough to allow its

removal from the front left hand wheel bay,
remove the steering box (A) from the relative
seat.
Refitting the steering box

Fastening retainer bracket on recirculation pump Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening steering box to chassis Nut (pretightening) 25 Nm B
Screw 60 Nm A
Fastening steering box tie-rod to front hub carrier Nut 40 Nm A
Rotating by just enough to allow to pass through the

front left hand wheel bay, fit the steering box (A)
in the relative seat.
Fit the water recirculation pump (F), complete with

mounting bracket, in the relative seat, after
installing the steering box (A) correctly.
recirculation pump mounting bracket (F).

Screw 9 Nm B
Refit the cable retainer clamp (6) on the steering

box (A).
Fit the mounting (4) and the relative shim (5) on the
steering box (A).
On the right hand side, tighten the indicated screws
fastening the steering box (A) to the chassis.
On the left hand side, tighten the indicated screws

fastening the steering box (A) to the chassis.
Pre-tighten and definitively tighten the steering box fastener screws in a cross pattern.

Screw 60 Nm A
Tighten the screw (3) fastening the universal joint

(D) linking the steering column (E) with the
steering box.

Screw 30 Nm B
Connect the right hand tie-rod (B) to the right hand

hub carrier (C).
Pre-tighten, loosen and then definitively tighten the
nut (2) fastening the right hand tie-rod (B) to the
right hand hub carrier (C).

Nut 40 Nm A
Connect the left hand tie-rod (B) to the left hand

hub carrier (C).
Pre-tighten, loosen and then definitively tighten the
nut (2) fastening the left hand tie-rod (B) to the
left hand hub carrier (C).

Nut 40 Nm A
Connect the connector (1) to the steering box (A).
Refit the front stabiliser bar ( D4.05).

Refit the front wheels.
Refit the front flat undertray section ( E3.12).

Radiator/power steering fluid coil Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
D5.05 Radiator/power steering fluid coil
Removing the radiator/power steering fluid coil

Remove the front bumper ( E3.03).
Undo the indicated inner screws fastening the lower

radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.
Remove the indicated rivets.
New solution

The indicated screws replace the previous rivets.
Undo the indicated outer screws fastening the lower

radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.
Remove the lower radiator air duct (A) from the
relative seat, easing out towards the front of the
vehicle.
Disconnect the unions (1) from the power steering

fluid radiator (B), undoing the relative fastener
nuts indicated.
Remove the power steering fluid radiator (B) from
the relative seat.
Detach the pipes (1) removing the indicated clamps.

Remove the coil (B).
Refitting the radiator/power steering fluid coil

Fastening power steering pipe unions to power Nut 9 Nm B
steering fluid radiator
Fastening the power steering fluid coil Screw 5 Nm C
Fit the power steering fluid radiator (B) in the

relative seat.
Connect the unions (1) to the power steering fluid
radiator (B), tightening the relative fastener nuts
indicated.

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the coil (B).


Screw 5 Nm C
Connect the pipes (1), fastening the new clamps as

indicated.
Fit the lower radiator air duct (A) in the relative seat,
installing from the front of the vehicle.
Tighten the indicated outer screws fastening the
lower radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.

Screw 5 Nm C
Fit new rivets in the indicated positions.
New solution


Screw 5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated inner screws fastening the

lower radiator air duct (A) to the water radiator.

Screw 5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated screw.

Screw 5 Nm C
Refit the front bumper ( E3.03).

Steering wheel Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
D5.06 Steering wheel
Removing the steering wheel

Remove the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

Undo the fastener nut, (3), retrieve the washer and
remove the steering wheel.
Fasten the clock spring connector (B) with a clamp

(4).
Refitting the steering wheel

Fastening steering wheel to steering column Nut 50 Nm B
Remove the clamp (4) to release the clock spring

connector (B).
Fit the steering wheel in its seat, by tightening the

fastener nut (3) after having fitted the relative
washer.

Nut 50 Nm B
Position the cover (1) and press down fully.
Refit the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

Steering column Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
D5.07 Steering column
Removing the steering column

Remove the steering wheel ( D5.06).
Remove the steering column trim panel ( E4.02).
Remove the dashboard trim panels ( E4.02).
Remove the lower left hand trim.
Remove the instrument panel ( E5.02).
Open the clamp (1).


Mark the position of the steering column with

respect to the steering box shaft.
Remove the steering column (A) from the steering
box.
Undo the lower screws indicated fastening the

steering column (A).
Undo also the two screws on the right hand side of
the steering column.
Undo the indicated upper screws and remove the

steering column (A) from the dashboard.
Refitting the steering column

Fastening lower fastener for steering column to Screw 25 Nm B
dashboard
Fastening upper fastener for steering column to Screw 8 Nm B
dashboard
Fit the steering column (A) in the relative seat on

the dashboard.
Hand tighten the lower screws indicated fastening
the steering column (A).
Hand tighten also the two screws on the right
hand side of the steering column.
Hand tighten the upper screws indicated fastening

the steering column (A).
Tighten the lower screws indicated fastening the

Tighten also the two screws on the right hand side
of the steering column.

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the upper screws indicated fastening the


Screw 8 Nm B
Using the markings made during removal as

reference, fit the steering column (A) on the
steering box.

Screw 30 Nm B


Close the clamp (1) securing the cables as
originally installed.
Refit the instrument panel ( E5.02).

Refit the dashboard trim panels ( E4.02).
Refit the lower left hand trim.
Refit the steering column trim panel ( E4.02).

Refit the steering wheel ( D5.06).
Emptying and filling the power steering system Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
D5.08 Emptying and filling the power steering system
Draining the power steering system

Remove the left hand element of the front flat undertray section.
Unscrew and open the power steering fluid

reservoir cap (A).

Cover the connector adequately.

Loosen the unions (1) and (2).
Filling the power steering system

FROM Ass.ly No. 98002, a different power steering fluid is prescribed.

Before topping up or filling, always check which type of fluid should be used, as mixing the two different
types of power steering fluid will damage the power steering system itself.
The power steering system is self-bleeding.
Replace the respective seal and tighten the union

(1).

M14 pipe union 35 Nm B
Replace the respective seal and tighten the union

(2).

Remove the power steering tank ( D5.02).

Clean the interior of the power steering fluid reservoir thoroughly using a small quantity of new power steering
fluid of the specified type.
Allow the power steering fluid used to clean the power steering fluid reservoir to drain completely into a
suitable container.
Use a suitable syringe to aspirate any residue of the power steering fluid used for cleaning from the power
steering fluid reservoir.
Connect a suitable additional pipe to the power

steering fluid reservoir return pipe (B)
Place the other end of the pipe into a container for
collecting the power steering fluid.
CAUTION
The oil contained in the hydraulic steering system is
harmful to the eyes and skin and may also
damage the vehicle bodywork.
Adequately protect the areas surrounding the power

steering tank pipes (B) and (C).
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the
steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Steer fully to the left and right a few times until

power steering fluid starts to flow from the tank
return pipe (B).
Connect a suitable funnel to the power steering fluid
reservoir delivery pipe (C).
Place an 80 micron mesh filter in the funnel.
Pour new power steering fluid into the funnel while
simultaneously steering to the left and right a few
times until at least 3 litres of power steering fluid
has been collected from the power steering fluid
reservoir return pipe (A).
Do not let the funnel empty during this procedure.
Disconnect and remove the funnel from the power

steering fluid reservoir delivery pipe (C).
Disconnect and remove the additional pipe from the
power steering fluid reservoir return pipe (B).
Refit the power steering tank ( D5.02).
Undo and open the cap (A).

sealed containers.

DO NOT apply any more turning force to the

steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Fill the power steering fluid reservoir to the MAX

limit on the cap dipstick (A) while simultaneously
steering fully to the right and left repeatedly until
the power steering fluid level stabilises and the
fluid contains no bubbles.
Start and stop the engine twice repeatedly.

Check that the fluid level is stable and that the fluid
is not emulsified with air.
If the power steering fluid level drops, top the power
steering fluid reservoir up to the MAX limit on the
cap dipstick (A) while simultaneously steering
fully to the right and left repeatedly until the
power steering fluid level stabilises and the fluid
contains no bubbles.
Lift the vehicle with a vehicle lift so that the wheels are not in contact with the ground.
Start the engine and run at idle speed for 1 minute.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.
Check the power steering system fluid level ( A3.06).

Simultaneously, steer fully 10 times.
Lower the vehicle to bring the wheels into contact with the ground.
Wait for the engine coolant temperature to reach 90°C.
DO NOT apply any more turning force to the steering wheel once full lock is reached.

Simultaneously, steer fully 10 times.
Repeat this procedure another three times.
Print Exit
E1.01 Tightening torques

Fastening wheelhouse Screw 3 Nm C
Fastening luggage compartment tub Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening underwindscreen shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Fastening flat undertray elements Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening luggage compartment shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Screw 8.5 Nm B
to chassis
Fastening removable subframe to chassis Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening seat Screw 40 Nm B
Fastening F1 shift paddles Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening steering angle sensor mounting to Screw 6 Nm B
steering column
Fastening cabin light Screw 3 Nm B
Fastening DCT gearbox control panel Screw 3 Nm B
Fastening the NIT Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening the woofer Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fastening radio amplifier Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening amplifier Screw 6 Nm C
Fastening steering column trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening rear subframe in rear suspension Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
mounting casting area screw
Screw 110 Nm A
Fastening for lateral front part of rear subframe Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
screw
Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening for lateral engine strut mounting point Screw 30 Nm A
extrusion of rear subframe.
Fastening sill connector cross member area of Screw 60 Nm A
rear subframe (on bushing)
Fastening for rear subframe in rear part of rear Screw 20 Nm B
suspension mounting casting
Fastening rear subframe in rear radiator area Screw 9 Nm C
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_E10... 8/5/2011

Fastening for shield plate for fuel tank connector Screw 24 Nm B
pipe
Fastening mounting bracket for fuel tank Screw 6 Nm B
connector pipe
Fastening ground cable to rear subframe Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening bumper Screw 7.5 Nm C
Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening engine compartment cosmetic shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Fastening passenger compartment trim panels Screw 7 Nm B
Fastening roof trim panels Screw 7 Nm B
Screw 4 Nm B
Screw 2 Nm B
Fastening centre console trim panel Screw 8.5 Nm B
Screw 3 Nm C
Fastening fuel filler neck Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening glove compartment to dashboard Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening central bracket Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening diagnostic socket mounting bracket Screw 3 Nm C
Fastening fuse box mounting bracket Screw 5 Nm C
Lateral fastening for dashboard from luggage Screw 60 Nm B
compartment
compartment
Central fastening dashboard from luggage Screw 8 Nm B
compartment
Lateral fastening dashboard from passenger Screw 32 Nm B
compartment
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - Screw 60 Nm B
Central fastening dashboard from passenger Screw 8 Nm B
compartment
Fastening engine inspection hatch Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening doors Screw 18 Nm B
Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening door panel Screw 4 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 9 Nm C
Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening seat belts Screw 40 Nm B
Fastening quarterlight Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening windscreen and headlight washer fluid Screw 5 Nm B

reservoir
Fastening fuel filler flap Nut 4 Nm B
Fastening actuator striker plate to fuel filler flap Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening fuel filler flap actuator Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening external rear view mirror Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid lock shield Screw 4.1 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid lock Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid lock striker plate Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening luggage compartment lid lock Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening luggage compartment lid lock striker Nut 8 Nm B
plate
Fastening gas strut to glove compartment door Nut 7 Nm B
Fastening glove compartment liner Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening under rear screen cosmetic shield Screw 4.1 Nm B
Fastening structural connector plate Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening driver side seat height adjustment Screw 24 Nm B
mechanism
Fastening engine buffer cross member M8x20 screw 20 Nm B
M6x14 screw 8 Nm B
Fastening door striker plates Screw 23 Nm B
Fastening internal door window scraper seal Screw 2 Nm B
Fastening door window Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening external door window scraper seal Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening the door triangle trim Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening passenger side footrest mat Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening the dashboard trim panels Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fastening underdashboard mats Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid grilles Screw 8 Nm C
Fastening sill trim Screw 4.5 Nm B
Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fastening window lifter mechanism Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid release handle Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening armrest bracket Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening internal body of external door handle Nut 2 Nm B
Fastening external body of external door handle Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fastening door lock Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fastening driver side door latch Nut 2 Nm B
Fastening breather duct and cover Screw 5 Nm A
Fastening the fuel filler neck ground lug terminal Nut 5 Nm B
Fastening instrument panel binnacle Screw 4 Nm B
Print Exit
E1.02 Specific tooling and equipment
Trolley 95977565 (AS 107565)

removing the engine / gearbox / subframe assembly.
Safety extensions 95977513 (AS 107573)

for trolley AS 107565 for removing/refitting rear
subframe.
Safety retainers 95978183 (AV 8183)

vehicle anti-tipping retention.
Fastener brackets for safety retainers 95978184

(AV 8184)
raised vehicle anti-tipping retention for runway type
car lifts.
Mounting bracket for vehicle safety retainers for

lifting 95978251 (AV 8251)
lifting vehicle on vehicle lift.
Spacers 95978255 (AV 8255)

for trolley AS 107565 for removing/refitting rear
subframe.
General Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
E2.01 General
Features of the chassis
As already seen on the California, a "Space-frame" architecture has been adopted for the aluminium chassis,
meaning less weight, for improved performance and safety, and greater torsional stiffness, for superior
dynamic qualities.
Using a modular chassis also introduces the following advantages:
greater service efficiency and shorter service times;
easier maintenance from a Client perspective;
reduced replacement times for damaged parts;
reduced running costs.
Rear removable engine-gearbox assembly mounting subframe Page 1 of 58
Print Exit
E2.02 Rear removable engine-gearbox assembly mounting subframe
Removing the rear subframe
CAUTION
INSTALLED.

Remove the expansion tank ( B6.02).
Remove the engine compartment lid lock ( E5.11).
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802. Remove the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
To remove the rear subframe complete with

gearbox and engine, use the trolley (AS 107565).
The trolley consists of a turntable platform (53),
which can be locked in position with the two
handles (54); of six locator pins (52), with
relevant swivelling and removable mounts; of a
pedal (55) for lifting the platform, and a handle
(56) for lowering the platform.
Before starting the following procedure, the trolley

(AS 107565) must be configured correctly for
removing the rear subframe on this vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the handle (A)
to the mountings on the trolley (AS 107565).
Fit the safety extensions (AS 107573), as shown in

the figure aside, and fasten to the trolley
(AS 107565), tightening the screws and nuts
indicated by the red arrows after installing the
relevant washers.
Fasten the handle (A) to the safety extensions
(AS 107573), tightening the screws removed
and retrieved during the previous step.
Check that the cable and handle for lowering the
platform are positioned correctly and function
correctly.
Disconnect the three gearbox wiring harness

connectors (5) and remove from the relevant
mounting bracket.
Detach the gearbox wiring harness (6) from the

chassis, detaching the indicated clip.
Place the gearbox wiring harness (6) on the air filter
box, taking care not to damage the box, so that it
does not hinder the subsequent operations.
Separate the cables (7) of the engine compartment

lid lock, undoing the lock grub screw and
retrieving the cable clamp (8).

indicated screws.

indicated screws.
Detach the cable (7) for emergency release of the

engine compartment lid lock, removing the
indicated clamps.
Detach the cable (9) for the fuel filler flap
emergency release, by loosening the nut
indicated by the red arrow.

pump filter.
Release the low pressure pipe (1) by opening the

indicated clamp.

pump filter.
pipes (3) from the respective evaporative
emissions control system solenoid valves.
Release the low pressure pipe (2) by opening the

indicated clamp.
Left-hand side
Remove the indicated clamp and remove the

evaporative emissions control system solenoid
valve connector pipe (3) from the engine
compartment.
secondary air system connector pipe (4).
Right-hand side
Remove the indicated clamp and remove the

evaporative emissions control system solenoid
valve connector pipe (3) from the engine
compartment.
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and undo the
Detach the clamps retaining the cable (45) to the
chassis.


Disconnect the connector (24) from the right hand
Motronic ECU, and disconnect the connector
(25) from the engine compartment cable junction.
Release the right hand injection cable (22) leading

to the ELDOR ECU, removing the indicated
clamps.
Disconnect the connectors (26) from the ELDOR
ECU.
Disconnect the front right hand oxygen sensor

connector (27) and remove the indicated clips.
Pull out the right hand injection cable (22) and place

Disconnect the front left hand oxygen sensor
connector (29) and remove the indicated clips.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the fuel vapour
separator mounting bracket (30) to the chassis.

the indicated clamps, and disconnect the
connector (31) from the engine compartment
cable junction.
Disconnect the connector (32) from the left hand

Motronic ECU.
Pull out the left hand injection cable (28) and place
Remove the left hand air duct (10), undoing the

indicated screws, then ease out towards the rear.
Disconnect the solenoid valve connector (11) on the
radiator.
Remove the right hand air duct (12), undoing the

indicated screws, then ease out towards the rear.
Disconnect the two connectors (13) on the solenoid

valves and release the relevant cables from the
retainer clips on the rear subframe.
Disconnect the third stop light connector (14) and

release the relevant cable from the indicated
clamps.
On the left hand rear suspension, undo the

indicated nut fastening the ground cable (15)
and cut the cable tie indicated by the red arrow.

connector (16).
Disconnect the connector (18) on the shock

absorber and release the cable (17), removing
Undo the screw (19) fastening the ground cables to

the chassis and remove the indicated clamps.
Disconnect the connectors (66) and remove the

indicated clamps.
Disconnect the shock absorber connector (64) and

release the cable (65), removing the indicated
clamps.
Disconnect the connector (61) on the EPB ECU.

Undo the screw (63) fastening the ground cable to
the chassis.
Undo the screw (62) fastening the ground cables to
the chassis.
Release the wiring harnesses, removing the
indicated clamps.
On the right hand rear suspension, undo the

and cut the cable tie indicated by the red arrow.
Disconnect the right hand rear oxygen sensor

connector (59) and release the relevant wiring
harness, cutting the indicated clamps.
Disconnect the left hand rear oxygen sensor

connector (58) and release the relevant wiring
harness, cutting the indicated clamp.
Remove the mounting bracket (57), undoing the

indicated screw.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ rear of vehicle

Remove the mounting bracket (57), undoing the
indicated screw.
Remove the two shield brackets (67) from the rear

subframe, undoing the indicated screws.
CAUTION
CAUTION
Take every necessary precaution, since fuel residues
may remain in the tank and in the pipes, even after
the operations described.
Place a container under the quick couplings (69), as

there may be some residual fuel in the tanks and
in the connector pipe (68).
Mark the position of the tank connector pipe (68)
with respect to the connectors so as to
reassemble it correctly.
Disconnect the quick couplings (69) on the tank
connector pipe (68), disconnecting one end first
and then the other.
Place plugs on the tank inlets.
Remove the bracket (70) on the pipe retainer pillory

block (72), undoing the screws indicated by the
red arrows.
Place a container under the clamps (71).
Loosen the indicated clamps then detach the
coolant pipes (71) from the rigid pipes and the
pipe retainer pillory block.

Remove the clamp (73) and disconnect the vent
pipe leading from the radiator to the header tank.
Remove the indicated clamps fastening the pipes.

Remove the structural connector plate (90).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the mounting

brackets to the bodyshell and tilt the rear part of
the pipes (80) downwards.
The pipe connections are protected by a section of

sheath fastened with a clamp. Cut the clamp and
move the section of sheath in order to
disconnect the pipes.
Both open ends must be adequately plugged
immediately after disconnecting pipes.
Undo the AC unions (78) and the power steering
system unions (77).
Disconnect the brake servo vacuum system quick
coupling (76).
Remove the clamp (75) and disconnect the water
Undo the unions (74) for the brake fluid pipes
leading to the rear callipers.
Both open ends must be adequately plugged

immediately after disconnecting pipes.
Open the clamps indicated.
Release the pipes from the relative clamps.
Remove the clamp (94) on the power steering
system pipe.
Disconnect the quick coupling (93) on the AC pipe.
Disconnect the quick coupling (77) on the power
Undo the union (78) on the AC pipe.
Undo the union (74) on the brake fluid pipe leading

to the rear calliper.
Place a container under the clamps (71).

Loosen the indicated clamps (71) and disconnect
the water pipes.

coupling (76).
Detach the brake fluid pipe from the indicated clip.
Undo the union (74) on the brake fluid pipe leading
to the rear calliper.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ vehicle rear end _ for

vehicles with front lifter ONLY
Undo the union (1A).

Disconnect the quick coupling (75) on the water
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ front of vehicle
Remove the clamp (75) and disconnect the pipe.

Undo the unions (74) for the brake fluid pipes
Remove the clamp (96) and disconnect the relative
pipe.
Loosen the indicated clamp (71) and disconnect the

water pipe.
Loosen the clamp (94) and disconnect the power
Loosen the indicated clamp (71) and disconnect the

water pipe.

coupling (76).
Disconnect the quick coupling (77) on the power

coupling (76).
Undo the pipe union (98) and disconnect the

respective pipe.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ vehicle front end _ for

Undo the union (2A).

Release the pipe from the indicated clip.

Remove the complete underbody pipe set (97) from
underneath the vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the rear

subframe, located on the inner side of the two
rear radiators.
Right-hand side

subframe in the rear radiator area.
Left-hand side

Make reference markings at the rear subframe fastener points to facilitate reassembly.
Right-hand side
From the wheel bay undo the screw indicated

fastening the rear subframe, located in the rear
of the rear suspension mounting casting.
Left-hand side
From the wheel bay undo the screw indicated

Right-hand side
Undo the upper screw indicated fastening the rear

subframe located in the rear suspension
mounting casting area.
Left-hand side
Undo the upper screw indicated fastening the rear

subframe located in the rear suspension
Open the clamp indicated by the red arrow and pull
the engine compartment lid lock cable (7)
outwards.
From underneath the vehicle, undo the four

indicated screws fastening the rear subframe in
the sill connector cross member area.
Tighten the spacer (AV 8255) into the relevant hole

on the left-hand side of the chassis, as shown in
the photo aside. This spacer will serve as a front
mounting point for the corresponding pin on the
trolley (AS 107565).
Tighten the spacer (AV 8255) into the relevant hole

on the right-hand side of the chassis, as shown
in the photo aside. This spacer will serve as a
front mounting point for the corresponding pin on
the trolley (AS 107565).
CAUTION
To ensure safety, the following procedure for placing
the support trolley in position must be carried out
exactly as described.
Position the trolley (AS 107565) with the control

handle facing toward the rear; lift the platform so
that the locator pins are approximately 20 mm
from the respective holes in the chassis, as
shown in the photo.
Lock the turntable platform by using the relevant
handles.
CAUTION
ALWAYS ensure that the tool pins are correctly
located in the respective holes in the chassis.
Using a hex headed wrench, tighten the locator pins

of the trolley (AS 107565) until they are flush
with the respective holes on the rear subframe
and on the front part of the latter, as shown in
the photo, with the spacers (AV 8255) installed
previously.
Right-hand side

subframe in the rear suspension mounting
casting area.
Left-hand side

casting area.
Right-hand side

subframe at the lateral engine strut mounting
point extrusion.
Left-hand side

point extrusion.
Right-hand side

subframe in the lateral front area.
Left-hand side

The rear subframe (79) is now disconnected from

the bodyshell and is supported by the trolley
(AS 107565).
Slowly lower the trolley (AS 107565), ensuring that
there are no cables or pipes still connected and
taking care not to scrape against any other
components.
If the vehicle is lifted with a runway type vehicle
lift, lower the subframe for approximately 150 -
200 mm, then move backwards to avoid
contact with the runways.
Lower completely, move away from underneath the

vehicle and set the complete rear subframe
down in a safe place.
Refitting the rear subframe

Fastening rear subframe in rear suspension Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
mounting casting area screw
Screw 110 Nm A
Fastening for lateral front part of rear subframe Pretightening torque for 15 Nm B
screw
Screw 100 Nm A
Fastening for lateral engine strut mounting point Screw 30 Nm A
extrusion of rear subframe.
Fastening sill connector cross member area of Screw 60 Nm A
rear subframe (on bushing)
Fastening for rear subframe in rear part of rear Screw 20 Nm B
suspension mounting casting
Fastening rear subframe in rear radiator area Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening brake fluid underbody pipe unions Union 16 Nm B
90802)
90802)
Fastening underbody union with pipe leading to Union 27 Nm B
90802)

fluid delivery pipe
fluid return pipe
Fastening underbody mounting brackets for Screws 9 Nm B
cooling system rigid pipes
bodyshell
Fastening structural connector plate Screw 8 Nm B
set No. 90802)
Fastening for shield plate for fuel tank connector Screw 24 Nm B
pipe
Fastening mounting bracket for fuel tank Screw 6 Nm B
connector pipe
removable subframe
Clean the seats for the fasteners and the fasteners themselves, both on the rear subframe and on the vehicle
chassis, to remove any dirt or adhesive residue.
Position the rear subframe (79), supported by the

trolley (AS 107565), under the rear of the vehicle.
Lift slowly the trolley (AS 107565) making sure that
pipes or cables do not touch or interfere.
When using a runway type vehicle lift, lift the
subframe to approximately 150 - 200 mm from
its seat, insert the subframe horizontally and
then lift, to prevent contact with the runways.
Lift the rear subframe completely and fit in the

relevant seat, using the markings made on the
subframe and chassis during removal as
reference.
Right-hand side
Fit and pre-tighten the indicated screws fastening

the rear subframe in the rear suspension

Pretightening torque for screw 15 Nm B
Left-hand side

the rear subframe in the rear suspension

Right-hand side

the rear subframe in the lateral front area.

Left-hand side

the rear subframe in the lateral front area.

Right-hand side
Apply a small quantity of AREXONS SYSTEM

to the screw threads.
Hand tighten the indicated screws fastening the rear
point extrusion.
Left-hand side

Hand tighten the indicated screws fastening the rear
point extrusion.
Right-hand side
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the rear


Screw 100 Nm A
Left-hand side


Screw 100 Nm A
Right-hand side

point extrusion.

Screw 30 Nm A
Left-hand side

point extrusion.

Screw 30 Nm A
CAUTION
Before removing the lift trolley, ensure that the screws are all correctly fastened.
Using the relevant lowering handle, slowly lower the trolley and remove from underneath the vehicle.
Right-hand side

casting area.

Screw 110 Nm A
Left-hand side

casting area.

Screw 110 Nm A

From underneath the vehicle, fit and tighten the four
indicated screws fastening the rear subframe in
the sill connector cross member area.

Screw 60 Nm A
Right-hand side
Tighten the upper screw indicated fastening the rear

casting area.

Screw 110 Nm A
Left-hand side
Tighten the upper screw indicated fastening the rear

casting area.

Screw 110 Nm A
Fit the cable (7) for releasing the engine

compartment lid from the passenger
compartment in its original position and fasten by
closing the clamp indicated by the red arrow.
Right-hand side
From the wheel bay tighten the screw indicated


Screw 20 Nm B
Left-hand side
From the wheel bay tighten the screw indicated


Screw 20 Nm B
Right-hand side


Screw 9 Nm C
Left-hand side


Screw 9 Nm C

subframe, located on the inner side of the two
rear radiators.

Screw 9 Nm C
On both side of the rear subframe, undo and

remove the spacers (AV 8255).
Once connected, the pipe connections must be

protected with a section of sheath fastened with
a new plastic clamp.
Remove the plastic plugs fitted previously on the
ends of the pipes.
Tighten the unions (74) for the brake fluid pipes

Union 16 Nm B
Connect the water pipe leading to the recirculation

pump and fasten by tightening the clamp (75).
Connect the brake servo vacuum system quick-
coupling (76).
Tighten the AC unions (78) and the power steering
system unions (77).

Union 16 Nm B
Union 27 Nm B
Union 40 Nm B
Union 20 Nm B
Fasten the pipe mounting brackets (80), tightening

the indicated screws.

Screws 9 Nm B
Connect the vent pipe leading from the radiator to

the header tank and fasten by tightening the
clamp (73).
Fit the coolant pipes (71) in the relative seats on the
pipe retainer pillory block (72).
Connect the coolant pipes (71) onto the ends of the
rigid pipes and tighten the indicated clamps.
Fasten the bracket (70) on the pipe retainer pillory
block (72), tightening the screws indicated by the
red arrows.

Screw 6 Nm B
Fit the structural connector plate (90).


Screw 8 Nm B
Fasten the clamps retaining the pipes as originally

fitted.
Fit the complete underbody pipe set (97).


90802)

ends of the pipes.
Tighten the union (93) on the AC pipe.

90802)

coupling (76).
Connect the quick coupling (77) on the power
Fit the indicated clamp.

ends of the pipes.

90802)

coupling (76).
Fit the indicated clamp.
Replace the relative seals and tighten the pipe

union (98), connecting the respective pipe.

Connect the water pipe and fasten by tightening the

clamp (71).
Connect the water pipe and fasten by tightening the

clamp (71).
Connect the power steering system pipe and fasten
by tightening the clamp (94).

the header tank and fasten by tightening the
clamp (73).
Tighten the unions (74) for the brake fluid pipes

Union 16 Nm B
Connect the water pipe to the rigid pipe and fasten


90802)
Connect the pipe and fasten with a new clamp (75).
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ vehicle front end _ for

Tighten the union (2A).

Union 16 Nm B
Fasten the pipe to the indicated clip.
Connect the quick coupling (75) on the water pipe

leading to the recirculation pump.
Tighten the union (74) on the brake fluid pipe

leading to the rear calliper.

Union 16 Nm B
Fasten the brake fluid pipe to the indicated clip.

the header tank with a new clamp (73).
Connect the water pipes and fasten by tightening
the clamps (71).
coupling (76).
Tighten the union (74) on the brake fluid pipe

leading to the rear calliper.

Union 16 Nm B

90802)
Connect the quick coupling (93) on the AC pipe.

Connect the power steering system pipe and fasten
Connect the quick coupling (77) on the power
Fasten the pipes to the relative clamps.
Close the indicated clamps.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90802 _ vehicle rear end _ for

Tighten the union (1A).

Union 16 Nm B
Remove the plugs on the tank inlets.

Direct the tank connector pipe (68) toward the
connectors, following the notes taken during the
disassembly operations.
Connect the quick-couplings (69) on the tank
connector pipe (68), connecting one end first
and then the other.
Fasten the two shield brackets (67) onto the rear
subframe, tightening the indicated screws.

Screw 24 Nm B
Fasten the mounting bracket (57), tightening the

indicated screw.

Screw 6 Nm B
Fasten the mounting bracket (57), tightening the

indicated screw.

Screw 6 Nm B
Close the clamp indicated by the red arrow.
Connect the left hand rear oxygen sensor connector

(58) and fasten the relevant wiring harness with
a new clamp as indicated.
Connect the right hand rear oxygen sensor

connector (59) and fasten the relevant wiring
harness with new clamps as indicated.
On the right hand rear suspension, tighten the

and fit a new cable tie, as indicated by the red
arrow.

Nut 6 Nm B
Connect the connector (61) on the EPB ECU.

Tighten the screw (63) fastening the ground cable
to the chassis.

Screw 18 Nm C
Tighten the screw (62) fastening the ground cables

to the chassis.

Screw 9 Nm C
Secure the wiring harnesses, fastening the

indicated clamps.
Connect the shock absorber connector (64) and

secure the cable (65), fastening the indicated
clamps.
Connect the connectors (66) and fasten the

indicated clamps.
Tighten the screw (19) fastening the ground cables

to the chassis and fasten the indicated clamps.

Screw 9 Nm C
Connect the shock absorber connector (18) and

secure the cable (17), fastening the indicated
clamps.
Fasten the indicated clamps and connect the

connectors (16).
On the left hand rear suspension, tighten the

and fit a new clamp, as indicated by the red
arrow.

Nut 6 Nm B
Connect the third stop light connector (14) and

secure the relevant cable, fastening the
indicated clamps.
Connect the two connectors (13) on the solenoid

valves and fasten the relevant cables with the
retainer clips on the rear subframe.
Fasten the right hand air duct (12), tightening the

indicated screws.

Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
Fasten the left hand air duct (10), tightening the

indicated screws.

Screw / Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the solenoid valve connector (11) on the

radiator.
Lay out the left hand injection cable as originally

Connect the connector (32) to the left hand
Motronic ECU.

indicated clamps, and connect the connector
(31) to the engine compartment cable junction.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the fuel

vapour separator mounting bracket (30) to the
chassis.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the front left hand oxygen sensor

connector (29) and fit the indicated clips.
indicated clamps.
Lay out the right hand injection cable as originally

Connect the front right hand oxygen sensor
connector (27) and fit the indicated clips.
Connect the connectors (26) to the ELDOR ECU.

Fasten the right hand injection cable (22) leading to
the ELDOR ECU, fitting the indicated clamps.
Connect the connector (24) to the right hand

Motronic ECU, and fasten the connector (25) to
the engine compartment cable junction.
indicated clamps.

indicated clamps.
Lift the cover (21) of the junction box and tighten the
Fit the cable retainer clamps (45) as originally
installed on the chassis.
Right-hand side
Fit the pipe (3) leading to the evaporative emissions

control solenoid valve onto the relative union,
tightening a new clamp as indicated.
Left-hand side
Fit the pipe (3) leading to the evaporative emissions

control solenoid valve onto the relative union,
tightening a new clamp as indicated.
Connect the pipe (4) connecting to the secondary
air pump and fasten by tightening a new clamp
as indicated.

filter.
Connect the pipes (3) onto the evaporative
emissions control system solenoid valves and
fasten by tightening new clamps as indicated.

indicated clamp.
Fit the cover (91).

filter.

indicated clamp.
Fit the cover (92).
Secure the emergency engine compartment lid

release cable (7), fastening the indicated clamps.
Fasten the fuel filler flap emergency release cable
(9) to the relative bracket, tightening the nut
Fit the right hand engine compartment lid lock cable

(7) and feed through relevant hole on the black
mounting.
Secure the cables (7) of the engine compartment lid
lock, by fitting the cable clamp (8) then fasten it
by tightening the indicated lock grub screw.
Secure the gearbox wiring harness (6) to the

chassis, fastening the indicated clip.
Connect the three gearbox wiring harness

connectors (5) and fasten to the relevant
mounting bracket.
If present, fit and fasten the shield (81), tightening

If present, fit and fasten the shield (82), tightening

FROM Ass.ly No. 90802. Refit the luggage compartment tub ( E4.07).
Refit the engine compartment lid lock ( E5.11).
Refit the expansion tank ( B6.02).
Engine compartment lid Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
E3.01 Engine compartment lid
Removing the engine compartment lid

Detach the connector (1) of the engine

compartment lid window defroster.
Release from the relevant seat the clamp indicated
fastening the connector cable (1).
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of the engine
compartment lid.
This operation requires at least two operators.
Detaching the relevant fastener clip, disconnect the

upper end of the right hand gas strut (A),
supporting the engine compartment lid (B), from
the relevant ball stud.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Detaching the relevant fastener clip, disconnect the

upper end of the left hand gas strut (A),
supporting the engine compartment lid (B), from
the relevant ball stud.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the engine

compartment lid (B) to the right hand hinge (C).
Recover the shim (D).
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the engine

compartment lid (B) to the left hand hinge (C).
Recover the shim (D).
Remove the engine compartment lid from the relevant seat.
Refitting the engine compartment lid
Fit the engine compartment lid in the relevant seat.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Fit the shim (D) in the relevant seat.

engine compartment lid (B) to the left hand hinge
(C).
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Fit the shim (D) in the relevant seat.

engine compartment lid (B) to the right hand
hinge (C).
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Installing the relevant fastener clip, fasten the upper

end of the left hand gas strut (A), supporting the
engine compartment lid (B), onto the relevant
ball stud.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Installing the relevant fastener clip, fasten the upper

end of the right hand gas strut (A), supporting
the engine compartment lid (B), onto the
relevant ball stud.
Fasten the clamp indicated fastening the connector

cable (1) in the relevant seat.
Connect the connector (1) of the engine
compartment lid window defroster.
Check that the engine compartment lid (A) opens

and closes correctly.
If the lid does not open and/or close correctly,
adjust the engine compartment lid (A) by
adjusting the fastener hinges.
Check that the entire perimeter of the engine

compartment lid (A) sits flush with the adjacent
bodywork.
If the lid does not sit flush with the adjacent
bodywork, adjust the engine compartment lid
(A) by adjusting the fastener hinges.

Refit the right hand engine compartment shield.
Removing the engine compartment lid grilles

Remove the grille (A), retrieving any shims from the
relative mounting brackets.
Note the positions and quantities of any shims
fitted
Refitting the engine compartment lid grilles

Fastening engine compartment lid grilles Screw 8 Nm C
Fit the grille (A), installing any shims necessary on

the relative mounting brackets.
Fit any shims necessary in the correct quantities
and positions noted during removal.

Screw 8 Nm C
Check that the grille (A) is correctly aligned with the

window and the bodywork.
If the alignment is not correct, undo the indicated

screws and add or remove the shims (1)
between the grille (A) and mounting bracket (B).
Add or remove only where necessary.
Replacing the engine compartment lid window
Protect all painted bodywork parts and the cabin to prevent damage when using cutting equipment and
when installing the new windscreen.
Remove the engine compartment lid grilles ( E3.01).

Cover the engine compartment with protective material.
The following tools are required to remove the

engine compartment lid glass:
One (Excalibur pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519
short blade) (A).
For cutting the sealant in the more easily
accessible locations and for removing excess
sealant on the bodyshell.
One (Excalibur 6 pneumatic cutter with Equaliser

Pat. 4955124 long blade) (B).
For cutting the sealant in deeper, less accessible
locations.
A thin metal plate (0.5 mm thick) (C).

To facilitate cutting and protect the bodywork from
the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).

To protect the operator's airways from airborne
fragments of material.
Safety eyewear is also recommended to protect

the eyes from flying splinters.

Remove the indicated clip.
Before cutting, always place the metal in front

of the pneumatic cutter blade, with the edge
of the plate resting against the bodywork to
protect the bodywork against the blade.
Ensure that there are no obstructions for the

metal plate, as it must be moved together
with the pneumatic cutter while cutting.
To cut the sealant along the bottom edge, place the

cutter blade (C) between the bodyshell and the
glass.
Using specific pneumatic cutter tools, cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the engine compartment
lid window, working from inside the engine compartment inner.
Using suction cup handles, remove the engine compartment lid window from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the assistance of another operator.
Apply strips of adhesive tape on the bodywork,

along the lower mating edge of the engine
compartment lid window.
Take care not to damage the bodywork;
Remove residual sealant with the (Excalibur

pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519 short blade) (A).
Clean the engine compartment lid window mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with
heptane to remove all traces of adhesive or dust.
Before preparing the glass for installation,

check there are no imperfections or
scratches on the surface or around the
perimeter.
Set the new glass panel carefully on a stable

surface so that it is not scratched or damaged.
Fix the defroster cable to the glass with a strip of
adhesive tape, as shown in the photo aside.
Degrease the perimeter of the glass with
BETACLEAN 3300 cod. 81636500 and leave to
dry.
Check the expiry date of the PRIMER to ensure
that it is suitable for use.
Shake the can well, continuing for 30 seconds
after the ball bearings inside the can itself
can be heard to move.
Protect newly applied primer from draughts

during work breaks. Never exceed the
drying time of 8 hours.
Apply BETAPRIMER 5500, green cap, code

81636600 to the entire perimeter of the glass
between the two dotted lines shown in the photo
aside and leave the product to dry for at least 5
minutes.
Degrease the mating surface of the glass on the

bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap,
code 81636700 and WypAll X60 _ Kimberly-
Clark high absorbency cloth.

Apply BETAPRIMER 5404 Red cap code

62864900 to the mating surface between the
glass and the bodyshell as indicated by the two
dotted lines, and leave the product to dry for at
least 10 minutes.
Apply adhesive primer in a uniform,

uninterrupted bead.
Using an extrusion gun fitted with a triangular

section nozzle, apply a continuous bead (4) of
BETASEAL 1703 code 64954900 over the
primer applied previously, starting from the mid
point of the bottom edge.
At the bottom and top edges of the glass, the
sealant must be applied inside the seals.
The end of the bead must overlap the beginning

by approximately 20-30 mm.
Check that there are no bubbles or interruptions in

the bead; if necessary, correct with additional
sealant.
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell must take place with no possibility of delay within 5 minutes
from the application of the adhesive tape.
Hold the engine compartment lid glass parallel to the mating surface and fit onto the bodyshell.
Press along the entire perimeter of the engine compartment lid window.
Check that the gap, along the whole length of the

indicated sections, between bodyshell and
engine compartment glass corresponds to the
values shown in the photo aside.
Apply a few strips (2) of adhesive fabric tape

SYROM 90, stretching out from the engine
compartment lid window to the vehicle roof.
Wait at least 3 hours, remove the adhesive tape
and remove any sealant residue from the
perimeter of the engine compartment lid window
with heptane.

Fasten the indicated clip.

Refit the engine compartment lid grilles ( E3.01).
Luggage compartment lid Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E3.02 Luggage compartment lid
Removing the luggage compartment lid
When the same luggage compartment lid is to be reused, mark the positions of the hinges on the lid itself to
facilitate adjustment.
Detach the pipe grommet (1) from the relative hole.

Pull out the pipe (2) from the relative hole until the
check valve is reached, then detach the pipe
from the valve.
CAUTION
Adequately support the weight of luggage
compartment lid.
Detaching the relative fastener clip, disconnect the

left hand gas strut (B), supporting the luggage
compartment lid (A), from the relative ball stud.
Undo the two indicated nuts fastening the luggage
compartment lid (A) to the left hand hinge (C).
Retrieve the relative washers, if present.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Detaching the relative fastener clip, disconnect the

right hand gas strut (B), supporting the luggage
compartment lid (A), from the relative ball stud.
Undo the two indicated nuts fastening the luggage
compartment lid (A) to the right hand hinge (C).
Retrieve the relative washers, if present.
Remove the luggage compartment lid from the relative seat.
Refitting the luggage compartment lid
Luggage compartment lid Page 2 of 2
When refitting the same luggage compartment lid removed previously, fit the lid onto the relative hinges on
the markings made during removal to facilitate subsequent adjustment.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Tighten the two indicated nuts fastening the

luggage compartment (A) to the right hand hinge
(C), after fitting the relative washers, if present.
Installing the relative fastener clip, fasten the right
hand gas strut (B), supporting the luggage
compartment lid (A), onto the relative ball stud.
CAUTION
compartment lid.
Tighten the two indicated nuts fastening the

luggage compartment (A) to the left hand hinge
(C), after fitting the relative washers, if present.
Installing the relative fastener clip, fasten the left
hand gas strut (B), supporting the luggage
compartment lid (A), onto the relative ball stud.
Connect the pipe (2) to the relative check valve,
then insert the valve together with the pipe in the
relative hole.
Fit the pipe grommet (1) in the relative hole.
Check that the luggage compartment lid (A) opens

and closes correctly.
If the lid does not open and/or close correctly,
adjust the luggage compartment lid (A) by
adjusting the fastener hinges.
Check that the entire perimeter of the luggage

compartment lid (A) sits flush with the adjacent
bodywork.
If the lid does not sit flush with the adjacent
bodywork, adjust the luggage compartment lid
(A) by adjusting the fastener hinges.
Front bumper Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
E3.03 Front bumper
Removing the front bumper


Remove front brakes air duct (A).

Remove front brakes air duct (A).
Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving screws and

washers.
Undo the indicated nuts, retrieving screws and

washers.
Loosen the indicated clip.

For vehicles featuring front parking sensors only

Remove the front bumper (B).
Refitting the front bumper

Screw 8 Nm C
Position front bumper (A).


Screw 8 Nm C
For vehicles featuring front parking sensors only
Loosen the indicated clip.

Connect pipe (1).
Tighten the indicated nuts, with screws and

washers.

Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated nuts, with screws and

washers.

Screw 7.5 Nm C

Screw 7.5 Nm C
Position front brakes air duct (A).


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Position front brakes air duct (A).


Screw 7.5 Nm C

Replacing the front impact absorber

Remove the impact absorber (A) and replace.
Fit the impact absorber (A).
Rear bumper Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
E3.04 Rear bumper
Removing the rear bumper

Remove the rear elements of the rear wheelhouses only.
Only for vehicles with parking camera

Undo the indicated lower right hand screw fastening

the rear bumper (A).
Undo the indicated lower left hand screw fastening

Undo the indicated lateral right hand screws

fastening the rear bumper (A).
Undo the indicated lateral left hand screws

Undo the indicated upper right hand screw

Undo the indicated upper left hand screw fastening

Remove the rear bumper from the relative seat, detaching the relative centre fastener clips.
Refitting the rear bumper

Screw 8 Nm C
Fit the rear bumper in the relevant seat, installing the relevant centre fastener clips.
Tighten the upper left hand screw indicated


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated upper right hand screw


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated lateral left hand screws


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated lateral right hand screws


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated lower left hand screw


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated lower right hand screw


Screw 7.5 Nm C
Only for vehicles with parking camera

Lay the cable correctly and apply a new cable tie in
the indicated position.

Replacing the rear impact absorbers
Centre impact absorber

Fit the impact absorber (A).
Lateral impact absorbers
Left

Fit the new impact absorber (A).
Right

Fit the new impact absorber (A).
Wheelhouse Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
E3.05 Wheelhouse
Removing the front wheelhouses
The complete wheelhouse consists of two elements which may be removed independently.
If it is necessary to remove both elements of the front wheelhouse, remove the front element first and then the
rear one, as the front element overlaps the rear element.
The following procedure is for removing the left hand front wheelhouse.
The procedure for removing the right hand front wheelhouse is the same.

Remove the front wheels only.
Front element
Undo the screws indicated fastening the front

element (A) of the front wheelhouse.
Remove the front element (A) of the front
wheelhouse from the relative seat.
Rear element

element (B) of the front wheelhouse.
Remove the rear element (B) of the front
Refitting the front wheelhouses

If it is necessary to refit both elements of the front wheelhouse, refit the rear element first and then the front one,
as the front element overlaps the rear element.
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand front wheelhouse.
The procedure for refitting the right hand front wheelhouse is the same.
Rear element
Fit the rear element (B) of the front wheelhouse in

the relative seat.
If the front element is already fitted, as the rear
element was removed individually, fit the rear
element (B) underneath the front element.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the rear

element (B) of the front wheelhouse.

Screw 3 Nm C
Front element
Fit the front element (A) of the front wheelhouse in

the relative seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the front
element (A) of the front wheelhouse.

Screw 3 Nm C
Removing the rear wheelhouses
The rear wheelhouse consists of two elements which may be removed independently.
If it is necessary to remove both elements of the rear wheelhouse, remove the rear element first and then the
front one, as the rear element overlaps the front element.

Remove the rear wheels only.
Rear element

element (A) of the rear wheelhouse
Remove the rear element (A) of the rear
Front element
For the front left hand element only


Carefully remove the breather duct (B).
Remove the clamp (1).

Disconnect and detach the breather pipe (C) from
the breather duct (B).
Remove the breather duct (B).

element (B) of the rear wheelhouse
Remove the front element (B) of the rear
Refitting the rear wheelhouses

Fastening breather duct and cover Screw 5 Nm A
If it is necessary to refit both elements of the rear wheelhouse, refit the front element first and then the rear one,
as the rear element overlaps the front element.
Front element
Check conformity of the heat shield fitted on the

inner side of the front section of the rear
wheelhouse.
If the heat shield is damaged and/or not
securely fastened, replace the front section
of the rear wheelhouse.
Fit the front element (B) of the rear wheelhouse in

the relative seat.
If the rear element is already fitted, as the front
element was removed individually, fit the front
element (B) underneath the rear element.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the front

element (B) of the rear wheelhouse

Screw 3 Nm C
For the front left hand section only
Fit a new clamp (1) on the breather pipe (C).

Connect and fasten the breather pipe (C) to the
breather duct (B), fitting correctly in the relative
bracket
Tighten the new clamp (1).
Carefully fit the breather duct (B).


Screw 5 Nm A
Fit the cover (A).


Screw 5 Nm A
Rear element
Fit the rear element (A) of the rear wheelhouse in

the relative seat.
element (A) of the rear wheelhouse

Screw 3 Nm C
Windscreen Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
E3.06 Windscreen
Replacing the windscreen

Remove the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Remove the trim from the windscreen cross member and A pillars.
Remove the interior rear view mirror ( E5.09).

Remove the rain/twilight sensor ( F2.12).
Cover the dashboard, centre console, mats and front seats with protective material.

windscreen glass:
short blade) (A).

locations.

the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).


Before cutting, always place the metal in front

of the pneumatic cutter blade, with the edge
of the plate resting against the bodywork to
protect the bodywork against the blade.
Ensure that there are no obstructions for the

metal plate, as it must be moved together
with the pneumatic cutter while cutting.
To cut the sealant along the right and left-hand

sides, place the metal plate (C) between the
bodyshell and the glass panel seal.
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the windscreen from inside
Using suction cup handles, remove the windscreen from its seat.
This operation must be carried out with the assistance of another operator.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork,

around the perimeter of the windscreen seat.
Remove residual sealant with the (Excalibur

pneumatic cutter with ESM - 519 short blade) (A).
Clean the windscreen mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with heptane to remove
all traces of adhesive or dust.
Degrease the perimeter on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and WypAll
X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
If necessary, replace the two alignment blocks (1),

fitting the new parts in the original positions.
Before preparing the glass for installation, check there are no imperfections or scratches on the surface
or around the perimeter.
Set the glass panel carefully on a stable surface so that it is not scratched or damaged.
Degrease the perimeter of the glass with BETACLEAN 3300 cod. 81636500 and leave to dry.



81636600 to the entire perimeter of the glass
between the two dotted lines in the figure and
leave the product to dry for at least 5 minutes.
The inner dotted line at the top and side of the
glass overlaps the solid screen-printed area by
approximately 10 mm.
Apply adhesive primer in a uniform,

uninterrupted bead.
Using an extrusion gun fitted with a triangular

section nozzle, apply a continuous bead (3) of
BETASEAL 1812 code 67306000, starting from
the mid point of the bottom side.
The end of the bead must overlap the beginning
by approximately 20-30 mm.

sealant.
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell must take place with no possibility of delay within 5 minutes
from the application of the adhesive tape.
Hold the windscreen parallel to the mating surface and fit onto the bodyshell.
Press along the entire perimeter of the windscreen and bring the lower edge against the alignment blocks
fitted previously.
Check that the gaps between the A pillars and the windscreen are uniform.
Apply a few strips of adhesive fabric tape SYROM 90, starting from the windscreen and fixing to the pillar and
roof.
Wait at least 3 hours, remove the adhesive tape and remove any sealant residue from the perimeter of the
windscreen with heptane.
Refit the rain/twilight sensor ( F2.12).

Refit the interior rear view mirror ( E5.09).
Refit the roof trim panels ( E4.04).
Refit the underwindscreen shields ( E4.07).
Quarterlights Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
E3.07 Quarterlights
Replacing the quarterlights

Fastening quarterlight Screw 5 Nm B
The quarterlights are supplied as spare parts complete with perimeter seal, which must not be separated from
the glass.

Remove the lateral trim panels.

Remove the upper and lateral rear screen trim panels.
Detach the door perimeter seal in the area near the quarterlight.

quarterlight:
short blade) (A).

locations.

the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).


Working from inside the passenger compartment,

undo the indicated screws fastening the
quarterlight (E).
Remove the tape (1).
Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the quarterlight from inside
Using suction cup handles, remove the quarterlight from its seat.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork, around the perimeter of the quarterlight seat.
Use the specific pneumatic cutter to remove any residual sealant.

Clean the quarterlight mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with heptane to remove
Degrease the perimeter on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and WypAll
X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
Before preparing the glass for installation,

check there are no imperfections or
scratches on the surface or around the
perimeter.
Make triangular notches in the recesses (2) on the

new quarterlight seal as indicated in the photo
aside.
Apply Vaseline grease with a brush on the
indicated recesses and over the entire seal (2).
Apply a continuous triangular section bead (3) of

biSil.
Dimensions of triangular cross section bead:
height 12 mm, width 7 mm.

sealant.
Taking care not to touch the bead of sealant, fit the
quarterlight onto the bodyshell, fitting the upper
edge of the quarterlight onto the indicated pins
on the gutter moulding and onto the indicated
rear pin.
Working from inside the passenger compartment,

tighten the indicated screws with relative
washers fastening the quarterlight (E).

Screw 5 Nm B
Remove any excess sealant with WypAll X60 _

Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth
moistened with heptane.
Apply a strip of tape (1) in the original position.
Apply a continuous bead (4) of biSil.

sealant.
Remove any excess sealant with WypAll X60 _
Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth
moistened with heptane.
Leave to set for a few hours.
Refit the section of door perimeter seal near the quarterlight detached previously.
Doors Page 1 of 37
Print Exit
E3.08 Doors
Removing the complete door

Undo the screw (2).
Remove the complete door (A).
Refitting the complete door

Fastening doors Screw 18 Nm B
Screw 23 Nm B
Doors Page 2 of 37
Fit complete door (A).


Screw 18 Nm B

Screw 23 Nm B
Checking and adjusting door closure

Fastening door striker plates Screw 23 Nm B
The door striker plate must be checked and adjusted with the door window completely raised.
Visually check that the door is flush with the rear

fender.
If the door does not close flush with the fender,
adjust the door striker plate as follows.
Doors Page 3 of 37
Open the door.

Loosen the two screws indicated fastening the
striker plate (A) to the bodyshell.
Adjust the striker plate (A) into the correct position.
Check that the door opens and closes without
sticking.
Tighten the two screws fastening the door striker
plate (A) to 80% of the rated tightening torque.

Screw 23 Nm B
Close the door.

Visually check that the door is flush with the rear
fender.
If the door does not close flush with the fender,
repeat the door striker plate adjustment as
described previously.
Tighten the two screws fastening the door striker

plate (A) to 100% of the rated tightening torque.

Screw 23 Nm B
Removing the door panel
Doors Page 4 of 37
Only passenger side door panel
Detach and remove the cover (A).

Remove the handle (B).

Detach the door opening handle (C).
Doors Page 5 of 37

Release the Bowden cable (2).
Remove the door opening handle (C).

Detach and remove the cover (D).
Carefully prise off and remove the cover (E).
Doors Page 6 of 37

Detach and remove the door panel (F),
disconnecting the airbag connector and the
cabin light connector.
FROM Ass.ly No. 92282, for vehicles with carbon

fibre door panels only
Refitting the door panel

Fastening door panel Screw 4 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 9 Nm C
Screw 8 Nm B
Doors Page 7 of 37

Connecting the airbag connector and the cabin light

connector, place the door panel (F) and press by
hand until it clicks audibly into place.
Check that the door panel (F) and the window
scraper seal are correctly aligned.
Tighten the upper screws indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B
Tighten the lower screws indicated.

Screw 4 Nm B
Doors Page 8 of 37
Carefully fit and install the cover (E).
Place the cover (D) and press by hand until it clicks

audibly into place.

Screw 5 Nm B
Attach the Bowden cable (2).

Place the door opening handle (C).
Doors Page 9 of 37
Fit the door opening handle (C).


Screw 5 Nm B
Place the handle (B).


Screw 9 Nm C
Position the cover (A) and press by hand until it

clicks audibly into place.

Perform the airbag ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Doors Page 10 of 37
Removing the external body of the external door handle
Pull the external body (A) of the external door

handle outwards.
Pull the seal (B) for the external body (A) of the
external door handle out of the relative seat.
Undo the screw (1) fastening the external body (A)

of the external door handle to the inner body.
Remove the external body (A) of the external door
handle from the relative seat.
Refitting the external body of the external door handle

Fastening external body of external door handle Screw 3.5 Nm B
Doors Page 11 of 37
Fit the external body (A) of the external door handle

Tighten the screw (1) fastening the external body
(A) of the external door handle to the inner body.

Screw 3.5 Nm B
Push the seal (B) for the external body (A) of the
external door handle into the relative seat.
Replacing the internal body of the external door handle

Fastening internal body of external door handle Nut 2 Nm B
Lift the door window completely with the relative control.

Remove the door panel ( E3.08).
Remove the external body of the external door handle ( E3.08).
Doors Page 12 of 37

Detach the Bowden cable (2) from the lock.
Detach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden
cable (2) to the door subframe.
Undo the four nuts indicated fastening the internal
body (A) of the external door handle.
Remove the internal body (A) of the outer door
handle, retrieving the relative shim (3).
Replace the internal body (A) of the external door
handle.
Fit the new internal body (A) of the outer door
handle, installing the relative shim (3).
Tighten the four nuts indicated fastening the internal
body (A) of the external door handle.

Nut 2 Nm B
Attach the indicated clips fastening the Bowden

cable (2) to the door subframe.
Attach the Bowden cable (2) to the lock.
If necessary, apply grease Z2 PROTECTION to the
Bowden cable spring (2).
Connect and fasten the connector (1).
Refit the external body of the external door handle ( E3.08).
Check that the distance between the external body

(C) of the external door handle and the external
surface of the door subframe is 3 ± 0.5 mm.
If the distance is incorrect, loosen the four nuts
fastening the internal body of the external door
handle and add or remove an appropriate shim
to achieve the correct distance.
Refit the door panel ( E3.08).

Replacing driver side door latch
Doors Page 13 of 37

Fastening driver side door latch Nut 2 Nm B
Our Spare Parts Service Dept. supplies a complete lock kit, therefore, when replacing the door lock
control block, all the locks on the vehicle must be replaced.
Lift the door window completely with the relative control.


Detach the lever (2) from the latch (A).
Detach the lever (2) from the door lock.
Remove the latch (A) and replace.
Fit the new latch (A).
Attach the pin (2) to the door lock.
Attach the lever (2) to the latch (A).

Nut 2 Nm B
Doors Page 14 of 37

Removing the internal door window scraper seal
Detach the lower part of the internal window scraper

seal (A), removing from the relative fastener
pegs.
Detach the upper part of the internal door window
scraper seal (A) and remove completely from the
relative seat on the door subframe.
Refitting the internal door window scraper seal

Fastening internal door window scraper seal Screw 2 Nm B
Doors Page 15 of 37
Fit the internal window scraper seal (A) in the

relative seat on the door subframe and insert the
upper part.

Screw 2 Nm B
Install the lower part of the internal window scraper

seal (A), fitting onto the relative fastener pegs.
Remove the internal door window scraper seal ( E3.08).
Removing the door window

Replace the woofer loudspeakers ( E5.14).
Remove the woofer.
Remove the waterproof line sheet (1).

Lower or raise the door window to allow access to the relative fastener screws.
Doors Page 16 of 37
Working with due caution, remove the door window

(A) by easing out from the upper slit in the door
frame, and set down on a soft surface.
Retrieve the tab (B) from the door window (A).
Refitting the door window
Doors Page 17 of 37

Fit the tab (B) on the rear hole on the door window
(A).
Working with due caution, insert the door window
(A) through the upper slit in the door frame and
fit onto the relative mounting shoes.

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 18 of 37

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Fit a new waterproof liner sheet (1).
Adjust the door window ( E3.08).

Replace the woofer loudspeakers ( E5.14).
Refit the woofer.
Refit the internal door window scraper seal ( E3.08).

Adjusting the door window


Doors Page 19 of 37
Intrusion into upper seal
With the door closed and the door window

completely raised, use a white pencil to trace a
line on the window (A) as indicated by the dotted
line in the image.
Check that the door window (A) intrudes into the

upper seal (B) by at least 4 mm.
If this measurement is incorrect, adjust as follows.
Loosen the screw (1).
Doors Page 20 of 37
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct intrusion into the seal.

Screw 9.5 Nm B

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 21 of 37
Intrusion into mirror triangle seal
With the door open and the door window completely

raised, block the lock (C) with a suitable
screwdriver.
Check that the door window (A) intrudes into the

door mirror triangle (B) by at least 3 mm.
Doors Page 22 of 37
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct intrusion into the seal.

Screw 9.5 Nm B

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 23 of 37
Perpendicularity relative to lateral seal of rear quarterlight
With the door closed and the door window

completely raised, check the perpendicularity of
the door window (A) relative to the lateral seal
(E) of the quarterlight.
The door window (A) must be spaced 6.5 ± 1 mm

longitudinally and 1.5 ± 1 mm laterally from the
lateral seal (E) of the rear quarterlight.
If these measurements are incorrect, adjust as
follows.
Doors Page 24 of 37
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct degree of perpendicularity.

Screw 9.5 Nm B

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 25 of 37
Preload
With the window completely raised, partially close

the door until the door window touches the upper
seal.
Check that the distance between the edge of the
door and the edge of the rear fender is 12.5 ±
2.5 mm.
Prise out and remove the plug (3).
Loosen the nut (4).
Doors Page 26 of 37
Loosen the nut (6).
Adjust the door window to achieve the correct preload value.

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 27 of 37
Fit the cap (5).

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fit the cap (3).
Carry out test for water and air infiltration via door window ( E3.08).
Doors Page 28 of 37
Check for water or air infiltration via the door window
Place the Ultrasonic multi-trasmitter STD 8 on

the centre console in the passenger
compartment.
Check that the door windows are completely closed.
Holding the Detector STD 170 in contact with the
exterior of the vehicle, move the detector around
the entire perimeter between the door window
and the door perimeter seal.
The Ultrasonic multi-trasmitter Type STD 8
emits a signal of 20 - 50 dB. If the seal integrity
is insufficient, the sonar emits an audible signal
of > 50 dB.
In the event of insufficient seal integrity
Adjust the door window ( E3.08).
Carry out the water infiltration test.
Replacing the external door window scraper seal

Fastening external door window scraper seal Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening the door triangle trim Screw 9.5 Nm B
Remove the door window ( E3.08).

Remove the upper part only.
Doors Page 29 of 37
Detach the front part of the external window scraper

seal (A).
Remove the door triangle trim (B).

Starting from the rear end, carefully detach and
remove the external window scraper seal (A).
Replace the external window scraper seal (A).
Starting from the front end, fit and install the
external window scraper seal (A).
Check that the profile of the external window
scraper seal (A) is straight.

Screw 4 Nm B
Doors Page 30 of 37
Fit the door triangle trim (B).

Screw 9.5 Nm B
Install the front part of the external window scraper

seal (A).
Refit the internal door window scraper seal ( E3.08).

Refit the door window ( E3.08).
Replacing the power window unit

Fastening armrest bracket Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening the door node Screw 5.5 Nm B
Fastening hyperfrequency volumetric sensors Screw 3.5 Nm B
Remove the door window ( E3.08).

Doors Page 31 of 37

Undo the screws fastening the hyperfrequency
sensor (A).
Remove the hyperfrequency sensor (A).
Undo the screws fastening the mounting brackets
for the door node (B), without disconnecting the
relative connectors.
Remove the door node (B).
Undo the nuts fastening the bracket (C).
Remove bracket (C).
Detach and remove the waterproof liner sheet (D).
Undo the nut (3).
Doors Page 32 of 37
Undo the nut (5).
Undo the nut (6).
Doors Page 33 of 37
Undo the nut (7).

Detach the indicated clip.
Carefully remove the power window unit from the relative seat, removing first the rear guide and then the
motor and the front guide from the relative recess.
Doors Page 34 of 37
Replace the power window unit, installing the new

power window unit correctly as shown in the
image aside.
Apply an even layer of Z2 PROTECTION grease on
the pulleys and guides of the new power window
unit.
Carefully fit the new power window unit in the relative seat, fitting first the front guide and then the motor and
the rear guide in the relative recess.


Nut 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 35 of 37

Nut 9.5 Nm B

Nut 9.5 Nm B

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Doors Page 36 of 37
Fit the cap (4).

Nut 9.5 Nm B
Fit the cap (2).
Doors Page 37 of 37
Fit the waterproof liner sheet (D) and glue into place.
Position bracket (C).
Tighten the nuts fastening the bracket (C).

Nut 9 Nm B
Fit the door node (B).

Tighten the screws fastening the mounting brackets
for the door node (B).

Screw 5.5 Nm B
Fit the hyperfrequency sensor (A).

Tighten the screws fastening the hyperfrequency
sensor (A).

Screw 3.5 Nm B
Refit the door window ( E3.08).
Windscreen wiper Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
E3.09 Windscreen wiper
Replacing the windscreen wiper blades
Lift the lever (1) fastening the windscreen wiper

blade.
Remove the wiper blade (A), pressing in the
direction indicated to release it from the
windscreen wiper arm (B).
Lift the windscreen wiper arm (B) slightly to
facilitate removal of the windscreen wiper blade.
Replace the windscreen wiper blade (A).
Fit the new windscreen wiper blade (A) onto the

windscreen wiper arm (B), pressing in the
direction indicated.
Lift the windscreen wiper arm (B) slightly to
facilitate installation of the windscreen wiper
blade.
Lower the lever (1) fastening the windscreen wiper

blade (A).
Removing the windscreen wiper arms
Mark the position of the blades on the windscreen to ensure that the arms are installed in the correct positions
during reassembly.
Passenger side arm
Undo the nut (2) fastening the windscreen wiper

arm (A) to the relative linkage.
Remove the windscreen wiper arm (A) from the
relative seat.
Driver side arm
Undo the nut (2) and screw indicated fastening the

windscreen wiper arm (A) to the relative linkage.
Remove the windscreen wiper arm (A) from the
relative seat.
Refitting the windscreen wiper arms

Fastening windscreen wiper arms Nut 25 Nm B
Passenger side arm
Fit the windscreen wiper arm (A) in the relative

seat, using the marking indicating the wiper
blade position made on the windscreen during
removal as reference.
Tighten the nut (2) fastening the windscreen wiper
arm (A) to the relative linkage.

Nut 25 Nm B
Fit the cap (1).
Driver side arm
Fit the windscreen wiper arm (A) in the relative

seat, using the marking indicating the wiper
blade position made on the windscreen during
removal as reference.
Tighten the nut (2) and screw indicated fastening
the windscreen wiper arm (A) to the relative
linkage.

Nut 25 Nm B
Fit the cap (1).
Removing the windscreen wiper linkage

Remove the left hand underwindscreen shield only.

Undo the three screws indicated fastening the
windscreen wiper linkage (A) to the chassis.
Remove the windscreen wiper linkage (A),
complete with motor, from the relative seat.
Refitting the windscreen wiper linkage

Fastening windscreen wiper linkage Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the windscreen wiper linkage (A), complete with

motor, in the relative seat.
linkage (A) to the chassis.

Screw 8 Nm B

Windscreen washer and headlight washer Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
E3.10 Windscreen washer and headlight washer
Headlight washer system layout
A - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank

B - Headlight washer pipes
C - Headlight washer spray nozzles
Windscreen washer system layout
A - Windscreen washer/headlight washer fluid tank

B - Windscreen washer pipes
C - Windscreen washer spray nozzles
D - Check valve
Removing windscreen and headlight washer fluid reservoir

Remove the luggage compartment lid lock ( E5.11).
Loosen the indicated clamps and remove the hose

union (1).
Open the clip (2).
Loosen the indicated clamps and remove the hose

union (1).
Open the clip (2).

clamp.
Remove the rigid pipe (7) from the luggage
compartment.

Disconnect the pipe (5) from the relative union.

Detach the wiring harness by releasing the
indicated clips.
Undo the screws indicated by the red arrows.
Remove the windscreen and headlight washer fluid
reservoir (A).
Refitting windscreen and headlight washer fluid reservoir

Fastening windscreen and headlight washer fluid Screw 5 Nm B
reservoir
Fit the windscreen and headlight washer fluid

reservoir (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the screws indicated by the red arrows.

Screw 5 Nm B

Secure the wiring harness by fastening the
indicated clips.

Connect the pipe (5) to the relevant union.
Fit the rigid pipe (7) in the relevant seat.

Connect the pipe (6) and tighten the indicated
clamp.
Close the clip (2).

Fit the union (1) on the pipes.
Close the clip (2).

Fit the union (1) on the pipes.
Refit the luggage compartment lid lock ( E5.11).

Door perimeter trim panels Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
E3.11 Door perimeter trim panels
Removing the door perimeter seals
Upper seal
Delicately detach the upper seal (A) and remove.
Lower seal
Delicately detach the ends of the upper seal (A).

Delicately detach the lower seal (B) and remove.
Refitting the door perimeter seals
Upper seal
Manually fit and install the upper seal (A).

Do NOT tap seal perpendicularly to the relative
fastener tab in order not to damage it.
Using a suitable tool and working in a progressive

manner, press the upper seal correctly into its
relative seat (A), taking care not to nick or scuff
the seal itself.
Lower seal
Manually fit and install the lower seal (B).


manner, press the lower seal correctly into its
relative seat (B), taking care not to nick or scuff
the seal itself.
Manually install the ends of the upper seal (A).

manner, press the upper seal correctly into its
relative seat (A), taking care not to nick or scuff
the seal itself.
Removing the kickplate
Using a suitable tool, detach and remove the

kickplate (A).
Refitting the kickplate
If necessary, remove the old strips (1) of dual sided

adhesive tape.
Ensure that the inner surface of the kickplate (A) is
clean. If necessary, clean with a degreasing
product.
Apply new strips of dual sided adhesive tape (1) in
the original positions.
Ensure that the surface of the seat for the kickplate

(A) is clean. If necessary, clean with a
degreasing product.
Fit the kickplate (A) correctly in the relative seat,
pressing over its entire outer surface to fix
evenly.
Removing the door sill trim panel
Remove the kickplate ( E3.11).

Remove the front element of the rear wheelhouse.

Remove the rear element of the front wheelhouse.
Undo the front screw indicated fastening the door

sill trim panel (A).
Undo the upper screws indicated fastening the door

Undo the rear screw fastening the door sill trim

panel (A).
Undo the lower screws indicated fastening the door

Remove the door sill trim panel (A) from the relative
seat.
Refitting the door sill trim panel

Fastening sill trim Screw 4.5 Nm B
Screw 7.5 Nm B
Fit the door sill trim panel (A) in the relative seat.
door sill trim panel (A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the rear screw fastening the door sill trim

panel (A).

Screw 4.5 Nm B

door sill trim panel (A).

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Tighten the front screw indicated fastening the door


Screw 4.5 Nm B

Refit the rear element of the front wheelhouse.

Refit the front element of the rear wheelhouse.
Refit the kickplate ( E3.11).
Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting Page 1 of 27
Print Exit
E3.12 Flat undertray sections and vehicle lifting
Lifting the vehicle
CAUTION
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
Two post vehicle lift
Fit the two front bushings (A) in the position

indicated.
Fit the two rear bushes (B) in the positions

indicated, in the relative recesses in the rear flat
undertray section.
Lift the vehicle.
Runway type vehicle lift
Fit the front pads (A) in the position indicated.
Fit the rear bushes (B) in the positions indicated, in

the relative recesses in the rear flat undertray
section.
To prevent damage to the rear flat undertray
section, cylindrical bushes that fit into specific
recesses in the rear flat undertray section itself
must be used
Lift the vehicle.
Lifting the vehicle with anti-tipping safety retainers
CAUTION
CAUTION
Failure to observe the operations below may pose a serious risk to the persons working or standing in the
vicinity of the vehicle.
The following procedure is for fitting the brackets (AV 8251), fitting the vehicle anti-tipping safety retainers
(AV 8183) to a two post vehicle lift and fitting the brackets (AV 8184) to a runway type car lift, and
subsequently lifting the vehicle.
The anti-tipping safety retainers must always be used when removing the engine, gearbox and the rear
subframe.
Place the pads (A) in the positions indicated.
Lift the vehicle.
Fit the brackets (AV 8251) in the relative seats.

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the brackets
(AV 8251) to the subframe.
Lower the vehicle to the ground.
Remove the rear pads (A) on the vehicle lift.
Hold the anti-tipping safety retainers (AV 8183).
Fit the spacers (1) for preventing the vehicle lift

arms from coming into contact with the sill trim
panel during manoeuvring in the holes
previously used for the rubber blocks.
The spacers (1) are supplied in different sizes.
Fit the sleeves (2) on the shims (1).

Fit the washers (3) on the sleeves (2).
Fit the eccentric pins (4) on the sleeves (2),
inserting in the relative holes.
Fit the ring nuts (5) under the vehicle lift arms over
the centres of the holes previously used for the
rubber blocks, tightening to the bushings (2).
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5), hand
tighten the sleeves (2).
Tighten the bushings (6) to the eccentric pins (4).
Tighten the positioning levers (7) into the relative
holes on the bushings (6), which must be aligned
with the groove on the eccentric pins (4).
Holding the positioning levers to prevent them from

turning (7), tighten the nuts (8).
Partially tighten the screws (9) fastening the
positioning levers (7) onto the bushings (6).
Holding the sleeves (2) to prevent them from
turning, rotate and unscrew the ring nuts (5),
together with the positioning levers (7), until the
head of the eccentric pins (4) protrudes in the
correct position for attaching to the vehicle.
Note that the rear right hand fastener slot is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle,
the front right hand fastener slot is
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle, the rear left hand fastener slot is
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the
vehicle and the front left hand fastener slot is
parallel to the longitudinal axis of the vehicle.

Turn the positioning levers (7) until the eccentric pin

head (4) retracts into the correct position to allow
the insertion of the anti-tipping safety retainers
into the relative fastener slots.
Completely tighten the screws (9) fastening the
positioning levers (7).
Lower the arms of the car lift completely, ensuring
that the anti-tipping safety retainers do not touch
the floor, as this may damage them.
Position a hydraulic jack under the rear gearbox

mounting cross member, installing a pad (B)
between the jack and the cross member.
Lift the rear of the vehicle with the jack until it is

possible to increase the height of the front pads
(A) on the vehicle lift or place an additional pad
(C) on top of the front pads (A) of the vehicle lift.
The total height of the front pads (A) of the vehicle
lift, measuring it from the lift arm to the pad top
surface, must be 145 mm.
Moving the rear vehicle lift arms (AV 8183)

manually align the anti-tipping safety retainers
(AV 8251)with the relative fastener brackets on
the vehicle to ensure correct engagement when
lifting.
Ensuring that the anti-tipping safety retainers are
correctly aligned with the respective fastener
brackets, carefully lower the rear of the vehicle
with the hydraulic jack until the anti-tipping safety
retainers engage with the respective fastener
brackets.
Loosen the screws (9) fastening the positioning
levers (7).
Turn the positioning levers (7) by 180°.
Unscrew and remove the positioning levers (7).
Tighten the screws (9) fastening the positioning
levers (7).
Lift the vehicle lift arms until the car is the desired
height from the ground.
Place two pads (A), stacked one on top of the other,

at the front vehicle lift points.
Remove the safety extensions (B) from the car lift

runways.
Place two pads (C), stacked one on top of the other,
at the rear vehicle lift points on the safety
extensions (B).
The pads (C) must be the same size as the pads
placed previously at the front vehicle lift points.
Lift the vehicle.
Fit the brackets (AV 8251) in the relative seats.


mounting cross member, installing a pad (D)
Raise the rear of the vehicle with the hydraulic jack

until it is possible to add a pad (E) on top of the
pads (A) placed previously at the front vehicle lift
points.
The total height of the pads installed at the front
vehicle lift point must be 180 mm.
Fit the upper plates (1) of the brackets (AV 8184)

fastening the anti-tipping safety retainers
(AV 8183) over the safety extensions on the car
lift runways.
Fit the lower plates (2) of the brackets fastening the
anti-tipping safety retainers on the safety
extensions under the car lift runways.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the upper (1)
and lower plates (2) to the safety extensions on
the car lift runways.
Loosen the screws fastening the positioning levers.
Holding the sleeves (4) to prevent them from
turning, rotate and unscrew the ring nuts (5),
together with the positioning levers, until the
head of the eccentric pin (7) protrudes in the
correct position for attaching to the vehicle.
Turn the positioning levers until the eccentric pin
head (7) retracts into the correct position to allow
the insertion of the anti-tipping safety retainers
into the relative fastener brackets.
Tighten the screws fastening the positioning levers.
Visually check that the eccentric pins (7) and
brackets fastening the anti-tipping safety
retainers to the safety extensions on the vehicle
lift runways are positioned correctly, to ensure
correct insertion of the anti-tipping safety
retainers into the relative brackets (AV 8251) for
attaching to the vehicle.
Proceeding with due care and ensuring that the anti-

tipping safety retainers (AV 8183) are correctly
aligned with the respective brackets (AV 8251)
for fastening to the vehicle, lower the rear of the
vehicle with the hydraulic jack until the anti-
tipping safety retainers engage with the
respective fastener brackets.
Remove the pads (C) from the safety extensions on
the vehicle lift runways.
Lift the vehicle slightly off the ground and check that
it is stable.
levers (6).
Unscrew and remove the positioning levers (6).
levers (6).
Raise the vehicle lift runways until the car is the
desired height from the ground.
Lowering the vehicle with anti-tipping safety retainers
The following procedure is for lowering the vehicle, removing the brackets (AV 8251), removing the vehicle anti-
tipping safety retainers (AV 8183) from a two post vehicle lift and removing the anti-tipping safety retainer
fastener brackets (AV 8184) from a runway type car lift.
Lower the vehicle lift arms until the car is the

levers (7).
Tighten the positioning levers (7).
levers (7).

mounting cross member, installing a pad (B)
Proceeding with due care and ensuring that the anti-

tipping safety retainers withdraw correctly and
without impediment from the respective brackets
for attaching to the vehicle, raise the rear of the
vehicle with the hydraulic jack until it is possible
to reduce the height of the front pads (A) on the
vehicle lift or remove the pad (C) from the front
pads (A) on the vehicle lift.
Remove the vehicle lift arms from underneath the vehicle and lower the hydraulic jack positioned under the
lower gearbox mounting cross member.
Undo and remove the screws (9) fastening the

positioning levers (7) onto the bushings (6).
Holding the positioning levers to prevent them from
turning (7), undo the nuts (8).
Unscrew the positioning levers (7) from the
bushings (6).
Undo the bushings (6) from the eccentric pins (4).
Remove the eccentric pins (4) from the relative
seats.
Preventing the ring nuts from turning (5), manually
unscrew the sleeves (2) and remove both
components, together with relative shims, from
the car lift arms.
Refit the rear pads (A) on the vehicle lift.
Lift the vehicle.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the brackets

Remove the brackets (AV 8251) from the relative
seats.
Lower the vehicle lift runways until the car is the

Place the pads (C) at the rear vehicle lift points on
the runway safety extensions.
levers (6).
Tighten the positioning levers (6).
Visually check that the eccentric pins (7) are
positioned correctly to ensure that the anti-
tipping safety retainers (AV 8183) withdraw
correctly from the relative brackets (AV 8251) for
attaching to the vehicle
levers (6).

mounting cross member, installing a pad (D)
Raise the rear of the vehicle with the hydraulic jack

carefully to ensure that no resistance is
encountered, until the anti-tipping safety
retainers (AV 8183) withdraw from the relative
brackets (AV 8251) for attaching to the vehicle.
plates (1) and lower plates (2) of the brackets
(AV 8184) fastening anti-tipping safety retainers.
Remove the lower plates (2) fastening the anti-
tipping safety retainers from the safety
extensions on the car lift runways.
Remove the upper plates (1) fastening the anti-
tipping safety retainers from the safety
extensions on the car lift runways.
Remove the pad (E) from the pads (A) placed

previously at the front lift points, then lower the
rear of the vehicle.
Lift the vehicle.

Remove the brackets (AV 8251) from the relative
seats.
From the safety extensions (B) remove the two

pads (C) from the rear vehicle lift points.
Fit the runway safety extensions (B).
Remove the two pads (A) from the front vehicle lift
points.
Removing the front flat undertray section
The front flat undertray section consists of a right hand element and a left hand element.
Lift the vehicle ( E3.12).
Right hand element
Undo the screws indicated fastening the right hand

element (A) of the front flat undertray section.
Remove the right hand element (A) of the front flat
undertray section from the relative seat.
Left hand element
Undo the screws indicated fastening the left hand

Remove the left hand element (A) of the front flat
undertray section from the relative seat.
Refitting the front flat undertray section

The front flat undertray section consists of a right hand element and a left hand element.
Right hand element
Inserting the battery breather pipe (1) correctly in

the relative hole, fit the right hand element (A) of
the front flat undertray section in the relative seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the right
hand element (A) of the front flat undertray
section.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Left hand element
Fit the left hand element (A) of the front flat

undertray section in the relative seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the left hand

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Removing the rear diffuser

diffuser (A).
Remove the rear diffuser (A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the rear diffuser

Fit the rear diffuser (A) in the relative seat.

diffuser (A).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Removing the central flat undertray section
The central flat undertray section consists of a front element and a rear element.
Front element

element (A) of the central flat undertray section.
Ease out and remove the front element (A) of the
central flat undertray section from the relative
seat.
Rear element

Ease out and remove the rear element (A) of the
central flat undertray section from the relative
seat.
Refitting the central flat undertray section

Front element
Inserting the air conditioner condensate drain pipe

(1) correctly in the relative hole, fit the front
element (A) of the central flat undertray section

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Rear element
Fit the rear element (A) of the central flat undertray

section in the relative seat.
Removing the rear flat undertray section
Undo the screws indicated fastening the rear flat

undertray section (A).
Remove the rear flat undertray section (A) from the
relative seat.
Undo the four indicated screws fastening the right

hand duct (B) onto the rear flat undertray section
(A).
Undo the four indicated screws fastening the left

(A).
Remove the right hand duct (B) from the relative

seat.
Remove the left hand duct (B) from the relative seat.
Lower the vehicle sufficiently in order to be able to

place a pad approximately 80 mm high under
the centre of the rear flat undertray section (A).
Lower the vehicle until it rests on the ground.
Remove the lift pad of the right hand arm of the

vehicle lift from the relative hole in the rear flat
Remove the lift pad of the left hand arm of the

vehicle lift from the relative hole in the rear flat
Place the lift pad of the right hand arm of the vehicle
lift correctly under the relative lift point.
Place the lift pad of the left hand arm of the vehicle
lift correctly under the relative lift point.
Lift the vehicle sufficiently in order to be able to remove the rear flat undertray section.
Refitting the rear flat undertray section
Lift the vehicle sufficiently in order to be able to fit

the rear flat undertray section (A), positioned
correctly, under the rear of the vehicle.
Fit a pad approximately 80 mm high under the
centre of the rear flat undertray section (A).
Lower the vehicle until it rests on the ground.
Inserting through the relative hole in the rear flat

undertray section (A), position the lift pad of the
left hand rear arm of the vehicle lift correctly
against the relative lift point.
Inserting through the relative hole in the rear flat

undertray section (A), position the lift pad of the
right hand rear arm of the vehicle lift correctly
against the relative lift point.
Lift the vehicle.
Fit the left hand duct (B) in the relative seat.
Fit the right hand duct (B) in the relative seat.
Tighten the four indicated screws fastening the left

(A).
Tighten the four indicated screws fastening the right

(A).
Inserting the power steering fluid reservoir vent pipe

(3) and the coolant tank vent pipe (2) correctly
through the relative holes, fit the rear flat
undertray section (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the screws indicated fastening the rear flat
Engine compartment cosmetic shields Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E3.13 Engine compartment cosmetic shields
Removing engine compartment cosmetic shields
CAUTION
Lateral cosmetic shields

Remove the lateral cosmetic shields (A),
disconnecting the water drainage pipes.
FROM Ass.ly No. 93871, the water drainage
pipes are no longer included.
Centre cosmetic shield
Remove both lateral cosmetic engine compartment

shields.
Remove the centre cosmetic shield (C).
Engine compartment cosmetic shields Page 2 of 2
Refitting engine compartment cosmetic shields

Fastening engine compartment cosmetic shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Lateral cosmetic shields
Fit the lateral cosmetic shields (A), connecting the

water drainage pipes.
FROM Ass.ly No. 93871, the water drainage
pipes are no longer included.

Screw 4.5 Nm B
Centre cosmetic shield
Fit the centre cosmetic shield (C).


Screw 4.5 Nm B
Refit both lateral cosmetic engine compartment

shields.
Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap Page 1 of 10
Print Exit
E3.14 Fuel filler neck and fuel filler flap
Using the Capless fuel filler system
The 'capless' filler system is a filler neck with no manual cap.

The advantages of a capless system during refuelling are:
no need to physically unscrew the cap (which may be particularly difficult in certain temperature conditions);
no need to hang the cap near the filler neck itself while refuelling;
no risk of accidentally trapping the cap lanyard under the cap itself when closing, which may cause fuel
leakage.
The cap is functionally substituted by two tandem flaps, (1) and (2), both of which fitted with an airtight seal and
a pressure relief safety valve calibrated at 120 mbar.
The above image shows the capless filler neck with the fuel pump nozzle inserted and the flaps (1) and (2) open.
For safety reasons, the outer wall features a number of 'teeth' (3) that lock the outer flap: the only way to open
this flap is to insert the nozzle of a fuel station pump.
Do not force the outer flap by pushing with the fingers or attempt to open with inappropriate tools (e.g.
screwdriver): this may damage the outer flap mechanism and compromise seal integrity.
The capless system is more reliable than a conventional filler cap system, as instead of an external cap, the
system is sealed by elements within the filler neck itself. Furthermore, the pump nozzle is guided more
positively into the filler neck during insertion that with a conventional filler system.
Insert the nozzle carefully into the filler neck to prevent damage to the mechanism seal.
After refuelling, wait approximately 5 seconds, then slowly remove the nozzle from the filler neck: this is
to allow any residual fuel in the nozzle to drain into the tank, preventing spillage onto the bodywork.
The pump nozzle is inserted into the filler neck until it comes into contact with the outer flange (4). More of the
pump nozzle remains outside the filler neck than with a conventional system; this is not a problem, as the
capless system has been specifically engineered to function correctly with the nozzle in this position.
Like a conventional filler neck, the capless system also has a retainer tongue for locking the pump nozzle (EU
and USA). By twisting the nozzle by 30° in either direction after insertion, the nozzle itself is held in place
during refuelling.
Do not attempt to insert funnels or portable jerry can spouts into the filler neck.
Should it be necessary to use a portable fuel container, only use the funnel included in the vehicle tool kit,
which is designed to activate the automatic release system.
Should it be necessary to refuel without access to a fuel station, a special funnel (A), shaped like the nozzle of a
petrol pump, is included in the tool kit. The funnel (A) releases the capless automatic sealing system.
Removing the fuel filler neck

Remove only the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.

Remove the right hand duct only.
Replace the ELDOR ionizing ECU ( F2.11).

Remove the ELDOR ionizing ECU

indicated nut.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the filler neck

(A).
Release the "double-lock" quick-coupling (2) with

due caution by pressing on both sides and
pushing the safety clip out of its seat until it
audibly unlocks with a click.
millimetres.
Pressing on both sides of the quick-coupling (2),

disconnect the fuel vapour recirculation pipe (B).
Remove the collar (3).

Disconnect the pipe (C).
Remove the filler neck (A), taking care not to

damage the clip (4).
Refitting the fuel filler neck

Fastening fuel filler neck Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening the fuel filler neck ground lug terminal Nut 5 Nm B
Fit the filler neck (A) in the relative seat, taking care
not to damage the clip (4).
Partially tighten the indicated screws fastening the

filler neck (A).
Fit a new collar (3) on the pipe (B).

Connect the pipe (B) to the tank, aligning the
indicated reference slot correctly.
Fit and tighten the new collar (3), positioning
correctly between the reference lines on the pipe
(B).
Check again that the pipe (B) is positioned correctly.
Connect the fuel vapour recirculation pipe (B).

Lock the "double-lock" quick-coupling (2) with due
caution by pressing on both sides and pushing
the safety clip into its seat until it audibly locks
with a click.
millimetres.
Strictly observe the indicated tightening torque.

Tightening the fastener screws excessively
may damage the fuel filler neck.
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the filler

neck (A).

Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the ground cable lug terminal (1) by

tightening the indicated nut.

Nut 5 Nm B
Replace the ELDOR ionizing ECU ( F2.11).

Refit the ELDOR ionizing ECU


Refit the right hand duct.

Refit the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.
Replacing fuel filler flap

Fastening fuel filler flap Nut 4 Nm B
Located at the rear right-hand side of the outer bodywork.
Open the fuel filler flap (A) by means of the specific

button and undo the indicated nuts.
Replace the fuel filler flap (A) and fit it by tightening
the indicated nuts.

Nut 4 Nm B
Close the fuel filler flap (A) and check that it sits
flush with the bodywork.
Tow hook Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E3.15 Tow hook
Tow hook
CAUTION
Always comply with road safety legislation when towing the vehicle.
Do not connect toe lines to suspension arms, suspension components or wheels. Connect only to the specific
tow hook, after fitting the toe hook in its relative mounting.
Remember that the power steering and brake servo do not function with the engine off.
Select the tow hook (A) from the tool bag in the
luggage compartment.
Remove the cap (A) from the seat in the front

bumper.
Tow hook Page 2 of 2
Do not use any anchor points for towing other than

the tow hook fastened correctly in its seat (B).
Fully tighten the hook in the seat (B).
Release the Park Lock carrying out the CAR WASH procedure, if possible, or carrying out the emergency
Park Lock release procedure.
Deactivate the Parking Brake, using the relative lever if possible, or carrying out the emergency electric
parking brake release procedure.
Keep the ignition key turned to II to enable the lights to work and to prevent the steering wheel from locking if
turned, to keep the Park Lock deactivated (when using the CAR WASH procedure) and to prevent electric
parking brake activation (if the AUTO PARK function is enabled).
Rear screen Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
E3.16 Rear screen
Replacing the rear screen
The rear screen is supplied as a spare part complete with perimeter seal, which must not be detached from the
glass.

Remove the rear screen cross member.

Remove the lower and lateral rear screen trim panels.
The following tools are required to remove the rear

screen:
short blade) (A).

locations.

the cutter blade.
A face mask (D).


Use specific pneumatic cutters to cut the sealant around the entire perimeter of the rear screen from inside
Using suction handles, remove the rear screen from its seat.
Apply strips of adhesive tape to the bodywork, around the perimeter of the rear screen seat.
Use the specific pneumatic cutter to remove any residual sealant.

Clean the rear screen mating surface thoroughly with compressed air, then degrease with heptane to remove
Before preparing the glass for installation, check there are no imperfections or scratches on the surface
or around the perimeter.
Set the new glass onto the suction pad mounting, with the external side facing downwards.
Degrease and clean the perimeter of the glass with BETACLEAN 3300 cod. 81636500 and WypAll X60 _
Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.

Apply a strip of adhesive tape (2) on the rear

screen, 20 mm from the edge.

81636600 to the perimeter of the glass and
leave the product to dry for at least 10 minutes.
Degrease the mating surface on the bodyshell with BETACLEAN 3350, black cap, code 81636700 and
WypAll X60 _ Kimberly-Clark high absorbency cloth.
The fitting of the windscreen on the bodyshell

must take place with no possibility of delay
within 5 minutes from the application of the
adhesive tape.
Using an extrusion gun with a triangular section

nozzle, apply a continuous bead (3) of
BETASEAL 1812 code 67306000 to the rear
screen, starting from the mid point of the bottom
edge and overlapping the ends of the bead by
approximately 20 - 30 mm. Even out the
overlapping ends of the bead with a spatula.
Dimensions of triangular cross section bead:
height 12 mm, width 7 mm.

sealant.
Fit the rear screen (E), aligning in its relative seat

on the bodyshell.
Press forcefully, placing two spacers (4) measuring
7 mm between the lower edge of the glass and
the bodyshell.
Bring the rear screen (E) against the spacers (4).
Place a suction pad compression tool on the glass.

Remove the two spacers installed previously
between the bodyshell and the glass.
Working from inside the passenger compartment, use a spatula to press the adhesive into the gap and
remove any excess adhesive.
Working from the passenger compartment, remove the adhesive tape applied previously, taking care not to
soil any surrounding parts.
Leave to set for at least three hours, then remove the compression tool.

Seats Page 1 of 12
Print Exit
E4.01 Seats
Removing the seats
Move the seat all the way forwards.

Undo the two rear seat fastener screws indicated
(A).
Move the seat all the way back.

Undo the two front seat fastener screws (A)
indicated and lift it.
Seats Page 2 of 12
Undo the indicated screw fastening the seat belt (B).
Remove the seat and detach the connectors (1) and

(2).
The driver seat has two connectors whereas the
passenger seat has only one connector.
Refitting the seats

Fastening seat Screw 40 Nm B
Seats Page 3 of 12

Tighten the indicated screw fastening the seat belt

(B).

Screw 40 Nm B
Place and slide the seat (A) back completely.

Tighten the two front seat fastener screws (A)
indicated.

Screw 40 Nm B
Seats Page 4 of 12
Move the seat all the way forwards (A).

Tip the backrest (A) forwards.
Tighten the two front rear seat fastener screws (A)
indicated.

Screw 40 Nm B
Removing racing seats (optional)
Move the seat all the way forwards.

Undo the two rear seat fastener screws indicated
(A).
Seats Page 5 of 12
Move the seat all the way back.

Undo the two front seat fastener screws indicated
(A).
Prise off the indicated cover and undo the screw

fastening the seat belt (B).
Remove the seat and detach the connectors (1) and

(2).
Refitting racing seats (optional)
Seats Page 6 of 12

Fastening racing seat Screw 24 Nm B
Fit the seat and connect the connectors (1) and (2).
Tighten the screw fastening the seat belt (B) and fit
the relative cover indicated.

Screw 40 Nm B
Seats Page 7 of 12
Move the seat all the way back (A).

Tighten the two front seat fastener screws (A)
indicated.

Screw 24 Nm B
Move the seat all the way forwards (A).

Tip the backrest (A) forwards.
Tighten the two front rear seat fastener screws (A)
indicated.

Screw 24 Nm B
Adjusting the height and/or inclination positions of the driver side seat cushion (optional for Super
Racing seat)
The different seat cushion adjustment positions are set using the rear fastener screws.
The front fastener screws are used to move the seat cushion.
Seats Page 8 of 12
In the "LOWEST" position, two movements are possible.
Seats Page 9 of 12
In the "INTERMEDIATE LOW" position, three movements are possible.
Seats Page 10 of 12
In the "INTERMEDIATE HIGH" position, three movements are possible.
Seats Page 11 of 12
In the "HIGHEST" position, two movements are possible.
Adjusting the height and/or inclination positions of the driver side seat cushion (optional for Super
Racing seat)

Fastening driver side seat height adjustment Screw 24 Nm B
mechanism
Adjustment may only be carried out by an authorised Ferrari service centre.
Seat cushion height and inclination adjustment is only possible for the driver side Super Racing seat.
Remove the seats ( E4.01).

Remove the driver side seat.
Seats Page 12 of 12
Loosen the two screws (1).

Undo and remove the screws (2) necessary to
achieve the desired setting.
Set the seat height to one of the available positions
described previously.
After achieving the desired setting, fit and tighten
the screws (2) into the relative holes for the
position.

Screw 24 Nm B
Tighten the two screws (1).

Screw 24 Nm B
Refit the seats ( E4.01).
Dashboard Page 1 of 64
Print Exit
E4.02 Dashboard
Removing the binnacle

Prise off the binnacle (A) until it snaps audibly
loose, then remove.
Refitting the binnacle

Fastening instrument panel binnacle Screw 4 Nm B
Fit and fasten the binnacle (A), pressing until it

snaps audibly into place.

Screw 4 Nm B
Removing the steering column trim panel
The panel is mounted on the steering column and consists of two elements (a lower element and an upper
element).
Undo the two screws and one nut indicated

fastening the lower element (1) of the steering
column trim panel.
Detach the lower element (1) from the upper

element of the steering column trim panel and
disconnect the connector (2) for the steering
wheel adjustment control.
Remove the lower element (1) of the steering
column trim panel.
Undo the two indicated fastener screws on the right

and left hand sides fastening the upper element
(3) of the steering column trim panel.
Remove the upper element (3) of the steering
column trim panel.
Refitting the steering column trim panel

Fastening steering column trim panel Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the upper element (3) of the steering column trim

panel and tighten the two indicated fastener
screws on the right and left hand sides.
Connect the connector (2) to the lower element (1)

of the steering column trim panel.
Tighten the two screws and one nut indicated

fastening the lower element (1) of the steering
column trim panel.

Screw 5 Nm B
Removing lid and glove compartment

Remove the underdashboard mat on passenger's side.
Undo the lower screws indicated fastening the lid

(1) to the glove compartment.
Undo the nut fastening the lid (1) to the gas strut
(2), retrieving the screw and the washers.
Detach the lock connector (3) and remove the glove

compartment lid from the passenger
compartment.
Undo the screws indicated by the red arrows.

Remove the glove compartment lining (10).
Undo the screws indicated fastening the glove box
(4) to the dashboard.
Prise off the lower right hand dashboard trim panel

(7) in the position indicated. The panel is simply
press-fit into place.
Remove the glove box (4) complete with lower right

hand dashboard trim panel and detach the
connector (5) of the cabin light.
Remove the glove box (4) and detach the connector

(6) of the ON/OFF switch.

Remove the socket (9) for the battery conditioner
from the lower right hand dashboard trim panel
(7).
Remove the glove compartment from the passenger compartment.
Refitting lid and glove compartment

Fastening glove compartment to dashboard Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening glove compartment liner Screw 4 Nm B
Fastening gas strut to glove compartment door Nut 7 Nm B
Take out the glove box (4) complete with lower right
hand dashboard trim panel and connect the
connector (6) of the ON/OFF switch.
Fit the battery conditioner socket (9) on the lower

right hand dashboard trim panel (7).
If applicable, feed the cables (8) for the iPod

connection and USB port through the relative
hole indicated in the glove compartment.
Fit the glove box (4) in the relative seat and connect
the connector (5) of the cabin light.
Fasten the lower right hand dashboard trim panel

(7) by pressing into place in the position
indicated.
Fasten the glove box (4) tightening the indicated

screws.

Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the glove compartment liner (10) in the relative

seat, attaching the three tabs at the rear.

Screw 4 Nm B
Take out the glove compartment lid and connect the

lock connector (3).
Fasten the door (1) to the gas strut (2) fitting the
screw with the relative washers and tightening
the indicated nut.

Nut 7 Nm B
Hand tighten the lower screws indicated fastening

the lid (1) to the glove compartment.
Check that the lid closes and opens correctly.

Refit the underdashboard mat on passenger's side.
Removing the dashboard trim panels
Lower left hand trim panel
Take particular care not to damage the leather

trim.
Detach the lower left hand trim panel (A) from the
relative seat by prising out gently in the indicated
positions.
Remove the lower left hand trim panel (A),

disconnecting the connectors (1).
Upper trim panel
Remove the lid and the glove compartment ( E4.02).


The indicated screw is only visible from
underneath the dashboard.
Prise off the front of the central grille (A) until it

snaps audibly loose.
Remove the upper part of the central grille (A) from
underneath the upper trim panel (B).

Prise off the upper trim panel until it snaps audibly
loose.
For vehicles with satellite antitheft system ECU

only

only
Remove the upper trim from the dashboard.
Cosmetic grilles
Passenger side
Remove the upper trim.

Remove the cosmetic grille, detaching the front
edge from the relative seat.
Driver side

Remove the binnacle.
Remove the cosmetic grille, detaching the front
edge from the relative seat.
Lower centre trim panel

Detach the trim without disconnecting the connectors.

Remove the A.C. control panel ( F5.02).
Remove the front tunnel mat.
Disconnect the connector (1) for the passenger

compartment temperature sensor.

Prise off the lower central trim panel (A) until it
Remove the lower central trim panel (A).
Driver side vent trim
Remove the binnacle ( E4.02).

Remove the vent trim, disconnecting the connectors

(1).
Once the vent trim (B) has been removed, the

control panel (C), vent control (D), the grille (E),
the vent (F) and the duct (G) may be replaced by
undoing the respective fastener screws.
Centre vent trim

Remove the lower central trim.


Remove the vent trim, disconnecting the vent
control connectors.
Once the vent trim (B) has been removed, the

control panel (C), the vent controls (D) and the
vents (E) may be replaced by undoing the
respective fastener screws.
Passenger side vent trim


Remove the trim (A).
Remove the vent trim, disconnecting the connector

(1).
Once the vent trim (B) has been removed, the vent
control (C), the grille (D), the vent (E) and the
duct (F) may be replaced by undoing the
respective fastener screws.
Front trim
Remove the driver side vent trim

Remove the centre vent trim.
Remove the passenger side vent trim.
Lift the front trim.
Remove the front trim.
Refitting the dashboard trim panels

Fastening the dashboard trim panels Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 3.5 Nm B
Lower left hand trim panel
Hold the lower left hand trim panel (A) and connect
the connectors (1).

trim.
Fasten the lower left hand trim panel (A) in the

relative seat, pressing in the positions shown in
the photo aside.
Upper trim panel
Fit the upper trim.

only

only
Fit the upper trim panel, pressing until it snaps audibly into place.
Insert the upper part of the central grille (A)

Fasten the central grille (A), pressing on the front of
the grill until it snaps audibly into place.

The indicated screw is only visible from
underneath the dashboard.

Screw 3.5 Nm B


Screw 3.5 Nm B

Screw 3.5 Nm B
Refit the lid and the glove compartment ( E4.02).
Cosmetic grilles
Passenger side
Fit the cosmetic grille, inserting the front edge into

the relative seat.
Refit the upper trim panel.
Driver side
Fit the cosmetic grille, inserting the front edge into

the relative seat.
Refit the binnacle.
Lower centre trim panel
Fit the lower central trim panel (A).

Fasten the lower central trim panel (A), pressing
until it snaps audibly into place.

Screw 5 Nm B
Connect the connector (1) for the passenger

compartment temperature sensor.

Refit the front tunnel mat.

Refit the A.C. control panel ( F5.02).
Driver side vent trim
If removed previously, refit the control panel (C), the

vent control (D), the grille (E), the vent (F) and
the duct (G), and tighten the respective fastener
screws, before refitting the vent trim (B.)
Fit the vent trim, connecting the connectors (1).

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit and install the cover (A).

Refit the binnacle ( E4.02).
Centre vent trim
If remove previously, refit the control panel (C), the

vent controls (D) and the vents (E), and tighten
the respective fastener screws, before refitting
the vent trim (B).
Fit the vent trim, connecting the vent control

connectors.

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit and install the cover (A).
Refit the lower central trim.

Passenger side vent trim
If removed previously, refit the vent control (C), the

grille (D), the vent (E) and the duct (F), and
tighten the respective fastener screws, before
refitting the vent trim (B).
Fit the vent trim, connecting the connector (1).

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the trim (A).


Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Front trim
Fit the front trim.

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Screw 5 Nm B

Refit the passenger side vent trim.
Refit the centre vent trim.
Refit the driver side vent trim.
Removing complete dashboard

Remove the instrument panel ( E5.02).

Remove the steering column ( D5.07).
Remove the A.C. control panel ( F5.02).
Remove the centre console trim panel ( E4.03).
Remove the centre console footrest mats, under the dashboard, the passenger footrest mat and the
pedal mat.
Remove the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).

Do not disconnect the brake fluid reservoir from the system.
Remove the passenger compartment air duct (1),

undoing the screws indicated.
Mark the position of the pipes (2) on the heater, to

prevent accidentally swapping them during
refitting.
Place absorbent paper under the pipes to dry any
fluid spillage.
Open the indicated plastic clamps (3).

Undo the nut indicated by the red arrow.
Detach the pipes (3).
Loosen the indicated screw.
Undo the left hand screw indicated fastening the

bracket (4).

(4) and (7).

Detach the condensation drain pipe (8).

Take out the diagnostic socket (10).
Remove the relays (11).


Take the fuse boxes (12) and place them on the
vehicle floor.

Remove the fuse box (17) and set it down on the
vehicle floor.
Undo the screw indicated fastening the battery

cable branch (14).
Disconnect the connector (15) under the Body

computer.
Luggage compartment right-hand side
Luggage compartment left-hand side
Passenger compartment left-hand side
Passenger compartment right-hand side
Hold the complete dashboard (A).

With the assistance of another worker, remove the
complete dashboard (A) from the passenger
compartment.
Refitting complete dashboard

Lateral fastening dashboard from passenger Screw 32 Nm B
compartment
Products to use: AREXONS SYSTEM 52A43 - Screw 60 Nm B
compartment
compartment
Fastening central bracket Screw 8 Nm B
Central fastening dashboard from passenger Screw 8 Nm B
compartment
Central fastening dashboard from luggage Screw 8 Nm B
compartment
Fastening fuse box mounting bracket Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening diagnostic socket mounting bracket Screw 3 Nm C
Fastening A.C. pipes to expansion valve Nut 16 Nm B
luggage compartment
With the aid of another operator, place the complete

dashboard (A) in the relevant seat in the
passenger compartment.

STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the screw
thread.
Pretighten the indicated lower screw.

Screw 32 Nm B

STRENGTH THREAD LOCK on the screw
thread.
Pretighten the indicated lower screw.

Screw 32 Nm B

Screw 32 Nm B

Screw 32 Nm B

the screws.

Screw 60 Nm B

the screws.

Screw 60 Nm B

the upper screw.

Screw 60 Nm B

the upper screw.

Screw 60 Nm B
Fit the bracket (4) in the relative seat.

Apply and hand tighten all screws indicated.

Screw 8 Nm B

(4) and (7).

Screw 8 Nm B

Tighten the left hand screw indicated fastening the

bracket (4).

Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the connector (15) under the Body

computer.
Tighten the screw indicated fastening the battery

cable branch (14).
Fasten the fuse box (17), tightening the indicated

screws.

Screw 5 Nm C
Fasten the fuse boxes (12) tightening the screw

indicated.

Screw 5 Nm C

Screw 5 Nm C
Fit the relays (11) in the relative seat.
Fit the diagnostic socket (10).


Screw 3 Nm C
Fasten the indicated clamp.
Fit the condensation drain pipe (8).

Replace the gaskets on the pipes (3).

Fit the pipes (3).
Tighten the nut indicated by the red arrow.

Nut 16 Nm B
Close the indicated plastic clamps (3), securing the

pipes (3).
Clean and dry any fluid residue.
Connect the pipes (2), following the notes taken

during the disassembly operations, until it clicks
audibly into place.
Clean and dry any fluid residue.
Fasten the passenger compartment air duct (1),


Screw 1.5 Nm B
Refit the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).

Refit the console trim panel ( E4.03).
Refit the A.C. control panel ( F5.02).
Refit the steering column ( D5.07).

Refit the instrument panel ( E5.02).

Centre console Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
E4.03 Centre console
Removing DCT gearbox control panel

Detach the control panel (A).
Detach the connector (1).

Remove the control panel (A).
Refitting DCT gearbox control panel

Fastening DCT gearbox control panel Screw 3 Nm B
Fit the control panel (A).

Press the control panel (A) into place.


Screw 3 Nm B
Removing the centre console trim panel

Remove the DCT gearbox control panel ( E4.03).
Detach the rear glove compartment trim panel (A)

from the relative seat.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the front glove

compartment trim panel (B).
Detach and remove the front glove compartment
trim panel (B) from the relative seat.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the centre

console trim panel (C).
Undo the rear screws indicated fastening the centre

console trim panel (C).
Detach the centre console trim panel (C) from the
relevant seat.
Remove the centre console trim panel detaching

the connectors (2).
Refitting the console trim panel

Fastening centre console trim panel Screw 8.5 Nm B
Screw 3 Nm C
Fit the centre console trim panel (C) in the relevant

seat.
Tighten the rear screws indicated fastening the
centre console trim panel (C).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Tighten the front screws indicated fastening the

centre console trim panel (C).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit and fasten the front glove compartment trim

panel (B) in the relevant seat, pressing down by
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the front
glove compartment trim panel (B).

Screw 3 Nm C
Fit and fasten the rear glove compartment trim

panel (A) in the relevant seat, pressing down by
Refit the DCT gearbox control panel ( E4.03).

Passenger compartment and roof trim panels Page 1 of 22
Print Exit
E4.04 Passenger compartment and roof trim panels
A - Windscreen pillar trim panels

B - Sun visors
C - Windscreen cross member trim panel
D - Lateral roof trim panels
E - Rear roof trim panel
F - Central roof trim panel
g - Lower lateral passenger compartment trim panels
H - Upper lateral passenger compartment trim panels
L - Rear screen lower trim panel
M - Rear screen lateral trim panels
N - Rear passenger compartment trim panel
Removing the passenger compartment trim panels
Lower lateral trim panels
Remove the lower lateral trim panel (G) from the

relative seat, by detaching it gently in the
Detach the connector (1) of the loudspeaker

mounted on the lower lateral trim panel (G).
Lower lateral trim panels (high-power Hi-Fi)
Remove the lower lateral trim panel (G) from the

Upper lateral trim panels
Remove the lower lateral trim panel.
Undo the screw (1) fastening the seat belt guide

and remove the latter from the relative seat.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the upper lateral trim
panel (H).
Remove the upper lateral trim panel (H) from the
indicated position.
Speaker trim (high-power Hi-Fi)
Remove the rear screen lower trim panel (R) from

the relative seat, detaching gently in the
Rear screen lower trim panel

Remove central cosmetic shield.
Remove the indicated 3M parts.
Remove the rear screen lower trim panel (L) from

Rear screen lower trim panel (high-power Hi-Fi)
Remove the speaker trim.
Remove the rear screen lower trim panel (L) from

Rear screen lateral trim panels

Remove the lateral roof trim panel and the rear screen cross member trim panel.

Remove the rear screen lower trim panel.
Undo the screws (1) fastening the rear screen

lateral trim panel (M).
Remove the rear screen lateral trim panel (M) from
the relative seat, by detaching it gently in the
indicated position.

mounted on the rear screen lateral trim panel (G).
Rear screen lateral trim panels (high-power Hi-Fi)

Remove the lateral roof trim panel and the rear screen cross member trim panel.

Remove the rear screen lower trim panel.
Undo the screws (1) fastening the rear screen

Remove the rear screen lateral trim panel (M) from
the relative seat, by detaching it gently in the
indicated position.
Rear trim panel

Remove the rear shelf.
Remove the rear screen lateral trim panels.

Remove the rear trim panel (N) from the relative

seat.
Refitting the passenger compartment trim panels

Lower lateral trim panels
Connect the connector (1) of the loudspeaker

mounted on the lower lateral trim panel (G).
Fit the lower lateral trim panel (G) in the relative

seat and press by hand in the indicated positions
until it clicks audibly into place.
Lower lateral trim panels (high-power Hi-Fi)
Fit the lower lateral trim panel (G) in the relative

seat and press by hand in the indicated positions
Upper lateral trim panels
Fit the upper lateral trim panel (H) in the relative

seat and press by hand in the indicated position
Tighten the screw (2) fastening the upper lateral
trim panel (H).

Screw 7 Nm B
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the seat belt guide


Screw 40 Nm B
Refit the lower lateral trim panel.
Speaker trim (high-power Hi-Fi)
Fit the speaker trim (R) in the relative seat and

press by hand in the indicated positions until it
Rear screen lower trim panel
Fit the rear screen lower trim panel (L) in the

relative seat and press by hand in the indicated
positions until it clicks audibly into place.
Hand tighten the nuts indicated.
Apply 3M parts in the indicated points.

Refit central cosmetic shield.
Rear screen lower trim panel (high-power Hi-Fi)
Fit the rear screen lower trim panel (L) in the

positions until it clicks audibly into place.
Refit the speaker trim.
Rear screen lateral trim panels

Fit the rear screen lateral trim panel (M) in the

position until it clicks audibly into place.
Tighten the screws (1) fastening the rear screen

Screw 7 Nm B
Refit the rear screen lower trim panel.

Refit the lateral roof trim panel and the rear screen cross member trim panel.
Rear screen lateral trim panels (high-power Hi-Fi)

Fit the rear screen lateral trim panel (M) in the
position until it clicks audibly into place.
Tighten the screws (1) fastening the rear screen

Screw 7 Nm B
Refit the rear screen lower trim panel.

Refit the lateral roof trim panel and the rear screen cross member trim panel.
Rear trim panel
Fit the rear trim panel (N) in the relative seat.
Fit the cover (1).

Refit the rear screen lateral trim panels.

Refit the rear shelf.
Removing the roof trim panels
Rear screen cross member trim panel
Remove the rear screen cross member trim panel

(E) from the relative seat, by detaching it gently
in the indicated positions.
Lateral trim panels
Remove the rear screen cross member trim panel.
Undo the screw (1) fastening the lateral trim panel

(D).
Remove the lateral trim panel (D) from the relative
seat, by detaching it gently in the indicated
positions.
Sun visors
Undo the three indicated screws fastening the sun

visor (B).
Remove the sun visor (B) from the relevant seat.
Windscreen cross member trim panel
Remove the lateral trim panels.

Remove the sun visors.
Remove the cabin light ( E5.06).
Undo the screw (1) fastening the right hand side of

the windscreen cross member trim panel (C).
Undo the screw (1) fastening the left hand side of

Remove the windscreen cross member trim panel

(D) from the relative seat, by detaching it gently
in the indicated positions.
Windscreen pillar trim panels

Remove the windscreen cross member trim.

Remove the windscreen pillar trim panel (A).
Refitting the roof trim panels

Fastening roof trim panels Screw 7 Nm B
Screw 4 Nm B
Screw 2 Nm B
Rear screen cross member trim panel
Fit the rear screen cross member trim panel (E) in

the relevant seat and press by hand in the
indicated positions until it clicks audibly into
place.
Lateral trim panels
Fit the lateral trim panel (D) in the relative seat and
press by hand in the indicated positions until it
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the lateral trim panel
(D).

Screw 7 Nm B
Refit the rear screen cross member trim panel.
Sun visors
Fit the sun visor (B) in the relative seat.

Tighten the three indicated screws fastening the
sun visor (B).

Screw 4 Nm B
Windscreen cross member trim panel
Fit the windscreen cross member trim panel (D) in

the relative seat and press by hand in the
indicated positions until it clicks audibly into
place.
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the left hand side of


Screw 7 Nm B
Tighten the screw (1) fastening the right hand side

of the windscreen cross member trim panel (C).

Screw 7 Nm B
Refit the cabin light ( E5.06).

Refit the sun visors.
Refit the lateral trim panels.
Windscreen pillar trim panels
Fit the windscreen pillar trim panel (A).


Screw 2 Nm B

Screw 2 Nm B
Refit the windscreen cross member trim panel.

Mats Page 1 of 17
Print Exit
E4.05 Mats
A - Rear shelf mat

B - Centre console mats
C - Underdashboard mats
D - Passenger footrest mat
E - Pedal mat
F - Platform mats
Removing mats
Passenger side footrest mat
Mats Page 2 of 17
Lower the footrest mat (A) with the relative loop.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the bracket (B).

Remove the bracket (B).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the footrest
mat (A).
Remove the footrest mat (A).
Underdashboard mat, passenger side
Lower the passenger side footrest mat (A) with the

relative loop.
Mats Page 3 of 17

Remove the underdashboard mat (B).

Remove the underdashboard mat (B).
Underdashboard mat, driver side

Remove the underdashboard mat (A).
Mats Page 4 of 17
Pedal mat

Remove the pedal mat (A).
Rear tunnel mat

Mats Page 5 of 17

Remove the rear tunnel mat (A).
Front tunnel mat
Remove the rear tunnel mat.
Mats Page 6 of 17

Lower the footrest mat (A) with the relative loop.

Remove the front tunnel mat (B).
Rear shelf mat

Remove the lower lateral trim panels.
Mats Page 7 of 17

Remove the rear shelf mat (A).
Floor mat, driver side
Remove the door perimeter seals ( E3.11).

Remove the lower driver side seal.

Remove the driver side seat.

Remove the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel ( E5.11).
Remove the rear shelf mat.
Detach and remove the footrest (A).
Mats Page 8 of 17
Undo the indicated screws fastening the plate (B).

Remove the plate (B).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the guard (C).
Remove the guard (C).
Undo the indicated screw

Prise off the button surround (D).
Remove the driver side floor mat.
Mats Page 9 of 17
Floor mat, passenger side
Remove the door perimeter seals ( E3.11).

Remove the lower passenger side seal.

Remove the passenger side seat.

Remove the passenger side footrest mat.
Remove the rear shelf mat.
Remove the passenger side floor mat.
Refitting mats

Fastening passenger side footrest mat Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening battery bracket Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening underdashboard mats Screw 5 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid release handle Screw 5 Nm C
Passenger side footrest mat
Mats Page 10 of 17
Fit the footrest mat (A).

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the footrest
mat (A).

Screw 9 Nm C
Fit the bracket (B).

(B).

Screw 10 Nm B
Lift the footrest mat (A) with the relative loop.
Underdashboard mat, passenger side
Mats Page 11 of 17
Fit the underdashboard mat (B).


Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the underdashboard mat (B).


Screw 5 Nm B
Lift the passenger side footrest mat (A) with the

relative loop.
Underdashboard mat, driver side
Mats Page 12 of 17
Fit the underdashboard mat (A).


Screw 5 Nm B
Pedal mat
Fit the pedal mat (A).

Rear tunnel mat
Mats Page 13 of 17
Fit the rear tunnel mat (A).


Mats Page 14 of 17
Front tunnel mat

Lift the footrest mat (A) with the relative loop.
Fit the front tunnel mat (B).

Refit the rear tunnel mat.
Rear shelf mat
Mats Page 15 of 17
Fit the rear shelf mat (A).


Refit the lower lateral trim panels.
Floor mat, driver side
Fit the driver side floor mat.
Mats Page 16 of 17
Press-fit the button surround (D) into place.

Tighten the indicated screw

Screw 5 Nm C
Fit the guard (C).

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the guard
(C).
Fit the plate (B).
Tighten the indicated screws fastening the plate (B).
Fit and glue into place the footrest (A), fixing with
double sided adhesive tape.
Mats Page 17 of 17
Refit the rear shelf mat.

Refit the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel ( E5.11).

Refit the driver side seat.
Refit the door perimeter seals ( E3.11).

Refit the lower driver side seal.
Floor mat, passenger side
Fit the passenger side floor mat.
Refit the rear shelf mat.

Refit the passenger side footrest mat.
Refit the passenger side seat.
Refit the door perimeter seals ( E3.11).

Refit the lower passenger side seal.
Engine inspection hatch Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E4.06 Engine inspection hatch
Removing the engine inspection hatch

Remove the passenger compartment rear trim panel.

Remove the engine inspection hatch (A).
Refitting the engine inspection hatch

Fastening engine inspection hatch Screw 9 Nm C
Engine inspection hatch Page 2 of 2
Fit the engine inspection hatch (A).


Screw 9 Nm C
Luggage compartment cosmetic trim and guards Page 1 of 11
Print Exit
E4.07 Luggage compartment cosmetic trim and guards
Removing luggage compartment cosmetic shields
Left hand cosmetic shield
Detach the section of luggage compartment seal

(A) from its relevant seat in the area next to the
left hand shield.
Undo the screws indicated and detach the left hand

shield (B) from the relevant seat.
Right hand cosmetic shield

(A) from its relevant seat in the area next to the
right hand shield.
Open the windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap (1).

Undo the screws indicated and detach the right
hand shield (C) from the relevant seat.
Refitting luggage compartment cosmetic shields

Fastening luggage compartment shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Screw 8.5 Nm B
Left hand cosmetic shield
Fit the left hand shield (B) in the relevant seat.

shield (B).

Screw 4.5 Nm B

shield (B).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the luggage compartment seal (A) in the relevant

seat.
Right hand cosmetic shield
Fit the right hand shield (C) in the relevant seat.

hand shield (C).

Screw 4.5 Nm B

shield (C).

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Close the windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap (1).
Fit the luggage compartment seal (A) in the relevant

seat.
Removing the underwindscreen shields
Left hand underwindscreen shield

Remove the left hand luggage compartment shield.

(A) next to the left hand underwindscreen shield
(B).
Remove the windscreen wiper arms ( E3.09).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the left hand

underwindscreen shield (B).
Remove the left hand underwindscreen shield (B)
Right hand underwindscreen shield

Remove the right hand luggage compartment shield.

(A) next to the right hand underwindscreen
shield (B).
Undo the indicated screws fastening the right hand

Remove the right hand underwindscreen shield (B)
Refitting the underwindscreen shields

Fastening underwindscreen shields Screw 4.5 Nm B
Left hand underwindscreen shield
Fit the left hand underwindscreen shield (B) in the

relative seat.

Screw 4.5 Nm B
Refit the windscreen wiper arms ( E3.09).
Fit the section of luggage compartment seal (A)

next to the left hand underwindscreen shield (B).

Refit the left hand luggage compartment shield.
Right hand underwindscreen shield
Fit the right hand underwindscreen shield (B) in the

relative seat.
hand underwindscreen shield (B).

Screw 4.5 Nm B
Fit the section of luggage compartment seal (A)

next to the right hand underwindscreen shield
(B).

Refit the right hand luggage compartment shield.
Removing the luggage compartment tub

Undo the lower screws indicated fastening the

luggage compartment tub (A).
Undo the upper screws indicated fastening the

Prise the light unit (B) out of the relative seat.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the light unit (B).
Lift the luggage compartment tub out of its relative seat.
Refitting the luggage compartment tub

Fastening luggage compartment tub Screw 8 Nm C
Fit the luggage compartment tub in the relative seat.
Connect the connector (1) to the light unit (B).
Fit the light unit (B) in the relative seat.


Screw 8 Nm C


Screw 8 Nm C

Location of controls in vehicle Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
E5.01 Location of controls in vehicle
Instruments and controls on roof panel
A - Door lock - unlock

B - Disable anti-lift protection
C - Switch on driver side light
D - Switch on centre light
E - Switch on passenger side light
F - Cabin light
G - Rear view mirror
H - Activating / deactivating electrochromic mirror
L - Enable/disable front parking sensors (optional)
M - Passenger airbag disabled warning light
Instruments and controls on the dashboard
A - Left hand TFT display controls

B - EPB electric parking brake controls
C - External rear view mirror adjustment control
D - Light selector
E - Instrument panel
F - Right hand TFT display (NIT) controls
G - A.C. control panel
Instruments and controls on steering wheel
A - Horn button
B - Turn indicator buttons
C - High beam light switch
D - Windscreen wiper controls
E - Suspension decoupling button
F - Manettino
G - Engine start button
H - NIT controls
L - Shift paddles
Instruments and controls on centre console
A - DCT gearbox control panel

B - Hazard warning light button
C - Door window controls
D - Glove compartment open button
E - On/off button for “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift (optional)
Instrument panel Page 1 of 23
Print Exit
E5.02 Instrument panel
A - Left hand TFT display

B - Electronic analogue tachometer
C - Right hand TFT display
D - DCT gearbox display
E - Warning lights
Left hand TFT display
This display is set in the instrument panel and has the following functions:
displaying control parameters;
displaying general information while driving;
indicating any faults.
To interact with the system, selecting the desired configuration and setting parameters, use the controls on the
dashboard, on the left-hand side of the steering wheel.
Display areas
Each screen is subdivided into four display areas:

A: selected driving mode (Manettino position), windscreen wiper status, external temperature and “Ice hazard”
icon.
B: virtual gauge display, parking sensor screen, fault/warning display (text message and specific symbol, if
applicable), brightness setting display.
C: area for iconised symbols relative to faults with no specific indicator on dial, speedometer repetition.
D: fuel level gauge.
E: total or trip (TRIP A or B) odometer display, range.
Fuel level gauge
The fuel level gauge is always displayed.

The gauge consists of 9 yellow bars that "extinguish" as the fuel level diminishes.
After the second bar extinguishes, the first bar turns red and remains lit until the fuel tank is empty.
Once the fuel level enters reserve, in addition to the specific warning indicator illuminating on the dial, the
relative symbol and the specific message "Fuel level low" are shown on the display for 10 seconds,
together with the remaining range in Km.
If the conditions causing the symbol and message to be displayed persist, they are repeated every 8 Km.
If the remaining range is very low, the remaining range information in Km is replaced by the message "Limited
cruising range".
MAIN screen
Pressing the MAIN button recalls the MAIN screen, from which the four screen groups SETUP, VDA, TRIP and
STATUS may be recalled.
These groups consist of the following screens:
SETUP (press UP): MENU screen;
STATUS (press DOWN): SPORT screen, SPORT 2 screen, TYRES screen (only on vehicles with TPMS);
VDA (press LEFT): Chronometer screen, Vehicle status screen, Manettino status screen;
TRIP (press RIGHT): TRIP A screen, TRIP B screen.
MENU screen
The display settings may be adjusted and vehicle parameters configured from the MENU screen (the only
screen in the SETUP group). The MENU screen may be recalled directly by pressing UP with the MAIN
screen active.
Navigation in the menu is organised into different levels:
The first level contains a list of options for setting the following parameters and displaying the following
information:
Dimming: adjust display illumination;
Display setup.: configure display;
Date/Hour: set date and time;
Language/M.U.: set language and units of measurement;
Car setup: configure vehicle parameters;
Calibr. TPMS: calibrate TPMS (only on vehicles with TPMS);
Service: scheduled maintenance information.
These options are the main functions of the menu.

Press UP or DOWN to scroll through the list of options.
Press and release the OK or RIGHT button quickly to select the required function.
After selecting the function, the relevant subfunctions or modifiable parameters are displayed.
Always press UP or DOWN to select, while pressing and releasing the OK (or RIGHT) button quickly accesses
any additional subfunctions or enables the parameter selected.

Press and hold OK or LEFT, or select the BACK option (included in most subfunctions) to go back to the
previous level.
If no input is received for 10 seconds, the display returns to the first menu level.
Setting brightness
The brightness of the two TFT displays in the instrument panel may be adjusted from the specific option in the
MENU screen, or adjusted directly, with the MENU screen not currently active, or with the chronometer
stopped, if the Chronometer screen is currently active, by pressing the UP and DOWN buttons.
Pressing one of the two buttons for the first time recalls the specific screen. Pressing the buttons again adjusts
the setting.
The brightness setting may be adjusted with the vehicle in motion. Changes in the setting are effective
immediately and do no affect the brightness setting of the indicator lights on the dial.
Press OK to cancel the screen. After 5 seconds of inactivity, the screen cancels automatically and is replaced by
the previously active screen.
SPORT screen
The SPORT screen contains the following virtual gauges:

engine coolant temperature;
engine oil temperature.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the SPORT screen
is active, the virtual indicators are displayed in minimised format.
SPORT 2 screen
The SPORT 2 screen contains the following virtual gauges:

engine oil pressure;
voltmeter.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the SPORT 2
screen is active, the virtual indicators are displayed in minimised format.
TYRES screen
The TYRES screen displays a symbol of the vehicle with the pressure and temperature values for each tyre.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the TYRES screen
is active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
TRIP A and TRIP B screens
The TRIP A and TRIP B screens display the following information:

maximum speed;
average speed;
distance travelled;
journey time;
range.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the TRIP A or
TRIP B screens are active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
VDA screen group (Vehicle Dynamic Assistance)
In addition to the chronometer function, the Vehicle Dynamic Assistance (VDA) group of screens acts as a
valuable tool for ascertaining the status of the vehicle during use on the track, allowing the driver to intuitively
determine the optimum conditions for making full use of the vehicle's performance.
The VDA group is recalled by pressing LEFT with the MAIN screen active or by pressing VDA with any screen
active and includes the “Chronometer”, “Vehicle status” and “Manettino status” screens.
The functions of the “Vehicle status” screen are only available with the Manettino driving mode selector set to
RACE, CT OFF or CST OFF mode, which have been specifically developed for track use;
With the Manettino set to Low Grip or SPORT mode, the “Vehicle status” screen is viewable, but with the
message “VDA available in Race - CT off - CST off modes”.
The “Chronometer” screen may be used to record and save lap times during track use.
The screen displays the following information:
Current Lap: time elapsed since chronometer was started;
LAP TIME / Best: best lap time;
LAP TIME / Last: last lap time;
TOP SPEED / Best: highest speed reached;
TOP SPEED / Last: top speed reached during last lap.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the “Chronometer”
screen is active, the screen is displayed in minimised format.
The chronometer continues to run while the event/fault is displayed.
The chronometer is reset at each Key-on, while the most recent valid Best Lap and Last Lap values recorded
remain in memory.
The chronometer function is controlled using the OK, UP and DOWN buttons as follows:
pressing OK briefly with the chronometer stopped starts the Current Lap chronometer;
pressing OK briefly with the chronometer running resets and restarts the Current Lap chronometer and
updates information relative to the previous laps (lap end/start of next lap);
pressing UP or DOWN briefly with the chronometer stopped recalls the display brightness setting screen;
pressing UP or DOWN briefly with the chronometer running stops the chronometer and updates information
relevant to previous laps;
pressing and holding UP or DOWN with the chronometer stopped or running resets the chronometer and the
information relevant to previous laps.
During the display cycle of an active event/fault, pressing OK briefly cancels the event/fault display cycle
(“ESCAPE” function) without affecting the chronometer function.
The “Vehicle status” screen, which may be recalled directly by pressing VDA, or by pressing LEFT with the
MAIN screen active, helps the driver keep the vehicle in optimum conditions for maximum performance
during use on high grip surfaces.
This is done by using an algorithm that estimates the temperature status of the vehicle's main subsystems
(tyres, brakes, engine) in relation to a number of dynamic parameters (lateral acceleration, speed etc.).
Three different colours - green, light blue and red - are used to visualise the current vehicle status in an
immediately legible form:
WARM UP: component warm-up and control system self-acquisition stage, during which careful driving intended
to bring the vehicle into optimum operating conditions is recommended.
GO: the vehicle has completed the warm-up stage and all vehicle subsystems have reached optimum conditions
for performance driving.
OVER: one or more systems overheated, creating conditions which may compromise vehicle dynamics -
slowing down is recommended in order to restore optimum operating conditions for the systems involved.
The “Manettino status” screen displays a list of the parameters configurable using the Manettino driving mode
selector, indicating the relevant configuration for each parameter in each of the driving modes.
The systems involved are as follows:
F1-Trac: traction control;
E-Diff: electronic differential;
F1-DC: dual clutch F1 gearbox;
CST: stability and traction control;
ABS: anti-lock brake system;
SCM: magnetorheologically controlled suspension.
Electronic analogue tachometer
The electronic rev counter is set in the centre of the instrument panel.
The numbers on the dial represent engine speed in rpm/1000.
Engine speed is indicated as main numbers at intervals of 1000 rpm, with intermediate markings at secondary
intervals of 200 rpm.
If the rev counter has a white or yellow background, the backlighting is not enabled during the daytime -
i.e. with the parking lights off, or with the parking lights on, but with the twilight sensor detecting
daytime light conditions - so as to allow instrument better visibility.
Right hand TFT display
This display is set in the instrument panel and has the following functions:
vehicle speed display;
NIT information display (Infotainment Node);
"Rear Parking Camera" display (if applicable).
To interact with the system, selecting the desired configuration and setting parameters, use the controls on the
dashboard, on the right-hand side of the steering wheel.
Vehicle speed display
The vehicle speed may be displayed on the right hand TFT display in either “Speedometer” or “Digital speed”
mode.
The desired display mode is selectable with the specific option in the MENU screen on the left hand TFT display.
In “Speedometer” mode, the vehicle speed is displayed as a virtual analogue speedometer.
In “Digital speed” mode, the vehicle speed is indicated in digital format.
Storing the "Start of vehicle life"
When the vehicle is delivered, the start date of vehicle life must be stored, from which the counter begins for the
expiry date for the first "Scheduled Maintenance" service.
The parameter is entered using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
"Scheduled Maintenance" reset
At every scheduled service date, the 'maintenance complete' procedure must be performed using the relevant
function on the DEIS diagnostic tester.
The instrument panel must store the following data:
service No. performed;
service date;
total mileage at service date.
This data must be readable via the DEIS diagnostic tester.

At each service, before resetting the "Scheduled Maintenance" parameter, the instrument panel verifies that the
date on the CAN network is later than the “start of vehicle life” date or that of the previous service. If these
conditions are not met, the panel will not accept the reset operation.
Gearbox display
It displays the following information:

Engaged gear (DCT gearbox);
"Auto" gearbox mode (DCT gearbox);
"Auto easy exit” gearbox mode (DCT gearbox);
“Parking” mode;
"Performance Start" active indication;
"AVH" system enabled;
"Shift Light Indicator" message.
Information concerning the gearbox is always displayed in all operating conditions.
Engaged gear (DCT gearbox)
When gears are selected with the two shift paddles on the steering wheel with the DCT gearbox in MANUAL
mode (F1), the number corresponding to the currently engaged gear is shown on the gearbox display as
follows: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.
When the DCT gearbox is used in AUTOMATIC mode, the relative gear engaged is shown on the gearbox
display as follows: D (Drive), N (Neutral), R (Reverse).
At Key-off, if the panel receives the Neutral value, the gearbox display will read N. If the panel receives a gear
engaged value for any gear other than Neutral, the display will show the gear engaged.
"Auto" gearbox mode (DCT gearbox);
When the DCT gearbox is in AUTOMATIC mode, the gearbox display reads “AUTO” along with the letter
indicating the gear currently engaged.
"Auto easy exit” gearbox mode (DCT gearbox)
At every Key-on, “Auto easy exit” gearbox mode is activated by the gearbox.
A small "arrow" symbol is shown continuously at the bottom left of the gearbox display.
“Parking” mode
When the gearbox Park Lock system is activated, the gearbox display shows the letter “P” at the centre.
Performance Start
When the system receives the signal indicating that the performance start function is available, the gearbox
display will show the message “PS” until key-off or until the function is enabled.
AVH system enabled
When the AVH function is activated, the message “HOLD” is shown on the gearbox display.
"Shift Light Indicator" message
The function is enabled only with "manual" driving mode selected. Indication consists of a small "arrow" symbol
displayed at the top left of the gearbox display which is either fixed or flashing (3 Hz, DC 50%) depending on
the value of the signal received.
The arrow symbol appears to indicate the recommended time to upshift at the lowest speed possible
(sustainable by the vehicle in each gear) to reduce fuel consumption.
The relevant vehicle speeds for each upshift are as follows:
1st > 2nd: 12.5 Mph;

2nd > 3rd: 17.5 Mph;
3rd > 4th: 22.5 Mph;
4th > 5th: 27.5 Mph;
5th > 6th: 32.5 Mph;
6th > 7th: 37.5 Mph.
Removing instrument panel

Detach the left hand connection under the

instrument (2) from the dashboard.
Detach the right hand connection under the

instrument (3) from the dashboard.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the left hand

side of the instrument panel (A) to the
dashboard.

dashboard.
Undo the indicated upper screws fastening the

instrument panel (A) to the dashboard.
Remove the instrument panel (A) from the relative

seat and detach the connectors (4).
Remove the instrument panel (A) from the
passenger compartment.
Refitting instrument panel

Fastening upper fastener for instrument panel Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening lower fastener for instrument panel Screw 2.6 Nm B
Remove the instrument panel (A) and connect the

connectors (4).
Fit the instrument panel (A) in the relative seat and


Screw 8 Nm B

dashboard.

Screw 2.6 Nm B

dashboard.

Screw 2.6 Nm B
Fit by pressing the right hand connection under the

instrument (3) into the relative seat on the
dashboard.
Fit by pressing the left hand connection under the

instrument (2) into the relative seat on the
dashboard.


Warning lights Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
E5.03 Warning lights
They are backlit by LED lights of appropriate colours illuminating the relative surface directly.
The warning lights are only displayed when active (symbol only illuminated).
The symbols are permanently visible with light coloured instrument backgrounds.
The lights are displayed at Key-on and in the following conditions with the vehicle in motion:
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD)
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD) failure.
Fuel
Low or reserve fuel level.
Fuel gauge failure.
Engine oil
Engine oil temperature too high.
Insufficient engine oil pressure.
Engine oil pressure sensor failure (flashing).
Coolant
Coolant temperature too high.
Dual Clutch gearbox
Dual Clutch gearbox failure.
Brake system
EBD system failure, together with ABS warning light.
Insufficient brake fluid level.
Excessive brake pad wear.
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with EPB electric parking brake warning light.
Parking brake system service required, together with brake system warning light.
EPB electric parking brake
EPB electric parking brake engaged (lit continuously or flashing).
EPB electric parking brake failure, together with brake system warning light (lit continuously or flashing).
ABS system
ABS system failure.
ASR/CST system
ASR/CST system failure.
ASR/CST system disengaged.
ASR/CST system triggered (flashing).
Indicates ESC system failure.
Indicates intervention of ESC system (flashing)
Indicates ESC system deactivation.
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift
Indicates that the system is active.
Indicates that the system is active in Key-off state.
Indicates activation and deactivation of the system (flashing).
TPMS system
One or more standard type tyres punctured.
Vehicle has been driven for more than 100 Km (62 mi), or at a speed exceeding 80 Km/h (50 mph), following a
puncture to one or more RUN FLAT tyres.
One or more RUN FLAT type tyres punctured.
TPMS system failure.
TPMS system temporarily not active.
TPMS system not active.
TPMS system not calibrated.
Alternator failure
Alternator failure and insufficient or excessive battery charge.
Logistic Mode ON (lit continuously or flashing).
External lights
Running lights or low beam lights on.
During key-off, parking lights on.
Left hand turn indicators on.
Right hand turn indicators on.
Hazard warning lights simultaneously on.
High beam lights on.
Rear fog lights on.
Adaptive Light Control
Adaptive Light Control failure (flashing).
Vehicle alarm system
Vehicle alarm system failure (lit continuously or flashing).
System not programmed (lit continuously or flashing).
System failure and system not programmed (lit continuously or flashing).
Airbag
Airbag system failure.
Seat belts
Driver side seat belt not buckled.
Passenger side seat belt not buckled.
Indications on the TFT display Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
E5.04 Indications on the TFT display
The driver is notified of a fault by the instrument panel via the following events:
relevant fault warning light (if available) illuminated on instrument panel;
icon (if available) corresponding to fault displayed with relative specific message (if available) on TFT display;
The icon appears on the display simultaneously with the illumination of the warning light on the instrument panel
(if available).
All information contained in the display area reserved for messages is replaced by information concerning the
failure.
Faults are displayed according to the priority attributed to the faults themselves:
Priority 0 (very serious)
Priority 1 (serious)
Priority 2 (not serious)
In the event of multiple simultaneous faults, the faults are displayed in order, with priority 0 faults first, priority 1
faults next and priority 2 faults last.
The information relative to the faults are displayed for 5 seconds each, in "rolling" order. with the screens
displayed in rolling mode and in order of priority or occurrence of the relative fault event.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, another priority 1 or 2 fault occurs, this will replace the message currently
displayed only once the latter has been displayed for 2 seconds. The messages then continue to be
displayed in "rolling" order.
If, during the display cycle for a fault, a priority 0 fault occurs, this will replace the fault currently displayed
immediately, without waiting 2 seconds. The messages then continue to be displayed in "rolling" order.
During the display of multiple faults in rolling order, if any of the faults is interrupted by a new failure/check event
before its full display period has elapsed, the last event will be displayed nonetheless for 5 seconds, even if a
shorter period would suffice to complete its display cycle.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the set-up MENU functions, which are normally accessible via the
specific buttons, are disabled.
During the display of priority 0, 1 and 2 faults, the display of other main screens normally accessible with the
specific DISP button is disabled.
The faults remain displayed for 20 seconds.
In the event of faults with no physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle, the
relative symbol will be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display and will remain displayed until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified.
In the event of faults with a physical warning light on the instrument panel, at the end of the display cycle, the
relative symbol will not be shown in icon form in area C1 of the display.
Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault event will be shown again.
The fault is displayed for the period specified above at each key-on (until the malfunction generating the fault
has been rectified).
If the fault is rectified before the end of the display cycle, the message will continue to be displayed and the
relative warning light (if available) will remain lit for at least 2 seconds, to prevent undesirable "flashing"
effects.
The warning light (if available) extinguishes and the message disappears from the display simultaneously.
Fault display may be interrupted in two different ways:

by eliminating the malfunction generating the fault;
by pressing the button with "ESCAPE" functions.
Schedule maintenance
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Service Stop within:" followed by the value
in “kilometres” (or “miles”) or “days” remaining until the next vehicle service interval.
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area. In this case, as
there is no physical indicator light, the symbol is displayed in icon form in the specific area C1 until the
malfunction generating the fault has been rectified. Additionally, the screen displayed before the fault event
will be shown again.
Engine diagnostic system (EOBD)
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine control system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer".
Limp Home
The TFT display displays the specific message "Warning limited performance of the engine" together with
the message "Restart the engine".
Fuel
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Inertia switch triggered".
At the end of the display cycle, the TFT display displays the minimised icon in the specific area.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Fuel level low" together with information
concerning the remaining "Range" in Km (or mi).
In low remaining range conditions, the remaining range information in Km (or mi) is replaced by the
message "Limited cruising range".
The relevant message display cycle is repeated every 8 Km (5 mi).
Engine oil
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Check engine oil level".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low engine oil pressure" together with the
message "Stop and turn off engine".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine oil Too Hot" together with the
message "Slow down".
Coolant
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Engine coolant Too Hot".
Catalytic converters
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temp. Excess." together with the
message "Engine performance limited".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature not plausible "
together with the message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Catalytic conv. temperature high" together with
the message "Slow down".
DCT gearbox
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Transmission failure" together with the
E-Diff system
Priority 1
The TFT display shows the icon and the specific message "Recovery", depending on the signal it receives.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "E-DIFF system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer", if necessary for the particular signal received.
Power steering
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Powersteering Malfunction".
Brake system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EBD system failure" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake fluid level low" together with the
message "Go to dealer slowly".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Brake Pads Worn" together with the
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CCM disc brakes wear".
EPB electric parking brake
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EPB failure only manual unlock allowed: see
handbook".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "EPB is overheated see handbook".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Garage braking on".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Diagnosis activated".
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking Brake system revision" together with the
AVH system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "AVH system failure".
ABS system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ABS system failure" together with the
ASR/CST system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST on".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "CST system failure" together with the
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC off".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "ESC system failure" together with the
Suspension
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Suspension control system failure".
“Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Front Lift system failure" together with the
TPMS system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the specific message "Check tyre pressure" in the event of low tyre pressure.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Do not proceed", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with normal tyres.
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low tyre pressure" together with the
message "Max speed 80 Km/h", in the event of puncture if the vehicle is fitted with Run Flat tyres.
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS temporarily inactive".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS inactive".
Priority 2
TPMS system not calibrated.
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "TPMS not calibrated" together with the
message "Execute calibration".
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Calibration activated".
Electronic system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Electrical system failure" together with the
Proxi configuration check
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "System not programmed".
Battery
Priority 0
While the vehicle is connected to an external battery charger, the specific icon is displayed on the TFT display.
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alternator failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "LOGISTIC MODE ON".
External lights
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty running lights (front RH or LH -
rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Lamp Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones corresponding to the faulty turn indicators (front RH or LH -
rear RH or LH) "highlighted" in red and the specific message "Direction Indic. Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Foglamp Failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Stop Lamp failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Numberplate Lamp Failure".
Adaptive Light Control
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Adaptive Light Control failure".
Twilight sensor
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Twilight sensor failure".
Parking sensor system
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Parking sensor failure" together with the
message "Warning! Possible obstacles".
Vehicle alarm system
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction".
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer Malfunction Immobilizer not
programmed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Immobilizer not programmed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Alarm system failure".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Break-in attempted".
Doors/front lid/rear lid open
The TFT display displays the vehicle with the zones representing the open doors, luggage compartment lid and
engine compartment lid highlighted in red, and the specific message "Door open", "Doors open", "Front
bonnet open", "Rear bonnet open" or "Front and rear bonnet open".
Airbag system
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag system failure" together with the
Priority 0
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag test not performed".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Airbag warning light fault".
Heated seats
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Front LH Seat Heater" / "Front RH Seat Heater".
Manettino
Priority 1
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Manettino failure".
Rain sensor
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Rain sensor failure".
Ice hazard
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Warning: danger of ice".
Windscreen washer
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Low windshield washer fluid level".
Priority 2
The TFT display displays the icon and the specific message "Windshield wiper motor failure" together with
the message "Go to dealer ".
Switches and buttons Page 1 of 18
Print Exit
E5.05 Switches and buttons
Horn button
Press the buttons (A) to sound the horn.
Turn indicator buttons
Press the buttons (B) to switch the corresponding turn indicators on and off.
High beam light switch
With the low beam headlights on, pull the switch (C) to turn on the high beam lights.
To switch the high beam lights off again, pull or push the switch (C).
With the low beam lights off, push the switch (C) to flash the high beam lights.
The high beam lights may be flashed with the low beam light off only with the ignition switch in position II.
If the high beam light switch is turned on, the high beams will come on each time the headlights switch on
automatically. Preferably turn the high beam switch off once the twilight sensor switches off the lights.
With the ignition key turned to 0 or removed, push the switch (C) within 3 minutes from switching off the engine
(or within 30 seconds if the driver side door is opened) to activate the “Follow me home” function, which
illuminates the area surrounding the vehicle to allow the occupants to walk safely in dark conditions. Each
time the switch (C) is pushed again increases the time that the low beam lights remain on in increments of 30
seconds, up to a maximum of 210 seconds.
Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer and headlight washer control
Push and pull the switch (D) to activate and deactivate the windscreen wiper and washer.
The windscreen wiper and washer will only work with the ignition switch in position II.
The windscreen wipers have four speed settings:
OFF: windscreen wiper off;
AUTO: the rain sensor regulates the windscreen wiper frequency in relation to rain intensity;
1: continuous slow operation;

2: continuous fast operation.
With the windscreen wiper OFF, push and release the switch (D) quickly to set the windscreen wipers to AUTO
mode.
With the windscreen wipers OFF, pull and release the switch (D) quickly to make the windscreen wipers perform
a few, rapid wipes (instant screen clear function).
With the windscreen wipers on, push and release the switch (D) quickly to increase the windscreen wiper speed
setting in steps (from AUTO to 1 and from 1 to 2).
With the windscreen wipers on, pull and release the switch (D) quickly to reduce the windscreen wiper speed
setting in steps (from 2 to 1, from 1 to AUTO and from AUTO to OFF).
With the windscreen wipers in AUTO mode or OFF, press and hold the switch (D) to set the maximum speed (2).
With the windscreen wipers set to 1 or 2, press and hold the switch (D) to turn off the windscreen wipers.
Pull and hold the switch (D) to activate the windscreen washer. The windscreen wiper resumes operation at the
previous speed setting when the switch (D) is released.
The windscreen wiper will remain functional even in the event of electronic system malfunction.
In the event of malfunction, push the switch (D) to turn the windscreen wipers on and pull to turn off.
In the event of very severe malfunction, windscreen wiper operation may not be sustained automatically: in this
case, keep the windscreen wipers operating by pressing and holding the switch (D).
The headlight washers are activated automatically when the windscreen washer is operated with the low beam
headlights on. The headlight washer uses the same reservoir as the windscreen washer. A low fluid level is
indicated by the relative symbol on the left hand TFT display.
Suspension decoupling button
Press the button (E) to render the rear suspension setting independent of the Manettino control logic.
Irrespective of the current Manettino position, the suspension setting is set to Level 1 (COMFORT).
If the Manettino setting is altered after pressing the button (E), the suspension setting is determined by the
Manettino control logic.
After stopping and restarting the vehicle, the suspension setting will be determined by the Manettino position.
Manettino
The driving mode selector (Manettino) (F) on the steering wheel allows the driver to make full use of the
potential of the vehicle quickly and intuitively.
There are five different driving modes available, ordered in relation to ascending grip levels (from low to high
grip) offering progressively less driver assistance (from high to none).
Turn the Manettino (F) to select one of the five driving modes listed as follows:
Low grip / WET mode: driving mode offering maximum safety;
SPORT Mode: ideal mode for using the vehicle on an everyday basis;
RACE Mode: driving mode offering performance and stability in high grip conditions;
CT OFF Mode: F1-Trac traction control system is deactivated, whereas stability control remains active;
CST OFF / ESC OFF mode: all electronic control systems are deactivated except for the E-Diff.
In the event of a fault of any of the onboard systems, as indicated by the relative symbol on the left hand
TFT display, the Manettino enters "recovery" mode, allowing the vehicle to be driven.
CAUTION
Do not deactivate the CST system in medium or low grip conditions (wet road, ice, sand etc.).
CAUTION
With any gear higher than second gear engaged, the system automatically downshifts by one gear when the
driver switches from “Low Grip” mode to “SPORT” mode, or from “SPORT” mode to “RACE” mode.
Do not switch from “Low Grip” mode to “SPORT” mode, or from “SPORT” mode to “RACE” mode while in the
middle of a bend.
The system will not downshift automatically if doing so will cause engine speed to exceed a value or if a
downshift is already in progress due to excessively low engine speed.
Engine start button
Press the ENGINE START button (G) to start the engine.

Do not keep the ENGINE START button pressed for prolonged periods.
Release the ENGINE START button (G) as soon as the engine has started.
Replacing the steering wheel control panel

Remove the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).
Disconnect the connector (A).
Disconnect the connectors (B) and (C).

The connectors (B) have a secondary lock on the
outer side (use a suitable tool, such as a flat
headed screwdriver, to release)
The connectors (C) have a secondary lock at the

rear (press to release).
DO NOT disconnect the 2 connectors with grey

wires.
Remove the steering wheel mounted control panel

(D).
On the right hand side, refit the connector wires in

the indicated slit.
On the left hand side, refit the connector wires in

the indicated slit.
Locate the tabs (E) on the new steering wheel

mounted control panel.
When fitting the new steering wheel mounted

control panel, ensure that the tabs described
previously fit correctly in the relative seats (F) on
the steering wheel.
Press repeatedly in the positions indicated to fasten

the new steering wheel mounted control panel
correctly into place.
Connect the connectors (B) and (C).
Connect the connector (A).
Refit the driver side airbag module ( F4.02).

Perform a "complete test cycle" for the airbag system with the DEIS tester.
External light switch
The external lights will only work with the ignition switch in position II.
Turn the external light selector clockwise or counterclockwise to select between the following external light
modes:
Turn to position (A) to switch on the parking lights.
Turn to position (B) to set the lights to automatic mode, controlled by the twilight sensor.
Turn to position (C) to switch the lights off.
Turn to position (D) to switch on the daytime running lights.
Turn to position (E) to switch on the low beam headlights.
Press the button (F) to switch the rear fog lights on and off. The rear fog lights can only be switched on and
off if the low or high beam headlights are on.
The rear fog lights may be switched on manually once the external lights have switched on in automatic mode.
When the external lights switch off automatically, the rear fog lights are also switched off automatically (if on),
and will have to switched on again manually, if required, the next time that the external lights switch on
automatically.
With the parking lights on, press the high beam light switch (G) down to turn on the running lights on the left-
hand side, and press upward to turn on the running lights on the right-hand side.
Replacing the external light switch

Remove the indicated clips.

Remove the rear light switch (A) and replace.
Fit the new external light switch (A).
Refit the indicated clips.

Left hand TFT display control buttons
The MAIN (A) button recalls the MAIN screen.

The VDA (B) button scrolls through the VDA screens in sequence.
The OK button (C) has the following functions:
"escape", interrupting any active fault/warning display cycle, by pressing and releasing quickly with any active
screen;
toggling between Trip Tot / Trip A / Trip B / Range, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens
SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS active;
reset Trip A / Trip B, while the relative function is flashing, by pressing and releasing quickly with the screens
TRIP A / TRIP B active;
start chronometer (if chronometer is not already running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
CHRONOMETER screen active;
start / stop chronometer (if the chronometer is running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
confirm menu option selection, by pressing and releasing quickly with the MENU screen active;
confirm setting/modification made and go back to previous menu level (when in a submenu), by pressing and
releasing quickly with the MENU screen active;
reset Trip A (if Trip B is disabled), by pressing and holding with screens TRIP A / TRIP B active;
set Trip A to flashing mode, if Trip A information is currently displayed, by pressing and holding with any of
the screens SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS /
CHRONOMETER active;
set Trip B to flashing mode, if Trip B information is currently displayed, by pressing and holding with any of
the screens SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS /
CHRONOMETER active;
go back to the previous menu level, by pressing and holding with the MENU screen active.
The UP and DOWN (D) buttons have the following functions:

enable and set brightness adjustment, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens SPORT /
SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS / TRIP A / TRIP B active;
adjust twilight sensor sensitivity, if activated, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens
SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS / TRIP A / TRIP B
active;
toggling between Trip A / Trip B, if the odometer function is currently flashing, by pressing and releasing
quickly with any of the screens SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS /
MANETTINO STATUS / TRIP A / TRIP B active;
start chronometer (if chronometer is not already running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
stop chronometer (if the chronometer is running), by pressing and releasing quickly with the
select menu and submenu options, by pressing and releasing quickly with the MENU screen active;
reset chronometer (if the chronometer is stopped / running), by pressing and holding with the
CHRONOMETER screen active.
The RIGHT button (D) has the following functions:

scrolling between main screens (to the right), by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens
SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS / TRIP A / TRIP B /
CHRONOMETER active;
confirm menu option selection, by pressing and releasing quickly with the MENU screen active.
The LEFT button (D) has the following functions:

scrolling between main screens (to the left), by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens
SPORT / SPORT 2 / TYRES / SERVICE / VEHICLE STATUS / MANETTINO STATUS / TRIP A / TRIP B /
CHRONOMETER active;
go back to the previous menu level, by pressing and releasing quickly with the MENU screen active.
Right hand TFT display control buttons
The MAIN / ON - OFF button (A) has the following functions:

recall MAIN screen (if NIT is on), by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens MAIN / PHONE /
NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO active;
switch NIT off and recall default screen (if NIT is on), by pressing and holding with any of the screens MAIN /
PHONE / NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO active;
switch NIT on (if NIT is off), by pressing and holding with any of the screens MAIN / PHONE / NAVI / MEDIA /
RADIO active.
The BACK / VIEW button (B) has the following functions:

go back to previous menu level, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens MAIN / PHONE /
NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO active;
recall NQS screen (selected with specific option in setup menu), pressing and holding with any of the screens
MAIN / PHONE / NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO active.
The MENU / SETUP button (C) has the following functions:

recall specific MENU screen, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens PHONE / NAVI /
MEDIA / RADIO active;
recall NIT setup menu, by pressing and holding with any of the screens PHONE / NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO
active.
The navigation dial (D) has the following functions:

select and enable the PHONE, NAVI, MEDIA and RADIO function by pushing up and down with the MAIN
screen active;
select and enable the PHONE, NAVI, MEDIA and RADIO function by pressing right and left with the MAIN
screen active;
navigate the specific function menu, by turning with any of the screens PHONE / NAVI / MEDIA / RADIO
active;
confirm selected menu option, by pressing and releasing quickly with any of the screens PHONE / NAVI /
MEDIA / RADIO active.
The navigation dial (E) also adjusts the infotainment system volume.
EPB electric parking brake control buttons
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety device is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
The vehicle is held in position only by the electric parking brake, if engaged.
The lever (A) engages and releases the EPB electric parking brake (by operating the brake shoes) in the
following conditions:
engine off;
ignition key in position II (Key-on);
brake pedal depressed.
The parking brake may be used as an emergency brake while the vehicle is in motion. In this case, the system
continues to apply the brakes to all four wheels until the lever (A) is released, dialoguing with the ESP
stability control system, which prevents wheel lockup.
Autohold function
Pressing the AUTO PARK (B) button, after disengaging the EPB electric parking brake as described previously
and with the ignition key turned to II (Key-on), enables and disables the Autohold function that automatically
engages the EPB electric parking brake when the ignition key is turned to 0 (Key-off).
CAUTION
When the Autohold function is deactivated, when parking the vehicle, always remember to manually engage
the electric parking brake with the relative lever before switching off the engine.
When the button (B) is pressed, the message "PARK OFF" is displayed for 5 seconds on the left hand TFT
display. The next time the button (B) is pressed, the message "PARK ON" is displayed for 5 seconds on the
left hand TFT display.
AVH "Automatic Vehicle Holding" function
The electric parking brake ensures optimised brake release dynamics for hill starts with the Automatic Vehicle
Holding function: when certain conditions are met, the system keeps the vehicle braked by releasing the
brake shoes and callipers at different times, allowing the driver enough time to move the foot from the brake
to the accelerator without the vehicle rolling backwards.
Replacing the EPB electric parking brake control buttons


Remove the bracket (A).
Remove the EPB electric parking brake control
buttons (B) and replace.
Fit the new EPB electric parking brake control
buttons (B).
Fit the bracket (A).

Electrically adjustable steering wheel control
The steering wheel reach and rake are adjustable electrically (only with the key turned to II), by pushing the
control (A) in the intended direction of adjustment for the steering wheel.
The steering wheel position is memorised, together with the external rear view mirror position, when the driver
seat position is memorised (only on vehicles with memory seats).
DCT gearbox control buttons
Press the PS button (A) to activate the "Performance Start" function.

Activating this function ensures the fastest acceleration possible for the vehicle from a standing start.
The function, which cannot be selected with the Manettino set to “Low Grip” mode, transmits the optimum
amount of torque to the road surface to prevent wheelspin under acceleration.
Use the following procedure to activate the "Performance Start" function:
vehicle stationary;
brake pedal depressed;
gearbox in manual mode;
select first gear;
disable traction control by setting the Manettino to CST OFF;
press the PS button (A) on the centre console panel, an audible signal warns that the function is active and
the message “PS” is shown on the gearbox display;
press the accelerator pedal and release the brake pedal.
In the event of malfunction of the “UP” and “DOWN” shift paddles, the message “Depress brake pedal and
press PS to engage gear” is shown on the left hand TFT display. The gear may then be engaged by
pressing the PS button (A) on the centre console while depressing the brake pedal.
In this case, the “Performance Start” function is not available.
If the gear selected previously was R, the PS button (A) must be pressed twice to engage 1st gear.
Press R (B) to select reverse.

Release the R button (B) immediately once the relative gear selected is shown on the display. Holding the
button for a prolonged period of time will cause the gearbox fault warning indicator to light, accompanied by a
warning sound.
An audible safety signal sounds intermittently for as long as reverse in engaged.
If the system automatically engages 2nd gear when attempting to shift from "R" to 1st, this indicates that
crashing was encountered in 1st gear.

If crashing is encountered when attempting to shift from 1st to "R", the system automatically engages "N".
Press AUTO (C) to enable “Automatic” mode for the DCT gearbox.
The message “auto” is shown on the display when "Automatic" mode is enabled.
When in "Automatic" mode, the system automatically upshifts and downshifts in relation to vehicle speed,
engine speed and the torque/power requested by the driver.
When in "Automatic" mode, the driver may still shift manually using the UP and DOWN shift paddles.
After a manual shift, the system remains in "Automatic" mode, as indicated by the message “auto”, which
continues to be shown on the display and flashes when the driver shifts manually with the paddles.
When the vehicle is stationary, requesting "N" from 1st or "R" will not cause the gearbox to switch
from "Automatic" to "Manual" mode.
Press and hold the AUTO (C) button until the message “auto” is no longer shown on the gearbox display to exit
the DCT gearbox "Automatic" mode.
The default mode for the DCT gearbox is "Automatic".
At each engine start, the DCT gearbox will be in “Auto easy exit” unless the vehicle was last switched off with
the DCT gearbox in “Automatic” mode.
To exit “Auto easy exit” mode, simply press the AUTO (C) button on the centre console.
Power window buttons
CAUTION
Improper use of the power windows may be dangerous.
Always ensure that all persons and objects are at a safe distance before operating.
Use particular caution when operating the driver side window in automatic mode.
The power windows may only be operated with the ignition switch in position II.
Push the button (A) up or down briefly and release to raise or lower the driver side door window manually
(partial open/close).
Pushing and holding (for more than 0.3 seconds) the button (A) down or up lowers or raises the driver side door
window completely in one-touch automatic mode, with the window stopping only once it has completed its
travel or if the button is pressed again.

Push the button (B) up or down briefly and release to raise or lower the passenger side door window manually
(partial open/close).
Press and hold the button (B) (longer than 0.3 seconds) up or down to lower the passenger side door window
automatically (complete open/close) or raise manually.
Glove compartment open button
Press the button (A) to open the glove compartment lid.
On/off button for “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift (optional)
Press the button (A) to activate the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift with the engine running and at
speeds below 40 Km/h.
The “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift is disabled at speeds above 40 km/h. If vehicle speed
exceeds 40 km/h while the system is active, it is automatically deactivated.

Press the button (A) to deactivate the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift.
If the engine is switched off with the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift active, it is advisable to turn
the ignition key back to II (Key-on) and press the button (A) to deactivate the system.
If the system is not deactivated manually by pressing the button (A), the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front
suspension lift will be deactivated automatically 15 seconds after engine off.
In the event of engine fault, the “Front Lift” ramp clearing front suspension lift may still be activated by pressing
and holding the button (A) for 10 seconds.
Internal lighting Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
E5.06 Internal lighting
Removing the cabin light
Using a suitable tool, prise off the trim (A) and

remove.
Undo the three screws indicated fastening the cabin

light (B).
Using a suitable tool, prise out the cabin light (B)
from its seat.

Remove the protective cover and disconnect the
connector (2).
Remove the cabin light (B) from the vehicle.
Refitting the cabin light

Fastening cabin light Screw 3 Nm B
Place the cabin light (B) in the vehicle.

Connect the connector (2) and refit the respective
protective cover.
Fit the cabin light (B) in the relative seat, pressing

cabin light (B).

Screw 3 Nm B
Fit the cover (A) in its respective seat, pressing until

it snaps audibly into place.
Door controls Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E5.07 Door controls
CAUTION
Always check that the doors are closed correctly to prevent them from opening accidentally with the vehicle in
motion.
When the door is opened, the window (A) will automatically drop by approximately 2 centimetres to the target
position (1), to prevent contact with the door seal.
After the door is closed, the window (A) automatically rises to the upper limit (2).
Opening from the outside
Door controls Page 2 of 2
Deactivate the alarm and unlock the centralised locking with the remote control or by turning the key in the
relative lock.
Pull the handle (A) until the lock clicks open to open the door.
Opening from inside the vehicle
Pull the handle (A) until the lock clicks open to open the door.
When the door handle (A) is pulled without opening the door, the window drops to the "target position". If the
door is then not opened within two seconds, the window returns to the "upper limit".
To open the door, release the handle and pull again.
Pulling the door handle (A) unlocks both doors
Door lock
Press the "LOCK / UNLOCK" (A) button to lock and unlock both doors from inside the passenger compartment.
The rolling lock function, which automatically locks the doors when the vehicle speed reaches 20 Km/h, may be
enabled from the “Vehicle setup” screen viewable on the left hand TFT display on the instrument panel.
Ignition switch Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
E5.08 Ignition switch
The ignition key has two positions:

Position II (Key-on)
Position 0 (Key-off)
Position II (Key-on)
Turn the key clockwise to position (II).
The left and right hand TFT displays on the instrument panel power up and the system check cycle starts.
Once the system check cycle is complete, the letter “P” (Parking) or “N” (Neutral) must be displayed.
Position 0 (Key-off)
The key cannot be removed if the vehicle is not in Parking (the letter “P” must be shown in the gearbox
display).
Turn the key counterclockwise to position (0).

If running, the engine switches off.
The key may be removed.
When the key is even partially extracted, the steering column is locked.
The hazard warning lights and parking lights may be switched on.
To facilitate releasing the steering lock, wiggle the steering wheel gently while turning the key.
Key lock
If the key is not removed from the ignition switch within 20 seconds from turning to position (0), the key lock
system automatically prevents the key from being removed from the ignition switch.
Should this occur, press button (A) simultaneously while removing the key from the ignition switch in order to
remove the key from the ignition switch.
Starting the engine
Ensure that the antitheft system and any major current consumers are switched off.
Ensure that the EPB electric parking brake is engaged and the doors are closed correctly.
Turn the ignition key to II (Key-ON).

Wait for the gearbox display to switch on and for
the initial check cycle to complete.
Do not keep the ENGINE START button

pressed for prolonged periods.
DO NOT depress the accelerator while the

engine is starting.
Press the ENGINE START (A) button and release

as soon as the engine has started.
If the engine does not start, turn the key back to 0

(Key-OFF), wait for the gearbox display to
switch off and repeat the engine start procedure.
If the engine still does not start after repeated
attempts, the cause may be one of the following:
starter motor speed too low (flat battery), faulty
ignition system, faulty electrical contacts or
blown fuel pump fuses.
Rear view mirrors Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
E5.09 Rear view mirrors
Adjusting the interior rear view mirror
Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
The internal rear view mirror is electrochromic and dims automatically to reduce glare. The speed at which the
mirror dims varies in relation to the brightness of the incident light.
Grip the internal rear view mirror (A) and move

manually into the desired position.
Press button (1) to enable or disable electrochromic
dimming mode.
The green LED indicated lights to indicate when
electrochromic dimming mode is enabled. The
green LED is off when electrochromic dimming
mode is disabled.
Removing the interior rear view mirror
Detach the internal rear view mirror (A) from the

respective mounting.
Lift the windscreen cross member trim slightly in the

area indicated and pull out the connector (2).
Disconnect the connector (1) from the rain/twilight
sensor.
Remove the internal rear view mirror (A) from the
vehicle.
Refitting the interior rear view mirror
Place the internal rear view mirror (A) in the vehicle.

Connect the connector (1) to the rain/twilight sensor.
Connect the connector (2) and insert the connector
underneath the windscreen cross member trim,
lifting the trim in the area indicated.
Refit the internal rear view mirror (A) on the

respective mounting, pressing manually until the
mirror snaps audibly into place.
Adjusting the external rear view mirrors
Do not adjust the rear view mirrors while the vehicle is in motion.
The mirrors can fold forward or backward in the event of collision: if necessary, the mirrors may be pushed
forwards or backwards.
When reverse is engaged, the driver may adjust the passenger side rear view mirror into a different position
than the one used in normal driving to facilitate parking manoeuvres. This position may be memorised by
pressing the driving position memory buttons (E5.14, "Driving positions").
If a personalised reverse position for the rear view mirror has not been memorised, when reverse gear is
engaged, the external rear view mirror will still move slightly downwards and inwards (relative to the normal
driving position).
To adjust the driver side external rear view mirror,

turn the knob (A) 45° to the left.
To adjust the passenger side external rear view
mirror, turn the knob (A) 45° to the right.
Push the knob (A) in the corresponding direction to

adjust the field of view of the external rear view
mirror as desired.
After adjusting, turn the knob back (A) by 45° to the

centre position to prevent unintentionally altering
the rear view mirror setting.
Rotate the knob (A) by 180° to fold both external rear view mirrors inwards.
On versions with a driver seat with memory, the

positions for the rear view mirrors for both
normal driving and reversing are automatically
memorised together with each seat position
memorised.
To memorise a new position for the rear view
mirrors, turn the ignition key to "II" and adjust the
position of the mirrors as desired; select reverse,
adjust the rear view mirrors so that they offer the
best possible view for reversing, then shift out of
reverse.
Press and hold any of the three seat memory
buttons numbered 1, 2 and 3 (B) corresponding
to the three different memorisable positions, until
a double beep is emitted confirming that the
setting has been memorised.
The new rear view mirror setting is automatically
memorised together with the seat position.
The mirror setting may be adjusted either for normal
driving or for reversing.
Replacing the external rear view mirror adjustment control

Remove the indicated clips.

Remove the external light switch (A).
Remove the bracket (B).
Remove the external rear view mirror adjustment
control (C) and replace.
Fit the new external rear view mirror adjustment
control (C).
Fit the bracket (B).
Fit the external light switch (A).
Refit the indicated clips.

Replacing the external rear view mirror glass
Applying leverage in different positions, remove the

glass (A) from the rear view mirror housing.
Detach the cable branches (1) from the mirror glass

heater elements (A) and replace the glass.
Connect the heater element cable branches (1) to
the glass (A).
Manually press the glass (A) into place in the rear

view mirror housing.
Removing the external rear view mirror


Remove the hyperfrequency sensor (1) without
disconnecting it from the electrical system.
Remove the stickers (3) on the door slots.
Detach the connections from the door.

Prise off the indicated clip.

Detach and remove the complete rear view mirror
(A) from the door.
Refitting the external rear view mirror

Fastening external rear view mirror Nut 9.5 Nm B
DO NOT turn (open/close) the mirror on the

support base before it is fixed on the door.
Fit the complete rear view mirror (A) in relative seat

on the door.

Nut 9.5 Nm B

Secure the connections to the door.
Restore new stickers (3) on the door slots.
Fit a new waterproof liner sheet (2).

Make sure the waterproof liner sheet (2) is glued
correctly.
Fit the hyperfrequency sensor (1) and fasten it by

Screw 3.5 Nm B

F1 shift paddles Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
E5.10 F1 shift paddles
Gearshift paddles (F1 gearbox)
The driver can select the gears by means of two shift paddles located behind the steering wheel.
Pull the left shift paddle DOWN to downshift.
Pull the right shift paddle UP to upshift.
Pull both shift paddles to select neutral (N).
In the event of a malfunction of the UP and DOWN shift paddles, the message “Depress brake pedal and
press LAUNCH to engage gear” is shown on the left hand TFT display. To engage the gear, press the
LAUNCH button on the centre tunnel console while depressing the brake pedal.
In the event of a malfunction of the UP and DOWN shift paddles with R engaged, press the LAUNCH button
twice to select 1st gear.
In this case, the “Launch Control” function is not available.
Removing the F1 shift paddles
Located on the steering column, behind the steering wheel.

Undo the right hand lateral screw fastening the F1

gearbox shift paddles.
Undo the two screws indicated fastening the F1

Disconnect the connector (1) and remove the F1
gearbox shift paddles (A).
Refitting the F1 shift paddles

Fastening F1 shift paddles Screw 4 Nm B
Fit the F1 gearbox shift paddles (A) on the steering

column, arranging the cables correctly, and
connect the connector (1).
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the F1

Screw 4 Nm B
Tighten the right hand lateral screw fastening the F1


Screw 4 Nm B

Removing the steering angle sensor mounting
The switch is located on the steering column, behind the F1 gearbox shift paddles.

Remove the F1 shift paddles ( E5.10).
Disconnect the clock spring connector (1).
Disconnect the steering angle sensor connector (2).
Undo the indicated screw and remove the steering

angle sensor mounting (A) from the steering
column.
Refitting the steering angle sensor mounting

Fastening steering angle sensor mounting to Screw 6 Nm B
steering column
Fit the steering angle sensor mounting (A) on the

steering column and fasten by tightening the
indicated screw.

Screw 6 Nm B
Connect the steering angle sensor connector (2).
Connect the clock spring connector (1).
Refit the F1 shift paddles ( E5.10).

Lid and fuel filler flap opening systems Page 1 of 18
Print Exit
E5.11 Lid and fuel filler flap opening systems
Opening the engine compartment lid
Pull the release lever (A), located on the inner side

of the sill to the left of the driver side seat, until
the lock audibly clicks open.
Lift the engine compartment lid until the gas struts

take up the weight.
Emergency engine compartment lid release (UP TO Ass.ly No. 92450)
UP TO Ass.ly No. 92450, if the engine compartment lid cannot be opened with the relative release lever, the lid
lock may be opened by using the emergency release cable located behind the fuel filler flap.
FROM Ass.ly No. 92451, the emergency release cable has been eliminated.
Open the fuel filler flap ( E5.11).
Pull the emergency release cable (B) until the lock

audibly clicks open.
Lift the engine compartment lid until the gas struts

take up the weight.
Closing the engine compartment lid
CAUTION
Always check that the engine compartment lid is
closed correctly to prevent it from opening
accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
Lower the engine compartment lid to close and

press down on the lock area until it locks audibly.
Removing the engine compartment lid lock
Remove the left hand shield (3) by undoing the

indicated screws.
Remove the breather pipe (1) from the relative seat

on the shield (2).
Remove the shield (2).
Mark the position of the lock relative to the

mounting to facilitate subsequent adjustment.
Undo the indicated nuts and remove the lock (A).
Detach the retainer block (6) from the seat indicated

by the red arrow.
Detach the release cables (5) from the seat
indicated by the orange arrow.
Remove the lock (A) from the engine compartment.
Refitting the engine compartment lid lock

Fastening engine compartment lid lock Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening engine compartment lid lock shield Screw 4.1 Nm B
Fit the cable clamp for the release cables (5) in the
seat on the lock (A), indicated by the orange
arrow.
Fit the retainer block (6) in the seat on the lock (A),
Use the last retainer ring on the retainer block (6)
as shown in the photo aside.
Fit the lock (A) in the relative seat, using the

markings made during removal as reference.

Screw 9 Nm B

Use the relative release button and emergency release cable to check that the lock works correctly.
Close the lid and check that it remains closed after trying to force open with the hands.
If necessary, loosen the indicated nuts and adjust

the position of the lock (A).
Tighten the indicated nuts after adjusting as
required.

Screw 9 Nm B
If necessary, loosen the indicated screws and also

adjust the position of the lock striker plate (B).
Tighten the indicated screws after adjusting as
required.

Screw 9 Nm B
Fasten the left hand shield (3) by tightening the

indicated screws.
Fit the shield (2).


Screw 4.1 Nm B
Fit the breather pipe (1) in the relative seat on the

shield (2).
Opening the luggage compartment lid
The luggage compartment lid may also be opened with the ignition key removed.
Press the button (A) located on the driver side mat,

on the left-hand side of the seat.
The luggage compartment lid may also be opened

by pressing and holding the button (B) on the
ignition key for more than 2 seconds.
Keep the lever (C) pressed upward and lift the

luggage compartment lid until the two gas struts
take the weight of the lid itself.
Opening the luggage compartment lid in an emergency
If the luggage compartment lid cannot be opened with the relative release button, the lid may be opened using
the emergency release cable located under the dashboard on the driver side.
Pull the emergency release cable (D) until the lock


Closing the luggage compartment lid
Lower the luggage compartment lid to bring it into

contact with the lock.
CAUTION
Always check that the luggage compartment lid is
closed correctly to prevent it from opening
accidentally with the vehicle in motion.
Pressing onto the area over the lock, push the

luggage compartment lid down gently until it
locks audibly.
Emergency luggage compartment lid release for children
Pull the emergency release handle (E) until the lock


Removing the luggage compartment lid lock

Remove the Seeger rings indicated by the red

arrows.
Detach the emergency release cables (1) from the
lock (A).
Disconnect the connectors (2), (3) and (4).
Mark the position of the lock relative to the
mounting to facilitate adjustment.
Remove the luggage compartment lid lock (A).
Refitting the luggage compartment lid lock

Fastening luggage compartment lid lock Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening luggage compartment lid lock striker Nut 8 Nm B
plate
Fit the luggage compartment lid lock (A), aligning

the marks made during removal.

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the connectors (2), (3) and (4).

Attach the emergency cables (1) to the lock (A),
fitting the Seeger rings indicated by the red
arrows.

Use the relative emergency release button and cable to check that the lock works correctly.
Close the luggage compartment lid and check that it remains shut even when trying to force open with the
hands.
If necessary, loosen the indicated screws and

adjust the position of the lock (A).
Once adjustment is complete, tighten the indicated
screws.

Screw 8 Nm B
If necessary, the position of the lock striker plate (B)

may also be adjusted, after loosening the
indicated nuts.
Tighten the indicated nuts once adjustment is
complete.

Nut 8 Nm B
Opening the fuel filler flap
Press the button (A) located on the driver side mat,

on the left-hand side of the seat.
Open the fuel filler flap, pulling from the left-hand

side.
Opening the fuel filler flap in an emergency
If the fuel filler flap cannot be opened with the relative release button, it may be opened by using the emergency
release cable located on the right-hand side of the engine compartment.
Open the engine compartment lid ( E5.11).
Pull the emergency release cable (B) until the fuel

filler flap audibly opens.
Open the fuel filler flap, pulling from the left-hand

side.
Closing the fuel filler flap
Close the fuel filler flap and press on the left hand
area until it locks audibly.
Replacing the fuel filler flap actuator

Fastening fuel filler flap actuator Screw 5 Nm B
Located in the fuel filler neck compartment.
Open the fuel flap with the specific button.


Remove the right hand engine air duct.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the fuel filler

flap actuator (A).
Detach the fuel filler flap emergency release cable

(1) loosening the indicated nut.

Remove the indicated clip.
Remove the fuel filler flap actuator (A) complete
with emergency release cable from the relevant
seat
Fit the fuel filler flap actuator (A) complete with

emergency release cable in the relevant seat.

Screw 5 Nm B
Secure the fuel filler flap emergency release cable

(1) to the relevant bracket, tightening the
indicated nut.
Fasten the emergency cable with the indicated clip.

Connect the connector (2) to the fuel filler flap
actuator (A).
Check the correct operation of the emergency release by pulling the specific eyebolt in the engine
compartment.

Removing the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Using an appropriate tool, prise out the luggage

compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button
panel (A) from the relative seat.

Remove the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler
flap release button panel (A) from the vehicle.
Refitting the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release button panel
Fit the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap

release button panel (A) in the vehicle.
Install the luggage compartment lid and fuel filler

flap release button panel (A) in the respective
seat, pressing until the panel fastens into place.
Park Lock Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
E5.12 Park Lock
The Park Lock device is integrated in the gearbox and immobilises the vehicle to prevent involuntary movement
when the multiplate clutches are open, specifically, when the engine is off and/or with no hydraulic pressure
in the gearbox.
This device is activated automatically at every "Key-OFF".
Park Lock engaged
Park Lock disengaged
The mechanism consists of a retainer wheel located on the output shaft, onto which a cable-controlled ratchet
engages.
When the ratchet is over one of the teeth of the retainer wheel, the compression spring is loaded; as soon as the
vehicle begins to move, the ratchet drops between two teeth, the spring relaxes, the carriage moves and the
system locks.
When exiting park mode, carriage returns to its starting position and the compression spring retracts the ratchet
from the gap between the retainer wheel teeth.
The vehicle is equipped with a manual system for releasing the Park Lock, situated on the gearbox housing, for
use in the event of an emergency (e.g. vehicle breakdown or when transporting the vehicle with the battery
disconnected).
CAR WASH procedure
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety system is deactivated electronically (CAR WASH procedure), the vehicle may move
unexpectedly!
The Park Lock safety device may be temporarily deactivated electronically by carrying out the CAR WASH
procedure described as follows. This procedure is necessary, for instance, when the vehicle must be moved
without turning on the engine and when using an automatic car wash.
With the engine running, request 1st gear.

Request neutral "N".
Switch off the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to position "II" (Key ON) within 3 seconds after switching off the engine.
Check that the letter "N" (screen shown aside) is

shown on the gear indicator display instead of
the letter "P", and that the message "Carwash
mode activation" is shown on the left hand TFT
display.
The ignition switch must be kept in position "II"
(Key ON) to keep the Park Lock deactivated.
At the next Key OFF, the Park Lock activates once

again and resumes normal operation, and when
in Key ON state, the letter "P" appears on the
gear indicator display (screen shown aside)
instead of the letter "N".
Emergency Park Lock release procedure
CAUTION
When the Park Lock safety device is deactivated manually, the vehicle may move unexpectedly!
CAUTION
If the vehicle is NOT on a level surface, suitable chocks must be placed in front of or behind the wheels.
The emergency Park Lock release mechanism is situated above the gearbox and next to the engine air filter box
in the engine compartment.
To release the Park Lock in an emergency, proceed as follows.
Select the Allen key for releasing the Park Lock, p/n
261347, from the vehicle toolkit bag.
Open the engine compartment lid.

Extend the Allen key, p/n 261347, and fit into the
relative seat on the manual release mechanism,
as indicated in the photo aside, holding the tool
at an angle in order to reach the seat.
Once the key has been inserted in the relative seat

(1), apply gentle leverage against the filter box to
straighten the key relative to the seat.
Ensure that the guide groove on the Allen key is
aligned with the locator tang (2) in the seat on
the mechanism (1).
Release the Park Lock by turning the key fully (a

quarter of a turn) counterclockwise.
If the electrical system is sufficiently functional, turn

the ignition switch to "II" (Key ON) and check
that the letter "N" is displayed on the gear
indicator display instead of the letter "P", and
that the message "Gearbox not in Parking
position" is shown on the left hand TFT display.
Simultaneously, a warning sound is repeated
four times to indicate that the Park Lock has
been released.
After moving the vehicle to a suitable location, REACTIVATE the Park Lock as follows.
If the Park Lock cannot be reactivated, the vehicle will function correctly but at the next key-off, the device
will not activate and the vehicle will only be held in position by the electric parking brake. As a result, the
parking brake must be engaged after stopping the vehicle.
Fit the Allen key, p/n 261347, into the relative seat
on the mechanism as indicated in the photo
aside, holding the tool at an angle in order to
reach the seat.
Once the key has been inserted in the relative seat

(1), apply gentle leverage against the filter box to
straighten the key relative to the seat.
Ensure that the guide groove on the Allen key is
aligned with the locator tang (2) in the seat on
the mechanism (1).
Block the Park Lock by turning the key fully (a

quarter of a turn) clockwise.
If the electrical system is sufficiently functional, turn

the ignition switch to position "II" (Key-ON) and
check that the letter "P" is shown on the gear
indicator display instead of the letter "N".
Seat controls Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
E5.13 Seat controls
"Base" seat adjustment controls
CAUTION
Never adjust the seat position while driving, as this may cause loss of control of the vehicle.
- Backward/forward adjustment for cushion
Lift and hold the lever (A) and slide the seat forward or backward into the desired position.
Once in the desired position, release the lever (A) and shift the seat slightly to ensure that it has locked into
place.
- Backrest inclination
Turn the knob (B) clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the backrest inclination angle.
- Tipping the backrest
Lift the handle (C) to tip the backrest forwards.
"Electric" seat adjustment controls (optional)
CAUTION
Do not operate the electric seat adjustment controls while the backrest is tipped.
After opening one of the doors with the ignition key turned to 0, the seat may still be adjusted for a limited time
(approximately 15 seconds).
The seat may be adjusted again for a brief period each time that one of the doors is opened or both of the doors
are closed with the ignition key turned to 0.
- Adjusting the backward/forward position, height and tilt angle of the seat cushion
Push the control (A) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
forward/backward position of the seat.
Push the control (A) downwards or upwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the height
or tilt angle of the seat.
- Adjusting backrest inclination
Turn the control (B) forwards or backwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the
inclination of the seat backrest.
- Lumbar support adjustment (Full Electric option)
Push the control (C) forwards, backwards, upwards or downwards, as indicated by the arrows on the control
itself, to adjust the backrest lumbar support.
- Pneumatic bolster width adjustment (Full Electric option)
Push the control (D) as indicated by the arrows on the control itself, to adjust the width of the lateral backrest
and cushion sides.
- Driving positions (Full Electric option, driver seat only)
Use the three buttons (E) as described as follows to memorise or recall up to three different driving positions
(function only enabled in key-on state):
to memorise a driving position setting, adjust the seat, steering wheel and external rear view mirrors as
desired using the respective controls, then press and hold any one of the three buttons (E) (each button
corresponds to one memorisable position) for at least three seconds, until a double beep is emitted
confirming that the setting has been saved. Adding a new driving position setting to the memory
automatically replaces the setting assigned previously with the same button.
to recall a memorised driving position, press the relative button (E) and release within three seconds.
Driving position selection may not be recalled while the vehicle is in motion.
The movements begin once one of the buttons (E) is released.
After releasing one of the buttons (E), if the vehicle starts to move before the seat, steering wheel and external
rear view mirrors have reached their respective memory positions, they will continue moving until the
selected positions are reached.
If the memorised longitudinal position for the passenger seat is less than 50 mm from the rear travel limit, the
seat will stop at approximately 50 mm from the rear travel limit when the memorised seat position is recalled.
The seat may then be moved beyond this point using the forward/backward adjustment control.
Pressing any of the seat adjustment control buttons or memory buttons immediately arrests the automatic
function in progress (e.g. memory recall, driver seat easy entry/exit function or rear seat easy entry function).
- Heating (Full Electric option)
Turn the dial (F) to switch on the heated seat function and set the temperature.
Turning the dial to "0" switches the seat heating function off.
Lift the handle (G) to tip the backrest forwards.
"Super Racing" seat adjustment controls
CAUTION
- Backward/forward adjustment for cushion
Lift and hold the lever (A) and slide the seat forward or backward into the desired position.
Once in the desired position, release the lever (A) and shift the seat slightly to ensure that it has locked into
place.
- Backrest inclination
Turn the knob (B) clockwise and counterclockwise to adjust the backrest inclination angle.
Lift the handle (C) to tip the backrest forwards.
Infotainment system Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
E5.14 Infotainment system
A - NIT
B - Amplifier (Becker)
C - Radio amplifier
D - Tweeters (Faital/Becker)
E - Twiddlers
F - Twiddlers (Becker)
G - Woofers (Faital/Becker)
H - SDARS antenna
Removing the NIT


Remove the NIT (A), detaching the cable retainer
clip.

Open the tabs (3).
Remove the CANBOX (B).

Remove the NIT (A).
Refitting the NIT

Fastening the NIT Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the NIT (A).

Fit the CANBOX (B).

Close the tabs (3).
Fit the NIT (A), fastening the cable retainer clip.


Screw 5 Nm B

Replacing the woofer loudspeakers

Fastening the woofer Screw 3.5 Nm B


Remove the woofer (A) and replace.
Fit the new woofer (A).
Tighten the indicated screws

Screw 3.5 Nm B
High-power Hi-Fi

Remove the woofer (A) and replace.
Fit the new woofer (A).
Tighten the indicated screws

Screw 3.5 Nm B

Replacing the twiddlers
Lower


Remove the twiddler (A) and replace.
Fit the new twiddler (A).

Upper

Remove the lateral rear screen trim.

Remove the twiddler (A) and replace.
Fit the new twiddler (A).

Refit the lateral rear screen trim.
Replacing the planar speakers (high-power Hi-Fi)

Remove the planar speaker trim (high-power Hi-Fi).

Remove the speaker (A) and replace.
Fit the new speaker (A).

Refit the planar speaker trim (high-power Hi-Fi).
Replacing the tweeter loudspeakers
Passenger side

Remove the passenger side cosmetic grille.

Lift the tweeter (A).

Remove the tweeter (A) and replace.
Connect the connector (1) to the new tweeter.
Fit the new tweeter (A).


Refit the passenger side cosmetic grille.
Driver side

Remove the driver side cosmetic grille.

Lift the tweeter (A).

Remove the tweeter (A) and replace.
Connect the connector (1) to the new tweeter.
Fit the new tweeter (A).


Refit the driver side cosmetic grille.
Removing the amplifier (high-power Hi-Fi)

Remove the lower central trim panel.

Remove the amplifier (A).
Refitting the amplifier (high-power Hi-Fi)

Fastening amplifier Screw 6 Nm C

Fit the amplifier (A).

Screw 6 Nm C

Replacing the radio amplifier

Fastening radio amplifier Screw 7 Nm B

Remove the cabin light ( E5.06).

Remove the radio amplifier (A) and replace.
Fit the new radio amplifier (A).

Screw 7 Nm B
Refit the cabin light ( E5.06).

Replacing the SDARS antenna

Remove the rear screen cross member.
Open the relative protective foam and disconnect

the connector (1).
Undo the indicated nut and retrieve the relative
shim.
Working from outside the vehicle, remove the

antenna (A) and replace.
Fit the antenna (A), orienting correctly and checking
that it is correctly aligned.
Fit the relative shim correctly and tighten the

indicated nut.
Feeding the cable through the relative hole, connect
the connector (1) and close the relative
protective foam.

Refit the rear screen cross member.
Replacing the GPS antenna (optional)

Detach the GPS antenna (A) and replace.

Fit and glue the new GPS antenna (A).

File without name Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
E6.01 Sanding and cleaning
Pre-Cleaning
Steel. Remove rust by sandblasting, wire brush or coarse sanding paper (P16 to P80) to
achieve a bare substrate. For rust through areas tinning is recommended. In case of larger
damaged areas it might be necessary to weld in a new sheet or to replace the whole part.
Remove any remains like scale from welding, tinning or any parting compounds and fluxing
agents thoroughly.
Cleaning
Clean any old paint (OE finish) thoroughly with water first to remove any water soluble dirt.
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
Dry Sanding (rotary-orbital machine)
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders. Use a guide coat for best results:
TM ™ red pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
TM ™ grey pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Tinned Steel P80-P220
TM ™ red pad, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
E-Coat (spare P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ grey pad, 3
parts) M Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires
only cleaning)
OE Finish / Repair P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Coatings Soft Pad superfine
Putty / Filler Coarse sanding: P80 - P150, fine sanding:
P240 - P320
Spray Polyester Coarse sanding: P150, fine sanding: P240 -
P320
Primer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Topcoat (blending P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M
areas) Scotch-Brite ™ pad superfine
Clearcoat (blending P800 - P1500, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine, 3M
areas) Scotch-Brite ™ pad superfine
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Start with the coarsest grade and
carry on down to the finest grade. Fleeces and pads are especially recommended for edges
and borders:
E-Coat (spare parts)
P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
(faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning)

OE Finish / Repair
Coatings
Putty / Filler NEVER USE wet sanding for putties!
Spray Polyester NEVER USE wet sanding for putties!
Primer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Surfacer P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
Topcoat (blending P320 - P400, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine
areas)
Clearcoat (blending
areas)
Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D842 DX380 low VOC
Cleaner or D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. If using D842, rinse the surface with T494
Envirobase thinner immediately after degreasing, then dry the panel surface.
Print Exit
E6.02 Use of hardeners and diluents
The following tables show which hardeners and thinners have to be used together with the corresponding PPG
products depending on the ambient temperature.
Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer

HS Hardeners MS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner MS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D884 / D897 D808 D841 D808
18 – 25°C D884 / D897 D866 / D807 D841 D866 / D807
25 – 35°C D884 / D897 D812 D861 D812
Above 35°C D884 / D897 D869 D861 D869
N.B.: When using Deltron D821 primer as non-sand surfacers, it is recommended that the same
hardener is used in subsequently applied direct gloss colour or clearcoat. Consult the
appropriate technical datasheet(s) to identify a suitable common hardener.
Deltron BC – Solventborne Basecoat

Temperature Thinner
Up to 18°C D808
18 – 25°C D807
25 – 35°C D812
Above 35°C D869
Spot Repair D851 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "02 – Deltron BC"
For optimum durability and adhesion it is recommended to mix Deltron BC 10 : 1
with D841 MS Hardener, and then thin 1 : 1 with GRS Thinner prior to
application. Potlife of the activated basecoat is in excess of 48 hours. Application
and drying properties are unchanged.
Deltron D8109 – UHS low VOC Clearcoat

HS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D897 D808
18 – 25°C D897 D807
25 – 35°C D897 D812
Above 35°C D897 D869
D8208 D808
Spot Repair D868 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "171 –
Deltron D8109"
D865 / for detailed information see technical datasheet "171 –
Enhanced
Deltron D8109"
Extended
Deltron D8109"
Deltron D8105 – CeramiClearTM

HS Hardeners
Temperature
HS-Hardener Thinner
Up to 18°C D8215 -
18 – 25°C D8215 -
25 – 35°C D8215 -
Above 35°C D8215 -
Spot Repair D8215 -
Extended
Deltron D8105"
Print Exit
E6.03 Preparing and painting the aluminium sheets
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109
Substrate Preparation and Cleaning

for detailed information see chapter / section “Sanding and Cleaning”.
Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 (DX330) Spirit Wipe o D845 (DX310) High
Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC
Cleaner.
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate. Use a guide coat for best results:
Aluminium / P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,

Magnesium 3M Soft Pad superfine
OE Finish / Repair P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,
Coatings 3M Soft Pad superfine
Wet Sanding (manual)
Do not wet sand

Cleaning
Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837 DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength
Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner.
Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4 hours.
Deltron D831 – Universel
For detailed information see technical datasheet "10 – Universel D831"
For detailed information see chapter / section “Sanding and Cleaning”
Mixing Ratio D831 1 vol

D832 / D833 * 1 vol
* For exceptional conditions of temperature and humidity (> 35°C / > 70%) and for
large areas use Slow Reactive Thinner D833
Number of coats: 2-3
Flash-off between coats at 20°C: 5 minutes
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes
Dry to sand at 20°C 30 - 45 minutes (D832)
Total dry film build: 15 - 20 µm

Repair / Recoating: with P400 (dry), if necessary
Overcoat / Re-coat time at
at 20°C (airdrying): 30 – 40 minutes
Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer [Primer Surfacer]

For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Hardener and thinner selection: for detailed information see chapter / section “Hardeners and
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1 vol
Thinner 1 vol Thinner 1 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol
HS-Hardener 1 vol MS-Hardener 1,5 vol
Flash-off between coats at 20°C: 10 – 15 minutes

Flash-off before stoving at 20°C: 10 – 15 minutes
Drying times:
Dustfree at 20°C 35 minutes

Touch dry at 20°C 1,5 - 2 hours (tinted: 2 – 2.5 hours)
Through dry at 20°C Overnight
Through dry at 60°C
20 – 25 minutes tinted: 30
minutes (metal temperature)
Through dry (IR) 10 - 15 min
Total dry film build: 70 – 110 µm (tinted: 60 – 90 µm)
Sand with P400 (dry) or P800 (wet)
Galvaplast 77
For detailed information see technical datasheet "76 - Fillers"
Addition of hardeners from –5°C to 10°C 2,5 % - 3,0 %

(A665, A666, A667) from 10 °C to 20 °C from –2,0°C to 2,5°C
from –20°C to 30°C from –1,5°C to 2,0°C
(by weight)
Application: use a suitable knife or spreader. Apply one or more coats as necessary, allowing 5 –
10 minutes at 20°C between coats. Galvaplast 77 can be used directly on the bare metal.
Dry to sand:
from –5°C to 10°C 25 – 35 minutes

from 10 °C to 20 °C 20 – 30 minutes
IR medium 5 – 6 minutes
IR short 4 – 5 minutes
Dry sanding paper grades: P80 - P120 - P240

Overcoating at 20° C: 30 minutes
Primer Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant [low VOC Primer Surfacer]

D104 /For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:

20 – 25 minutes; tinted: 30
Approved Topcoats to be used with this Repair System

Deltron BC see technical datasheet "02 – Deltron BC"
Deltron D8105 see technical datasheet "170 – Deltron D8105"
Notes:
- D8105 can be replaced by D8109 if the Fade-out technique is required .
- The following system is required if on the car the Colour Code label indicates “WATERBORNE
TECHNOLOGY”.
- If a damaged part has to be repaired without replacing it, it is absolutely necessary to sand the OE
Clear thoroughly. Superficial sanding can result in adhesion problems.
- Panel repair - also of adjacent parts – is recommended for optimum scratch resistance!
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Aluminium substrates, total or partly
respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
Aluminium / Magnesium
Cleaning / Sanding see below
Primer Universal D831
Surfacer (if polyester filler is
Deltron D821 HS
necessary)
Putty / Filler (If necessary) Galvaplast 77
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC
Clearcoat(s) Deltron D8105, Deltron D8109

Cleaning
Cleaner.

Do not wet sand

Cleaning


D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes


Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:

Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:

IR short 4–5 minutes

Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:


Envirobase see technical datasheet "125 – Envirobase"

Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
Print Exit
E6.04 Preparing and painting the steel sheets
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, conventional with sanding,for Steel substrates, total or partly respray,
for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS / Deltron D821 MS /
Surfacer
HS HS HS
Basecoat(s) Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC Deltron BC
Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105 Deltron D8105
Clearcoat(s)

Cleaning
Cleaner.
Steel P80 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad,

3M Soft Pad superfine
Galvanized Steel P320 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Soft Pad superfine
Tinned Steel P80-P220
Aluminium / P150 - P220, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Magnesium Soft Pad superfine
E-Coat (spare P280 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ grey pad, 3M
parts) Soft Pad ultrafine (faultless E-Coat requires
only cleaning)
OE Finish / P240 - P400, 3M Scotch-Brite ™ red pad, 3M
Repair Coatings Soft Pad superfine
Use the following paper grades depending on the substrate
E-Coat (spare parts) P600 - P800, 3M Soft Pad ultrafine

(faultless E-Coat requires only cleaning)
OE Finish / Repair
Coatings
Cleaning
After wet sanding rinse thoroughly with clear water. Clean with a suitable pre-cleaner, e.g. D837
DX330 Spirit Wipe o D845 DX310 High Strength Degreaser. If there is any VOC legislation in
force, use D8401 Waterborne low VOC Cleaner. Overcoat any exposed Aluminium within 4
hours.
Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:


D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes

Deltron D821 – 2K HS Chip Resistant Primer [Primer Surfacer]

D104 / For detailed information see technical datasheet "104 – Deltron D821"
Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:



Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
CeramiClearTM warranty repair system, compliant (low VOC, european legislation) with sanding, for Steel
substrates, total or partly respray, for stonechipping areas and tintable surfacer.
Substrates
E-Coat (spare
Bare Steel Galvanized Steel OE Finish
parts)
Cleaning / Sanding see below see below see below see below
Putty / Filler Galvaplast 77 Galvaplast 77
Primer Universal 831 Universal 831
Surfacer Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS Deltron D821 HS
Basecoat(s) Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase Envirobase
Clearcoat(s)

Cleaning
Cleaner.

Do not wet sand

Cleaning
Galvaplast 77

(by weight)
Dry to sand:




D832 / D833 * 1 vol
Drying times:
Dustfree 5 minutes


Thinners”
Mixing Ratio
Untinted
D821 5 vol D821 3 vol
Tinted
D821 3 vol D821 3 vol
DG 1 vol DG 1 vol

Drying times:



Notes:
TECHNOLOGY”.
Restoring the cataphoresis coating Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
E6.05 Restoring the cataphoresis coating
Restoring the cataphoresis coating
Any damage to the cataphoresis coating must be protected immediately as follows.
Only mix the amount necessary to restore the coating, as once mixed, the product must be used within 1
hour.
Prepare the product, mixing equal volumes of the two components (50% epoxy primer PPG Universel D831
and 50% catalyst PPG Universel D832).
Clean the area to be treated thoroughly with a clean cloth soaked in R107/S.
The repair product may be applied by airbrush or with a standard brush:
Airbrush application
Protect the surrounding areas and nearby components against heat.
Apply 2 or 3 coats of product, waiting 5 minutes between coats.

The dry film must measure between 15 μ and 20 μ in thickness.
Dry until dust free for 5 minutes or with a hot air gun for automotive paint shops at maximum power and at a
distance of 20 cm for 10 minutes.
Brush application
Protect the surrounding areas and nearby components against heat.
Apply a thin coating of product.

Dry until dust free for 5 minutes or with a hot air gun for automotive paint shops at maximum power and at a
distance of 20 cm for 10 minutes.
Print Exit
F1.01 Tightening torques

Fastening windscreen wiper arms Nut 25 Nm B
Fastening headlamp Screw 7.5 Nm B
Nut 8 Nm C
Fastening windscreen wiper linkage Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening horn Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening battery positive terminal clamp Nut 4.5 Nm C
Fastening starter motor - mounting bracket Nut 4.75 Nm A
Fastening starter motor mounting bracket - lower Pretightening torque for 5 Nm 0
crankcase shell screw
Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening power cable - starter motor Nut 14 Nm A
Fastening starter motor actuator cable Nut 6.2 Nm A
Fastening heat shield - starter motor Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening taillight unit Nut 7.5 Nm B
Fastening threaded bushings to cylinder heads Bushing 15 Nm B
Fastening alternator - engine Screw 49 Nm B
Fastening bracket to alternator Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening engine service cable to alternator Nut 14 Nm B
Fastening bracket and ELDOR ionizing ECU to Screw 9 Nm B
chassis
Fastening yaw node Screw 6 Nm B
Fastening DCT gearbox ECU to mounting bracket Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening EPB ECU mounting bracket to chassis Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening EPB ECU to mounting bracket Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening ECU to battery Screw 1 Nm C
Fastening the reinforcement plate Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening the power steering ECU Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening the MagneRide ECU mounting bracket Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening the tyre pressure monitoring system Nut 6 Nm B
ECU
Fastening the parking sensor ECU mounting Screw 6 Nm B
bracket
Fastening passenger's footrest cross member. Screw 5 Nm C
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=mo&link=link::SM_SM_F10... 8/5/2011

Fastening body computer node Screw 8 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B
Fastening third stop light Nut 4.5 Nm C
Fastening parking camera ECU bracket Screw 9 Nm C
Fastening unions to compressor Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening compressor to engine Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening pipes to dehydrator filter Screw 8 Nm B
90802)
90802)
Fastening underbody union with pipe leading to Union 27 Nm B
90802)
Fastening unions to condenser Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening A.C. pipes to expansion valve Nut 16 Nm B
Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening pipes to expansion valve Nut 16 Nm B
Fastening AC unit Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening oil temperature sensor on heat Oil temperature sensor 20 Nm B
exchanger
Fastening oil pressure sensor on heat exchanger Pressure sensor 38 Nm A
RPM sensor Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening By-pass valve control solenoid valves to Screw 4 Nm B
air filter box
Fastening coolant temperature sensor to Temperature sensor 18 Nm B
connection on water delivery pipe
Fastening timing sensor Timing sensor 8 Nm A
Variable timing adjuster solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
High pressure fuel pump Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw
Screw 10 Nm B
High pressure pipe - rail Nut +1 0
23 -1 Nm
High pressure pipe - pump Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Complete rail pipe - cylinder head Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
Screw/stud bolt 10 Nm B

Soundproofing cover - complete fuel rail Screw +0 0
6 -2 Nm
Low pressure pipe - high pressure pump Nut +2 0
20 -0 Nm
Complete fuel rail mounting Screw 10 Nm B
Fastening Motronic ECU mounting bracket to Screw 8.5 Nm B
chassis
Fastening driver side airbag module Screw 9.5 Nm A
Fastening inertia switch to bodyshell Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening anti-lift sensor Screw 2 Nm C
Fastening the door airbag modules Screw 8 Nm B
Screw 4 B
Fastening the buzzer Screw 5 Nm C
Fastening anti-theft siren Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening the crash sensors Screw 6.5 Nm A
Fastening the passenger side airbag Nut 8 Nm B
Screw 8 Nm B
Fastening accelerator pedal Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening secondary air pump bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Fastening vacuum accumulator tank Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening dashboard substructure trim Screw 5 Nm B
List of light bulbs Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F1.02 List of light bulbs
Bulb application Type Power (12V)

High / Low beams Gas discharge Das
(Xenon) lamp
Front running lights LED
Front turn indicators LED
Side turn indicators Incandescent T4W
Running lights in taillight LED
Rear fog lights Incandescent W16W
Reverse lights Incandescent H6W
Stop lights LED
Rear turn indicators LED
Number plate lights Incandescent 5W
Side Markers Incandescent W3W
Third stop light LED
Cabin light Incandescent 8W
Spot light Incandescent 5W
Document compartment light Incandescent 5W
Underdoor courtesy light Incandescent 5W
Luggage compartment light Incandescent 10W
Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
F2.01 Battery, disconnecting / reconnecting
Specifications
The battery is located in the passenger compartment, behind the passenger side footrest.

Brand: FIAMM
Type: VR760 - 12V - 65Ah - 760A EN

Brand: FIAMM
Type: VRLA - L3 AGM - 12V - 70Ah - 760A EN
The battery is a sealed, maintenance-free unit.

The advantages of this type of battery are very low electrolyte consumption, self-discharge current and gas
release during charging.
This battery has more than ample capacity to cater for the current consumption of the electrical systems
originally installed on the vehicle.
This location ensures optimum operating conditions for the battery and extends battery life.
Installing additional electrical devices (telephone, etc.), increases absorption and necessitates special
maintenance to ensure that the battery is charged correctly at the specified intervals.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760, a battery master switch is located in the luggage compartment, which is used to
disconnect the battery in the event of work on electrical components or prolonged periods with the vehicle
not in use.
Note that the battery has a self-discharge current of approximately 7 mA. As a result, in the event of particularly
prolonged periods with the vehicle not in use, recharge the battery at least once every months.
Removing the battery
Each time the battery is disconnected from the electrical system of the vehicle, all the self-acquisition
parameters are cancelled from the injection ECU.
These parameters must be reacquired before reusing the vehicle.
The battery is located in the passenger compartment, behind the passenger side footrest.

Release connector (1) from bodyshell.

Position connector aside so that it does not hinder
the following operations.

Lift crosspiece (B).

Remove the crosspiece (B).
CAUTION
When removing a battery from a vehicle, always start
from the earth (negative) terminal when
disconnecting connections.
Release the quick release clamp on the negative

pole of the battery using the lever (C).
Disconnect the quick release clamp from the
negative battery pole.

Remove the bracket (D).
Disconnect vent pipe union, and remove battery.
Vent pipe union is positioned on battery right-hand
side.
Press the indicated tabs.

Detach and remove the cover (E).
Remove the bracket (2), undoing the indicated

screws.
Disconnect the positive terminal clamp, loosening
the indicated nut.
Remove battery from vehicle.
Refitting the battery

Fastening battery positive terminal clamp Nut 4.5 Nm C
Fastening ECU to battery Screw 1 Nm C
Fastening passenger's footrest cross member. Screw 5 Nm C
CAUTION
When installing a battery in a vehicle, always start
from the positive terminal when making
connections.
Connect and fasten the positive terminal clamp,


Nut 4.5 Nm C
Fit the bracket (2), tightening the indicated screws.

Screw 1 Nm C
Fit and fasten the cover (E), pressing on the

indicated clips.
Position battery, connecting vent pipe union.

Vent pipe union is positioned on battery right-hand
side.
Fit the bracket (D).


Screw 10 Nm B
CAUTION
When removing a battery from a vehicle, always start
from the earth (negative) terminal when
disconnecting connections.
Connect the quick release clamp to the negative

battery pole.
Fasten the quick release clamp onto the false
negative pole of the battery using the lever (C).
Position cross member (B).


Screw 5 Nm C
Attach connector (1) to bodyshell.
Fit the crosspiece (B).


Restoring the self-adaptive parameters
parameters are cancelled from the ignition/injection ECU.
These parameters must be restored before the vehicle is used again, proceeding as follows.
The self-acquisition function of the Motronic ECUs will only be performed correctly at intake air temperatures
above 5 °C. Ensure that the ambient air temperature is not below this value.
Leave the engine stationary for approximately 10 minutes in the following conditions:
engine at idle speed;
water temperature stabilised;
current consumers switched off (lights, windscreen wipers etc.);
air conditioner off.
These preparations allow the ECU to optimise the self-adaptive parameters quickly by preventing irregular
engine operation.
Disconnecting the battery
Never disconnect the battery from the electrical system while the engine is running.
Before disconnecting the battery, lower the side windows by at least 2 or 3 centimetres to prevent
damage to the seals when opening and closing the doors.
If the battery is flat and the side windows are completely raised, open the door only if strictly necessary
and with the utmost caution, and do not close again afterwards, as the window will not be able to drop
automatically.
Disconnect the battery when working on current consumers or in the event of prolonged periods with the vehicle
not in use.
Disarm the electronic alarm with the remote control.
Disconnecting the battery with battery master switch (UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760)
Prise off the rubber plug (1) on the right hand

cosmetic engine compartment shield.
Open the cover (2).
The battery master switch may only be

operated by Ferrari Service Network
personnel.
Using the specific TORX wrench, turn the battery

master switch (A) counterclockwise to set to
OFF.
Disconnecting the battery with quick release clamp (FROM Ass.ly No. 90761)
Lower the passenger side footrest mat (A) with the

relative loop.
Release the quick release clamp on the negative

pole of the battery using the lever (B).
Disconnect the quick release clamp from the
For vehicles with HELE
Release the quick release clamp on the false

negative pole of the battery using the lever (B).
Disconnect the quick release clamp from the false
Reconnecting the battery
Each time the battery is connected to the electrical system of the vehicle, WAIT 1 MINUTE before
inserting the key in the ignition switch and do not switch on any current consumers during this period.
After inserting the ignition key, turn to "II" and WAIT AT LEAST 1 MINUTE before starting the engine.
This procedure ensures that the ECUs in the vehicle are powered up and synchronised correctly, that all
motorised valve aperture and closure travel parameters are self-acquired correctly and that AC ECU
self-acquisition is performed correctly.
These self-acquisition procedures are initiated each time the battery is connected to the vehicle.
Reconnecting the battery with battery master switch (UP TO Ass.ly No. 90760)
The battery master switch may only be

operated by Ferrari Service Network
personnel.
Using the specific TORX wrench, turn the battery

master switch (A) clockwise to set to ON.
Fit the cover (2) on the battery master switch.
Fit the rubber plug (1) on the right hand cosmetic

engine compartment shield.
Reconnecting the battery with quick release clamp (FROM Ass.ly No. 90761)
Connect the quick release clamp to the negative

battery pole.
Fasten the quick release clamp onto the negative
pole of the battery using the lever (B).
For vehicles with HELE
Connect the quick release clamp to the false

Fasten the quick release clamp onto the false
negative pole of the battery using the lever (B).
Lift the passenger side footrest mat (A) with the

relative loop.
Carry out the following operations before starting the engine: close the doors, the engine compartment lid and
the luggage compartment lid, unlock and lock the doors with the remote control, set the date and time on
the instrument panel, close the doors, raise the door windows to the upper limit and check that the
windows drop to the target position when the doors are opened.
If this procedure is not followed correctly, the buttons in the passenger compartment for opening the
luggage compartment lid, locking/unlocking the doors and releasing the fuel filler flap will be disabled.
Restore the self-adaptive parameters ( F2.01).
Key-operated circuits Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F2.02 Key-operated circuits
Key-operated circuits
Start-up
Windscreen wiper and washer
Number plate lights
Stop lights
Turn indicators
Low beam/high beam/flash
Rear fog lights
Reverse lights
Side Markers (USA)
Document compartment light
Seat adjustment and comfort functions
Power windows
Injection/Ignition
Electric fuel pumps
Air conditioning and heating system
Instrument panel
Radiator cooling fan motors
Defrost windscreen, engine compartment lid window and rear view mirrors
External rear view mirror adjustment
Suspension setup control system
ABS - CST system
Exhaust temperature monitoring circuit
Tyre pressure monitoring system (optional)
Front suspension lift (Front Lift) (optional)
Switch and control lighting
Airbag system
Logistic Mode Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F2.03 Logistic Mode
This is a mode in which a number of vehicle functions are inhibited or deactivated to prevent improper use of the
vehicle during transport.
After receipt of the activation signal, the specific message "Logistic mode ON" is shown in area A of the TFT
display.
Simultaneously, the “Alternator failure” light starts flashing (1 Hz - DC 50%).
"Logistic Mode" may be deactivated with the DEIS tester,
Alternator Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
F2.04 Alternator
Removing the alternator
The alternator is located under the intake manifold.

Remove the ancillary belt ( A3.12).
Remove the sheath (3) on the engine service cable

(5).
Remove the engine service cable (5) from the

alternator (A) undoing the indicated nut.
Detach the pipes (1) of the brake servo vacuum

system, undoing the indicated screws.
Move the pipes (1) of the brake servo vacuum
system from above the alternator so that they
will not hinder the subsequent operations.
Undo the indicated screws fastening the bracket (2)

to the alternator (A), retrieving the washers.
Undo the screws indicated by the red arrows,
retrieving the washers.
Pull up the alternator (A) from the engine
compartment.
Refitting the alternator

Fastening threaded bushings to cylinder heads Bushing 15 Nm B
Fastening alternator - engine Screw 49 Nm B
Fastening bracket to alternator Screw 10 Nm B
Check if the cylindrical bushings (6) are installed in

the relative seats on the cylinder heads.
Make sure that the threaded bushings (7) are
installed and tightened correctly.

Bushing 15 Nm B
From the engine compartment, fit the alternator (A)

Fit and hand tighten, after fitting the relevant
washers, the screws indicated by the red arrows
fastening the alternator (A).

Screw 49 Nm B
Fit and tighten the indicated screws fastening the

bracket (2) of the alternator (A), after fitting the
relevant washers.

Screw 10 Nm B
Fasten, with the relevant clamps, the pipes (1) of

the brake servo vacuum system, tightening the
indicated screws.

Apply Protective grease for electrical contacts
on the eyebolt of the engine service cable (5)
and on the relevant fastening pin on the
alternator (A).
Fasten the engine service cable to the alternator (A)

Nut 14 Nm B

Starter motor Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
F2.05 Starter motor
Removing the starter motor

Remove the heat shield (1) on the starter motor,

undoing the three indicated screws and
retrieving the relative bushes.
Undo the indicated screw and open the clamp (2).

Move the protective cap (4) on the cable (3) aside,
then undo the indicated nut.
Undo the indicated nut on the cable (5).
Undo the two indicated screws fastening the

mounting bracket (6) for the starter motor on the
lower crankcase shell.

starter motor (A) to the gearbox-differential
housing flange.
Detach the starter motor (A), complete with bracket,
pulling toward the front of the vehicle.
Refitting the starter motor

Fastening starter motor mounting bracket - lower Pretightening torque for 5 Nm 0
crankcase shell screw
Screw 25 Nm B
Fastening starter motor - mounting bracket Nut 4.75 Nm A
Fastening starter motor actuator cable Nut 6.2 Nm A
Make sure the components are clean before fitting.
Fit the starter motor (A), complete with bracket, in

the relative seat on the engine.
Fit and tighten the three screws indicated fastening
the starter motor (A) to the gearbox-differential
housing flange.

Screw 25 Nm A
Loosen the nuts, indicated by the red arrows,

fastening the starter motor (A) to the mounting
bracket (6).
Ensure that the surfaces are mated correctly and
pretighten the screws indicated by the black
arrows.

Pretightening torque for screw 5 Nm 0
Ensure that the surfaces are correctly mated and

snug the nuts indicated by the red arrows,
without tightening.
Tighten the screws, indicated by the black arrows,
fastening the mounting bracket (6) to the lower
crankcase shell.

Screw 25 Nm B
Tighten the nuts, indicated by the red arrows,

fastening the mounting bracket (6) to the starter
motor.

Nut 4.75 Nm A
Fit the cable (5) in the relative seat on the starter

motor, positioning as shown in the photo aside,
and tighten the indicated nut.

Nut 6.2 Nm A
Fit the cable (3) in the relative seat on the starter

motor, positioning as shown in the photo aside,
and tighten the indicated nut.

Nut 14 Nm A
Secure the cables with the clamp (2), then fasten

the clamp by tightening the indicated screw.
Fit the protective cap (4) as originally installed in the
relative seat.
Fit and fasten the heat shield (1) on the starter

motor by tightening the three screws indicated
after installing the relative bushes.
The lower screw also fastens the retainer clamp
on the earth cable.

Screw 10 Nm B
Lamps Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
F2.06 Lamps
Replacing the Xenon low/high beam light
The following procedure is for replacing the left hand xenon low/high beam lamp.
The procedure for replacing the right hand xenon low/high beam lamp is identical.

Turn the lamp retainer ring (2) counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb (A) from the headlight.
Replace the lamp (A).
Fit the light bulb (A) in the headlight.
Turn the lamp retainer ring (2) clockwise and check
that the lamp is securely fastened.
Lamps Page 2 of 9
Fit the cover (1).

Replacing the taillight bulb
Remove the taillight unit ( F2.07).
Remove the cover (1) from the taillight unit by

undoing the three nuts indicated.
Lamps Page 3 of 9
Ease the bulb holder (2) out of the taillight unit.
Remove the bulb (A) from the bulb holder (2).

Replace the lamp (A).
Insert the new bulb (A) into the bulb holder (2).
Ensure that the bulb is correctly fastened in the
bulb holder (2).
Fit the bulb holder (2) into the taillight unit.
Lamps Page 4 of 9
Fit the cover (1) on the taillight unit and fasten by

Refit the taillight unit ( F2.07).
Replacing the side repeater turn indicator lamp
The following procedure is for replacing the right hand side repeater turn indicator lamp.
The procedure for replacing the left hand side repeater turn indicator lamp is identical.
Using a suitable tool and taking care not to damage

the bodywork, prise out the side repeater turn
indicator (A) from the front fender.
Lamps Page 5 of 9
Remove the outer lens (B) from the side repeater

turn indicator (A).
Remove the lamp (C) from the side repeater turn

indicator (A) and replace, ensuring that the new
lamp is installed and connected correctly.
Refit the outer lens (B) onto the side repeater turn
indicator (A).
Lamps Page 6 of 9
Refit the complete side repeater turn indicator (A)

onto the vehicle, press fitting by hand into the
relative hole in the front fender until flush.
Replacing the number plate light bulb
Prise the number plate light unit (A) out of its seat
on the bumper, applying leverage on the right-
hand side of the light, as shown in the photo
aside.
The fastener clips are on the right-hand side of the
number plate light unit.
Lamps Page 7 of 9
Detach the number plate light unit (A) from the bulb
holder (B).
Remove the bulb from the bulb holder (B) and
replace.
Fit a new bulb in the bulb holder (B).
Fit the number plate light unit (A) onto the bulb
holder (B).
Fit the number plate light unit (A) into the relative
seat on the rear bumper, inserting the left-hand
side first and then pushing the right-hand side up
and into place.
The fastener clips are on the right-hand side of the
number plate light unit.
Replacing the rear fog light bulb

Remove the rear element.
Lamps Page 8 of 9
Remove the bulb holder (A) from its seat.

Remove the bulb from the bulb holder (B) and
replace.
Fit the new bulb in the bulb holder (A).
Fit the bulb holder (A) in the relative seat.

Replacing the side marker bulbs

For front side marker bulbs only. Remove the front bumper ( E3.03).
For rear side marker bulbs only. Remove the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse only.
Turn the bulb holder (1) counterclockwise by 90°.

Remove the bulb holder (1) from its seat.
Lamps Page 9 of 9
Remove the bulb (A) from the bulb holder (1) and
replace.
Insert the new bulb (A) into the bulb holder (1).
Fit the bulb holder (1) in its respective seat.

Turn the bulb holder (1) clockwise by 90°.
For front side marker bulbs only. Refit the front bumper ( E3.03).
For rear side marker bulbs only. Refit the rear wheelhouses ( E3.05).
Lights Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
F2.07 Lights
AFS2 adaptive headlights (optional)
The adaptive headlight system AFS2 (optional) links the angle of both the left and right front headlight beams
(low and high beam) with the steering angle for improved road illumination and to eliminate dark areas ahead
of the vehicle in bends.
The lateral angle of the headlights, which ranges from 8° toward the centre and 15° toward the exterior, is
dependent on the steering angle.
The AFS2 system also includes a “Dynamic Levelling” function, which ensures that the light beam is correctly
aimed vertically under acceleration and braking by tilting the headlights by up to 1.9° upward under braking
and up to 1° downward under acceleration.
The adaptive headlight system overrides the curve correction function at low speeds.
Removing the headlight
The following procedure is for removing the right hand headlight.
The procedure for removing the left hand headlight is the same.

Lights Page 2 of 7

headlight (A) to the chassis.
Remove the headlight (A) from the relative seat.
Refitting the headlight

Fastening headlamp Screw 7.5 Nm B
Nut 8 Nm C
Lights Page 3 of 7
Fit the headlight (A) in the relative seat.

headlight (A) to the chassis.

Screw 7.5 Nm B
Adjust the pad (2) to bring it into contact with the

headlight (A), applying minimal preload without
altering the alignment of the headlight itself (A).
Tighten the nut (3) fastening the pad (2).

Nut 8 Nm C

Lights Page 4 of 7
Adjusting headlight alignment
Park the vehicle, unloaded and with the tyres inflated to the specified pressure, on a flat, level surface in front
of a shaded white screen.
Draw two crosses on the screen corresponding to

the centres of the low beam headlights.
Move the vehicle 10 metres backwards and switch
on the low beam headlights: The reference
points P1 of the light beam must be lower than
the respective crosses by 1/10 of the distance
between the ground and the crosses themselves.
The values given here are with reference to
applicable legislation in Italy. For other
countries, comply with the local legislation.
If necessary, adjust the headlight beams with the

relative adjuster screws.
Removing the taillight unit
The following procedure is for removing the left hand taillight unit.
The procedure for removing the rear right hand light cluster is identical.

Lights Page 5 of 7
Disconnect the connector (1) and undo the three

nuts indicated.
Remove the taillight unit (A), easing outward.
Refitting the taillight unit

Fastening taillight unit Nut 7.5 Nm B
The following procedure is for refitting the left hand taillight unit.
The procedure for refitting the rear right hand light cluster is identical.
Fit the taillight unit (A) into its seat from outside the
vehicle and fasten by tightening the three nuts
indicated.

Nut 7.5 Nm B

Replacing the front side markers
Lights Page 6 of 7
Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the front side

marker (A).
Press the front side marker (A) outward from the
bumper to remove from its seat and replace.
Fit the new front side marker (A) in its respective
seat, pushing into the bumper.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the front
side marker (A).

Replacing the rear side markers

Remove the rear element of the rear wheelhouse only.

Undo the two nuts indicated fastening the rear side
marker (A).
Press the rear side marker (A) outward from the
bumper to remove from its seat and replace.
Fit the new rear side marker (A) in its respective
seat, pushing into the bumper.
Tighten the two nuts indicated fastening the rear
side marker (A).
Tighten the new clamp in the indicated position.

Refit the rear element of the rear wheelhouse.
Replacing the rear fog light
Lights Page 7 of 7


Remove the rear fog light (A) and replace.
Fit the new rear fog light (A).

Refit the rear element of the rear wheelhouse.
Fuses and relays Page 1 of 15
Print Exit
F2.08 Fuses and relays
Locations of fuse boxes and relays
A - Fuses on battery
B - Fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)
C - Fuses and relays in passenger side of passenger compartment
D - Fuses and relays in driver side of passenger compartment
Fuse colour
A5_Ochre yellow
A7.5_Brown
A10_Red
A15_Light blue
A20_Yellow
A25_White
A30_Green
Maxi-fuse colours
A20_Yellow
A30_Green
A40_Orange
A50_Red
A60_Blue
Replacing fuses on battery

Release connector (1) from bodyshell.

Position connector aside so that it does not hinder
the following operations.

Lift the crosspiece (A).

Remove the crosspiece (A).

Detach and remove cover (2).
Replace the fuses and/or relays using the following

diagram as reference.

Fit the cover (2).
Fit the crosspiece (A).

Attach connector (1) to bodyshell.
Fit the crosspiece (A).


Fuses on battery
Ref Amp. Use

CAL5 CAL5 Power supply (starter motor and alternator)
F-70 150 Power supply for engine fuse and relay
ECU (SCM)
F-71 40 Ramp clearing front suspension lift pump
F-72 40 Parking brake power
F-73 70 Dashboard ECU power
Replacing fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)



Fuses and relays on dashboard (Body computer)
Ref Amp. Use

F-12 15 Right hand low beam light
F-13 15 Left hand low beam light
Ref Amp. Use

F-31 7.5 INT/A for dashboard ECU relay coils and
Body computer node
F-32 10 Cabin lights, footwell lights, puddle lights
and Side Marker relay coil
F-33 15 (not used)
F-34 30 Suspension control node
F-35 7.5 Stop light control, clutch control, AC node
F-36 10 Volumetric antitheft system, parking
sensors, furl filler flap relay coil
F-37 10 Stop light control, Instrument Panel Node,
Suspension Control Node
F-38 15 Luggage compartment lock actuator
F-39 15 Dashboard ECU devices (NBC
interconnections)
F-40 30 Heated rear screen
F-41 15 (not used)
F-42 7.5 Alternator
F-43 30 Windscreen washer/wiper relay power
F-44 20 Passenger seat heater, cigarette lighter
F-45 25 (not used)
F-46 20 (not used)
F-47 30 Driver side door, driver side power window
F-48 30 Passenger side door, passenger side power
window
F-49 7.5 Rain and twilight sensor, parking sensors,
parking brake control, adjustable
steering column control, hazard warning
lights, Steering Wheel Node, Differential
Control Node, radio, CAN box 1 interface
F-50 7.5 Airbag node, weight sensor
F-51 7.5 Semi-automatic gearbox node
F-52 15 Power socket, driver seat heater
F-53 10 Instrument panel node power
T01 20 Low beam relay
T11 30 Heated rear screen relay
T12 30 Services 1 relay (dependent on INT/A
ignition switch)
T13 50 Bridge (services 2 power)
Replacing fuses and relays in passenger side of passenger compartment
Remove the removable compartment (A).


Remove the lid and the glove

compartment ( E4.02).
Remove the relays (B) and replace if necessary.
Remove the box (C).
Refit the removable compartment (A).
Fuses and relays in passenger side of passenger compartment
Ref Amp. Use

F-01 60 +30 Radiator fan relay 2
F-02 30 +30 ABS (valves)
F-03 30 +30 Roof node (pump) - (not used)
F-04 50 +30 ABS (pump)
F-05 40 +30 AC node
F-06 50 +30 Radiator fan relay 1
F-07 20 +30 Horn relay
F-08 7.5 AC compressor
F-09 7.5 +30 Third stop light relay 2
F-10 15 +30 Fuel pump relay 1
F-11 25 Left hand cylinder bank oxygen sensor
F-14 15 +30 High beam relay
F-15 7.5 +30 EPB stop light control relay power, right
hand headlight LED module power relay
F-16 25 +30 Right hand cylinder bank engine
management power
F-17 25 +30 Left hand cylinder bank engine
management power
F-18 10 +30 Left hand cylinder bank injection
system power supply, LH main injection
relay coil
F-19 10 +30 Right hand cylinder bank injection
system power
Ref Amp. Use

system main relay
F-22 15 Left hand cylinder bank (ignition coil)
F-23 10 +30 ABS (electronics)
F-24 15 Right hand cylinder bank (ignition coil)
F-30 30 +30 Hi-Fi amplifier relay
F-81 40 +30 Supplementary ECU power
F-82 70 +30 Power supply for dashboard ECU and
ECU on rear lateral panel on driver side
F-83 50 +30 Air pump relay
F-85 25 Headlight washer
F-87 25 Right hand cylinder bank oxygen sensors
F-88 10 +15 Left hand cylinder bank injection system
system
F-90 7.5 (not used)
F-91 15 +30 Tyre Pressure Node, LH headlight LED
module relay
F-92 7.5 +30 Alternator sensing
F-93 30 +30 Ignition switch
F-94 15 +30 Stabiliser for radio/CAN box/ICP/clock
spring/Japan navigator
F-95 10 +30 Stabiliser for instrument panel
F-96 10 (not used)
F-97 30 +30 Stabiliser for Becker amplifier
F-98 30 (not used)
F-99 30 (not used)
T02 30 High beam relay
T03 30 Relay for second fuel pump speed
T05 30 Fuel pump relay 2
T06 30 Dashboard compartment relay
T07 50 Horn relay
T08 30 A.C. compressor relay
T09 30 Left hand cylinder bank injection system
main relay
T10 30 Right hand cylinder bank injection system
main relay
T14 30 Fuel pump relay 1
T15 50 Engine cooling electric fan relay - second
speed
T16 50 Engine cooling electric fan relay - first speed
T17 10/20 INT/A relay (services excluded upon engine
start)
T19 30 EPB stop light control relay
T20 30 Starter relay
T26 10/20 First windscreen wiper speed relay
Ref Amp. Use

T27 10/20 Second windscreen wiper speed relay
T28 30 Windscreen washer pump relay
T29 30 Third stop light relay
T30 50 Air pump relay
T31 30 Headlight washer pump relay
T37 30 Radiator fan relay 2
T38 30 Power relay for left hand headlight LED
module
T39 30 Power relay for right hand headlight LED
module
T40 30 Radiator fan relay 1
Replacing fuses and relays in driver side of passenger compartment

Remove the lower left hand lateral trim panel only.


Refit the lower left hand lateral trim panel.
Fuses and relays in driver side of passenger compartment
Ref Amp. Use

F-54 20 +30 Gearbox cooling fan
F-55 (not used)
F-56 30 +30 Driver side setup node
F-57 7.5 Side Markers 1 (front LH and rear RH)
F-58 (not used)
F-59 7.5 Reverse lights power
F-60 30 +30 Passenger side setup node
F-61 7.5 +30 Driver side setup node (electronics),
ramp clearing front suspension lift
F-62 7.5 +30 Passenger side setup node (electronics)
F-63 15 +30 Main relay for semi-automatic gearbox
F-64 7.5 Fuel filler flap actuator power
F-65 20 +30 Door lock actuator
F-66 7.5 +30 Semi-automatic gearbox node
F-67 7.5 Side Markers 2 (front RH and rear LH)
F-68 (not used)
F-69 (not used)
F-77 (not used)
F-78 15 +30 Battery charger
F-79 (not used)
F-80 30 +30 Starter relay
T21 50 Side Markers relay
T22 30 Reverse light relay
Ref Amp. Use

T23 30 Fuel filler flap relay
T24 30 Gearbox cooling fan relay
T25 30 Main relay for semi-automatic gearbox
T41 30 Aerodynamic relay 1
T43 30 (not used)
T42 30 Aerodynamic relay 2
R2 Starter relay 2
R3 Starter relay 3
Horn Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F2.09 Horn
Replacing the horn

Fastening horn Screw 5 Nm C
There are two horns located behind the front bumper, next to the headlights.
The following procedure is for removing the right hand horn.
The procedure for removing the left hand front horn is the same.

Remove the right hand luggage compartment shield.
Remove the air duct (1), undoing the screws

indicated.
Horn Page 2 of 2

Undo the screw indicated, remove the horn (A) and
replace.
Fit the new horn (A) in its seat, tightening the screw
indicated.

Screw 5 Nm C
Fit the air duct (1) and fasten by tightening the

screws indicated.

Diagnostic socket Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F2.10 Diagnostic socket
Connecting the DEIS diagnostic tester
There is a socket (A) underneath the steering

column for connecting the DEIS diagnostic tester
to the vehicle.
There is an alternative socket (B) on the Body

computer, behind the relative trim panel.
Once connected to either of these sockets via the specific connector harness supplied, the DEIS diagnostic
tester can interface with and diagnose all the systems in the vehicle.
ECUs Page 1 of 24
Print Exit
F2.11 ECUs
Location of ECUs in vehicle
A - ABS/ASR ECU
B - Parking sensor node
C - Parking camera ECU
D - Passenger door node ECU
E - AC system ECU
F - DCT gearbox ECU
G - Yaw node
H - Vehicle lift ECU
I - Right hand Motronic ECU
L - Eldor ECU
M - EPB ECU
N - Left hand Motronic ECU
O - Driver door node ECU
P - Body Computer node
ECUs Page 2 of 24
Q - Airbag ECU
R - Power steering control ECU
S - Tyre pressure ECU
T - Magneride ECU
U - Adaptive headlight node ECU
V - Vent ECU
Z - Satellite antitheft system ECU (optional)
Replacing the right hand Motronic ECU

chassis
The right hand Motronic ECU is located above the right hand wheelhouse.

Remove the bracket (1) complete with right hand

Motronic ECU, undoing the screws indicated.
ECUs Page 3 of 24
Disconnect the connectors (2) and replace the

Motronic ECU (A) after removing it from the
relevant bracket (1).
Secure the new Motronic ECU (A) to the relevant
bracket (1) until it is correctly fastened and
connect the connectors (2).
Fasten the bracket (1) complete with right hand

Motronic ECU to the chassis, tightening the
screws indicated.

Screw 8.5 Nm B

Refit the rear right hand wheelhouse

Perform the engine ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Replacing the left hand Motronic ECU

chassis
The left hand Motronic ECU is located above the left hand wheelhouse.

ECUs Page 4 of 24
Remove the bracket (1) complete with left hand

Motronic ECU, undoing the screws indicated.
Disconnect the connectors (2) and replace the

Motronic ECU (A) after removing it from the
relevant bracket (1).
Secure the new Motronic ECU (A) to the relevant
bracket (1) until it is correctly fastened and
connect the connectors (2).
Fasten the bracket (1) complete with left hand

Motronic ECU to the chassis, tightening the
screws indicated.

Screw 8.5 Nm B
ECUs Page 5 of 24
Refit the rear left hand wheelhouse.

Replacing ELDOR ionizing ECU

Fastening bracket and ELDOR ionizing ECU to Screw 9 Nm B
chassis
NEVER start the engine with the ELDOR ECUs disconnected: this would irreparably damage the coils
and the Motronic ECUs.
The ELDOR ionizing ECU is located behind the rear right hand wheelhouse.

Detach the connectors (2) from the ELDOR ionizing

ECU (A).
Undo the indicated screws, and retrieve cover (1), if
any, and ELDOR ionizing ECU (A).
Pay ATTENTION to the code indicated on the
ECU to avoid installing the previous version,
which would damage the coils and the
Motronic ECUs.
Position ELDOR ionizing ECU (A) into its seat onto

frame, and cover (1), if any, onto it, and secure
everything tightening the indicated screws.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the connectors (2) to the ELDOR ionizing

ECU (A).

Removing adaptive headlight ECU
The adaptive headlight ECU is located under the right hand headlight.
ECUs Page 6 of 24

Remove the front element of the front right hand wheelhouse.
Detach the connector (1), undo the indicated

screws and remove the adaptive headlight ECU
(A) and replace.
Fit the adaptive headlight ECU (A) in the relevant
seat and fasten by tightening the indicated
screws.

Replacing the yaw node

Fastening yaw node Screw 6 Nm B
The yaw node is located under the centre console trim panel.

ECUs Page 7 of 24
Detach the connector (1), undo the indicated

screws and remove the yaw node (A) and
replace.
Fit the yaw node (A) in the relevant seat on the
centre console and fasten by tightening the
indicated screws.

Screw 6 Nm B

Replacing DCT gearbox ECU

Fastening DCT gearbox ECU to mounting bracket Screw 9 Nm C
The DCT gearbox ECU is located under the lower right hand lateral trim panel.

Remove the lower right hand lateral trim panel.

Loosen the indicated screw, turn the retainer plate
(2) and remove the DCT gearbox ECU (A) from
the relevant seat on the bracket and replace.
Fit the DCT gearbox ECU (A) in the relevant seat
on the bracket, turn the retainer plate (2), as
shown in the photo aside, and tighten the
indicated screw.

Screw 9 Nm C
ECUs Page 8 of 24
Replacing the EPB ECU

Fastening EPB ECU to mounting bracket Nut 9 Nm B
Fastening EPB ECU mounting bracket to chassis Screw 9 Nm B
The EPB ECU is located behind the rear right hand wheel.

Remove the clip (1) from the EPB linkage bracket

(2).
Detach the end (3) of the EPB Bowden cable from
the EPB linkage bracket (2).

cable from the EPB equaliser (7) after removing
the indicated safety key.
Remove from the mounting bracket (4) the EPB
equaliser (7).
ECUs Page 9 of 24
Undo the indicated screw that fastens the cable (5)

leading to the EPB ECU.
Undo the screws indicated fastening the chassis

and remove the bracket (6) complete with EPB
ECU.
On the workbench separate the EPB ECU (A) from

the relevant mounting bracket, undoing the
indicated nuts.
On the new EPB ECU remove the cap from the inlet
for the EPB parking brake manual release.
Fit the EPB ECU (A) on the mounting bracket.

Nut 9 Nm B
ECUs Page 10 of 24
Check that the indicated inlets coincide.
Fasten the bracket (6) complete with EPB ECU to

the chassis, tightening the screws indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Secure the cable (5) leading to the EPB ECU on the

relevant clamp, tightening the screw indicated.
ECUs Page 11 of 24
Fit in the relevant seat on the mounting bracket (4)

the EPB equaliser (7).
cable on the EPB equaliser (7) and insert the
indicated safety key.
Attach the end (3) of the EPB Bowden cable to the

EPB linkage bracket (2).
Refit the clip (1) in the relative seat on the EPB
linkage bracket (2).

Replacing the tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ECU

Fastening the tyre pressure monitoring system Nut 6 Nm B
ECU
The ECU is located behind the driver side reinforcement plate.
ECUs Page 12 of 24

Remove the pedal mat.

Remove the reinforcement plate (1).
Move the reinforcement plate aside without
disconnecting the power steering ECU from the
system.

Remove the tyre pressure monitoring system ECU
(A) and replace.
Fit the tyre pressure monitoring system ECU (A) in
the relative seat.

Nut 6 Nm B
Fit the reinforcement plate (1).


Screw 5 Nm B
ECUs Page 13 of 24

Perform the TPMS ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Replacing the power steering system ECU

Fastening the power steering ECU Screw 5 Nm B
Located behind the driver side reinforcement plate.


Turn the reinforcement plate (1) over.

Remove the power steering ECU (A) and replace.
Fit the new power steering ECU (A) in the relative
seat.

Screw 5 Nm B
ECUs Page 14 of 24


Screw 5 Nm B

Replacing the Magneride ECU

Fastening the MagneRide ECU mounting bracket Screw 5 Nm B


Move the reinforcement plate aside without
disconnecting the power steering ECU from the
system.
ECUs Page 15 of 24
If installed in vehicle
Replace the tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ECU ( F2.11).

Dismantle only, without disconnecting from the system.

Undo the indicated screws and remove the
Magneride ECU (A), complete with mounting
bracket.
On the workbench, detach the Magneride ECU (A)
from the mounting bracket.
Fit the Magneride ECU (A), complete with mounting
bracket, in the relative seat.

Screw 5 Nm B
If installed in vehicle
Replace the tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ECU ( F2.11).

Refit only.


Screw 5 Nm B

ECUs Page 16 of 24
Replacing the parking sensor ECU

Fastening the parking sensor ECU mounting Screw 6 Nm B
bracket

Remove the passenger side floor mat; complete removal of the mat is not necessary, simply lift up the front
right hand corner.
ECUs Page 17 of 24
Disconnect the connectors (1) from the ECU.

Detach the clip indicated by the red arrow.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90580, it is not necessary to
detach the clip indicated by the red arrow.

Remove the parking sensor ECU (A) complete with
mounting bracket (2).
On the workbench, separate the parking sensor
ECU (A) from the relative mounting bracket.
Fit the new parking sensor ECU (A), complete with
mounting bracket, in the relative seat.

Screw 6 Nm B
Fasten the clip indicated by the red arrow.

Replace the waterproof membrane (3).

Fit the waterproof membrane (3) around the ECU
as originally fitted, ensuring that it adheres
correctly in the indicated positions.

Replacing the door node (NPG/NPP)

ECUs Page 18 of 24

Remove the door node (A).
Remove the waterproof membrane (1).

Replace the door node (A).
Fit a new waterproof membrane (1).

Fit the door node (A).
Do not use the lower hole.

Screw 5.5 Nm B

ECUs Page 19 of 24
Replacing the body computer node

Fastening body computer node Screw 8 Nm B
Screw 5 Nm B


Remove the underdashboard mat on the driver side.

Remove the bracket (A) complete with body
computer node, detaching the cable retainer
clips.

Detach the body computer node (B) from the
bracket (A) and replace.
Fit the new body computer node (B) on the bracket
(A).

Screw 8 Nm B
ECUs Page 20 of 24
Fit the bracket (A) complete with body computer

node, fastening the cable retainer clips.

Screw 5 Nm B

Refit the underdashboard mat on the driver side.

Replacing the airbag ECU

Fastening airbag ECU Screw 10 Nm B

ECUs Page 21 of 24

Remove the airbag ECU (A) and replace.
Fit the new airbag ECU (A).

Screw 10 Nm B


Carry out the system operating procedure with the tester.
ECUs Page 22 of 24
Replacing the Front Lift ECU

Remove the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.

Remove the ECU (A) and replace.
Fit the new ECU (A).

Refit the front element of the rear right hand wheelhouse.
Replacing the satellite antitheft system ECU (optional)

Remove the upper dashboard trim panel.

Remove the satellite antitheft system ECU (A).
Undo the indicated screw, disconnect and remove
the GPS antenna (B).
Detach and remove the GSM antenna (C).
Replace the satellite antitheft system ECU (A).
Fit and attach the GSM antenna (C).
Fit and attach the GPS antenna (B) and tighten the
indicated screw.
Fit the new satellite antitheft system ECU (A).
ECUs Page 23 of 24
Refit the upper dashboard trim panel.
Removing the parking camera ECU

Fastening parking camera ECU bracket Screw 9 Nm C

UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Remove the dashboard trim panels ( E4.02).
Remove the lower central trim panel.
UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Remove the amplifier (high-power Hi-Fi) ( E5.14).

FROM Ass.ly No. 93145. Remove the mats ( E4.05).

Remove the parking camera ECU (B) and replace.
Fit the new parking camera ECU (B).

Screw 9 Nm C

ECUs Page 24 of 24

Remove the parking camera ECU (B) and replace.
Fit the new parking camera ECU (B).
FROM Ass.ly No. 93145. Refit the mats ( E4.05).

UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Refit the amplifier (high-power Hi-Fi) ( E5.14).

UP TO Ass.ly No. 93144. Refit the dashboard trim panels ( E4.02).
Rain/twilight sensor Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F2.12 Rain/twilight sensor
Rain sensor
The rain sensor (part of a single unit with the twilight sensor) operates in the infrared range and measures the
refraction caused by raindrops of a beam of light passing through the windscreen to automatically adjust the
windscreen wiper frequency in proportion with rain intensity.
The rain sensor is activated by selecting "AUTO" windscreen wiper mode with the relative control on the
steering wheel.
Twilight sensor
When the external lights are set to "AUTO" with the light control dial, the twilight sensor (part of a single unit with
the rain sensor) switches the low beam lights and the running lights on and off automatically. The running
lights and low beam lights are switched off by the twilight sensor (with the external light dial set to "AUTO")
according to the following logic:
low beam lights off: upon reception of the relative command from the twilight sensor;
running lights off: 10 seconds after low beam lights are switched off.
The sensitivity of the sensor may be set via the instrument panel.
Checking rain sensor operation
Perform on vehicle fitted with battery.
Using the relative control on the steering wheel, turn the windscreen wiper from off to "AUTO".
Check that the windscreen wiper functions automatically, commanded by the rain sensor (with a dry screen,
the system will still perform a wash cycle approximately every 5 seconds).
Wet the windscreen slightly in the area over the sensor (with a spray bottle or sponge) and check that the
windscreen wiper activates and then stops when the area over the sensor is dry again.
A rain sensor fault is indicated by a specific indicator light on the instrument panel.
Checking twilight sensor operation
Perform on vehicle fitted with battery.
Rain/twilight sensor Page 2 of 2
Place the vehicle in a brightly lit area (for example, with a halogen lamp shining directly onto the windscreen
in the area over the twilight sensor).
Turn the dial to "AUTO" and check that the lights remain off.
Cover the sensor with a black screen and check that the lights switch on with no noticeable delay.
Remove the black screen from the sensor and check that the lights switch off after a delay of a few seconds.
A twilight sensor fault is indicated by a specific indicator light on the instrument panel.
Removing the rain/twilight sensor
Remove the interior rear view mirror ( E5.09).
Lift the two side tabs (1) at the same time, then
remove the rain sensor (A) from its base (2) on
the windscreen.
Place the sensor (A) into a closed box or use the
special cover for the sensing area included in the
sensor package.
Refitting the rain/twilight sensor
Check that the sensor mating area on the

windscreen is perfectly clean.
Fit the rain/twilight sensor (A) onto the base (2) and
fasten it by attaching the two side tabs (1) at the
same time.
Press onto the sensor with the palm of the hand to
ensure that it adheres fully to the windscreen.
Refit the interior rear view mirror ( E5.09).
Engine services cable Page 1 of 8
Print Exit
F2.13 Engine services cable
Removing the engine services cable


Remove the heat shield (3).
Release the engine services cable (A) from the

clamps (4).
Undo the indicated nut fastening the engine

services cable (A) to the starter motor.
Release the engine services cable (A), undoing the

indicated screw.

indicated screw.
Release the engine services cable (A) from the

indicated clip.
Lift the cover (7).

services cable (A) to the terminal block.
Undo the screw indicated by the black arrow.

Move the bracket (6) aside.
screw indicated by the red arrow.
Remove the guard (5).

services cable (A) to the alternator.
Detach the connectors (1).

Release the cables from the retainer clips indicated
by the red arrows.
Remove the engine services cable (A) from the
engine.
Refitting the engine services cable

Lay out the engine services cable (A) on the engine

as originally fitted.
Tighten the indicated nut fastening the engine
services cable (A) to the alternator.

Nut 14 Nm B

services cable (A) to the terminal block.

Nut 15 Nm B
Fasten the cover (7).

services cable (A) to the starter motor.

Nut 14 Nm A
Fasten the engine services cable (A) to the clamps

(4).
Fasten the engine services cable (A), tightening the

indicated screw.
Fit the heat shield (3).


Screw 10 Nm B
Fasten the engine services cable (A) to the

indicated clip.

indicated screw.

screw indicated by the red arrow.
Tighten the screw indicated by the black arrow.
Lay out the engine services cable (A) correctly.

Hand tighten the screws indicated by the black
arrows.
Fasten the cables to the retainer clips indicated by
the red arrows.
Fasten the connectors (1).

Electrical system absorption test Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F2.14 Electrical system absorption test
In preparation
In preparation
Print Exit
F3.01 Technical specifications
Injection - Ignition
Type BOSCH MED 9.6.1

GDI DIRECT
INJECTION
ECU BOSCH Motronic-
MED 9.6.1
Ignition order 1-8-3-6-4-5-2-7
Fuel supply pressure 5 bar
Single ignition coil ELDOR
Spark plugs NGK
Direct injection
Overview
Direct injection is a fuel system in which fuel is injected via one or more precisely oriented jets directly into the
combustion chamber. The injectors are located within the combustion chamber of each cylinder, so that fuel
is injected directly into the individual combustion chamber.
In conventional indirect injection systems, fuel is injected into the stream of aspirated air, before it enters the
cylinder. Single point injection systems have a single injector - even for a multi-cylinder engine - located
upstream of the point where the intake ducts branch out towards each cylinder. Multi point or PFI (Port Fuel
Injection) systems, on the other hand, have multiple injectors - one per cylinder - located in the intake
manifold, ahead of the intake valve. As a result, fuel is mixed differently - in PFI systems, mixing occurs in
the intake duct, where part of the fuel evaporates, forming a fine mixture with the air, and part of the fuel
does not evaporate, depositing instead on the inner wall of the duct creating a thin liquid layer (a
phenomenon known as wall wetting), whereas in the case of direct injection, as only air flows through the
ducts, mixing occurs directly within the combustion chamber.
Moreover, direct injection enables a stratified charge, resulting in a nonhomogeneous distribution of the fuel in
the combustion chamber; in particular, this creates a zone with a stoichiometric or slightly rich mixture zone
around the spark plug electrodes. This ensures combustion even with very lean mixtures: the air/fuel ratios -
usually indicated with the symbol α - is in these cases extremely high, around 40:1.
Stratification is controlled by a number of factors enabling the confinement of the stoichiometric zone, directing
the spray and impeding excessive diffusion throughout the chamber:
Combustion chamber geometry
Conformation of the airflow field
Injector geometry
Injection type
Stratification allows control over the engine charge by metering the quantity of fuel injected alone - as occurs in
diesel engines (quantity regulation) - eliminating the throttle valve and, as a consequence, reducing pumping
losses. Furthermore, in low load conditions, the mixture core in which combustion propagates is surrounded
by air alone. This insulates it from the surrounding environment, reducing thermal losses.
The following is a summary of the advantages and disadvantages of direct fuel injection.
- Advantages -
Low fuel consumption and reduced emissions
High compression ratios
Improved engine flexibility and response
High power from smaller displacement engines (if used in conjunction with a turbocharger)
- Disadvantages -
More complex production process
Increased costs
More difficult, more costly repairs
Functional layouts of the Ferrari direct injection system
The engine developed for the Ferrari California unequivocally confirms the validity of direct injection technology
in high performance applications.
The implementation of direct injection has necessitated a number of significant changes to the engine and to the
head in particular, with the adoption of high pressure pump, different injectors and, obviously, changes to the
electronic engine management. The primary components of the direct injection system are shown in the
following diagram.
1 - Air flow meter

2 - Motorised throttle valve
3 - High-pressure pump
4 - Fuel tank
5 - Active carbon filter
6 - Bleed valve
7 - Trivalent catalytic converter
8 - Accelerator pedal
9 - Motronic ECU
10 - Air flow sensor
11 - Intake manifold sensor
12 - RPM sensor
13 - Knock sensor
14 - Temperature sensor
15 - Timing sensor
16 - Proportional oxygen sensor
17 - Exhaust gas temperature sensor
18 - Potentiometric oxygen sensor
The different subsystems forming the system can be seen in this diagram: intake, fuel supply, exhaust and
electrical circuit. On the intake side, once past the air flow meter, the air flows through the throttle valve
(unlike conventional systems, this is no longer wet by fuel). Depending on the instantaneous accelerator
pedal angle and in relation to the engine mapping, the ECU sends the necessary signal to the injector to
deliver the exact amount required. On the exhaust side, note the two oxygen sensors, one ahead of and one
after the catalytic converter. The fuel system includes a high pressure pump separating the circuit into two
parts: a high pressure section and a low pressure section.
The lubrication and cooling circuits are also of fundamental importance for the engine. The oil circuit features
wet sump lubrication, which reduces maintenance costs and times compared with the previous dry sump
configuration, and also reduces noise emissions; the oil pump is chain driven.
High and low pressure circuits
Fuel is injected into the combustion chamber at high pressure of up to 200 Bar. Before it is injected, the fuel
must first pass through two circuits:
a low pressure circuit, from the fuel tank to the high pressure pump (A -> B); fuel enters the pump at a
pressure of 5-6 bar;
a high pressure circuit, from the pump to the injectors (B -> C); pressure varies from 50 to 200 Bar.
Ignition coils Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F3.02 Ignition coils
Removing the ignition coils
There are 8 ignition coils (4 per cylinder bank), fixed to the cylinder head covers.


Detach the coil (A) and remove from the seat on the
cylinder head cover.
Refitting the ignition coils
Check that the coil seat on the head is clean.

When refitting the original coils, clean them with
compressed air to remove any dirt.
Fit the coil (A) in the relevant seat on the cylinder
head cover, rotating into the original position,
then push in completely.
Check that the coil is fastened correctly.

Timing sensor Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
F3.03 Timing sensor
Removing the timing sensors
There are four timing sensors in all, with one (internal) intake timing sensor and one (external) exhaust timing
sensor per cylinder bank.

Left hand cylinder bank _ Intake
Loosen the indicated clamps.

Disconnect the pipes (1), (2) and (3) from the pipe
(4).
Open the indicated clamps fastening the rigid

secondary air system pipe (4).
Move the rigid secondary air system pipe (4) aside
operations.

Retrieve the intake timing sensor (A).
Left hand cylinder bank _ Exhaust

Retrieve the exhaust timing sensor (B).
Right hand cylinder bank _ Intake

Detach the pipes (7) and (8).
Open the indicated clamps fastening the rigid

Move the rigid secondary air system pipe (4) aside
operations.

Retrieve the intake timing sensors (C).
Right hand cylinder bank _ Exhaust

Retrieve the exhaust timing sensors (D).
Refitting the timing sensors

Fastening timing sensor Timing sensor 8 Nm A
Left hand cylinder bank _ Intake
Fit the intake timing sensor (A) on the cylinder head

cover and fasten by tightening the indicated
screw.

Timing sensor 8 Nm A
Connect the pipes (1), (2) and (3) onto the rigid pipe
(4).
Close the indicated clamps fastening the rigid

Left hand cylinder bank _ Exhaust
Fit the exhaust timing sensor (B) on the cylinder

head cover and fasten by tightening the
indicated screw.

Right hand cylinder bank _ Intake
Fit the intake timing sensor (C) on the cylinder head

cover and fasten by tightening the indicated
screw.

Connect the pipes (7) and (8) onto the rigid pipe (4).
Close the indicated clamps fastening the rigid

Right hand cylinder bank _ Exhaust
Fit the exhaust timing sensor (D) on the cylinder

head cover and fasten by tightening the
indicated screw.


RPM sensor Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F3.04 RPM sensor
Replacing the RPM sensor

RPM sensor Screw 8 Nm B
Located on the rear of the crankcase, near the flywheel.

Remove the engine oil tank ( B5.03).

Undo the indicated screw fastening the angular
speed sensor (A) to the engine crankcase and
replace it.
Fit the angular speed sensor (A) in the relative seat
and fasten it by tightening the indicated screw.

Screw 8 Nm B
Refit the engine oil tank ( B5.03).

Engine coolant temperature sensor Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F3.05 Engine coolant temperature sensor
Replacing the coolant temperature sensor on the front timing cover
Located on the top of the front timing cover.

Working from the passenger compartment, detach

the connector (1) from the coolant temperature
sensor (A).
Cover the area surrounding the sensor adequately
with absorbent paper as there may be some
coolant leakage.
Unscrew the coolant temperature sensor (A) and
remove from the front timing cover, plugging the
orifice immediately to prevent leakage.
Remove the plug, fit the coolant temperature sensor
(A) in the relative seat with a new gasket and
tighten.

Check the cooling system fluid level ( A3.07).
Replacing the coolant temperature sensor on the water delivery pipe

Fastening coolant temperature sensor to Temperature sensor 18 Nm B
connection on water delivery pipe
Installed on the front part of the water delivery pipe.

Remove the left hand element of the front flat undertray section.
Engine coolant temperature sensor Page 2 of 2
Disconnect the connector (1) unscrew the water

temperature sensor (A) from the water delivery
pipe, plugging the orifice immediately to prevent
fluid spillage.
Remove the plug then fit and tighten the water
temperature sensor (A) in the relevant seat,
installing a new gasket (2).

Temperature sensor 18 Nm B

Check the cooling system fluid level ( A3.07).
Carry out in the event of water spillage.
Engine oil temperature sensor Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F3.06 Engine oil temperature sensor
Replacing the engine oil temperature sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger

Fastening oil temperature sensor on heat Oil temperature sensor 20 Nm B
exchanger
Located on the rear of the water-engine oil heat exchanger.

Disconnect the connector (1) and unscrew the

engine oil temperature sensor (A) from the heat
exchanger, plugging the orifice immediately to
prevent oil spillage.
Remove the plug then fit and tighten the engine oil
temperature sensor (A) in the relevant seat,
installing a new gasket.

Oil temperature sensor 20 Nm B

Carry out in the event of engine oil spillage.
Air flow meter Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F3.07 Air flow meter
Removing the air flow meter
The following procedure is for removing the left hand air flow meter.
The procedure for removing the right hand air flow meter is identical.
Disconnect the connector (1) from the air flow meter

(A).
Undo the two indicated screws with nuts fastening
the air flow meter (A) to the air filter box.
Disconnect the air flow meter (A) from the air filter
box, retrieving the O-rings.
Remove the metal clamp (2) fastening the air flow
meter (A) to the bellow.
Disconnect the air flow meter (A) from the bellow.
Remove the air flow meter (A) completely from the
relative seat.
Refitting the air flow meter
Fit the air flow meter (A) in the relative seat.

Connect the air flow meter (A) to the bellow.
Apply and tighten a new metal clamp (2) fastening
the air flow meter (A) to the bellow.
Refit the O-rings and connect the air flow sensor (A)
to the air filter box.
Tighten the two indicated screws with nuts fastening
the air flow meter (A) to the air filter box.
Connect the connector (1) to the air flow meter (A).
Air flow meter Page 2 of 2

Perform only when replacing the component.
Motorised throttle body Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
F3.08 Motorised throttle body
Removing the motorised throttle body
Right hand motorised throttle body
Detach the cable guide fastener clip (1) from the

motorised throttle body (A).
Disconnect the quick connector on the pipe (4).
Remove the two metal clamps (2).

Disconnect and remove the motorised throttle body
(A) complete with bellow.
Left hand motorised throttle body
Detach the cable guide fastener clip (1) from the

Remove the two metal clamps (2).

Disconnect and remove the motorised throttle body
(A) complete with bellow.
Refitting the motorised throttle body
Right hand motorised throttle body
Fit the motorised throttle body (A) in the relative

seat and connect.
Check that the indicated references on the
motorised throttle body (A) and intake plenum
(B) are correctly aligned.
Connect the connector (3) to the motorised throttle

body (A).
Fit and tighten two new metal clamps (2).
Attach the cable guide fastener clip (1) to the

Left hand motorised throttle body
Fit the motorised throttle body (A) in the relative

seat and connect.
Check that the indicated references on the
motorised throttle body (A) and intake plenum
(B) are correctly aligned.
Connect the connector (3) to the motorised throttle

body (A).
Fit and tighten two new metal clamps (2).
Attach the cable guide fastener clip (1) to the


Reset the self-adaptive parameters and perform the engine ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Perform only when replacing the component.
Accelerator control Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F3.09 Accelerator control
Removing the accelerator pedal
Positioned in the passenger compartment, in the driver side footwell.

Undo the three nuts indicated fastening the

accelerator pedal (A).
Remove the accelerator pedal (A).
Refitting the accelerator pedal

Fastening accelerator pedal Nut 9 Nm B
Accelerator control Page 2 of 2
Fit the accelerator pedal (A) in the relative seat.

Tighten the three nuts indicated fastening the
accelerator pedal (A).

Nut 9 Nm B

Refit the pedal mat.
Pneumatic actuator system solenoid valves Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F3.10 Pneumatic actuator system solenoid valves
Replacing By-pass valve control solenoid valves

Fastening By-pass valve control solenoid valves to Screw 4 Nm B
air filter box
There are two By-pass valve control solenoid valves and they are fitted in the rear side of the air filter box.


Undo the screws indicated fastening the solenoid
valves (A).
Retrieve the retainer brackets.

Remove the solenoid valves (A) and replace them.
Connect and fasten the pipes (2) to the new
solenoid valves (A) with new indicated clamps.
Connect and fasten the pipes (1) with new indicated
clamps.
Fit the retainer brackets in the relevant seats.

Tighten the screws indicated fastening the solenoid
valves (A).

Screw 4 Nm B

Replacing secondary air system valve control solenoid valve
The secondary air system valve control solenoid valve is fitted in the rear side of the engine oil tank.

Mark the position of the pipes (2) then detach them.
Remove and replace the solenoid valve (A).
Fit the new solenoid valve (A) in the relative seat.
Connect the pipes (2) using the markings made
during removal as reference.
Replacing actuator control solenoid valves
There are two actuator control solenoid valves and they are fixed at the bottom of the intake manifold.

Detach the pipes (2) removing the clamps indicated
by the red arrows.
Undo the indicated nuts and retrieve the retainer
brackets.
Remove and replace the solenoid valves (A).
Fit the new solenoid valves (A) in the relative seat.
Fit the retainer brackets on the solenoid valves (A).
Connect and fasten the pipes (2) to the solenoid
valves (A) with new clamps indicated by the red
arrows.
Evaporative emissions control system solenoid valve Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F3.11 Evaporative emissions control system solenoid valve
Replacing the evaporative emissions control system solenoid valve
There are two evaporative emissions control system solenoid valves, installed on the left-hand side of the
engine compartment, under the fuel vapour separator.

Disconnect the outlet valve (1) from the evaporative

emissions control system solenoid valve (A),
Disconnect the quick connector inlet pipe (2) from
the evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve (A).
Remove the evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve (A) from its mounting bracket,
move the valve towards the front of the vehicle
and replace.
Fit the evaporative emissions control system
solenoid valve (A) as originally installed,
checking that the arrow on the valve points in the
correct direction.
Fit the solenoid valve on the relative retainer
bracket and connect the quick connector inlet
pipe (2) and the outlet pipe (1), fitting a new
clamp as indicated.

Secondary air system Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
F3.12 Secondary air system
Secondary air system layout
A - Secondary air pump

B - Secondary air valves
C - Pneumatic actuator ON/OFF solenoid valve
D - Vacuum accumulator tank
Removing the secondary air pump


Remove left hand cosmetic engine compartment shield.

Disconnect the pipe (2) from the secondary air
pump (A), opening the clamp indicated by the
red arrow.
(3).
Working from the wheel bay, unscrew the oxygen

sensor (4).
Undo the screw indicated by the red arrow.
If necessary, the heat shield may be bent slightly
to facilitate the operation.

Remove the secondary air pump (A) from the wheel
bay.
Refitting the secondary air pump

Fastening secondary air pump bracket Screw 9 Nm B
Nut 5 Nm B
Working from the wheel bay, fit the secondary air

pump (A) in the relative seat.

Screw 9 Nm B
original shape.
Tighten the screws indicated by the black arrows.

Screw 9 Nm B
Tighten the screw indicated by the red arrow.

Screw 9 Nm B
Screw on the oxygen sensor (4).

Tighten the indicated screws fastening the heat

shield (3).

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the pipe (2) to the secondary air pump (A),

fastening the clamp indicated by the red arrow.
Ensure that the pump and the relative pipe is
connected correctly.

Replacing vacuum accumulator tank

Fastening vacuum accumulator tank Nut 9 Nm B

Remove the rear element on the left hand side.

Disconnect the quick connectors (2).
Disconnect the pipe (3) by removing the indicated
clamp.
Remove and replace the vacuum accumulator tank
(A).
Fasten the new vacuum accumulator tank (A),
tightening the indicated fasteners.

Nut 9 Nm B
Connect the pipe (3) and fasten with the relative

clamp.
Connect the quick connectors (2).
Connect the pipes (1).
Variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F3.13 Variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves
Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease to variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve connectors
In the event of a variable timing adjuster solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the valve, carry out
the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease on variable timing adjuster solenoid valve connectors"
and check function again.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.
The following procedure must be performed whenever replacing a variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve
and, therefore, whenever the relative connector is disconnected.

DO not use blunt objects to disconnect the

connectors.
Disconnect the connectors (A) for the variable

timing adjuster control solenoid valves.
Apply grease UNIFLOR 8917 Code 70001410 to

the connectors (wiring harness side) for the
variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves,
as illustrated in the photo aside.
Connect the connectors (A) for the variable timing

adjuster control solenoid valves.

Replacing the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valves

Variable timing adjuster solenoid valve Screw 6 Nm B
In the event of a variable timing adjuster solenoid valve malfunction, before replacing the valve, carry out
the procedure "Applying UNIFLOR 8917 grease on variable timing adjuster solenoid valve connectors"
and check function again.
If the fault persists, the variable timing adjuster control solenoid valve must be replaced.
Remove the cylinder head covers ( B2.03).
Undo the two screws indicated and remove the

variable timing adjuster solenoid valves (A) from
the relative seats.
Lubricate the front cap seats and the variable timing

adjuster solenoid valve seals (1) with engine oil.
Fit the variable timing adjuster solenoid valves (A)

in the relative seats and fasten by tightening the
two screws indicated.

Screw 6 Nm B
Refit the cylinder head covers ( B2.05).
Engine oil pressure sensor Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F3.14 Engine oil pressure sensor
Replacing the engine oil pressure sensor on the water-engine oil heat exchanger

Fastening oil pressure sensor on heat exchanger Pressure sensor 38 Nm A
It is mounted on the rear of the water-engine oil heat exchanger next to the oil filter.

Disconnect the connector (1) and unscrew the

engine oil pressure sensor (A) from the heat
exchanger, plugging the orifice immediately to
prevent oil spillage.
Remove the plug then fit and tighten the engine oil
pressure sensor (A) in the relevant seat,
installing a new gasket.

Pressure sensor 38 Nm A

Carry out in the event of engine oil spillage.
GDI direct injection system Page 1 of 14
Print Exit
F3.15 GDI direct injection system
System layout
A - Low pressure fuel pipe

B - High pressure fuel pump soundproofing cover
C - High pressure fuel pump
D - High pressure fuel pipe
E - Fuel rail soundproofing cover
F - Complete fuel rail
G - Complete fuel rail mounting
H - Injector
Removing the complete rail
CAUTION
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel will
be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with fuel, dry
the affected area immediately.
There are two rails, one per cylinder bank, mounted on the cylinder heads.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Remove the soundproofing cover (1) on the high

pressure pump, undoing the two screws
indicated.
Remove the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail,

undoing the two screws indicated.
Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7) and
the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Disconnect the connectors (10) on the injectors.

Disconnect the pressure sensor connector (13).
Undo the indicated stud bolts and screws fastening
the complete rail (8) onto the cylinder head.
Remove the rail complete with injectors (8) from its
seat, in a perfectly perpendicular motion.
DO NOT remove the electroinjectors from the
complete rail for any reason.
Fit the protector caps on the injector tips.
Undo the six fastener screws indicated to remove

the complete rail mounting (11).
If present, retrieve the filler foam (12).
Cover the injector seats on the cylinder head to prevent foreign objects from entering.
Refitting the complete rail

Complete fuel rail mounting Screw 10 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
23 -1 Nm
30 -1 Nm
6 -2 Nm
ENSURE THAT all the components are CLEAN before fitting.
The electroinjectors are not supplied individually, but with the complete rail.
Ensure that the electroinjector seats on the cylinder head are completely clean.
Remove the cover plate from the injector holes on

the cylinder head.
If present, fit the filler foam (12) in the relative seat.
Fit the complete rail mounting (11) and fasten by
tightening the six screws indicated in the
sequence given in the photo aside.

Screw 10 Nm B
DO NOT remove the electroinjectors from the complete rail for any reason.
Remove the protector caps from the injector tips.
Fig. 2
NEVER lubricate the Teflon grommet on the

injector tip side.
WARNING: The fuel rail complete with injectors

MUST be installed in a PARALLEL and
UNIFORM fashion in the relative seat on the
cylinder head.
Fit the rail complete with injectors (8) in the relevant

seat, keeping the rail parallel with the seat and
installing in a uniform motion.
Manually snug the stud bolts (red arrows) and
screws (black arrows) indicated, then pretighten
and definitively tighten in the sequence given in
the photo aside.

Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
Connect the pressure sensor connector (13).

Connect the connectors (10) on the injectors.
When refitting the same high pressure pipe (9),

lubricate the nuts (5) and (6).
Fit the high pressure pipe (9) onto both pipe
connections and snug the nuts (5) and (6)
manually.
Tighten the nut (6) on the rail (8) first, then the nut
(5) on the high pressure pump (7).

Nut +1 0
23 -1 Nm
Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Loosen the nut (5) on the high pressure pump by

two thread turns, then tighten again.

Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Fit the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail, hand

When refitting the same soundproofing cover (4),
loosen the stud bolts indicated by the red
arrows in Fig. 2, then tighten the stud bolts
following the instructions given previously.
Then repeat the previous and following
operations.
Tighten the screws indicated in the sequence given

in the photo aside.

Screw +0 0
6 -2 Nm
Fit the soundproofing cover (1) in the relevant seat,

pretighten and then fully tighten the two screws
indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B

Perform the "High Pressure Circuit Leak Test" cycle.
Removing the GDI direct injection system high pressure fuel pump
CAUTION
CAUTION
When connecting a fuel system pipe, bear in mind that the line may be pressurised. Proceed therefore with
caution and keep away any type of flame as there is a risk of fuel spraying onto the operator.
Always plug the disconnected fuel pipes to prevent residual fuel from leaking.
CAUTION
Before performing the next operation, cover the relevant part of the engine with rags so that any leaking fuel will
be absorbed and will not come into contact with the engine or any other unit. In case of contact with fuel, dry
the affected area immediately.
There are two pumps, one per cylinder bank, mounted on the cylinder heads.
Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Perform the emergency Park Lock release procedure ( E5.12).
The Park Lock must be released as the procedure for refitting the high pressure pump entails rotating the
crankshaft manually using the torsion damper.
Perform the pressure release procedure for the high pressure circuit using the DEIS diagnostic tester.
Remove the soundproofing cover (1), undoing the

two screws indicated.
Disconnect the connector (2) and unscrew the nut

(3) fastening the low pressure pipe onto the high
pressure pump.
Plug the low pressure pipe and the relevant inlet on
the high pressure pump.
Remove the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail,

undoing the two screws indicated.
Undo the nut (5) on the high pressure pump (7) and
the nut (6) on the rail (8).
Remove the high pressure pipe (9).
Plug the pipe connections on the high pressure
pump and the rail.
Press the high pressure pump (7) and slowly loosen

the two indicated screws fastening the pump to
the relevant mounting on the cylinder head, as
the bi-lobe on the camshaft may be in a state of
thrust against the pump.
Remove the high pressure pump (7).
Recover the cup (10).
Refitting the GDI direct injection system high pressure fuel pump

High pressure fuel pump Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw
Screw 10 Nm B
23 -1 Nm
30 -1 Nm
screw/stud bolt
6 -2 Nm
Low pressure pipe - high pressure pump Nut +2 0
20 -0 Nm
ENSURE THAT all the components are CLEAN before fitting.
Using a ratchet spanner (STAHLWILLE 517) with

the appropriate socket applied to the torsion
damper fastener screw, rotate the crankshaft to
bring the fuel pump bi-lobe (12) on the intake
camshaft into BDC; in this position, the bi-lobe is
not in a state of thrust relevant to the fuel pump.
Fit the cup (10) in the relevant seat, after lubricating

with engine oil.
Lubricate the O-ring seat on the pump mounting
with engine oil.
Replace the O-ring (11) on the high pressure pump

(7), and fit in the relevant seat.
Fit the high pressure pump (7) in the relevant seat.

Snug the indicated screws by hand; pretighten then
tighten definitively, following the sequence
indicated in the photo aside.

Screw 10 Nm B
When refitting the same high pressure pipe (9),

lubricate the nuts (5) and (6).
Fit the high pressure pipe (9) onto both pipe
connections and snug the nuts (5) and (6)
manually.
Tighten the nut (6) on the rail (8) first, then the nut
(5) on the high pressure pump (7).

Nut +1 0
23 -1 Nm
Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Loosen the nut (5) on the high pressure pump by

two thread turns, then tighten again.

Nut +1 0
30 -1 Nm
Loosen the two indicated fuel rail fastener stud

bolts, then pretighten and tighten definitively in
the sequence indicated in the photo aside.

Pretightening torque for 5 Nm B
screw/stud bolt
Fit the soundproofing cover (4) on the rail, hand

Tighten the screws indicated in the sequence given
in the photo aside.

Screw +0 0
6 -2 Nm
Fit the low pressure pipe onto the high pressure

pump and hand-tighten the nut (3).

Nut +2 0
20 -0 Nm
Fit the soundproofing cover (1) in the relevant seat,

pretighten and then fully tighten the two screws
indicated.

Screw 10 Nm B

Only for vehicles with DCT gearbox. Perform the emergency Park Lock release procedure ( E5.12).
Reactivate the Park Lock.

Perform the "High Pressure Circuit Leak Test" cycle.
Alarm system Page 1 of 9
Print Exit
F4.01 Alarm system
Antitheft system layout
A - Satellite antitheft system ECU (optional)

B - Anti-lift sensor
C - Hyperfrequency volumetric sensors
D - Siren
E - GPS antenna (optional)
F - GSM antenna (optional)
Ferrari CODE System
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic engine immobiliser system (Ferrari CODE) which is activated
automatically when the ignition key is removed.
The keys contain an electronic device which transmits a coded signal to the Ferrari CODE ECU.
The Ferrari CODE ECU only permits engine start once it has recognised the signal.
Whenever the ignition key is removed from the 0 position, the system activates the engine immobiliser.
On engine start, pressing the ENGINE START button on the steering wheel:
if the code is recognised, the CODE indicator light on the instrument panel goes out after the check cycle,
while the EOBD indicator light extinguishes at the end of the ECU diagnostic cycle, only once the engine
has effectively started: this means that the security system has recognised the key code and disabled the
engine immobiliser;
if the CODE indicator light remains lit, this means that the code has not been recognised: Should this occur,
turn the key back to 0 position and then to II position. If the engine immobiliser is still not deactivated, try
with the other key provided.
With the vehicle running with the ignition key turned to II position:
the CODE indicator light illuminates when the system is running a self diagnosis cycle. The next time the
vehicle is stopped, the system may be tested as follows. Switch off the engine by turning the ignition key
to 0 position, then turn the key back to II position. The CODE indicator light should illuminate and
extinguish again within one second. If the indicator light remains lit, leave the key in the 0 position for more
than 30 seconds and repeat the above procedure;
the CODE indicator light flashes to indicate that the vehicle is not protected by the immobiliser system.
Electronic alarm
The electronic alarm performs the following functions:

manages remote centralised door locking/unlocking;
perimeter surveillance, detecting if any of the doors or lids are opened;
volumetric surveillance, detecting intrusions into the passenger compartment;
vehicle movement surveillance.
Press button (A) on the ignition key to arm the electronic alarm:
the turn indicators flash once;

the system emits an audible signal;
the infoled on the dashboard starts flashing;
the vehicle central locking system is activated, locking the doors.
After approximately 25 seconds, the system is armed.

The luggage compartment lid may be opened while the electronic alarm is armed. In this case, the volumetric
sensors and anti-lift sensors are temporarily deactivated.
The sensors are reactivated when the luggage compartment lid is closed again.
The turn indicators and the infoled on the dashboard will flash nine times when the alarm is armed to indicate
that one of the doors or lids is open or not closed correctly and that, as a result, the vehicle will not be
protected by the perimeter surveillance function.
Should this occur, check all doors and lids and close any doors or lids left open. Disarming the alarm is not
necessary. The turn indicators flash once to indicate that all doors and lids are now correctly closed and that
the vehicle is protected by the perimeter surveillance function.
If the turn indicators and the red led on the dashboard flash nine times when the alarm is armed, but all doors
and lids are correctly closed, this indicates that the self-diagnostic function has detected a system
malfunction.
Press button (B) on the ignition key to disarm the electronic alarm:
the turn indicators flash twice;
the system emits a double audible signal;
the infoled on the dashboard extinguishes;
the cabin lights and puddle lights switch on;
the vehicle central locking system is deactivated, unlocking the doors.
The alarm system is now disarmed and you may now enter the vehicle and start the engine.
To access the vehicle if the remote control key battery is flat, insert the key into either of the two door locks and
turn to unlock the door; the alarm siren will sound.
Start the vehicle normally; the alarm siren deactivates.
Press (C) to disable the anti-lift function of the alarm system.

When the function is disabled, the indicator light on the button flashes for approximately 3 seconds and then
extinguishes.
The CODE indicator light is shown on the display when starting the vehicle to indicate that there has been an
attempted break-in.
In this case, the system indicates the cause for the alarm as follows:
LED switches off 2 times: anti-lift sensor alarm;
LED switches off 3 times: door alarm;
LED switches off 4 times: luggage compartment lid alarm;
LED switches off 5 times: ignition key alarm.
The alarm system memory is cleared when the ignition key is turned.
Replacing the anti-lift sensor

Fastening anti-lift sensor Screw 2 Nm C


Undo the two indicated screws.
Remove the anti-lift sensor (A) and replace it.
Fit the new anti-lift sensor (A).
Tighten the two indicated screws.

Screw 2 Nm C

Replacing hyperfrequency volumetric sensors



Remove the hyperfrequency sensor (A), together
with the relevant shims, and replace.
Fit the new hyperfrequency sensor (A) together with
the relative shims.
Tighten the two indicated screws.

Screw 3.5 Nm B


Undo the indicated screws fastening the bracket (A).
Remove the bracket (A) complete with
hyperfrequency sensor (B).
Remove the hyperfrequency sensor (B), together
with the relative shims, and replace.
Fit the new hyperfrequency sensor (B) together with
the relative shims.

Screw 3.5 Nm B
Fit the bracket (A) complete with hyperfrequency

sensor (B).
(A).

Removing the antitheft system siren


Remove the antitheft system siren (A).
Refitting the antitheft system siren

Fastening anti-theft siren Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the antitheft system siren (A).


Screw 8 Nm B

Tilt the siren cone down by 30° to allow water
drainage.

Replacing the GPS antenna (optional)

Remove the upper dashboard trim.

Remove the ECU (A).
Undo the indicated screw and detach and replace
the GPS antenna (B).
Attach the new GPS antenna (B) and tighten the
indicated screw.
Fit the ECU (A).

Refit the upper dashboard trim.
Replacing the GSM antenna (optional)

Remove the upper dashboard trim.

Detach the GSM antenna (A) and replace.
Fit and affix the new GSM antenna (A).

Refit the upper dashboard trim.
Replacing the two-colour antitheft system infoled

Replace the windscreen ( E3.06).
Remove the windscreen.

Undo the two screws indicated fastening the two-
colour infoled (A).
Remove the two-colour infoled (A) from its seat and
replace.
Fit the new two-colour infoled (A) in the relative seat.
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the two-
colour infoled (A).
Replace the windscreen ( E3.06).

Refit the windscreen.
Airbag Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
F4.02 Airbag
Airbag system layout
A - Driver side airbag

B - Passenger side airbag
C - Side airbag
Deactivating the passenger airbag
The passenger airbag in the vehicle may only be deactivated by using a specific FERRARI child seat.
The specific child restraint systems have been designed to work in conjunction with the BabySmart™ automatic
child seat detection system (CPOD) for the front passenger seat of this vehicle.
The full protective function of the restraint system is only ensured if the restraint system itself is installed
and used correctly.
The specific child seats function like other child safety seats, except for the fact that they are designed to
Airbag Page 2 of 13
automatically deactivate the passenger airbag in vehicles equipped with the “BabySmart™ system”.
The specific child seats are equipped with two transponders, which are identified and detected by special
transmitters installed in the front passenger seat.
If the specific child restraint system is installed correctly on the front passenger seat, the transponders are
detected by the transmitters and the front passenger airbag is deactivated.
DO NOT place electronic devices (functioning laptop computers, mobile phones, cards with transponders
etc.) on the front passenger seat in a vehicle equipped with the BabySmart™ system, as signals
emitted by electronic devices may interfere with the automatic child seat detection system sensors,
resulting in system malfunctions and causing the front passenger airbag to fail to be activated and
deactivated correctly.
With the ignition key in position II and the BabySmart™ child restraint system installed on the front passenger
seat, the following conditions are possible:
if the warning light (A) is lit, the passenger airbag is deactivated;
if the warning light (A) is not lit, the passenger airbag is activated;
if the warning light (A) flashes at intervals of 6 seconds, the passenger airbag is deactivated, but only one of
the system's two transponders has been detected, meaning that the child seat is damaged or not installed
correctly.
When the passenger airbag is deactivated, the specific message is temporarily displayed on the TFT display.
Removing the driver side airbag module
CAUTION
A damaged airbag module may cause severe or fatal injuries if activated.
Airbag Page 3 of 13
After an accident causing airbag deployment, all the components of the system must be replaced
(including wiring harnesses and connectors).
After an accident without airbag deployment, the components of the system (including wiring harnesses
and connectors) must be checked and replaced if found to be bent, damaged or faulty.
Individual system components (including wiring harnesses and connectors) found to be damaged or
faulty must be replaced. NEVER attempt to repair a damaged or faulty component.
Airbag modules are subject to wear and ageing and must therefore be replaced at the intervals specified
in the “Warranty Card”, EVEN if the vehicle has NOT been involved in an accident.
If the vehicle has been stolen or the subject of an attempted theft, the components of the airbag system
must be checked.
Remove the two rubber plugs (3).
Undo the two screws (2) fastening the driver side

airbag module to the steering wheel.
Airbag Page 4 of 13
Remove the driver side airbag module (A) from the

steering wheel.
Prise open the two safety fasteners (1).
NEVER modify any of the individual
components of the system.
NEVER cut or tamper with the connectors
between the wiring harness and the airbag
modules.
Any inappropriate work carried out on the
components of the system may cause
airbag system malfunctions, involuntary
airbag activation or failure to deploy in the
event of an accident, leading to damage and
possibly fatal injury.
Disconnect the two connectors (4) and remove the

driver side airbag module (A).
Refitting the driver side airbag module

Fastening driver side airbag module Screw 9.5 Nm A
CAUTION
must be checked.
Airbag Page 5 of 13

modules.
Connect the two connectors (4) to the driver side

airbag module.
Close the two safety fasteners (1).
Fit the driver side airbag module (A) in its seat on
the steering wheel, arranging the electrical wiring
correctly.
Tighten the two screws (2) fastening the driver side

airbag module to the steering wheel.

Screw 9.5 Nm A
Fit the two rubber plugs (3) into their respective

seats, pressing fully into place.

Airbag Page 6 of 13
Replacing the passenger side airbag

Fastening the passenger side airbag Nut 8 Nm B
Screw 8 Nm B

Remove the upper trim panel.

Remove the passenger side airbag (B) and replace.
Fit the new passenger side airbag (B).

Nut 8 Nm B


Screw 8 Nm B

Replacing the door airbag modules

Fastening the door airbag modules Screw 8 Nm B
Screw 4 B
Airbag Page 7 of 13
CAUTION
must be checked.


modules.


Detach the airbag (B) from the bracket (A) and
replace.
Assemble the new airbag (B) onto the bracket (A).

Screw 8 Nm B
Airbag Page 8 of 13

modules.

Screw 4 B

Replacing the front crash sensors

Right

Airbag Page 9 of 13

Remove the air duct (A).

Remove the crash sensor (B) and replace.
Fit the new crash sensor (B).

Screw 6.5 Nm A
Fit the air duct (A).


Screw 5 Nm C
Airbag Page 10 of 13
Left

Remove the left hand cosmetic shield.

Remove the air duct (A).

Remove the crash sensor (B) and replace.
Fit the new crash sensor (B).

Screw 6.5 Nm A
Fit the air duct (A).


Screw 5 Nm C

Replacing the rear crash sensors

Right

Remove the lower right hand lateral trim panel.
Replace the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).

Remove it.

Undo the indicated screw fastening the rear crash
sensor (A) to the vehicle chassis.
Remove the rear crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new rear crash sensor (A) in the relative seat
on the vehicle chassis.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the rear crash

Screw 6.5 Nm A
Replace the DCT gearbox ECU ( F2.11).

Refit.
Left

Remove the lower left hand lateral trim panel.

Undo the indicated screw fastening the rear crash
Remove the rear crash sensor (A) and replace.
Fit the new rear crash sensor (A) in the relative seat
on the vehicle chassis.
Tighten the indicated screw fastening the rear crash

Screw 6.5 Nm A

Replacing the lateral crash sensors



Undo the indicated nut.
Remove the crash sensor (A), retrieving the screw,
washer and bracket with sheath (2), and replace.
Fit the bracket with sheath on the alignment pin of
the new crash sensor (A), turned towards the
rear.
Fit the washer and the crash sensor (A), inserting
the alignment pin in the corresponding hole in
the door substructure.
Fit the screw and tighten the indicated nut.

Screw 6.5 Nm A

Seat belts Page 1 of 6
Print Exit
F4.03 Seat belts
Seat belts
The vehicle is equipped with automatic three-point seat belts (A) with inertia lock reel and pretensioner, installed
next to the seats, on the outer side.
Seat belt fastening
After adjusting the seat correctly, grip the clip (B), pull the belt slowly and insert the tongue into the buckle (C). If
the belt locks while pulling, let it rewind a little and then pull it again without jerking abruptly.
Ensure that the tongue clicks audibly into the buckle.
Position the seat belt correctly.
If the driver or passenger seat belts are not buckled, the warning lamp D lights when the ignition key is turned to
(II).
Releasing the seat belts
Press the release button (E).
Accompany the buckle (B) back to its rest position.
Pretensioners
This device consists of a retractor with a pyrotechnic pretensioner. The pyrotechnic system is integrated in a
single component with the retractor.
This device maximises the protective action of the seat belt.
The pretensioner is activated by the airbag control ECU in the event of a frontal collision (direction of impact
between 11 a.m. and 1 p.m.) of excessive severity, or in the event of lateral collision of sufficient severity.
The seat belt is rewound by a few centimetres immediately before the restraining action begins, taking up
any slack between the belt and the body of the occupant.
Effective activation of the pretensioner is indicated by the light on the instrument panel and by the tightening of
the belt.
Pretensioner activation releases a small quantity of powder. This powder is harmless and is not an indication of
fire.
Pretensioner activation depends only on the state of the seat belt and is not influenced by the presence of the
occupant.
If the belt is not buckled, the pretensioner is not activated even if the seat is occupied.
The seat belt is equipped with a load limiter to reduce the restraint force exerted by the belt on the body of the
occupant in the event of a collision. This device controls the force with which the seat belt is rewound during
a collision.
Operation
Before activation, the device is in (G) state.

When the ECU detects a collision of a severity above the set threshold, it sends a signal to the pretensioner,
firing the pyrotechnic charge (1) of the gas generator: the combustion of the propellant (2) releases high
pressure gas, exerting an upward force on the rack piston (3).
This motion is transmitted via pinions (4) and (5) to the toothed bushing (6) which rewinds the belt by a few
centimetres (state H).
This takes up any slack between the belt and the body of the occupant immediately before the retention action
begins.
Once activated, a pretensioner is no longer functional, cannot be repaired and must be replaced.
Seat belt and pretensioner care
Replace the seat belt after a severe collision even if it does not appear damaged.
Periodically check that the anchor screws are tightly fastened and that the belt itself is in good condition and
winds and unwinds smoothly.
The belt must be kept clean; dirt may compromise the effectiveness of the retractor.
To clean the belt, hand wash with water and mild soap, rinse and allow to dry. Do not use strong detergents,
bleach or harsh solvents that could weaken the fibres.
Do not wet the retractors: water infiltration may compromise operation.
The pretensioner requires no maintenance or lubrication. If the pretensioner has been immersed in water or
mud, it must be replaced.

The pretensioners must be replaced every 15 years.
Never dismantle or modify the belts, retractors and pretensioners.
Particular repairs and maintenance work causing violent knocks, vibration or heating near the pretensioner
may accidentally trigger the pretensioner; road vibration and shocks will not trigger the pretensioners.
Safety devices
The pretensioners must be protected from exposure to temperatures of over 100 °C for more than 6 hours
and from sparks and naked flames.
The pretensioner may fire spontaneously at temperatures above 150 °C.
Pretensioners that have sustained knocks or falls must not be used and must be returned to the
manufacturer, specifying the reason.
Gas generators must be kept away from acids, water, grease or heavy metals to prevent the formation of
toxic gases or explosive compounds.
Do not store pretensioners together with inflammable and/or combustible materials.
Never dismantle retention system components.
Never carry pretensioners by the belt, as this may cause damage.
Remove the pretensioners before carrying out repair jobs that may involve violent shocks (e.g.
bodywork/chassis repairs) and/or high temperatures (e.g. painting with temperatures above 100 °C).
Fire pretensioners before scrapping.
Avoid skin contact with the propellant or swallowing: wear protective gloves when handling fired
pretensioners. In the event of contact with the propellant, wash with plenty of water and seek medical
assistance.
Replacing seat belts



Remove the seat belt (A) and replace it.
Fit the new seat belt (A).

Screw 40 Nm B

Inertia switch Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F4.04 Inertia switch
Inertia switch operation
The inertia switch is located to the right of the battery, behind the passenger footrest.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia switch deactivates the fuel pump relays, cutting off electrical power
to the fuel pumps to prevent further loss of fuel from the fuel tank.
The switch is triggered by a steel ball which can move in a tapered seat and is held in place by the attraction of
a permanent magnet.
In the event of a violent collision, the inertia of the ball overcomes the attractive force of the magnet, pushing the
ball up and out of the tapered seat, where it strikes a quick-release mechanism normally forming a closed
circuit.
When the ball strikes the mechanism, the latter changes position, opening the circuit and cutting the power to
the pumps.
Once triggered, the switch may be reset by pressing the top button (A).
CAUTION
If fuel is smelt or fuel leaks are noted from the fuel system after a mild collision, the inertia switch must not be
reset in order to prevent the risk of fire and to enable the safe identification of the cause of the problem.
Replacing the inertia switch

Fastening inertia switch to bodyshell Screw 5 Nm C
Located on the right-hand side of the battery, behind the passenger side footrest.
Fold down the passenger side footrest (1) by pulling

the relative loop (2).

Move the lateral mat (3) aside and undo the two
indicated screws fastening the inertia switch (A)
to the chassis.
Remove the inertia switch (A) and replace.
Fit the new inertia switch (A).
Move the lateral mat (3) aside and tighten the two
screws fastening the inertia switch (A) to the
chassis.

Screw 5 Nm C

Check the connection.
Fold the passenger side footrest (1) back into its

original position in the relative seat.
When refitting, after connecting the inertia switch to the system, reconnect the battery and wait at least one
minute before starting the engine.
Park assist Page 1 of 7
Print Exit
F4.05 Park assist
Parking sensors (optional)
To assist the driver during parking, the vehicle may be equipped as an option with four sensors in the rear
bumper (rear parking sensors), or with four sensors in the front bumper and four sensors in the rear bumper
(front and rear parking sensors).
For the system to function correctly, the sensors installed on the bumpers must be kept clean and free of
mud, dirt, snow or ice at all times.
When approaching obstacles located in front of or behind the vehicle, the parking sensor system informs the
driver of the distance of the obstacles via audible warning signals (which increase in frequency the closer the
obstacle is) and via visual indications in area B of the left hand TFT display. By using the visual information
provided by the system in conjunction with direct observation, the driver may avoid collisions when
manoeuvring the vehicle.
The driver is always responsible for avoiding collisions when parking and during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres. The system is only intended to offer assistance during parking by identifying obstacles
outside the driver's field of vision.
The parking sensors do not in any way substitute the due care and attention of the driver during
manoeuvres to avoid collision with persons or objects.
The rear parking sensors activate automatically, with the ignition key turned "II", when reverse is engaged. An
acoustic signal sounds when the rear sensors are activated to warn the driver that the system is active. On
vehicles also equipped with front parking sensors, these sensors may be activated and deactivated via a
button (1) on the headliner.
“Stop and Go” function
The “Stop & Go” function, available on vehicles equipped with front and rear parking sensors, automatically
activates the front sensors when the vehicle speed is equal to or less than 10 Km/h. This function offers
additional assistance to the driver in particular traffic conditions (e.g. traffic jams), indicating when the
preceding vehicle is at the minimum safe distance.
To activate/deactivate the system, recall the MENU screen, select the submenus “Car setup” and “Parking
sensor”, then select from the options “STOP&GO ON” and “STOP&GO OFF”.
Obstacle warning
The parking sensor system emits audible warning signals as soon as an obstacle is detected, which increase in
frequency the closer the obstacle is. The audible signal stops immediately if the distance to the obstacle
increases, while the frequency remains constant if the distance measured by the central sensors does not
change.
The vehicle symbol together with the zones relative to the sensors is shown on the left hand TFT display: these
zones indicate which part of the vehicle is approaching the obstacle (front or rear, right, left or centre) and the
distance between the vehicle and the obstacle (maximum, medium or minimum).
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the maximum distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in green).
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the medium distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in orange).
In the event of the system detecting an obstacle at the minimum distance at the front centre of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display (in red).
The symbols relative to the front of the vehicle are not displayed if the front sensors are not activated and on
vehicles not equipped with front sensors.
On vehicles with front and rear sensors, only the symbols relative to the front of the vehicle are displayed if the
rear sensors are not active. When all sensors are activated, the system is capable of indicating multiple
obstacles simultaneously: if an obstacle is detected at the maximum distance at the front centre of the
vehicle and another obstacle is detected at the minimum distance at the right hand rear of the vehicle, the
following is shown on the display.
If any event occurs necessitating the visualisation of a specific symbol and/or message while the parking sensor
system symbols are displayed, the symbols are shifted from the centre to the right hand area of the display,
as shown as follows.
Cleaning the sensors
Take particular care not to scratch or damage the sensors when cleaning; do not use dry, rough or hard cloths.
Wash the sensors with clean water, adding car shampoo if necessary. In car wash stations using steam
cleaners or high pressure water jets, clean the sensors quickly, keeping the nozzle more than 10 cm away
from the sensors.
Work to repaint the bumpers or touch up the paintwork in areas near the sensors must only be done by the
Ferrari Service Network. Incorrectly applied paint may compromise the function of the parking sensors.
Parking sensor fault indication
The system ECU checks all components each time reverse is engaged. In the event of a malfunction of one or
more parking sensor, the specific symbol together with the message “Parking sensor failure. Warning!
Possible obstacles” are shown on the left hand TFT display, accompanied by an audible warning signal.
The sensors are capable of detecting obstacles with sufficiently large and regularly shaped surfaces
(e.g.: poles with a diameter of more than 60 mm, walls, barriers and trees). Obstacles with protrusions
or with irregular surfaces may not be detected correctly.
When parking, beware of possible obstacles above or below the sensors.
In certain conditions, objects close to the rear of the vehicle may not be detected by the system and, as a
result, may cause damage to or be damaged by the vehicle.
The signals generated by the sensors may be altered by damage to the sensors themselves, dirt, snow
or ice accumulated on the sensors or by ultrasonic disturbance (e.g. pneumatic brake systems on
trucks or pneumatic drills) in the vicinity.
The driver is always responsible for avoiding collisions when parking and during potentially dangerous
manoeuvres. The system is only intended to offer assistance during parking and when operating the
roof by identifying obstacles outside the driver's field of vision.
The parking sensors do not in any way substitute the due care and attention of the driver during
manoeuvres to avoid collision with persons or objects.
Replacing the front parking sensor buzzer


Remove the driver side cosmetic grille.

Remove the buzzer (A) and replace.
Fit the new buzzer (A).

Screw 5 Nm C

Refit the driver side cosmetic grille.
Replacing the rear parking sensor buzzer


Remove the rear oddments storage compartment cover only.

Remove the buzzer (A) and replace.
Fit the new buzzer (A).

Screw 5 Nm C

Refit the rear oddments storage compartment cover.
Replacing the parking sensors

For front sensors only. Remove the front bumper ( E3.03).
For rear sensors only. Remove the rear bumper ( E3.04).

Lift the fastener tabs (2) and remove the parking
sensor (A).
Install the new parking sensor (A) correctly between
the fastener tabs (2).
For rear sensors only. Refit the rear bumper ( E3.04).

For front sensors only. Refit the front bumper ( E3.03).
Replacing the parking camera


Detach the parking camera (B) from the bracket (A).
Disconnect the cable (C).
Replace the parking camera (B).
Connect the cable (C).
Assemble the parking camera (B) with the bracket
(A).

AC system layout Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F5.01 AC system layout
System overview
The air conditioning and heating system in the California automatically regulates the temperature and humidity
in the passenger compartment. The system can simultaneously and independently regulate air temperature
and distribution for the driver side zone and passenger side zone.
The AC system consists of a heating, ventilation and air conditioning unit (HVAC) located under the dashboard.
The passenger compartment is split longitudinally into two temperature zones:

driver zone;
passenger zone.
The dual zone regulation system regulates the following parameters:

passenger compartment air temperature in driver zone;
air distribution via vents in driver zone;
passenger compartment air temperature in passenger zone;
air distribution via vents in passenger zone;
ventilation with external air or recirculating air in passenger compartment;
fan speed.
Functional requisites
The functions of the HVAC module, located under the dashboard, consist in aspirating air through heat
exchanger either from outside the vehicle or from inside (REC function) and in continuously adjusting the
quantity and temperature of the distributed air.
The air introduced into the vehicle must be filtered to remove particulate and odours in both external air and
REC modes.
The air temperature is regulated by altering the flow of refrigerant through the heater core in two symmetrical
crossed circuits, with one on the left hand side and one on the right hand side.
AC system layout Page 2 of 2
A - System charge/discharge unions

B - Compressor
C - Condenser
D - Dehydrator filter
E - Recirculation pump
F - Pressure switch
G - Heater / Evaporator
H - Expansion valve
A.C. controls - A.C. control panel Page 1 of 4
Print Exit
F5.02 A.C. controls - A.C. control panel
Automatic mode
Press the button (A) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) automatic mode for the air conditioning in the
driver zone.
Press the button (B) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) automatic mode for the air conditioning in the
passenger zone.
In automatic mode, the system automatically adjusts air flow, distribution and temperature to maintain the set
temperature value.
In partial automatic mode, certain parameters may be adjusted manually while others are regulated
automatically.
In manual mode, the user may adjust all parameters as desired.
Temperature setting
Turn the dial (C) clockwise to increase air temperature in the driver zone.
Turn the dial (C) counterclockwise to decrease air temperature in the driver zone.
Turn the dial (C) clockwise to increase air temperature in the passenger zone.
Turn the dial (C) counterclockwise to decrease air temperature in the passenger zone.
Air distribution mode selection
Turn the dial (E) clockwise or counterclockwise to select one from the six air distribution modes available for the
driver zone.
Turn the dial (F) clockwise or counterclockwise to select from the six air distribution modes available for the
passenger zone.
Fan speed
Turn the dial (G) clockwise to increase air flow.

Turn the dial (G) counterclockwise to reduce air flow and turn air flow off.
AC compressor on/off
Press the button (H) to switch the AC compressor on (LED on) and off (LED off).
Enable/disable single-zone operation
Press the button (L) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) single-zone operation.
Rear screen demist on/off
Press the button (M) to switch the rear screen demist/defrost function on (LED on) and off (LED off).
Windscreen demist on/off
Press the button (N) to switch the windscreen demist/defrost function on (LED on) and off (LED off).
Air recirculation on/off
Press the button (P) to enable (LED on) and disable (LED off) the air recirculation function.
With external temperatures above 32°C, the air recirculation function is always active, with 60 second pauses
every 20 minutes to refresh the air.
When the windscreen washer function is active, the recirculation function is activated for 20 seconds to prevent
the smell of detergent from entering the passenger compartment.
The recirculation function makes the air in the passenger compartment heat up or cool down more quickly.
Removing the A.C. control panel
It is located in the mid-lower part of the dashboard.
The NCL ECU for the air conditioning and heating system is integrated in the A.C. control panel.

trim.
Prise the A.C. control panel (A) out of its seat with a
suitable tool.
Disconnect the two connectors (1) from the A.C.

control panel (A).
Remove the A.C. control panel (A).
Refitting the A.C. control panel
Connect the two connectors (1) to the A.C. control

panel (A).

trim.
Arrange the electrical wiring correctly, fit the A.C.

control panel (A) in its seat and press manually
to fix into place.

Perform the NCL Air Conditioning ECU Cycle with the DEIS tester.
Perform when replacing the component.
Compressor Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F5.03 Compressor
Removing the compressor
The compressor is located on the left-hand side of the engine.

Remove the ancillary belt ( A3.12).

compressor (A) to the engine, retrieving the
shims with the relative fastener screws.
Undo the screw (2) fastening the delivery and return

unions (3) on the compressor.
If compressor replacement is necessary, drain the oil from the compressor via the relative threaded plug (on
the cylindrical body) and measure the quantity retrieved. The new compressor must be drained with the
same procedure and then filled with the same quantity of fluid drained from the previous component
before installation in the vehicle.
Refitting the compressor

Fastening unions to compressor Screw 24 Nm B
Fastening compressor to engine Screw 25 Nm B
When installing a new compressor, the oil must first be drained from the compressor via the threaded plug
(on the cylindrical body) and the new compressor must be filled with same quantity of oil retrieved from the
replaced compressor before installation in the vehicle.
Fit the delivery and return unions (3) on the

compressor, after replacing the O-rings, and
fasten by tightening the screw (2).

Screw 24 Nm B
Fit the compressor (A) in the relative seat.

Without tightening, fit the screws (7) and (8) with
relative washers, installing the brackets (5), and
(6), and fit the screw (9), with relative washer,
fastening the compressor (A) to the engine.
Tighten the screws fastening the compressor (A) to
the engine in the following sequence: (9) - (7) -
(8).

Screw 25 Nm B


Condenser Page 1 of 5
Print Exit
F5.04 Condenser
Removing the condenser

Disconnect the unions (1) from the condenser,

Undo the indicated inner screws fastening the lower
radiator air duct (A) and the condenser to the
water radiator.
Remove the indicated rivets.
New solution

Undo the indicated outer screws fastening the lower

radiator air duct (A) and the condenser (B) to the
water radiator.
Remove the lower radiator air duct (A) from the
relative seat, easing out towards the front of the
vehicle.
Remove the condenser (B) from the relative seat,
easing out towards the front of the vehicle.
Refitting the condenser

Fastening unions to condenser Screw 9 Nm B
Fit the condenser (B) in the relative seat, installing

from the front of the vehicle.
Fit the lower radiator air duct (A) in the relative seat,
installing from the front of the vehicle.
Tighten the indicated outer screws fastening the
lower radiator air duct (A) and the condenser (B)
to the water radiator.

Screw 5 Nm C
Fit new rivets in the indicated positions.
New solution


Screw 5 Nm C

Screw 5 Nm C
Tighten the indicated inner screws fastening the

lower radiator air duct (A) and the condenser to
the water radiator.

Screw 5 Nm C
Connect the unions (1) to the condenser, tightening

the indicated fastener screws.

Screw 9 Nm B

Pressure switch Page 1 of 1
Print Exit
F5.05 Pressure switch
Replacing the pressure switch
Located in the luggage compartment, underneath the windscreen wiper linkage.

Remove the connector (1) from the pressure switch

(A).
Remove the pressure switch (A) from the connector
block by undoing it.
Refit the pressure switch (A) in its seat in the
connector block and fully tighten.

Dehydrator filter Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F5.06 Dehydrator filter
Replacing the dehydrator filter

Fastening pipes to dehydrator filter Screw 8 Nm B
The dehydrator filter is located on the left-hand side of the luggage compartment, underneath the windscreen
wiper motor linkage.

Undo the screws (1) fastening the pipes (2) onto the
dehydrator filter (A).
Mark the position of the dehydrator filter (A) relative
to the mounting bracket (3), to ensure that the
new filter is installed at the same height.
Undo the indicated screw fastening the dehydrator
filter (A) to the mounting bracket (3).
Widen the mounting bracket (3) and lift out the
dehydrator filter (A).
Dehydrator filter Page 2 of 2
Fit the new dehydrator filter (A) in the relative seat

on the mounting bracket (3), using the marking
made during removal as reference for the height
of the filter.
The new dehydrator filter must be installed at the
same height as the removed filter.
With the dehydrator filter (A) at the correct height,

tighten the indicated screw fastening the
mounting bracket (3).
After replacing the O-rings on the pipe unions (2), fit
the pipes into the relative seats on the
dehydrator filter (A) and fasten by tightening the
screws (1).

Screw 8 Nm B

Expansion valve Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F5.07 Expansion valve
Replacing the expansion valve

Fastening pipes to expansion valve Nut 16 Nm B

Remove the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).
Without disconnecting the pipes and the connector, remove the brake fluid reservoir and move aside so
that is does not hinder the subsequent operations.
Open the two indicated clips.
Undo the indicated nut.

Disconnect and plug the pipe (1).
Disconnect and plug the pipe (2).
Move the pipes (1) and (2) aside, taking care not to
bend and/or damage them.

Remove the expansion valve (A) and replace.
Remove the seals (3) and replace.

Fit the new seals (3) in the relative seats, lubricating
with specific R134A oil for refrigerant systems.
Push the new expansion valve (A) completely into

its seat, taking care not to damage the seals
fitted previously.
Tighten the two screws indicated.
Connect the pipe (2), taking particular care not to

damage the relative seal.
Replace the relative seal, lubricating with specific
R134A oil for refrigerant systems.
Connect the pipe (1), taking particular care not to

damage the relative seal.
Replace the relative seal, lubricating with specific
R134A oil for refrigerant systems.

Nut 16 Nm B
Close the two indicated clips.
Refit the brake fluid tank ( D3.02).

A.C. unit Page 1 of 13
Print Exit
F5.08 A.C. unit
Removing the AC unit
Replace the body computer node ( F2.11).

Remove it.
Remove the NIT ( E5.14).

Remove the front trim.

Remove the trim (A).

Remove the trim (B).
Check the condition of the anti-vibration foam
elements on the trim (B) and replace if
necessary.
Remove the soundproofing (1).

Remove the lower driver side air duct (C).

Remove the lower passenger side air duct (D).

Remove the upper passenger side air duct (E).

Remove the upper central air ducts (F).

Remove the upper driver side air duct (G).

Working with due caution, remove the AC unit from the dashboard substructure, easing out from behind.
Refitting the AC unit

Fastening AC unit Screw 10 Nm B
Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fastening dashboard substructure trim Screw 5 Nm B
Working with due caution, fit the AC unit in the relative seat in the dashboard substructure, installing from
behind.
In the event of replacing the dashboard substructure, fit seal strips as per original installation to prevent
interference with the AC unit.

Screw 10 Nm B

Screw 10 Nm B

Screw 10 Nm B
Fit the upper driver side air duct (G).


Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the upper central air ducts (F).


Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the upper passenger side air duct (E).


Screw 8 Nm B

Screw 8 Nm B
Fit the lower passenger side air duct (D).


Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the lower driver side air duct (C).


Screw 8.5 Nm B
Fit the soundproofing (4).
Fit the dashboard substructure trim (B).

In the event of replacing the trim (B), refit the anti-
vibration foam elements.

Screw 5 Nm B
Fit the trim (A).


Screw 5 Nm B

Refit the front trim.
Refit the NIT ( E5.14).

Replace the body computer node ( F2.11).
Refit.
TGK proportional valves Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F5.09 TGK proportional valves
Replacing the TGK proportional valves

The TGK proportional valves are located inside the luggage compartment, behind the luggage compartment tub.

Open the indicated clamps on the pipes (1).

Detach the pipes (1) from the TGK valves (A).
Open the indicated clamps on the pipes (2).
Detach the pipes (2) from the TGK valves (A).
Detach the pipe (6) from the clamp (5).

Disconnect the connectors (3) and (4), after
detaching the clip indicated by the red arrow.
Undo the indicated screws and remove the TGK
proportional valves (A), complete with mounting
bracket, from the luggage compartment.
On the workbench, detach the TGK proportional
valves from the relative mounting bracket and
replace.
During reassembly, refit the shield (7) on the

bracket as originally mounted.
Fit the shield (7) correctly on the TGK proportional

valves.
Fit the new TGK proportional valves on the

mounting bracket then fit the entire assembly in
the relative seat on the chassis.
Tighten the two screws indicated fastening the TGK
proportional valves (A) complete with mounting
bracket.

Screw 8 Nm B
Connect the connectors (3) and (4) then fasten the

cable with the clip indicated by the red arrow.
Fasten the pipe (6) to the clamp (5).
Check that the two drip baffle rings (8) are correctly
installed on the pipes (1).
Fit the pipes (1) onto the TGK valves (A).

Tighten new clamps as indicated onto the pipes (1).
Fit the pipes (2) onto the TGK valves (A).
Tighten new clamps as indicated onto the pipes (2).

Recirculation pump Page 1 of 2
Print Exit
F5.10 Recirculation pump
Replacing the recirculation pump

The recirculation pump is located behind the luggage compartment tub, in front of the steering box.

Working from the luggage compartment, disconnect

the connector (1).
Remove the clamps (2) and disconnect the pipes
(3).
Undo the screw indicated, remove the retainer
bracket (4) then remove the recirculation pump
(A) and replace.
Recirculation pump Page 2 of 2
Fit the recirculation pump in the relative seat and

fasten as originally installed with the retainer
bracket (4) and tightening the screw indicated.

Screw 9 Nm B
Connect the pipes (3) and fasten with the clamps

(2).

Sensors Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F5.11 Sensors
Replacing the passenger compartment temperature sensor

Remove the lower element of the steering column trim panel only.
Using a suitable tool, prise off and remove the cover

(A).
Sensors Page 2 of 3
Remove the relative protective foam and disconnect

the connector (1).
Remove the sensor (B) and replace.
Fit the new sensor (B).
Connect the connector (1) and apply the relative
protective foam.
Fit and fasten the cover (A), pressing until it snaps

audibly into place.

Refit the lower element of the steering column trim panel.
Sensors Page 3 of 3
Replacing the sun radiation sensor
Prise off the front of the central grille (A) until it

Remove the upper part of the central grille (A) from

Remove the sunlight sensor (C), pressing in the
indicated positions, and replace.
Fit and fasten the new sunlight sensor (C), pressing
Insert the upper part of the central grille (A)

Fasten the central grille (A), pressing on the front of
the grill until it snaps audibly into place.
Discharging and charging the system Page 1 of 3
Print Exit
F5.12 Discharging and charging the system
Discharging the air conditioning system
Stop the right hand windscreen wiper arm (1) in the

vertical position to allow access to the cover (2)
over the AC unions.
Prise off the cover (2), applying leverage in the

position indicated.
Refit the caps (3) on the discharge/charge unions.
The air conditioning and heating system may be discharged with the special tool for recovering refrigerant gas.
If the function is available on the tool, measure the quantity of fluid emptied from the system to enable
subsequent refilling with the correct amount.
When replacing a component, drain all the oil from the removed components and refill the new component
with the same quantity.
CAUTION
Discharging refrigerant gas near open flame is
extremely dangerous and may result in the
emission of toxic gas (phosgene).
Tighten the RED (B) charge pipe union and the

BLUE (A) intake pipe union.
Recover the refrigerant gas and then perform the
system vacuum cycle.
The specified vacuum values must be attained
during the system vacuum cycle.
This operation is very important to ensure system
efficiency.
Check that the vacuum does not increase by 33

mbar (25 mmHg) in 5 minutes. If these values
are not attained, there is a leak in the system.
Check for leaks with an electronic leak detector.
CAUTION
Do not use open flames to search for refrigerant
leaks, as this may generate toxic gas (phosgene).
In the event of removal of any system components,

repeat the system vacuum cycle and check for
leaks.
Charging the air conditioning system
After discharging the system, attach the special tool to the system discharge/recharge unions and recharge
the system.
If some of the compressor oil has remained trapped in the machine after the discharging procedure, top up
the system with the same quantity of the specified oil.
When replacing a component, the new component must be topped up with the same amount of oil removed.
Carry out the system charging cycle.

Approximately 670 ± 30 g of refrigerant is needed to completely charge the system.
FROM Ass.ly No. 90177, the quantity of refrigerant needed for a full charge is 630 ± 30 g.
While charging the system, if pressure equilibrium is reached before charging is complete, proceed as follows:
- start the engine and run at 2000 rpm;
- switch on the A.C. system, set to max. cold and select max. fan speed;
- close the doors.
When the charging procedure is complete, let the system run for about 10 minutes.
After 10 minutes of operation at MAX cooling level, the following conditions must be met:
- ambient temperature: 20 - 22°C;
- relative low pressure: 2.0 bar;
- relative high pressure: 13.5 bar;
- output air temperature (average measured at the vents): 8 - 13 °C.
CAUTION
Discharging refrigerant gas near open flame is
extremely dangerous and may result in the
emission of toxic gas (phosgene).
Unscrew the RED (B) charge pipe union and the

BLUE (A) intake pipe union.
Refit the caps (3) on the discharge/charge pipes.

Fit the cover (2) onto the underwindscreen shield,

inserting the rear tabs in the respective seats
first and then the front tabs.
FUNCTION INDEX Page 1 of 3
Functional Diagrams
FD00 - Fuel supply system and earths
Symbol Code Description Assembly No.
FD0001 Fuel supply distribution
FD0002 Earth distribution

FD01 - C.A.N. network connections
FD0101 B CAN network
FD0102 C CAN network

FD02 - External lighting system
FD0201 Position/parking lights
FD0202 Number plate lights
FD0203 Low / High beam lights
FD0205 Direction indicators/hazard lights
FD0206 Stop lights
FD0207 Reverse gear lights
FD0209 Rear fog lights

FD03 - Internal lighting system
FD0300 Ceiling lights/Sun visors
FD0301 Instrument lighting
FD0302 Luggage compartment light
FD0303 Glove compartment light
FD0304 Step lights

FD04 - Electric devices controlled by the user
FD0400 Windscreen wiper/Windscreen washer
FD0404 Headlight washers
FD0405 Electrochromic mirrors
FD0406 Heated rear window
FD0407 External rear-view mirror defrosting
FD0408 External rear-view mirrors adjustment
FD0409 Steering wheel position adjustment
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/index_fu... 8/5/2011
FD0410 Electric door opening/Door locking system
FD0412 Power windows
FD0415 Cigarette lighter
FD0418 Seat position power adjustment
FD0423 Parking sensors
FD0424 Luggage compartment opening
FD0425 Fuel tank flap opening
FD0426 Buzzers
FD0427 Glove compartment opening

FD05 - Electronic devices
FD0500 Alarm system
FD0501 Brake system 98333-99999
FD0502 Airbag system
FD0503 Suspension control system
FD0504 DCT robotized gearbox
FD0505 Immobilizer
FD0506 Tyre pressure control system
FD0508 Electronic control system for hydraulic steering system
FD0510 Parking brake
FD0511 Lift system

FD06 - Radio system
FD0600 Car stereo system
FD07 - On-board instruments
FD0700 Control panel
FD08 - Engine management and control
FD0800 Engine ignition system 98333-99999
FD0801 Battery recharging system
FD0802 Engine Fuel electronic management
FD0804 Engine cooling 98333-99999
FD0805 Fuel supply system 98333-99999
FD0810 Stop & Start 98333-99999

FD09 - Air conditioning/ heating system
FD0900 Air conditioning/heating unit
FD0901 Compressor activation

FD10 - Diagnosis
FD1000 Multiple diagnostics connector
PDF Page 1 of 56
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0001 - Fuel supply distribution
99999
FD0001_02_P01 - Fuel supply distribution
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/index.php?action=sepdf&link=link::ES_PD_FD... 8/5/2011
PDF Page 2 of 56
0-
99999
Code Description Cavo

G012 Battery frame ground C01001_0
C036 Connection to battery positive (emergency start) C02601_0
B301-C Branch terminal board C04001_0
B301-A Branch terminal board C02801_0
C001-F Battery ECU (CBA) C02601_0
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-E Battery ECU (CBA) C02801_0
C001-B Battery ECU (CBA) C53111_0
C001-C Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-D Battery ECU (CBA) C02901_0
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
D313-B Battery master switch C01001_0
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
C010-A Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C02901_0
PDF Page 3 of 56
0-
99999
C01001_0 - Negative battery cable

D313-B Battery master switch C01001_0
PDF Page 4 of 56
0-
99999
C02601_0 - Emergency positive cable

C001-F Battery ECU (CBA) C02601_0
C036 Connection to battery positive (emergency start) C02601_0
PDF Page 5 of 56
0-
99999
C04001_0 - Engine utility cable

B301-C Branch terminal board C04001_0
PDF Page 6 of 56
0-
99999
C02801_0 - Positive branch node cable

B301-A Branch terminal board C02801_0
C001-E Battery ECU (CBA) C02801_0
PDF Page 7 of 56
0-
99999
C31112_2 - Front cable and passenger compartment cable

C001-C Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA) C31112_2
PDF Page 8 of 56
0-
99999
C53111_0 - Lift system cable

C001-B Battery ECU (CBA) C53111_0
PDF Page 9 of 56
0-
99999
C02901_0 - SCM supplementary ECU power cable

PDF Page 10 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 12 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 13 of 56
0-
99999

C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL) C31112_2
G003-A Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side C31112_1
Junction between dashboard cable / front wiring
Y003 C20012_0
and passenger compartment cable
Junction between front wiring and passenger
X003 C31112_2
compartment cable / dashboard cable
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM) C31112_2
C003-L Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
C003-M Dashboard ECU (CPL) C20012_0
D002-A Ignition switch C31112_2
C012 Supplementary fuse and relay ECU (CS-SCM) C31112_2
E312 Suspension control node (NCS) C31112_2
PDF Page 14 of 56
0-
99999

X003 C31112_2
PDF Page 15 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 16 of 56
0-
99999
C20012_0 - Dashboard cable

Y003 C20012_0
PDF Page 17 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 18 of 56
0-
99999
C21214_2 - Passenger compartment cable and rear cable

PDF Page 19 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 20 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 21 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 22 of 56
0-
99999

C312 Supplementary relay ECU 2 (CS-SCM 2) C31112_2
D002-B Ignition switch C20012_0
E131 DC/DC converter - front 1 C31112_2
G003-B Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side C31112_1
PDF Page 23 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 24 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 25 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 26 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 27 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 28 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 29 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 30 of 56
0-
99999

Y003 C20012_0
X003 C31112_2
E004-D Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-F Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
E004-Y Body computer node (NBC) CA0101_0
E004-V Body computer node (NBC) C31112_2
C003-X Dashboard ECU (CPL) CA0101_0
G022 Dashboard area earth - right-hand side C20012_0
PDF Page 31 of 56
0-
99999

Y003 C20012_0
PDF Page 32 of 56
0-
99999

X003 C31112_2
PDF Page 33 of 56
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 34 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 35 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 36 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 37 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 38 of 56
0-
99999

C003-O Dashboard ECU (CPL) C21214_2
E004-G Body computer node (NBC) C20012_0
C019-B Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
PDF Page 39 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 40 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 41 of 56
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 42 of 56
0-
99999

PDF Page 43 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 44 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 45 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 46 of 56
0-
99999

C019-A Luggage compartment ecu (CVB) C21214_2
E004-N Body computer node (NBC) C21214_2
X008 compartment cable / passenger compartment cable C31112_2
and rear wiring
Junction between passenger compartment cable
Y008 and rear wiring / front wiring and passenger C21214_2
compartment cable
PDF Page 47 of 56
0-
99999

Junction between passenger compartment cable and
Y008 rear wiring / front wiring and passenger C21214_2
compartment cable
PDF Page 48 of 56
0-
99999

and rear wiring
PDF Page 49 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 50 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 51 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 52 of 56
0-
99999

E042-A Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR) C21214_2
Y115-A and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable C31112_2
and rear wiring
X115-A and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable C21214_2
and rear wiring
PDF Page 53 of 56
0-
99999

X115-A rear wiring / passenger compartment cable and rear C21214_2
wiring
PDF Page 54 of 56
0-
99999

Y115-A rear wiring / passenger compartment cable and rear C31112_2
wiring
PDF Page 55 of 56
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 16
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0002 - Earth distribution
99999
FD0002_00_P00 - Earth distribution
PDF Page 2 of 16
0-
99999

Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand
G003-A C31112_1
side
G003-B C31112_1
side
G029-A Engine cooling electric fan's earth C31112_1
G029-B Engine cooling electric fan's earth C31112_1
G043 Amplifier earth C20012_0
G024 Airbag system earth C20012_0
G001-A Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side C31112_1
G001-B Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side C31112_1
G005 Braking system earth C31112_1
G009 Earth on engine cooling radiator electric fan C31112_1
G021 Dashboard area earth - left-hand side C21214_2
G105 Air pump earth C21214_2
G070 Fuel tank earth - left-hand side C21214_1
Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand
G056 C21214_1
side
G080 Head cover earth - left hand cylinder bank C11011_0
G041-A Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G002 Earth on engine for battery C06001_0
G008 Earth on chassis for engine C06001_0
G055 Earth on engine - left-hand side C11011_0
G053 Earth on engine - right-hand side C12011_0
G045 Earth for parking brake ECU C21214_1
G042-B Rear light area earth - right-hand side C21214_1
G042-A Rear light area earth - right-hand side C21214_1
G081 Head cover earth C12011_0
G095 Hydraulic pump earth - right hand cylinder bank C53111_0
G061 Fuel filler neck earth C21214_1
Earth on chassis for injection system - right-hand
G054 C21214_1
side
G060 Fuel tank earth C21214_1
PDF Page 3 of 16
0-
99999

G005 Braking system earth C31112_1
G009 Earth on engine cooling radiator electric fan C31112_1
G029-A Engine cooling electric fan's earth C31112_1
G029-B Engine cooling electric fan's earth C31112_1
PDF Page 4 of 16
0-
99999
C01001_0 - Negative battery cable

PDF Page 5 of 16
0-
99999

G024 Airbag system earth C20012_0
G043 Amplifier earth C20012_0
PDF Page 6 of 16
0-
99999

G021 Dashboard area earth - left-hand side C21214_2
G105 Air pump earth C21214_2
PDF Page 7 of 16
0-
99999

G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side C21214_1
G042-B Rear light area earth - right-hand side C21214_1
G045 Earth for parking brake ECU C21214_1
Earth on chassis for injection system - right-hand
G054 C21214_1
side
Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand
G056 C21214_1
side
G060 Fuel tank earth C21214_1
G061 Fuel filler neck earth C21214_1
PDF Page 8 of 16
0-
99999
C11011_0 - LH bank injection cable

G055 Earth on engine - left-hand side C11011_0
G080 Head cover earth - left hand cylinder bank C11011_0
PDF Page 9 of 16
0-
99999
C06001_0 - Engine earth braid

G002 Earth on engine for battery C06001_0
G008 Earth on chassis for engine C06001_0
PDF Page 10 of 16
0-
99999
C12011_0 - RH bank injection cable

G081 Head cover earth C12011_0
PDF Page 11 of 16
0-
99999

G095 Hydraulic pump earth - right hand cylinder bank C53111_0
PDF Page 12 of 16
0-
99999
PDF Page 13 of 16
0-
99999
PDF Page 14 of 16
0-
99999
PDF Page 15 of 16
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 12
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0101 - B CAN network
99999
FD0101_00_P00 - B CAN network
PDF Page 2 of 12
0-
99999

X018-A C21214_2
and rear wiring / driver side seat cable
X002 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side door cable
Junction between passenger side door cable /
Y002 C25002_0
passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
E022-C Passenger's door node (NPP) C25002_0
E008-A Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL) C31112_2
E304 Tyre pressure node (NTP) C31112_2
E073-B Airbag node (NAB) C20012_0
Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO)
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
E003-A Control panel (NQS) C20012_0
X022 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side seat cable
E041-C Parking sensor node (NSP) C21214_2
X001 C21214_2
and rear wiring / driver side door cable
Junction between driver side door cable /
Y001 C24002_0
E021-C Driver's door node (NPG) C24002_0
C022-A diagnosis outlet - OBDII C31112_2
E410 Information repetition node (CAN BOX) C20012_0
D412-A Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU C20012_0
PDF Page 3 of 12
0-
99999

E041-C Parking sensor node (NSP) C21214_2
X001 C21214_2
and rear wiring / driver side door cable
X002 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side door cable
X018-A C21214_2
and rear wiring / driver side seat cable
X022 C21214_2
and rear wiring / passenger side seat cable
PDF Page 4 of 12
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 5 of 12
0-
99999
C25002_0 - Passenger-side door cable

E022-C Passenger's door node (NPP) C25002_0
Junction between passenger side door cable /
Y002 C25002_0
PDF Page 6 of 12
0-
99999

E008-A Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL) C31112_2
E304 Tyre pressure node (NTP) C31112_2
PDF Page 7 of 12
0-
99999

D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
D412-A Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU C20012_0
E003-A Control panel (NQS) C20012_0
E073-B Airbag node (NAB) C20012_0
E410 Information repetition node (CAN BOX) C20012_0
PDF Page 8 of 12
0-
99999
C24002_0 - Driver-side door cable

E021-C Driver's door node (NPG) C24002_0
Junction between driver side door cable / passenger
Y001 C24002_0
compartment cable and rear wiring
PDF Page 9 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 10 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 13
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0102 - C CAN network
99999
FD0102_00_P00 - C CAN network
PDF Page 2 of 13
0-
99999

E006-B Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side C21214_1
E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side C12011_0
Z045 Steering angle sensor node (NAS) C31112_2
Z023 Yaw node (NYL) C31112_2
E302 Lift system ECU C53111_0
W003 Braking system node (NFR) C31112_1
E029 NFA ECU (adaptive headlights node) C31112_1
X302-A and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank C21214_2
injection cable
Junction between right hand cylinder bank
Y302-A injection cable / passenger compartment cable C31112_2
and rear wiring
X090 C21214_1
and rear wiring / lift system cable
Junction between lift system cable / passenger
Y090 C53111_0
X358 Disconnector for C-CAN line diagnosis C31112_2
R041 Robotized gearbox node resistor C21214_1
E082 Electric parking brake node C21214_1
X008 compartment cable / passenger compartment C31112_2
cable and rear wiring
compartment cable
E129-B Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side C21214_1
E129-A Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side C11011_0
X302-B and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank C21214_1
injection cable
Y302-B injection cable / passenger compartment cable C12011_0
and rear wiring
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION) C12011_0
Junction between left hand cylinder bank
Y303 injection cable / passenger compartment cable C11011_0
and rear wiring
X303 and rear wiring / left hand cylinder bank C21214_1
injection cable
PDF Page 3 of 13
0-
99999

E006-B Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side C21214_1
E082 Electric parking brake node C21214_1
E129-B Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side C21214_1
R041 Robotized gearbox node resistor C21214_1
X090 C21214_1
and rear wiring / lift system cable
X302-B and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank injection C21214_1
cable
X303 and rear wiring / left hand cylinder bank injection C21214_1
cable
PDF Page 4 of 13
0-
99999
C12011_0 - RH bank injection cable

E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side C12011_0
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION) C12011_0
Y302-B injection cable / passenger compartment cable and C12011_0
rear wiring
PDF Page 5 of 13
0-
99999

and rear wiring
X358 Disconnector for C-CAN line diagnosis C31112_2
Y302-A injection cable / passenger compartment cable and C31112_2
rear wiring
Z023 Yaw node (NYL) C31112_2
Z045 Steering angle sensor node (NAS) C31112_2
PDF Page 6 of 13
0-
99999

E302 Lift system ECU C53111_0
Junction between lift system cable / passenger
Y090 C53111_0
PDF Page 7 of 13
0-
99999

PDF Page 8 of 13
0-
99999

X302-A and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank injection C21214_2
cable
compartment cable
PDF Page 9 of 13
0-
99999
C11011_0 - LH bank injection cable

E129-A Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side C11011_0
Junction between left hand cylinder bank injection
Y303 cable / passenger compartment cable and rear C11011_0
wiring
PDF Page 10 of 13
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 13
0-
99999
PDF Page 12 of 13
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 12
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0201 - Position/parking lights
99999
FD0201_00_P00 - Position/parking lights
PDF Page 2 of 12
0-
99999

I007 Taillight - left-hand side C21214_1
I008 Taillight - right-hand side C21214_1
D020 External light switch (CLE) C20012_0
I061 Front headlight unit - left-hand side C31112_1
I062 Front headlight unit - right-hand side C31112_1
G003-B C31112_1
side
Y003 C20012_0
X003 C31112_2
E088 Japan' navigator node C21214_2
X008 compartment cable / passenger compartment C31112_2
cable and rear wiring
compartment cable
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
PDF Page 3 of 12
0-
99999

X003 C31112_2
and rear wiring
PDF Page 4 of 12
0-
99999

D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
Y003 C20012_0
PDF Page 5 of 12
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 6 of 12
0-
99999

PDF Page 7 of 12
0-
99999

PDF Page 8 of 12
0-
99999

E088 Japan' navigator node C21214_2
compartment cable
PDF Page 9 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 10 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 7
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0202 - Number plate lights
99999
FD0202_00_P00 - Number plate lights
PDF Page 2 of 7
0-
99999

X039 C21214_1
and rear wiring / rear bumper cable
Junction between rear bumper cable / passenger
Y039 C43001_0
I009 Number plate light - left-hand side C43001_0
I010 Number plate light - right-hand side C43001_0
PDF Page 3 of 7
0-
99999

PDF Page 4 of 7
0-
99999

X039 C21214_1
PDF Page 5 of 7
0-
99999
C43001_0 - Rear bumper cable

I009 Number plate light - left-hand side C43001_0
I010 Number plate light - right-hand side C43001_0
Y039 C43001_0
PDF Page 6 of 7
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 42
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0203 - Low / High beam lights
99999
FD0203_00_P00 - Low / High beam lights
PDF Page 2 of 42
0-
99999

G003-B C31112_1
side
G003-A C31112_1
side
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
PDF Page 3 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 4 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 5 of 42
0-
99999

D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
PDF Page 6 of 42
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 7 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 8 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 9 of 42
0-
99999
C001 - Battery ECU (CBA)
PDF Page 10 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 12 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 13 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 14 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 15 of 42
0-
99999
C003 - Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C003-B 2-way connector

C003-B +30 from SCM F-82
PDF Page 16 of 42
0-
99999
1 Track leading to Q18

2 Consent for low beams from F-13 for headlight level ECU
3 Power supply for LH low beam from F-13
4 Signal for controlling MIL indicator light from NCM
5 Reference ground for engine oil temperature sensor
6 Signal from engine oil level sensor
7 INT/A ignition switch from F-31 for NCL
8 Power supply for reverse light from switch on gearbox
9 3rd stop light power supply from NFR
10 Power supply for windscreen wiper relay from F-43
11 INT from F-42 for alternator
12 Power supply for RH low beam from F-12
13 INT from F-51
14 INT from F-37 for NO stop lights
15 Stop light power supply from pedal board switch
16 Stop light signal (NO) for NFR
17 INT from F-35 for clutch pedal command (manual gearbox)
PDF Page 17 of 42
INT from F-35 for high beam, headlight washer and NCL
18
relay coils
19 INT from F-35 for lift system
20 CPL earth path
PDF Page 18 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F33

2 +30 from F34 available
3 +30 from F46 for NCP roof node
5 Supplementary stop light power supply
Positive signal for NO stop lights for NCR, stop light for
6
USA market
7 Reverse gear signal input
8 Reverse signal for radio navigator/NIT
Positive signal for rear screen wash/wipe control on SW
9
versions
B-CAN A on passenger compartment cable for NPG, NPP,
10
NAG, NAP, NSP, RHT roof
+30 from F-32 for front puddle lights, footwell lights, side
11
marker relay coils, central cabin light
Power supply for driver side front seat heater/power socket
12
from F-52
13 30 CAV, NSP, 86 fuel filler flap T23 relay coil
PDF Page 19 of 42
Power supply for front passenger seat/cigarette lighter from

14
F-44
15 Power supply for heated rear window from F-40
16 Positive control for luggage compartment open striker plate
17 NPP power supply from F-48
18 Positive control for luggage compartment close striker plate
19 INT from F-49 available
20 Negative signal for rear screen washer motor control
21 INT from F-49 dome light button fixing plate
22 Negative signal for seat belt warning light control to NQS
23 INT from F-49 for CSP, NSP, NCD
24 INT from F-49
26 INT from F-51 for NCR
B-CAN B on passenger compartment cable for NPG, NPP,
28
29 _
30 +30 NPG from F-47
31 F-41 power supply available
32 Third stop light power from NFR (connection with AH9)
PDF Page 20 of 42
0-
99999
1 INT/A from T17 relay 87(NC)

2 Negative signal for parking light control from CLE
3 INT from F-49 for CEM
4 INT from F-49
5 B-CAN B
6 INT from F-50 for airbag ECU, CPOD
7 +30 from F-39 available
9 Power supply from F-44
10 CPL power earth
11 INT from ignition switch
12 INT from F-51 for starter button
13 INT from F-51
14 INT/A from F-31 for NBC
15 Signal from oil temperature sensor to NQS
16 Reference earth for engine oil temperature sensor
17 B-CAN A
PDF Page 21 of 42
18 _
PDF Page 22 of 42
0-
99999
C003-O 2-way connector

C003-O _
PDF Page 23 of 42
0-
99999
+30 from F-38 for luggage compartment release striker

1
plate
2 Control signal for LH/RH stop lights
3 Positive signal for turning on reverse lights
4 _
B-CAN B from NBC (for NAG, NAP, NIM, NSP, NPP,
5
NPG, weight sensors)
Negative signal for heated rear windowís coil relay control
6
(T11)
B-CAN A from NBC (for NAG, NAP, NIM, NSP, NPP,
7
8 Negative signal for Low beamsí coil control relay (T01)
9 INT for NBC
Positive command for luggage compartment opening
10
gearmotor
11 Positive control for luggage compartment close ratio motor
13 INT from F-37 for NQS
PDF Page 24 of 42
Negative signal for connected devicesí coil 2 relay control

14
(T13)
15 INT for F-51 power supply from NBC
16 _
+30 from F-39 for NCL, CSA, EOBD diagnostic socket,
17
CAV
+30 for NBC (immobiliser, CAN, position/direction
18 indicator/hazard lights, driver SBMT, ceiling lights, sun
visors, glove compartment light)
19 +30 from F-53 for rear fog lights
20 Earth for luggage compartment striker plate ratio motor
PDF Page 25 of 42
0-
99999
C010 - Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM)
79 Connection cable to battery positive
PDF Page 26 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F-19 LH cylinder bank

2 +30 from F-14 for T02 high beam relay
+30 T14 fuel pump 1 relay (1st speed), +30 T03 fuel pump
3
1 relay (2nd speed).
4 +30 from F-15 for 30/86 of T19, T39
+30 from F-18 for LH NCM, main relay coil, +30 T43 for
5
Stop&Start
6 +30 from F-23 for ABS electronics
7 + 30 HiFi amplifier (+30 converter 2 for Stop&Start)
8
9 +30 from F-09 for 30 and 86 third stop light relay, 86 T37
+30 from F-84 for radio, ICP, CAN BOX, ATS, clock
10
spring. (+30 converter 1 for Stop&Start)
11 +30 from F-20 for T10 main relay 2 (coil + power)
12 Power supply for RH cylinder bank ECU (from T-10)
13 Power supply for RH cylinder bank (from T-10)
Power supply for RH cylinder bank oxygen sensor (from T-
14
10)
15 Bus-bar pin 15/16/17
16 Main relay 2 (T10) input for F-87, F-24, F-16
17 Bus-bar pin 15/16/17
18 +30 from F-01 for T16 fan relay 2 (L019)
19 +30 from F-04 for ABS/NFR (pump)
20 +30 from F-05 for AC
PDF Page 27 of 42

22 +30 from F-03 for NCP
23 +30 from F-82 for CPL2 and CVB
+ 30 from F-81 J214 bus-bar F-91/F-92/F-93, bus-bar F-
24
94/F-95
25 +30 from F-02 ABS valves
26 +30 output from T07 (87) for horns
27 Negative signal for T07 horn relay coil (85)
28 Negative signal for T06 relay coil (85) from NQS
29 +30 output from T06 (87) for glove compartment motors
30 +30 input for T06 (30) from F32 CPL
31 Input from F24 for T30 relay coil (86) for air pump
32 Power supply from T30 (87) for air pump
33 Earth for relay T30 coil (85) for air pump
34 +30 for T02 (30) from F-14 high beams
35 Power supply from T02 (87) for high beams
36 INT input from F-35 for T02 relay coil (86) for high beams
Negative signal for relay T02 coil (85) for high beams from
37
NPL
38 +30 for T03 (30) from F18
39 Power from T03 (87) for controlling fuel pump 2nd speed
40 Input from F24 for T03 relay coil (86)
41 Negative signal for T03 relay coil (85) from RH NCM
42 +30 from F18 for T09 main relay coil (86) 1
Negative signal for T09 IE system relay coil (85) from LH
43
NCM
44 Earth for relay T08 coil (85) for AC system
45 Input from F-24 for T08 relay coil (86) for AC system
46 Earth for relay T31 coil (85) for headlight washer
INT input from F-37 for T31 relay coil (86) for headlight
47
washer
48 30 T17 relay from 15/54
49 _
50 Negative signal for T17 relay coil (85)
51 Input for T17 relay coil (86) from starter button
52 +30 from F-10 for T14 fuel pump 1 relay (30)
53 Power supply from T14 (87) for fuel pump 1
54 Negative signal for T14 relay coil (85) for fuel pump 1
55 Input for T14 relay coil (86) for fuel pump 1 from F24
56 +30 from F-21 for T05 (30) fuel pump 2
Power supply for LH cylinder bank oxygen sensor (from
60
T09)
61 Power supply for LH cylinder bank ECU (from T-09)
62 Power supply for LH cylinder bank (from T-09)
63 Power supply from F-08 for AC system compressor
64 Power supply for headlight washers from F85
65 +30 for T20 from F-21
66 Power from T20 (87) for fuel pump 2
67 Negative signal from RH NCM
68 Input for T20 coil (86) from F-24
69 +30 from F-15 for T19 (30) CLA with EPB
70 Power supply from T19 (87) for CLA
71 Negative signal for T19 relay coil (85) CLA CON EPB
72 Input for T19 relay coil (86) CLA with EPB from F-15
73 +30 for T10 (30) from F-20 main 2
74 Power supply from T10 (87) for BUS-BAR F24/F16/F87
75 +30 from F-20 for T10 main relay coil 2 (86)
76 Negative signal for T10 main relay coil (85) 2 from RH
PDF Page 28 of 42
NCM
77 Power supply output from T17 (87a) INT/A for CPL
78 Power output from T19 (87a) (predisposition)
PDF Page 29 of 42
0-
99999
D020 - External light switch (CLE)
1 Earth
2 Negative signal for running light control
3 _
4 Negative signal from rear fog light control light
5 Negative signal for low beam control
6 +15 for control symbol backlight power
7 Negative signal for parking light control
8 _
PDF Page 30 of 42
0-
99999
D072 - Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO) (clock spring)
1 Negative signal from horn control button

2 Windscreen wiper control, 1st speed (limp home function)
3 B-CAN B
4 B-CAN A
5 +30 from F-84
6 NVO earth, buzzer controls and any steering wheel controls
7 +15 for starter button
8 + 15 output from button for starter relay
9 Airbag 2nd stage - driver side (+)
10 Airbag 2nd stage - driver side (-)
11 Airbag 1st stage - driver side (-)
12 Airbag 1st stage - driver side (+)
PDF Page 31 of 42
0-
99999
E004 - Body computer node (NBC)
10 NBC power earth

11 _
12 _
13 _
14 Positive control for alarm system LED
15 _
16 +30 SBMT for glove compartment light (5W)
17 _
18 _
19 Ground (signal)
20 _
21 Positive output for DRL enable signal
Positive signal for LH/RH stop lights from CPL (short
22
circuited with CY2 via pin AH 16 CPL)
23 Speedometer signal 2 repeat for car stereo/NIT
24 B-CAN B for NVO, NAB
25 B-CAN A for NVO, NAB
26 _
27 INT/A from F-31 CPL
PDF Page 32 of 42
0-
99999
1 _
Negative signal for position lights control from external
2
light switch
3 +30 from F-53 for NQS
Negative signal for low beams control from external light
4
switch
5 B-CAN A for NQS
6 B-CAN B for NQS
7 _
8 Earth for CLE
9 _
PDF Page 33 of 42
0-
99999
28 1st windscreen wiper speed signal from CVS (clock spring)

29 Dimmed positive control for hazard warning lights on LED
30 _
32 2nd wiper speed signal from steering column stalk
33 _
34 Negative signal from hazard control
35 Negative signal for rear fog light button
36 Earth for NQS
PDF Page 34 of 42
0-
99999
1 B-CAN High (or B) at low speed for diagnostics

2 _
3 _
4 Power earth for diagnostic equipment
5 Signal earth for diagnostic equipment
6 C-CAN High for diagnostics
7 K-Line for NCM/NCR diagnosis (connection with V26)
8 _
9 B-CAN Low (or A) at low speed for diagnostics
10 _
11 _
12 K-Line for front zone, NFR (connection with Z47)
13 Line-K for NTV (connected to LN24)
14 C-CAN Low for diagnostics
15 _
+30 EOBD diagnostic socket from F-39 (connection with
16
Y17)
PDF Page 35 of 42
0-
99999
1 Timed/dimmed negative control for LH spotlight (5W)

2 _
3 Reference ground for front lid lock
4 Fuel tank door relay opening control
5 _
6 Actuation for rear RH direction indicators light
7 Fuel level signal from tank (positive)
LH rear running light actuation (on luggage compartment
8
lid/bumper)
RH rear running light actuation (on luggage compartment
9
lid/bumper)
10 A-bus serial line on rear cable for CAV and rain sensor
Negative signal from NO switch on driver side door (door
11
open detection)
12 LH/RH number plate light activation
13 Parking brake activated output (Japan market only)
14 10W front lid light command
15 Positive control for door status LED
16 'Autopark' enable/disable signal
Speed signal (VSO) / VSO signal repeater for Japan
17
navigator
18 Actuation for rear LH direction indicators light
19 _
Signal for passenger power window UP from passenger-
20
side
PDF Page 36 of 42
21 Fuel level signal from tank (Negative)

22 Input from hyper-frequency and anti-lift disable button
23 Negative signal from FIS (NO)
24 Line-K for NTV
25 _
26 Actuation for rear RH fog light
27 Signal for driver-side power window UP
28 _
29 _
Timed/dimmed negative control for centre dome light
30
(10W)
31 Actuation for RH stop light
Positive output to NPB and NFR for wake-up signal (short-
32
circuit with P38)
33 Negative signal from door lock/unlock buttons
Negative signal from NO switch on passenger side door
34
(door open detection)
35 _
Active low control for LED and disable anti-lift and hyper-
36
frequency
Analogue signal for switching on LH/RH spotlights and
37
centre front dome light
Positive signal from NPB for NBC wake-up (short-circuit
38
with P32)
39 Timed/dimmed negative control for RH spotlight (5W)
40 _
41 _
42 _
43 Actuation for rear LH fog lights
44 Actuation for LH stop light
45 _
46 Signal for driver-side power window DOWN
47 Negative signal for fuel tank door opening control
Negative signal from rear lid open indicator switch (switch
48
closed with rear lid closed)
Control for power supply relay for turn indicators and
49
running light/front RH DRL
Signal for passenger power window DOWN from
50
passenger-side
51 _
52 IF and anti-tilt power supply
PDF Page 37 of 42
0-
99999
1 Feedback from LH front turn indicator

2 Feedback from front LH daytime running light
3
running light/front LH DRL
4 _
5 LH side direction indicator light activation
6 Input from hyper-frequency
7 Immobilizer aerial
Input for frequency signal from Hall effect sensor on
9
luggage compartment lock motor
10 Speedometer signal input (VSO) from NFR
Negative control for windscreen washer motor power
11
supply relay (out 1)
12 Negative command for high-beam relay coil
13 INT from F-37 for NCS
14 Feedback from RH front turn indicator
15 Feedback from running light/RH front DRL
16 Command output for brake pedal switch power relay
17 +30 from F-39 for NCL
18 Negative signal for side marker relay coil control
19 INT contact for wiper motor
20 Negative command for headlight washer relay coil
21 Driver side door open signal repeat
PDF Page 38 of 42
22 _
23 Input from anti-tilt
Negative signal from brake fluid low level indicator switch
24
(NO with full pan)
25 Positive signal for D+ alternator
26 K-Line for NCM diagnosis
27 _
28 _
Negative control for 2nd speed windscreen wiper motor
29
power supply relay
30 Aerial for RF receiver (earth)
31 RHS direction indicator light activation
Negative signal from LH/RH front/rear brake pad wear
32
sensors
Negative signal from NA front lid incompletely closed
33 indicator switch (switch electrically closed with front lid
open)
34 Serial A-bus line on front cable for CSA
35 B-CAN A for NTP/NCL
36 B-CAN B for NTP/NCL
Speedometer signal repeater for vehicle dynamic signal
37
socket (used by numerous acquisition systems)
38 _
39 Actuation for front RH position light
Negative control for 1st speed windscreen wiper motor
40
power supply relay
41 Signal from external battery charger
42 Front lid open signal from button on centre console
43 Aerial for RF receiver
44 C-CAN L
45 C-CAN H
46 +30 from F-39 for alarm system siren
47 Line-K for front zone for NFR, CSG
48 C-CAN L
49 C-CAN H
50 Actuation for front LH direction indicators light
51 Actuation for front RH direction indicators light
52 Actuation for front LH position light
PDF Page 39 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F-38

2 Positive signal for LH/RH stop light from CPL
3 Positive signal for reverse lights from CPL
4 _
5 B-CAN B for CPL (for NAG, NAP, NSP, NPP, NPG)
6 Negative control for heated rear screen relay coil (R11)
7 B-CAN A for CPL (for NAG, NAP, NSP, NPP, NPG)
8 Negative command for low-beam relay coil (R01)
10 Positive command signal for front lid opener motor
11 _
12 Negative park command signal from external light selector
14 _
15 INT for F-51
16 _
17
CAV
+30 for BC (immobilizer, CAN, running lights, turn
18 indicators/hazard warning lights, driver SBMT, sun visors,
glove compartment light)
20 Ground
PDF Page 40 of 42
0-
99999
I061 - Front headlight unit - left-hand side
1 Earth
2 Turn indicator signal
4 Power for DRL/POS and turn indicator
5 High beam command
6 Turn indicator lamp diagnostic signal
7 Low beam
8 Earth (litronic)
9 DRL activation
10 Running light lamp diagnostic signal
11 LIT COM
12 INT (+15) (key on)
13 CAN H
14 CAN L
PDF Page 41 of 42
0-
99999
I062 - Front headlight unit - right-hand side
1 Earth
4 Power for DRL/POS and turn indicator
5 High beam command
6 Turn indicator lamp diagnostic signal
7 Low beam
8 Earth (litronic)
9 DRL activation
10 Running light lamp diagnostic signal
11 LIT COM
12 INT (+15) (key on)
13 CAN H
14 CAN L
PDF Page 1 of 12
Print Close PDF
FD0205 - Direction indicators/hazard 0-

lights 99999
FD0205_00_P00 - Direction indicators/hazard lights
PDF Page 2 of 12

lights 99999

G003-A C31112_1
side
D060 Hazard lights control C21214_2
I006 Front side direction indicator - right-hand side C31112_1
I005 Front side direction indicator - left-hand side C31112_1
G003-B C31112_1
side
D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
Junction between dashboard cable / passenger
X017-A C20012_0
Y017-A C21214_2
and rear wiring / dashboard cable
PDF Page 3 of 12

lights 99999

PDF Page 4 of 12

lights 99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 5 of 12

lights 99999

D060 Hazard lights control C21214_2
Y017-A C21214_2
and rear wiring / dashboard cable
PDF Page 6 of 12

lights 99999

D072 C20012_0
(clock spring)
Junction between dashboard cable / passenger
X017-A C20012_0
PDF Page 7 of 12

lights 99999

I005 Front side direction indicator - left-hand side C31112_1
I006 Front side direction indicator - right-hand side C31112_1
PDF Page 8 of 12

lights 99999

PDF Page 9 of 12

lights 99999
PDF Page 10 of 12

lights 99999
PDF Page 11 of 12

lights 99999
PDF Page 1 of 12
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0206 - Stop lights
99999
FD0206_00_P00 - Stop lights
PDF Page 2 of 12
0-
99999

P018 Diode C21214_2
I011 Supplementary stop light C21214_1
X003 C31112_2
Y003 C20012_0
D006 Brake indicator switch C31112_2
PDF Page 3 of 12
0-
99999

D006 Brake indicator switch C31112_2
X003 C31112_2
PDF Page 4 of 12
0-
99999

P018 Diode C21214_2
PDF Page 5 of 12
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 6 of 12
0-
99999

Y003 C20012_0
PDF Page 7 of 12
0-
99999

PDF Page 8 of 12
0-
99999

I011 Supplementary stop light C21214_1
PDF Page 9 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 10 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 11 of 12
0-
99999
PDF Page 1 of 42
Print Close PDF
0-
FD0207 - Reverse gear lights
99999
FD0207_00_P00 - Reverse gear lights
PDF Page 2 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 3 of 42
0-
99999
CA0101_0 - E004-Y C003-X

PDF Page 4 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 5 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 6 of 42
0-
99999

PDF Page 7 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 8 of 42
0-
99999
PDF Page 9 of 42
0-
99999
C003-B +30 from SCM F-82

C003-B 2-way connector
PDF Page 10 of 42
0-
99999
1 Track leading to Q18

2 Consent for low beams from F-13 for headlight level ECU
3 Power supply for LH low beam from F-13
4 Signal for controlling MIL indicator light from NCM
5 Reference ground for engine oil temperature sensor
6 Signal from engine oil level sensor
7 INT/A ignition switch from F-31 for NCL
8 Power supply for reverse light from switch on gearbox
9 3rd stop light power supply from NFR
10 Power supply for windscreen wiper relay from F-43
11 INT from F-42 for alternator
12 Power supply for RH low beam from F-12
13 INT from F-51
14 INT from F-37 for NO stop lights
15 Stop light power supply from pedal board switch
16 Stop light signal (NO) for NFR
17 INT from F-35 for clutch pedal command (manual gearbox)
PDF Page 11 of 42
INT from F-35 for high beam, headlight washer and NCL
18
relay coils
19 INT from F-35 for lift system
20 CPL earth path
PDF Page 12 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F33

3 +30 from F46 for NCP roof node
5 Supplementary stop light power supply
Positive signal for NO stop lights for NCR, stop light for
6
USA market
7 Reverse gear signal input
8 Reverse signal for radio navigator/NIT
Positive signal for rear screen wash/wipe control on SW
9
versions
B-CAN A on passenger compartment cable for NPG, NPP,
10
+30 from F-32 for front puddle lights, footwell lights, side
11
marker relay coils, central cabin light
Power supply for driver side front seat heater/power socket
12
from F-52
13 30 CAV, NSP, 86 fuel filler flap T23 relay coil
PDF Page 13 of 42
Power supply for front passenger seat/cigarette lighter from

14
F-44
15 Power supply for heated rear window from F-40
16 Positive control for luggage compartment open striker plate
17 NPP power supply from F-48
18 Positive control for luggage compartment close striker plate
20 Negative signal for rear screen washer motor control
21 INT from F-49 dome light button fixing plate
22 Negative signal for seat belt warning light control to NQS
23 INT from F-49 for CSP, NSP, NCD
24 INT from F-49
26 INT from F-51 for NCR
B-CAN B on passenger compartment cable for NPG, NPP,
28
29 _
30 +30 NPG from F-47
31 F-41 power supply available
32 Third stop light power from NFR (connection with AH9)
PDF Page 14 of 42
0-
99999
1 INT/A from T17 relay 87(NC)

3 INT from F-49 for CEM
4 INT from F-49
5 B-CAN B
6 INT from F-50 for airbag ECU, CPOD
10 CPL power earth
12 INT from F-51 for starter button
13 INT from F-51
14 INT/A from F-31 for NBC
15 Signal from oil temperature sensor to NQS
16 Reference earth for engine oil temperature sensor
17 B-CAN A
PDF Page 15 of 42
18 _
PDF Page 16 of 42
0-
99999
C003-O 2-way connector

C003-O _
PDF Page 17 of 42
0-
99999
+30 from F-38 for luggage compartment release striker

1
plate
2 Control signal for LH/RH stop lights
3 Positive signal for turning on reverse lights
4 _
B-CAN B from NBC (for NAG, NAP, NIM, NSP, NPP,
5
Negative signal for heated rear windowís coil relay control
6
(T11)
B-CAN A from NBC (for NAG, NAP, NIM, NSP, NPP,
7
8 Negative signal for Low beamsí coil control relay (T01)
9 INT for NBC
Positive command for luggage compartment opening
10
gearmotor
11 Positive control for luggage compartment close ratio motor
PDF Page 18 of 42
Negative signal for connected devicesí coil 2 relay control

14
(T13)
15 INT for F-51 power supply from NBC
16 _
17
CAV
+30 for NBC (immobiliser, CAN, position/direction
18 indicator/hazard lights, driver SBMT, ceiling lights, sun
visors, glove compartment light)
20 Earth for luggage compartment striker plate ratio motor
PDF Page 19 of 42
0-
99999
79 Connection cable to battery positive
PDF Page 20 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F-19 LH cylinder bank

2 +30 from F-14 for T02 high beam relay
3
4 +30 from F-15 for 30/86 of T19, T39
+30 from F-18 for LH NCM, main relay coil, +30 T43 for
5
Stop&Start
6 +30 from F-23 for ABS electronics
7 + 30 HiFi amplifier (+30 converter 2 for Stop&Start)
8
9 +30 from F-09 for 30 and 86 third stop light relay, 86 T37
+30 from F-84 for radio, ICP, CAN BOX, ATS, clock
10
spring. (+30 converter 1 for Stop&Start)
11 +30 from F-20 for T10 main relay 2 (coil + power)
12 Power supply for RH cylinder bank ECU (from T-10)
13 Power supply for RH cylinder bank (from T-10)
Power supply for RH cylinder bank oxygen sensor (from T-
14
10)
15 Bus-bar pin 15/16/17
16 Main relay 2 (T10) input for F-87, F-24, F-16
17 Bus-bar pin 15/16/17
19 +30 from F-04 for ABS/NFR (pump)
20 +30 from F-05 for AC
PDF Page 21 of 42

22 +30 from F-03 for NCP
23 +30 from F-82 for CPL2 and CVB
+ 30 from F-81 J214 bus-bar F-91/F-92/F-93, bus-bar F-
24
94/F-95
25 +30 from F-02 ABS valves
26 +30 output from T07 (87) for horns
27 Negative signal for T07 horn relay coil (85)
28 Negative signal for T06 relay coil (85) from NQS
29 +30 output from T06 (87) for glove compartment motors
30 +30 input for T06 (30) from F32 CPL
31 Input from F24 for T30 relay coil (86) for air pump
32 Power supply from T30 (87) for air pump
33 Earth for relay T30 coil (85) for air pump
34 +30 for T02 (30) from F-14 high beams
35 Power supply from T02 (87) for high beams
36 INT input from F-35 for T02 relay coil (86) for high beams
Negative signal for relay T02 coil (85) for high beams from
37
NPL
38 +30 for T03 (30) from F18
39 Power from T03 (87) for controlling fuel pump 2nd speed
40 Input from F24 for T03 relay coil (86)
41 Negative signal for T03 relay coil (85) from RH NCM
42 +30 from F18 for T09 main relay coil (86) 1
Negative signal for T09 IE system relay coil (85) from LH
43
NCM
44 Earth for relay T08 coil (85) for AC system
45 Input from F-24 for T08 relay coil (86) for AC system
46 Earth for relay T31 coil (85) for headlight washer
INT input from F-37 for T31 relay coil (86) for headlight
47
washer
48 30 T17 relay from 15/54
49 _
50 Negative signal for T17 relay coil (85)
51 Input for T17 relay coil (86) from starter button
52 +30 from F-10 for T14 fuel pump 1 relay (30)
56 +30 from F-21 for T05 (30) fuel pump 2
Power supply for LH cylinder bank oxygen sensor (from
60
T09)
61 Power supply for LH cylinder bank ECU (from T-09)
62 Power supply for LH cylinder bank (from T-09)
63 Power supply from F-08 for AC system compressor
64 Power supply for headlight washers from F85
65 +30 for T20 from F-21
66 Power from T20 (87) for fuel pump 2
67 Negative signal from RH NCM
68 Input for T20 coil (86) from F-24
69 +30 from F-15 for T19 (30) CLA with EPB
70 Power supply from T19 (87) for CLA
71 Negative signal for T19 relay coil (85) CLA CON EPB
72 Input for T19 relay coil (86) CLA with EPB from F-15
73 +30 for T10 (30) from F-20 main 2
74 Power supply from T10 (87) for BUS-BAR F24/F16/F87
75 +30 from F-20 for T10 main relay coil 2 (86)
76 Negative signal for T10 main relay coil (85) 2 from RH
PDF Page 22 of 42
NCM
77 Power supply output from T17 (87a) INT/A for CPL
78 Power output from T19 (87a) (predisposition)
PDF Page 23 of 42
0-
99999
C019 - Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
1 +30 from F-54 for relay T24

2 +30 from F-63 for T25 NCR relay
3 +30 from F-56 for NAG
4 +30 from F-62 for NAP (electronics)
5 +30 from F-60 for NAP
6 +30 from F-78 for battery charger
7 +30 from F-61 for NAG (electronics), lift system
8 +30 from F-65 for door LCK/UNLCK
9 +30 from F-66
+30 from F-80 for starter relay T43 in CS-SCM 3 (for R2
10
starter relay 2 with Stop&Start)
11 Power from T21/F-55
Power from T21/F-57 for front LH and rear RH side
12
markers
Power from T21/F-67 for front RH and rear LH side
13
markers
19 Power from T22/F-59 for reverse lights with NCR
20 Power supply from F-64 for fuel filler flap
21 Input for F-64 from T23
PDF Page 24 of 42
22 Input for F-59 from T22

23 Input for F-68
24 Input for F-58
Coil 85, maxirelay T21 from NBC, dependent on running
25
lights
26 Coil 86, maxirelay T21 (+30 from F32)
27 Contact 30, microrelay T24 (+30 from F54)
28 Contact 87, microrelay T24 (gearbox fan)
29 Coil 86, microrelay T24 (from main relay)
30 Contact 87a, microrelay T24 (n.c.)
31 Coil 85, microrelay T24 from NCR
33 Contact 87a, microrelay T25
34 Coil 86, microrelay T25 from F-63
35 Contact 87, microrelay T25 to NCR, relay coil T22
36 Contact 30, microrelay T25 from F-63
39 Coil 86, microrelay T22 from 87 T25
40 Contact 87, microrelay T22 for F59
41 Contact 87, microrelay T23 for F-64
42 Coil 86, microrelay T23 (+30 F-39)
Coil 85, microrelay T23 from NBC, dependent on fuel filler
44
flap button
PDF Page 25 of 42
0-
99999
C019 - Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
1 +30 CVB power supply
PDF Page 26 of 42
0-
99999
10 NBC power earth

11 _
12 _
13 _
14 Positive control for alarm system LED
15 _
16 +30 SBMT for glove compartment light (5W)
17 _
18 _
19 Ground (signal)
20 _
21 Positive output for DRL enable signal
Positive signal for LH/RH stop lights from CPL (short
22
circuited with CY2 via pin AH 16 CPL)
23 Speedometer signal 2 repeat for car stereo/NIT
24 B-CAN B for NVO, NAB
25 B-CAN A for NVO, NAB
26 _
27 INT/A from F-31 CPL
PDF Page 27 of 42
0-
99999
1 _
Negative signal for position lights control from external
2
light switch
3 +30 from F-53 for NQS
Negative signal for low beams control from external light
4
switch
5 B-CAN A for NQS
6 B-CAN B for NQS
7 _
8 Earth for CLE
9 _
PDF Page 28 of 42
0-
99999
28 1st windscreen wiper speed signal from CVS (clock spring)

29 Dimmed positive control for hazard warning lights on LED
30 _
32 2nd wiper speed signal from steering column stalk
33 _
34 Negative signal from hazard control
35 Negative signal for rear fog light button
36 Earth for NQS
PDF Page 29 of 42
0-
99999
1 B-CAN High (or B) at low speed for diagnostics

2 _
3 _
4 Power earth for diagnostic equipment
5 Signal earth for diagnostic equipment
6 C-CAN High for diagnostics
7 K-Line for NCM/NCR diagnosis (connection with V26)
8 _
9 B-CAN Low (or A) at low speed for diagnostics
10 _
11 _
12 K-Line for front zone, NFR (connection with Z47)
13 Line-K for NTV (connected to LN24)
14 C-CAN Low for diagnostics
15 _
+30 EOBD diagnostic socket from F-39 (connection with
16
Y17)
PDF Page 30 of 42
0-
99999
1 Timed/dimmed negative control for LH spotlight (5W)

2 _
3 Reference ground for front lid lock
4 Fuel tank door relay opening control
5 _
6 Actuation for rear RH direction indicators light
7 Fuel level signal from tank (positive)
LH rear running light actuation (on luggage compartment
8
lid/bumper)
RH rear running light actuation (on luggage compartment
9
lid/bumper)
10 A-bus serial line on rear cable for CAV and rain sensor
Negative signal from NO switch on driver side door (door
11
open detection)
12 LH/RH number plate light activation
13 Parking brake activated output (Japan market only)
14 10W front lid light command
15 Positive control for door status LED
16 'Autopark' enable/disable signal
Speed signal (VSO) / VSO signal repeater for Japan
17
navigator
18 Actuation for rear LH direction indicators light
19 _
Signal for passenger power window UP from passenger-
20
side
PDF Page 31 of 42
21 Fuel level signal from tank (Negative)

22 Input from hyper-frequency and anti-lift disable button
23 Negative signal from FIS (NO)
24 Line-K for NTV
25 _
26 Actuation for rear RH fog light
27 Signal for driver-side power window UP
28 _
29 _
Timed/dimmed negative control for centre dome light
30
(10W)
31 Actuation for RH stop light
Positive output to NPB and NFR for wake-up signal (short-
32
circuit with P38)
33 Negative signal from door lock/unlock buttons
Negative signal from NO switch on passenger side door
34
(door open detection)
35 _
Active low control for LED and disable anti-lift and hyper-
36
frequency
Analogue signal for switching on LH/RH spotlights and
37
centre front dome light
Positive signal from NPB for NBC wake-up (short-circuit
38
with P32)
39 Timed/dimmed negative control for RH spotlight (5W)
40 _
41 _
42 _
43 Actuation for rear LH fog lights
44 Actuation for LH stop light
45 _
46 Signal for driver-side power window DOWN
47 Negative signal for fuel tank door opening control
Negative signal from rear lid open indicator switch (switch
48
closed with rear lid closed)
49
running light/front RH DRL
Signal for passenger power window DOWN from
50
passenger-side
51 _
52 IF and anti-tilt power supply
PDF Page 32 of 42
0-
99999
1 Feedback from LH front turn indicator

2 Feedback from front LH daytime running light
3
running light/front LH DRL
4 _
5 LH side direction indicator light activation
6 Input from hyper-frequency
Input for frequency signal from Hall effect sensor on
9
luggage compartment lock motor
10 Speedometer signal input (VSO) from NFR
Negative control for windscreen washer motor power
11
supply relay (out 1)
12 Negative command for high-beam relay coil
13 INT from F-37 for NCS
14 Feedback from RH front turn indicator
15 Feedback from running light/RH front DRL
16 Command output for brake pedal switch power relay
17 +30 from F-39 for NCL
18 Negative signal for side marker relay coil control
19 INT contact for wiper motor
20 Negative command for headlight washer relay coil
21 Driver side door open signal repeat
PDF Page 33 of 42
22 _
23 Input from anti-tilt
Negative signal from brake fluid low level indicator switch
24
(NO with full pan)
25 Positive signal for D+ alternator
26 K-Line for NCM diagnosis
27 _
28 _
Negative control for 2nd speed windscreen wiper motor
29
power supply relay
30 Aerial for RF receiver (earth)
31 RHS direction indicator light activation
Negative signal from LH/RH front/rear brake pad wear
32
sensors
Negative signal from NA front lid incompletely closed
33 indicator switch (switch electrically closed with front lid
open)
34 Serial A-bus line on front cable for CSA
35 B-CAN A for NTP/NCL
36 B-CAN B for NTP/NCL
Speedometer signal repeater for vehicle dynamic signal
37
socket (used by numerous acquisition systems)
38 _
39 Actuation for front RH position light
Negative control for 1st speed windscreen wiper motor
40
power supply relay
41 Signal from external battery charger
42 Front lid open signal from button on centre console
43 Aerial for RF receiver
44 C-CAN L
45 C-CAN H
46 +30 from F-39 for alarm system siren
47 Line-K for front zone for NFR, CSG
48 C-CAN L
49 C-CAN H
50 Actuation for front LH direction indicators light
51 Actuation for front RH direction indicators light
52 Actuation for front LH position light
PDF Page 34 of 42
0-
99999
1 +30 from F-38

2 Positive signal for LH/RH stop light from CPL
3 Positive signal for reverse lights from CPL
4 _
5 B-CAN B for CPL (for NAG, NAP, NSP, NPP, NPG)
6 Negative control for heated rear screen relay coil (R11)
7 B-CAN A for CPL (for NAG, NAP, NSP, NPP, NPG)
8 Negative command for low-beam relay coil (R01)
10 Positive command signal for front lid opener motor
11 _
12 Negative park command signal from external light selector
14 _
15 INT for F-51
16 _
17
CAV
+30 for BC (immobilizer, CAN, running lights, turn
18 indicators/hazard warning lights, driver SBMT, sun visors,
glove compartment light)
20 Ground
PDF Page 35 of 42
0-
99999
E042 - Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
1 Switched power ground loop 1

2 Fixed power ground loop
3 Switched power ground loop 2
4 Fixed power ground loop
5 Ground for e_parklock
6 Redundant GA2 sync. position (GA2/822)
7 E-Diff Pressure sensor
8 Clutch 1 Temperature (Ts_1); (Vcc side)
9 Clutch lubricant pressure 1 (c_lube_K1/141)
10 _
11 Low pressure bypass (s_LP_Sol/041)
12 Clutch lubricant_pressure 2 (c_lube_K2/142)
13 E-diff pressure
14 Clutch pressure 2 (c_K2/112)
15 Clutch pressure 1 (c_K1/111)
16 Gear_actuator High-Side 2 (c_GA2/312)
20 Clutch input speed (nE/XXX)
21 Vcc (12V) of speed sensor (even shaft)
22 Transout speed
23 Odd Shaft speed
24 _
PDF Page 36 of 42
25 External radiator temperature (ts_2/XXX)

26 Park Lock position redundant
27 Clutch pressure sensor 2 (ps_K2/812)
28 Switched Ground for sensor Ground loop
29 Fixed Ground for sensor Ground loop
30 _
31 _
32 _
33 _
34 _
35 _
36 Interconnection sensor Ground loop
37 Interconnection sensor Ground loop
38 _
39 Vcc (12V) of engine speed sensor
40 Even shaft speed
41 Vcc (12V) of Transout speed sensor
42 Vcc (12V) of odd shaft speed sensor
43 Gear actuator unit selection (s_GA_sol/320)
44 Redundant GA4 sync. position (poss_GA4/824)
45 Clutch 2 temperature
46 Pressure regulation (c_system/080)
47 Power for ps_ediff and ps-system sensors (811)
48 E-Diff pressure, ground
49 _
Power for poss_GA1 (811), poss_GA2 (823) and pos. Park
50
Lock (XXX) sensors
51 _
52 _
53 _
Power for poss_GA4 (824), poss_GA3 (823) and selector
54
pos. (XXX) sensors
55 _
56 _
57 _
58 GA1 synchroniser position (poss_GA1/821)
60 Park Lock position (parklock_pos/XXX)
61 Redundant clutch travel 1 (rs_K1/121)
62 Redundant clutch travel 2 (rs_K2/122)
63 Clutch pressure sensor 1 (ps_K1/811)
64 System pressure sensor (ps_System/880)
65 _
66 _
Power supply for ps_K2 (812), ps_system (880) and
67
ps_ediff (880) K2 sensors
68 _
69 _
70 _
71 _
74 Selector position (XXX)
75 _
76 _
79 High press./low press. switch (S_HPLP/040)
80 El. Park Lock actuator (E-magnet)
81 Hydraulic Park Lock actuator (c_Parklock/420)
PDF Page 37 of 42
PDF Page 38 of 42
0-
99999
E042 - Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
82 _
83 CAN 2 high (for development/tuning)
84 Wake-up 1 (ignition switch)
85 TIP +/- redundant
86 TIP +
87 Launch/Winter
88 Rev button
89 Transmission failure warning light
90 CAN 1 high
91 CAN 2 low (for development/tuning)
92 CAN 1 low
93 Forward/Reverse lever (not connected)
94 TIP -
95 Forward/Reverse lever redundant (not connected)
96 Key switch redundant (not connected)
97 Auto/Manual
98 _
99 GND for ren button/CAN Ground
100 Ground for Paddles
101 Ground for Lever (not connected)
102 Reverse Drive Relay (RevDriveRly)
103 Failure signal (positive from start button)
104 CAN earth
105 Brake switch
PDF Page 39 of 42
106 _
107 _
108 _
109 FWD Drive LED (not connected)
110 Engine starter relay
111 Keylock solenoid
112 Cooler fan
113 Main relay
114 _
115 _
116 Logic battery power (permanent)
117 Battery earth
118 Battery earth
119 Solenoid power (switched by master relay)
120 _
121 _
PDF Page 40 of 42
0-
99999
I007 - Taillight - left-hand side
1 Stop light
2 Rear fog/running lights
3 Turn indicator light
5 Reverse light
6 Earth
PDF Page 41 of 42
0-
99999
I008 - Taillight - right-hand side
1 Stop light
2 Rear fog/running lights
3 Turn indicator light
5 Reverse light
6 Earth
PDF Page 2 of 8
0-
FD0209 - Rear fog lights
99999

Y039 C43001_0
X039 C21214_1
I003 Rear fog light - left-hand side C43001_0
I035 Rear fog light - right-hand side C43001_0
PDF Page 3 of 8
0-
99999

PDF Page 4 of 8
0-
99999

PDF Page 5 of 8
0-
99999

X039 C21214_1
PDF Page 6 of 8
0-
99999
C43001_0 - Rear bumper cable

I003 Rear fog light - left-hand side C43001_0
I035 Rear fog light - right-hand side C43001_0
Y039 C43001_0
PDF Page 7 of 8
0-
99999
Page 1 of 1
Wiring Index
Code Tab. Description Assembly No.

C01001 Negative battery cable
C02601 Emergency positive cable
C02801 Positive branch node cable
C02901 SCM supplementary ECU power cable
C04001 Engine utility cable
C06001 Engine earth braid
C11011 LH bank injection cable 98333-99999
C11601 Intake manifold wiring harness A -(valves)- LH cylinder bank
C11701 Intake manifold wiring harness B -(position)- LH cylinder bank
C12011 RH bank injection cable 98333-99999
C20012 Dashboard cable 98333-99999
C21213 1 Passenger compartment cable and rear cable 98333-99999
C21213 2 Passenger compartment cable and rear cable 98333-99999
C24002 Driver-side door cable
C25002 Passenger-side door cable
C31111 1 Front cable and passenger compartment cable 98333-99999
C31111 2 Front cable and passenger compartment cable 98333-99999
C33001 Front bumper cable
C43001 Rear bumper cable
C50101 DCT electronically controlled gearbox cable
C53111 Lift system cable 98333-99999
C56201 Airbag cable - passenger side
C56301 Door panel airbag cable - driver side
C56401 Door panel airbag cable - passenger side
C60001 Air conditioning and heating system cable
C60101 Passenger compartment air electric fan cable
C67001 Glove compartment cable
C83101 Audio installation cable 98333-99999
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cables.htm 8/7/2011
Cable View Page 1 of 1
C01001 Negative battery cable
Code Description
D313-B Battery master switch
G012 Battery frame ground
https://modiscs.ferrari.it/KnowledgeOnline/techdoc/electrical-system/F142_C/eng/cable_pri... 8/7/2011
C02601 Emergency positive cable
Code Description
C001-F Battery ECU (CBA)
C036 Connection to battery positive (emergency start)
C02801 Positive branch node cable
Code Description
B301-A Branch terminal board
C001-E Battery ECU (CBA)
C02901 SCM supplementary ECU power cable
Code Description
C001-D Battery ECU (CBA)
C010-A Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM)
C04001 Engine utility cable
Code Description
B002-B Alternator with integrated adjuster
B301-C Branch terminal board
C066-B Power multiplication
M020-B 12V starter motor
C06001 Engine earth braid
Code Description
G002 Earth on engine for battery
G008 Earth on chassis for engine
C11011 LH bank injection cable
Code Description
B002-A Alternator with integrated adjuster
E129-A Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side
E300-B Ionising ECU (ION)
G055 Earth on engine - left-hand side
G080 Head cover earth - left hand cylinder bank
L009 Electro-injector - cylinder 5
L053 Coil - cylinder 5
L153 Intake camshaft timing adjuster - left-hand main bearings
L155 Exhaust camshaft timing adjuster - left-hand main bearings
L157 Intake timing sensor - left-hand main bearings
L159 Exhaust timing sensor - left-hand main bearings
M020-A 12V starter motor
M025-A A.C. compressor
M025-B A.C. compressor
M111 Motorised throttle valve - left-hand main bearings
S073 Oxygen sensor - ahead of catalytic converter - left-hand main bearings
S108 Direct injection pump (GDI ) - left-hand main bearings
S309 Fuel pressure sensor - left-hand main bearings
X304 Junction between left hand cylinder bank injection cable / right hand cylinder bank injection cable
Y058-A Left hand cylinder bank injection / intake manifold (valves) cable junction
Y058-B Left hand cylinder bank injection / intake manifold (valves) cable junction
Y303 Junction between left hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z080 Air flow meter - left-hand main bearings
C11601 Intake manifold wiring harness A -(valves)- LH cylinder bank
Code Description
L160 Intake manifold valve - 2
L161 Intake manifold valve - 1
X058-B Junction between intake manifold cable (valves) / left hand cylinder bank injection cable
C11701 Intake manifold wiring harness B -(position)- LH cylinder bank
Code Description
L162 Compensator butterfly valve sensor (intake manifold position) - 1
L163 Compensator butterfly valve sensor (intake manifold position) - 2
X058-A Junction between intake manifold cable (valves) / left hand cylinder bank injection cable
C12011 RH bank injection cable
Code Description
E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION)
G007 Earth on engine - right-hand side
G081 Head cover earth
L152 Intake camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L154 Exhaust camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L156 Intake timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L158 Exhaust timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L300 Secondary air solenoid valve
M026 Motor-driven throttle - right-hand main bearings
S014 Engine coolant temperature sensor
S036 Engine oil pressure sensor
S060 Engine oil temperature sensor
S071 Oxygen sensor - ahead of catalytic converter - right-hand main bearings
S107 Direct injection pump (GDI ) - right-hand main bearings
S114 RPM sensor
Y302-B Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y302-C Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y304 Right hand cylinder bank injection / left hand cylinder bank injection cable junction
Z002 Air flow meter - right-hand main bearings
C12011 RH bank injection cable
Code Description
E006-A Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E300-A Ionising ECU (ION)
G081 Head cover earth
L152 Intake camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L154 Exhaust camshaft timing adjuster - right-hand main bearings
L156 Intake timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L158 Exhaust timing sensor - right-hand main bearings
L300 Secondary air solenoid valve
M026 Motor-driven throttle - right-hand main bearings
S036 Engine oil pressure sensor
S060 Engine oil temperature sensor
S071 Oxygen sensor - ahead of catalytic converter - right-hand main bearings
S107 Direct injection pump (GDI ) - right-hand main bearings
S114 RPM sensor
Y302-B Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y302-C Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y304 Right hand cylinder bank injection / left hand cylinder bank injection cable junction
Z002 Air flow meter - right-hand main bearings
C20012 Dashboard cable
Code Description
C003-M Dashboard ECU (CPL)
D002-B Ignition switch
D018 Electric rear-view mirror control
D020 External light switch (CLE)
D024 Glove compartment light button
D058 Steering column adjustment control
D072 Steering wheel node - Driver side airbag (NVO) (clock spring)
D073 Handbrake switch
D100 ICP dial (Instrument Control Panel)
D101 TFT control
D301 Gear shift paddle selector
D412-A Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU
D412-B Satellite alarm system (ATS) - NAVTRAK ECU
E003-A Control panel (NQS)
E003-B Control panel (NQS)
E003-C Control panel (NQS)
E003-D Control panel (NQS)
E004-D Body computer node (NBC)
E004-F Body computer node (NBC)
E004-G Body computer node (NBC)
E013-A HI-FI system amplifier (DSP)
E013-B HI-FI system amplifier (DSP)
E040-A Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-B Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-D Info-telematic node (NIT)
E040-E Info-telematic node (NIT)
E073-B Airbag node (NAB)

E410 Information repetition node (CAN BOX)
G022 Dashboard area earth - right-hand side
G024 Airbag system earth
G043 Amplifier earth
H003 Connection with AC unit
I014 Alarm system LED
I024 Glove compartment light
K005 Air vent control module
L060 Front central loudspeaker
L062 Tweeter - driver side
L065 Tweeter - passenger side
L111 Front parking sensor buzzer
M032-A Axial steering column movement motor
M032-B Axial steering column movement motor
M034-A Vertical steering column movement motor
M034-B Vertical steering column movement motor
M090 Air vent actuator - 1
S021 Radio antenna
X017-A Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
X017-B Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
X019 Dashboard / Airbag - passenger side cable junction
X066-A Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
X066-B Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
X066-C Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (white RCA)
X134 Junction between dashboard cable / 'Japan' navigator cable (red RCA)
X333 Dashboard/glove compartment joint
X356 Microphone power supply (phantompower interface)
Y003 Junction between dashboard cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Y007 Junction between dashboard cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y162 IPOD interface joint
C21213-1 Passenger compartment cable and rear cable
Code Description
E006-B Engine control node (NCM) - right-hand side
E082 Electric parking brake node
E129-B Engine control node (NCM) - left-hand side
G041-A Rear light area earth - left-hand side
G041-B Rear light area earth - left-hand side
G042-A Rear light area earth - right-hand side
G042-B Rear light area earth - right-hand side
G045 Earth for parking brake ECU
G054 Earth on chassis for injection system - right-hand side
G056 Earth on chassis for injection system - left-hand side
G060 Fuel tank earth
G061 Fuel filler neck earth
G070 Fuel tank earth - left-hand side
H011 Heated rear window
I007 Taillight - left-hand side
I008 Taillight - right-hand side
I011 Supplementary stop light
L007 Anti-evaporative emission system safety solenoid valve - right-hand main bearings
L027 Rear shock absorber - left-hand side
L028 Rear shock absorber - right-hand side
L200 Evaporative emissions control system safety solenoid valve - left-hand main bearings
L302 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve
L303 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve - left-hand side
L304 Exhaust bypass solenoid valve - right-hand side
M049 Fuel tank filler cap door actuator
M064 Gearbox oil cooling electric fan
M077 Air pump

M301 Fuel vapour diagnostic pump
M302 Electric fuel pump - left-hand side
M303 Electric fuel pump - right-hand side
R033-A Fuel pump resistor - 1st speed
R033-B Fuel pump resistor - 1st speed
R034-A Fuel pump resistor
R034-B Fuel pump resistor
R041 Robotized gearbox node resistor
S032 Lid open sensor
S072 Oxygen sensor - behind catalytic converter - right-hand main bearings
S074 Oxygen sensor - behind catalytic converter - left-hand main bearings
S081 TRIGGER - Rear tyre pressure sensor - left-hand side
S082 TRIGGER - Rear tyre pressure sensor - right-hand side
S094-A Rear brake pad wear sensor - right-hand side
S094-B Rear brake pad wear sensor - right-hand side
S095-A Rear brake pad wear sensor - left-hand side
S095-B Rear brake pad wear sensor - left-hand side
X039 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / rear bumper cable
X090 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / lift system cable
X302-B Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank injection cable
X303 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / left hand cylinder bank injection cable
X405 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable
X406 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable
Y404 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable
Z004 Vertical acceleration sensor - 3 RL
Z018 Rear wheel ABS sensor - left-hand side
Z019 Rear wheel ABS sensor - right-hand side
Z027 Wheel acceleration sensor - rear left
Z028 Wheel acceleration sensor - rear right
C21213-2 Passenger compartment cable and rear cable
Code Description
C003-L Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C003-O Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C019-A Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
C019-B Luggage compartment ecu (CVB)
C311 Battery charger joint
C313 Supplementary relay ECU 3 (CS-SCM 3)
D060 Hazard lights control
D068 Accelerator pedal sensor
D200 Lift system button
D300 DCT gearbox control panel
D312 Glove compartment button
D400 Luggage compartment lid and fuel filler flap release controls
D405 Button for RHT roof and power windows
E004-N Body computer node (NBC)
E018 Parking camera ECU
E041-A Parking sensor node (NSP)
E041-B Parking sensor node (NSP)
E041-C Parking sensor node (NSP)
E042-A Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
E042-B Electronically-controlled gearbox node (NCR)
E073-A Airbag node (NAB)
E088 Japan' navigator node
E409 Anti-lifting sensor (CAS)
G021 Dashboard area earth - left-hand side
G105 Air pump earth
I025-A Front ceiling light (PAC)
I025-D Front ceiling light (PAC)

L112 Rear parking sensor buzzer
L201 Starter relay - 3
L202 Starter relay - 2
P018 Diode
R004 Cigarette lighter
R014 Belt pretensioner - driver's side
R015 Belt pretensioner - passenger's side
S007 Fuel level sensor - 1
S026 Satellite collision sensor - driver's side
S027 Satellite collision sensor - passenger's side
S078 Inertia switch (FIS)
X001 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / driver side door cable
X002 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / passenger side door cable
X007 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / dashboard cable
X018-A Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / driver side seat cable
X018-B Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / driver side seat cable
X022 Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / passenger side seat cable
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / passenger compartment cable and rear
X115-A
wiring
X302-A Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / right hand cylinder bank injection cable
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / front wiring and passenger compartment
Y008
cable
Y017-A Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / dashboard cable
Y017-B Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / dashboard cable
Y069 HIFI braid joint
Y115-B
wiring
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring (right-hand side) / front wiring and
Y200
passenger compartment cable
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring (left-hand side) / front wiring and
Y201
passenger compartment cable
Junction between passenger compartment cable and rear wiring / front wiring and passenger compartment
Y301
cable
Z031 Internal rear-view mirror
C24002 Driver-side door cable
Code Description
D308 External door handle switch - driver's side
D314 Internal door handle switch - driver's side
D316 Door lock knob switch - driver's side
E021-A Driver's door node (NPG)
E021-B Driver's door node (NPG)
E021-C Driver's door node (NPG)
E407 Slave hyper frequency alarm system sensor 1 on door (CSI slave 1)
I019 Step light - driver's side
L061-A Door woofer - driver's side
L061-B Door woofer - driver's side
L136 Mid range speaker - driver side door
M004 Door lock actuator - driver's side
M008-A External rear-view mirror - driver's side
M008-B External rear-view mirror - driver's side
M008-C External rear-view mirror - driver's side
M008-D External rear-view mirror - driver's side
M010 Power window motor - driver's side
S029 Window position microswitch - driver's side
S120 Crash sensor on door - driver side
X230 Junction between driver side door cable / driver side curtain airbag cable
Y001 Junction between driver side door cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
C25002 Passenger-side door cable
Code Description
D309 External door handle switch - passenger's side
D315 Internal door handle switch - passenger's side
E022-A Passenger's door node (NPP)
E022-B Passenger's door node (NPP)
E022-C Passenger's door node (NPP)
E406 Master hyper frequency alarm system sensor (CSI master)
I020 Step light - passenger's side
L064-A Door woofer - passenger's side
L064-B Door woofer - passenger's side
L138 Mid range speaker - passenger side door
M005 Door lock actuator - passenger's side
M009-A External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M009-B External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M009-C External rear-view mirror - passenger's side
M011 Power window motor - passenger's side
S030 Window position microswitch - passenger's side
S121 Crash sensor on door - passenger side
X231 Junction between passenger side door cable / curtain airbag cable
Y002 Junction between passenger side door cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
C31111-1 Front cable and passenger compartment cable
Code Description
D033 Luggage compartment lid electric lock switch
E001 Alarm system siren ECU (CSA)
E029 NFA ECU (adaptive headlights node)
G001-A Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side
G001-B Engine compartment earth - front - left-hand side
G003-A Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side
G003-B Engine compartment earth - front - right-hand side
G005 Braking system earth
G009 Earth on engine cooling radiator electric fan
G012-A Battery frame ground
G029-A Engine cooling electric fan's earth
G029-B Engine cooling electric fan's earth
I005 Front side direction indicator - left-hand side
I006 Front side direction indicator - right-hand side
I013 Luggage compartment ceiling light
I061 Front headlight unit - left-hand side
I062 Front headlight unit - right-hand side
I302 RH rear side marker
L020 Horn
L021 Horn - low
L025 Front shock absorber - left-hand side
L026 Front shock absorber - right-hand side
L030 Servodriving solenoid valve
M012 Windscreen wiper
M015 Windscreen washer electric pump
M016 Headlight washer electric pump
M017 Electric radiator fan for engine cooling - 1

M018 Electric radiator fan for engine cooling - 2
M039 Luggage compartment lid lock motor
M059 Heating system pump
M096 Child safety - luggage compartment motor
M306 A.C. valve - right-hand side
M307 A.C. valve - left-hand side
R005-A Radiator electric fan resistor - 1 - first speed
R005-B Radiator electric fan resistor - 1 - first speed
R032-A Radiator electric fan resistor - 2 - first speed
R032-B Radiator electric fan resistor - 2 - first speed
S003 Brake fluid level sensor
S004-A Front brake bad wear sensor - left-hand side
S004-B Front brake bad wear sensor - left-hand side
S005 Pressure gauge
S006-A Front brake bad wear sensor - right-hand side
S006-B Front brake bad wear sensor - right-hand side
S045 Windscreen washer fluid level sensor
S079 TRIGGER - Front tyre pressure sensor - left-hand side
S080 TRIGGER - Front tyre pressure sensor - right-hand side
S083 Digital antenna for tyre pressure sensors
S307 Front collision sensor - right-hand side
S308 Front collision sensor - left-hand side
W003 Braking system node (NFR)
X005 Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / front bumper cable
Z016 Front wheel ABS sensor - left-hand side
Z017 Front wheel ABS sensor - right-hand side
Z025 Wheel acceleration sensor - left-hand side
Z026 Wheel acceleration sensor - right-hand side
Z030 Vertical acceleration sensor - 1 FL
Z054 Vertical acceleration sensor - 2 FR
C31111-2 Front cable and passenger compartment cable
Code Description
B001-A Battery
C001-A Battery ECU (CBA)
C001-C Battery ECU (CBA)
C001-G Battery ECU (CBA)
C003-B Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C003-H Dashboard ECU (CPL)
C010-B Fuse ECU and engine compartment relay (SCM)
C012 Supplementary fuse and relay ECU (CS-SCM)
C022-A diagnosis outlet - OBDII
C312 Supplementary relay ECU 2 (CS-SCM 2)
D002-A Ignition switch
D006 Brake indicator switch
E004-V Body computer node (NBC)
E008-A Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL)
E304 Tyre pressure node (NTP)
E312 Suspension control node (NCS)
I303 LH front side marker
L011 Key lock solenoid
L019 Engine cooling electric fan relay - 1
L114 Electric engine cooling fan relay - 2
P035 Battery charge state sensor fuse
S020 Immobiliser antenna
S031 RF receiver antenna
W015 Power steering ECU
X003 Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / dashboard cable
X008 Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
wiring
X016-B Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / AC unit cable
X115-B
wiring
Junction between front wiring and passenger compartment cable / passenger compartment cable and rear
X200
wiring (right-hand side)
X201
wiring (left-hand side)
X301
wiring
X358 Disconnector for C-CAN line diagnosis
Y115-A
wiring
Y302-A Junction between right hand cylinder bank injection cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z023 Yaw node (NYL)
Z045 Steering angle sensor node (NAS)
C33001 Front bumper cable
Code Description
Y005 Junction between front bumper cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Z035 External front parking sensor - left-hand side
Z036 External front parking sensor - right-hand side
Z037 Internal front parking sensor - left-hand side
Z038 Internal front parking sensor- right-hand side
C43001 Rear bumper cable
Code Description
I003 Rear fog light - left-hand side
I009 Number plate light - left-hand side
I010 Number plate light - right-hand side
I035 Rear fog light - right-hand side
Y039 Junction between rear bumper cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Z007 External rear parking sensor - left-hand side
Z008 External rear parking sensor - right-hand side
Z009 Internal rear parking sensor - left-hand side
Z010 Internal rear parking sensor - right-hand side
C50101 DCT electronically controlled gearbox cable
Code Description
X400 CCP gearbox connector
X402 SAP gearbox connector
X403 GEARSET gearbox connector
X404 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y405 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
Y406 Junction between DCT semi-automatic gearbox cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
C53111 Lift system cable
Code Description
C001-B Battery ECU (CBA)
E302 Lift system ECU
G095 Hydraulic pump earth - right hand cylinder bank
L121 Lift system solenoid valve
L222 Lift system pump relay
M095 Lift system hydraulic pump
Y090 Junction between lift system cable / passenger compartment cable and rear wiring
C56201 Airbag cable - passenger side
Code Description
R009-A Passenger airbag
R009-B Passenger airbag
Y019 Airbag - passenger side / dashboard cable junction
C56301 Door panel airbag cable - driver side
Code Description
R010 Door airbag - driver's side
Y230 Junction between driver side curtain airbag cable / driver side door cable
C56401 Door panel airbag cable - passenger side
Code Description
R011 Door airbag - passenger's side
Y231 Junction between passenger side curtain airbag cable / passenger side door cable
C60001 Air conditioning and heating system cable
Code Description
E008-B Air conditioning and heating system node (NCL)
HCL3 Connection with AC vent control module
M853 Foot area air vent actuator - right-hand side
M854 Foot area air vent actuator - left-hand side
M855 Dashboard side air vent actuator - right-hand side
M856 Dashboard side air vent actuator - left-hand side
M857 Dashboard central air vent actuator - left-hand side
M858 Dashboard central air vent actuator - right-hand side
M859 Defrost air distribution flap actuator - right-hand side
M860 Defrost air distribution flap actuator - left-hand side
S851 Treated air temperature sensor - left-hand side
S852 Treated air temperature sensor - right-hand side
S871 Passenger compartment air temperature internal sensor (ICS)
XAC1 AC unit/passenger compartment ventilation fan cable junction
Y016-B Junction between AC unit cable / front wiring and passenger compartment cable
Z005 Sun sensor
C60101 Passenger compartment air electric fan cable
Code Description
M001 Passenger compartment air electric fan
M851 Air recirculation actuator
M871-A Electric fan power module (PM2)
M871-B Electric fan power module (PM2)
YAC1 Passenger compartment ventilation fan/AC unit cable junction
C67001 Glove compartment cable
Code Description
M038 Glove compartment motor
M308 Glove compartment motor
Y333 Glove compartment/dashboard joint
C83101 Audio installation cable
Code Description
L068-B Surround speaker (1) - left-hand side
L071 Surround speaker (1) - right side
L074 Surround speaker (2) - left-hand side
L075-B Surround speaker (2) - right side
X069 HIFI braid joint

Online Technical Documentation 458 Italia

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Online Technical Documentation 458 Italia

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1.

1 Ferrari quality standards

When manufacturing a Ferrari vehicle, the primary goal is “to

In the event of accident repairs, crash safety must be an absolute

The repair work may only be carried out by Ferrari-trained and

Only genuine parts should be used when carrying out the

Follow the procedures exactly as given in the repair manual.

Using non-approved repair methods may compromise the

Only Ferrari-approved tools may be used to carry out accident

It is essential that corrosion prevention measures are performed

In addition to extruded members, aluminium parts and sheet

These ultra-high strength steel reinforcements (A), installed

The ultra-strong extruded sections of the A-pillars are concealed

The sill (B) of the Ferrari F458 Italia is oversized, as on a

Explanation of safety instructions

• Align vehicle centrally between the vehicle lift columns.

1.3.3 Working in presence of aluminium dust 1.3.4 Handling batteries

Risk of explosion and ﬁre from ﬂying sparks during

1.3.6 Removing sealants 1.3.7 Handling chemicals

1.4.3 Original joint points

SG tack weld

SG staggered continuous weld

(SG = shield gas welding)

Solid and self-piercing rivet with countersunk head

Blind rivet with countersunk head

1.5.3 Milling off, drilling out or piercing spot welds

Mill off spot weld

Drill out or pierce

1.5.4 Gluing and sealing

Bicomponent sealant mastic

Area to be sealed with mastic

1.5.5 Cavity preservation

1.5.5 Screw symbol

1.5.5 Cutting and grinding points for weld seams

1: Roof/Windscreen 3: Side window/Roof

2: Roof/Windscreen 4: Roof/Fender

6: Fender/Bumper grille 8: Headlight/Bumper

9: Bumper/Headlight/Grille 11: Fender/Lid

10: Headlight/Lid 12: Roof seal/Front window surround

13: Fender/Sill trim panel 15: Side door/Sill trim panel

14: Door panel/Fender 16: Moulding/Door window

17: Roof/Moulding 19: Quarterlight/Door window

18: Door panel/Flank 20: Quarterlight seal/Door window scraper seal

21: Air intake surround/Roof 23: Roof/Rear window

25: Engine compartment lid/Rear bumper 27: Taillight/Rear bumper

26: Taillight/Exterior ﬂank 28: Air intake grilles/Rear bumper

29: Lower air intake/Rear bumper 31: Lower air intake/Diffuser

30: Lower air intake/Diffuser 32: Air intake surround/Exterior ﬂank

33: Rear window/Exterior ﬂank 35: Exterior ﬂank/Rear bumper

34: Engine compartment lid/Rear bumper

To mount the vehicle on the straightening bench, proceed

A special set of straightening tools has been developed for

• Before separating individual parts from the body assembly.

Expanded foam parts are used to reduce interior noise and

During vehicle production, strips of sealant, in various widths

Bicomponent expanded foam sealant

Single component permanently elastic adhesive mastic

A specially equipped workstation is necessary for carrying

Caution! • Hole-punching pliers (hand-operated and pneumatic)

• Set of straightening tools - Ferrari F458 Italia • Counterhold tool

• Portal gauge • Universal dolly

• Portal gauge accessory - F458 Italia • Plastic wedges

• MIG welding equipment • Plastic drift

• TIG welding equipment • Paintbrushes